Anda di halaman 1dari 492

AMI Configuration

Commands Reference
Manual
Part 1
MANU0471-06
Revision A
3-23-2001

Software Version 7.1.x

Marconi Communications
1000 FORE Drive
Warrendale, PA 15086-7502
Phone: 724-742-4444
FAX: 724-742-7742

http://www.marconi.com

Legal Notices
Copyright 1995-2001 FORE Systems, Inc.
All rights reserved.
U.S. Government Restricted Rights. If you are licensing the Software on behalf of the U.S. Government (Government),
the following provisions apply to you. If the Software is supplied to the Department of Defense (DoD), it is classified as
Commercial Computer Software under paragraph 252.227-7014 of the DoD Supplement to the Federal Acquisition
Regulations (DFARS) (or any successor regulations) and the Government is acquiring only the license rights granted
herein (the license rights customarily provided to non-Government users). If the Software is supplied to any unit or agency
of the Government other than DoD, it is classified as Restricted Computer Software and the Governments rights in the
Software are defined in paragraph 52.227-19 of the Federal Acquisition Regulations (FAR) (or any successor regulations)
or, in the cases of NASA, in paragraph 18.52.227-86 of the NASA Supplement to the FAR (or any successor regulations).
Restricted and Limited Rights Legend. Use, duplication or disclosure by the government is subject to restrictions as set
forth in subparagraph (c)(1)(ii) of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252.227-7013
(October 1988) and FAR 52.227-19 (June 1987).
Printed in the USA.
No part of this work may be reproduced in any form.
The software and this publication is provided by FORE Systems, Inc. as-is without warranty of any kind, either express
or implied, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose.
FORE Systems, Inc. shall not be liable for any errors or omissions which may occur in the software or this publication, nor
for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary or consequential damages of any kind resulting from the furnishing,
performance or use of the software or this publication.
Information published here is current as of the date of publication of this document. Because FORE Systems, Inc. is
improving and adding features to its products continuously, the information in this document is subject to change without
notice.
The VxWorks software used in the Mini Loader is licensed from Wind River Systems, Inc., Copyright 1984-1996.

TRADEMARKS
FORE Systems, ForeRunner, ForeRunnerLE, ForeThought, ForeView, AVA, CellPath, Euristix, Raceman, and
Networks of Steel are registered trademarks of FORE Systems, Inc.
ForeRunnerHE, CellChain, CellStarter, PowerCell, PowerHub, ForeMan, VoicePlus, FramePlus,
StreamRunner, EdgeRunner, ATV, All Roads Lead To ATM, ASN, MSC, TNX, Intelligent Infrastructure,
I2, Netpro, Zero Hop Routing, Application Aware, ASX, ESX, NSX, ForeWare, ServiceGrid, Dynamic
Protection Switching, Capacity Aware Routing, Demarc, ERP Express, ForeView Foundation, ForeView Son,
ServiceOn Management, Active Switch, ChannelFore, UserAware, Evolution, AuthentiFirst Agent,
NetResource Guard, PriorSynch Solutions, TAM, and Technical Account Management are trademarks of FORE
Systems, Inc.
Network of Steel is a registered service mark of FORE Systems, Inc.
CellStarter SM and Networks of Steel SM are service marks of Fore Systems, Inc.

FCC CLASS A NOTICE


WARNING: Changes or modifications to this unit not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could
void this users authority to operate this equipment.
NOTE: The ASX-200WG, the ASX-200BX, the ASX-1000, ASX-1200, the ASX-4000, the TNX-210, and the TNX-1100
have been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in
a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed
and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation
of the equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to
correct the interference at his own expense.

DOC CLASS A NOTICE


This digital apparatus does not exceed Class A limits for radio noise emission for a digital device as set out in the Radio
Interference Regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications.
Le present appareil numerique nemet pas de bruits radioelectriques depassant les limites applicables aux appareils
numeriques de la class A prescrites dans le reglement sur le brouillage radioelectrique edicte par le ministere des
Communications du Canada.

NOTICE
Marking by the symbol
indicates compliance of this system to the EMC (Electromagnetic Compatibility) directive of the
European Community and compliance to the Low Voltage (Safety) Directive. Such marking is indicative that this system
meets or exceeds the following technical standards:
EN 55022 - Limits and Methods of Measurement of Radio Interference Characteristics of Information
Technology Equipment.
EN 50082-1 - Electromagnetic compatibility - Generic immunity standard Part 1: Residential, commercial,
and light industry.
IEC 1000-4-2 - Electromagnetic compatibility for industrial-process measurement and control equipment
Part 2: Electrostatic discharge requirements.
IEC 1000-4-3 - Electromagnetic compatibility for industrial-process measurement and control equipment
Part 3: Radiate electromagnetic field requirements.
IEC 1000-4-4 - Electromagnetic compatibility for industrial-process measurement and control equipment
Part 4: Electrical fast transient/burst requirements.

VCCI CLASS A NOTICE

This is a Class A product based on the standard of the Voluntary Control Council for Interference by Information
Technology Equipment (VCCI). If this equipment is used in a domestic environment, radio disturbance may arise. When
such trouble occurs, the user may be required to take corrective actions.

AUSTRALIA EMC COMPLIANCE


This product has been tested and found to comply with the Class A electromagnetic compatibility limits specified in AS/
NZ 3548.

FCC REQUIREMENTS (Notice to Users of DS1 Service)


The following instructions are provided to ensure compliance with the FCC Rules, Part 68.
(1)
(2)

This device must only be connected to the DS1 network connected behind an FCC Part 68
registered channel service unit. Direct connection is not allowed.
Before connecting your unit, you must inform the telephone company of the following
information:

Port ID

REN/SOC

FIC

USOC

All DS1 Network Modules

6.0N

04DU9-BN/DN/1KN/1SN/1ZN

RJ48C

(3)

(4)

(5)
(6)

(7)

If the unit appears to be malfunctioning, it should be disconnected from the telephone lines
until you learn if your equipment or the telephone line is the source of the trouble. If your
equipment needs repair, it should not be reconnected until it is repaired.
If the telephone company finds that this equipment is exceeding tolerable parameters, the
telephone company can temporarily disconnect service, although they will attempt to give
you advance notice if possible.
Under the FCC Rules, no customer is authorized to repair this equipment. This restriction
applies regardless of whether the equipment is in or out of warranty.
If the telephone company alters their equipment in a manner that will affect use of this
device, they must give you advance warning so as to give you the opportunity for
uninterrupted service. You will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC.
An affidavit is required to be given to the telephone company to affirm that no encoded analog content or billing information is being transmitted.

CANADIAN IC CS-03 COMPLIANCE STATEMENT


NOTICE: The Industry Canada label identifies certified equipment. This certification means that the equipment meets
certain telecommunications network protective, operational and safety requirements. The Industry Canada label does not
guarantee the equipment will operate to the users satisfaction.
Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local
telecommunications company. The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection. In some
cases, the companys inside wiring associated with a single line individual service may be extended by means of a certified
connector assembly (telephone extension cord). The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions
may not prevent degradation of service in some situations.
Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian maintenance facility designated by the
supplier. Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may give the
telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment.
Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility, telephone lines and
internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are connected together. This precaution may be particularly important in
rural areas.
Caution: Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but should contact the appropriate electric
inspection authority, or electrician, as appropriate.

E1 AND E3 NOTICE
The E1 and E3 network modules that are described in this manual are approved for use in FORE Systems, Inc.s host
systems providing that the instructions below are strictly observed. Failure to follow these instructions invalidates the
approval.

Pan European Approval -

Marking

Pan European approval of the E1 network module was issued by BABT following assessment against CTR12. This means
that it can be connected to ONP and unstructured PTO-provided private circuits with 120 interfaces in all European
countries, according to Telecommunications Terminal Equipment (TTE) Directive 91/263/EEC. Thus, the following CE
mark applies:

168 X
The E1 and E3 network modules conform to safety standard EN60950 1992 following the provisions of Low Voltage
Product Safety Directive 73/23/EEC and CE Marking Directive 93/68/EEC, and can be marked accordingly with the CE
symbol.
The E1 and E3 network modules conform to EN55022 1994 and EN50082-1 1992 following the provisions of the EMC
Directive 89/336/EEC, and can be marked accordingly with the CE symbol.

National Approvals
UK
Network Module

Connects to

Approval Number

E1

Structured and unstructured


PTO-provided private circuits
with 75 interfaces
PTO-provided private circuits
with 75 interfaces

AA60953

E3

NS/4387/1/T/605954

Required User Guide Statements - UK Installation


The use of auxiliary products not authorized by FORE Systems, Inc. in FORE Systems, Inc. ATM Switches may cause the
power specification to be exceeded and is a potential safety hazard.
The equipment must be installed such that with the exception of the connections to the host, clearance and creepage
distances shown in the table below are maintained between the network module and any other assemblies which use or
generate a voltage shown in the table below. The larger distance shown in brackets applies where the local environment
within the host is subject to conductive pollution or dry non-conductive pollution which could become conductive due to
condensation. Failure to maintain these minimum distances invalidates the approval.

Clearance (mm)

Creepage (mm)

Voltage Used or Generated


by Host or by Network Modules

2.0
2.6
4.0
4.6

2.4 (3.8)
3.0 (4.8)
5.0 (8.0)
6.4 (10.0)

Up to 50 Vrms or Vdc
Up to 125 Vrms or Vdc
Up to 250 Vrms or Vdc
Up to 300 Vrms or Vdc

For a host or other expansion card fitted in the host, using or generating voltages greater
than 300V (rms or dc), advice from a competent telecommunications engineer must be
obtained before installation of the relevant equipment.

Above 300 Vrms or Vdc

NOTE: Installing the network modules in the appropriate FORE Systems hosts, according to the installation instructions
provided, satisfies the requirements listed above.
The following tables show the available ports and their safety status:

NM-8/E1D and NM-4/E1D


Ports

Safety Status

E1 Ports
Bus Connector

TNV operating at SELV


SELV

NM-4/E3D
Ports

Safety Status

E3 Ports
Bus Connector

TNV operating at SELV


SELV

SAFETY CERTIFICATIONS
ETL certified to meet Information Technology Equipment safety standards UL 1950, CSA 22.2 No. 950, and EN 60950.

Linux - PAM
The software which is the subject matter of this manual incorporates certain files commonly known as Linux-PAM
software (Linux-PAM). FORE Systems, Inc. is not in any manner to be construed as the author of the Linux-PAM. The
authority of FORE Systems, Inc. to distribute the Linux-PAM is derived from the license contained in the following list of
conditions. FORE Systems, Inc. expressly disclaims any and all other right, title or interest in or to the Linux-PAM.
Any distributor of the Linux-PAM is required to reproduce the following copyright notices, list of conditions and
disclaimer in any associated documentation. The following copyright notices, list of conditions and disclaimer are
applicable to the Linux-PAM only.
Copyright Theodore Tso, 1996. All rights reserved.
Copyright Andrew G. Morgan <morgan@linux.kernel.org>, 1996-8.
Copyright Theodore Tso, 1996. All rights reserved.
Copyright Theodore Tso, 1996.
Copyright Andrew Morgan, 1996-8.
Copyright Andrew G. Morgan <morgan@linux.kernel.org> 1996-8.
Copyright Andrew G. Morgan <morgan@parc.power.net> 1996,1997.
Copyright 1995 by Red Hat Software, Marc Ewing.
Copyright 1996-8, Andrew G. Morgan morgan@linux.kernel.org.
Copyright 1995 by Red Hat Software, Michael K. Johnson.
Copyright 1998, Andrew G. Morgan morgan@linux.kernel.org.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms of Linux-PAM, with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
(1)
(2)

(3)

Redistributions of source code must retain any existing copyright notice, and this entire
permission notice in its entirety, including the disclaimer of warranties.
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce all prior and current copyright notices, this
list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials
provided with the distribution.
The name of any author may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this
software without their specific prior written permission.

ALTERNATIVELY, this product may be distributed under the terms of the GNU General Public License, in which case the
provisions of the GNU GPL are required INSTEAD OF the above restrictions. (This clause is necessary due to a potential
conflict between the GNU GPL and the restrictions contained in a BSD-style copyright.)
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR(S) BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT
OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN
IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

SSL (Secure Socket Layer)


The software which is the subject matter of this manual incorporates certain files commonly known as Secure Socket Layer
software (SSL). FORE Systems, Inc. is not in any manner to be construed as the author of the SSL. The authority of FORE
Systems, Inc. to distribute the SSL is derived from the license contained in the following list of conditions. FORE Systems,
Inc. expressly disclaims any and all other right, title or interest in or to the SSL.
Any distributor of the SSL is required to reproduce the following copyright notices, list of conditions and disclaimer in any
associated documentation. The following copyright notices, list of conditions and disclaimer are applicable to the SSL only.
Copyright 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). All rights reserved.
This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). The implementation was written so as
to conform with Netscapes SSL.
This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are adhered to. The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code.
The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms, except that the holder is
Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
Copyright remains Eric Young's, and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed. If this package is
used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used. This can be in the
form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
(1)
(2)

(3)

(4)

Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided
with the distribution.
All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement: "This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young
(eay@cryptsoft.com)." The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the routines from the library
being used are not cryptographic related.
If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps directory
(application code) you must include an acknowledgement: "This product includes software
written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)."

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
The license and distribution terms for any publicly available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed (i.e., this
code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution license, including the GNU Public License).

Copyright 1998-2001 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.


Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
(1)
(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)
(6)

Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions
and the following disclaimer.
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided
with the distribution.
All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment: "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for
use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)."
The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission. For written
permission, please contact openssl-core@openssl.org.
Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL" nor may "OpenSSL"
appear in their names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project.
Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment: "This
product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit
(http://www.openssl.org/)."

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF
USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). This product includes software
written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).

Table of Contents

Preface
Chapter Summaries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
Related Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ii
Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
Typographical Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Important Information Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v
Laser Radiation Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vi
Safety Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii
Modifications to Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii
CHAPTER 1
1.1
1.2

1.3

1.4

AMI Overview

AMI Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 2
AMI Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 4
1.2.1
Implicit Command Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 4
1.2.2
Context-Sensitive Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 5
1.2.3
Partial Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 6
1.2.4
Command Completion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 6
1.2.5
Generic Query Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 7
1.2.6
Wild Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 8
1.2.7
Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 8
1.2.8
Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 9
1.2.9
List Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 10
1.2.10
Command Line Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 11
1.2.11
Command Confirmations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 12
1.2.12
Canceling an AMI Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 12
1.2.13
Querying on a Non-Key Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 13
Logging in to a Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 14
1.3.1
Login from the Serial Port. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 14
1.3.1.1 Login from the Serial Port with a Userid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 14
1.3.1.2 Login from the Serial Port with SecurID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 15
1.3.2
Login from Telnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 16
1.3.2.1 Using Password Authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 16
1.3.2.2 Using Kerberos Authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 17
1.3.2.3 Using SecurID Authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 19
AMI Commands in This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 21

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

TOC - 1

Table of Contents

CHAPTER 2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
2.11
2.12
2.13
2.14
2.15
2.16
2.17
2.18
2.19

exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 2
top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 2
up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 2
about . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 3
connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 4
debug. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 4
ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 4
hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 4
history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 5
interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 5
redo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 5
redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 7
routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 7
rows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 7
security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 7
services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 8
signalling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 8
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 8
whereis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 8

CHAPTER 3
3.1
3.2

TOC - 2

Root Level Commands

Connections Commands

connections atmifname . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 2
connections channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 3
3.2.1
connections channel delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 3
3.2.2
connections channel ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 4
3.2.2.1 connections channel ethernet delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 4
3.2.2.2 connections channel ethernet new . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 5
3.2.2.3 connections channel ethernet pair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 6
3.2.2.4 connections channel ethernet show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 7
3.2.2.4.1
connections channel ethernet show -all . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 7
3.2.2.5 connections channel ethernet unpair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 8
3.2.3
connections channel new . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 9
3.2.4
connections channel outputstat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 11
3.2.4.1 connections channel outputstat -advanced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 12
3.2.4.2 connections channel outputstat -packets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 13
3.2.5
connections channel qos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 14
3.2.6
connections channel show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 15
3.2.6.1 connections channel show -advanced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 16
3.2.7
connections channel statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 18

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Table of Contents

3.3
3.4

3.5

3.6

3.7

3.8

connections destnsap. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
connections oam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.1
connections oam f5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.2
connections oam genais. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.3
connections oam genrdi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.4
connections oam guard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.5
connections oam received . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
connections path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.1
connections path term . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.1.1 connections path term delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.1.2 connections path term modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.1.3 connections path term new . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.1.4 connections path term show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.1.4.1
connections path term show -advanced . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.1.4.2
connections path term show -overbooking . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.1.4.3
connections path term show -qosext . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.1.4.4
connections path term show -stats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.2
connections path through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.2.1 connections path through delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.2.2 connections path through new. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.2.3 connections path through outputstat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.2.3.1
connections path through outputstat -advanced. . . . . .
3.5.2.3.2
connections path through outputstat -packets . . . . . . .
3.5.2.4 connections path through show. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.2.4.1
connections path through show -advanced . . . . . . . . .
3.5.2.5 connections path through statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
connections qos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6.1
connections qos delete. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6.2
connections qos new . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6.3
connections qos show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
connections qosext . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.7.1
connections qosext delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.7.2
connections qosext modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.7.3
connections qosext new . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.7.4
connections qosext show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
connections spvcc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.8.1
connections spvcc parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.8.2
connections spvcc pmp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.8.2.1 connections spvcc pmp destparty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.8.2.2 connections spvcc pmp destroot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.8.2.3 connections spvcc pmp number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.8.2.4 connections spvcc pmp origination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

3 - 19
3 - 20
3 - 21
3 - 21
3 - 22
3 - 22
3 - 23
3 - 24
3 - 24
3 - 24
3 - 25
3 - 26
3 - 30
3 - 31
3 - 32
3 - 33
3 - 34
3 - 35
3 - 36
3 - 36
3 - 38
3 - 39
3 - 40
3 - 41
3 - 42
3 - 43
3 - 44
3 - 44
3 - 45
3 - 46
3 - 47
3 - 47
3 - 47
3 - 48
3 - 48
3 - 49
3 - 49
3 - 52
3 - 53
3 - 54
3 - 54
3 - 55

TOC - 3

Table of Contents

3.8.2.5

3.9

3.10

TOC - 4

connections spvcc pmp party . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 56


3.8.2.5.1
connections spvcc pmp party delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 56
3.8.2.5.2
connections spvcc pmp party modify. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 57
3.8.2.5.3
connections spvcc pmp party new. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 57
3.8.2.5.4
connections spvcc pmp party reroute . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 59
3.8.2.5.5
connections spvcc pmp party show. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 60
3.8.2.6 connections spvcc pmp root . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 63
3.8.2.6.1
connections spvcc pmp root delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 63
3.8.2.6.2
connections spvcc pmp root modify. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 64
3.8.2.6.3
connection spvcc pmp root new . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 64
3.8.2.6.4
connection spvcc pmp root show. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 66
3.8.2.7 connections spvcc pmp termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 68
3.8.3
connections spvcc pp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 69
3.8.3.1 connections spvcc pp delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 69
3.8.3.2 connections spvcc pp destination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 71
3.8.3.3 connections spvcc pp modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 72
3.8.3.4 connections spvcc pp new . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 73
3.8.3.5 connections spvcc pp number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 77
3.8.3.6 connections spvcc pp show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 77
3.8.4
connections spvcc spans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 82
3.8.4.1 connections spvcc spans destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 82
3.8.4.1.1
connections spvcc spans destination delete . . . . . . . . .3 - 82
3.8.4.1.2
connections spvcc spans destination new. . . . . . . . . . .3 - 83
3.8.4.1.3
connections spvcc spans destination show . . . . . . . . . .3 - 84
3.8.4.2 connections spvcc spans source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 85
3.8.4.2.1
connections spvcc spans source delete . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 85
3.8.4.2.2
connections spvcc spans source new . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 86
3.8.4.2.3
connections spvcc spans source show . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 87
connections spvpc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 88
3.9.1
connections spvpc delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 89
3.9.2
connections spvpc destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 90
3.9.3
connections spvpc modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 91
3.9.4
connections spvpc new . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 92
3.9.5
connections spvpc number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 95
3.9.6
connections spvpc parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 95
3.9.7
connections spvpc show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 97
connections spvxredundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 100
3.10.1
connections spvxredundancy delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 101
3.10.2
connections spvxredundancy modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 101
3.10.3
connections spvxredundancy new. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 102
3.10.4
connections spvxredundancy nsapaddr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 103
3.10.5
connections spvxredundancy show. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 104
3.10.6
connections spvxredundancy switchover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 105

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Table of Contents

3.11

connections upc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.11.1
connections upc delete. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.11.2
connections upc fratm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.11.2.1 connections upc fratm new . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.11.2.2 connections upc fratm show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.11.3
connections upc new . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.11.4
connections upc new-abr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.11.5
connections upc new-cbr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.11.6
connections upc new-ubr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.11.7
connections upc new-vbr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.11.8
connections upc show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.11.8.1 connections upc show -advanced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.11.8.2 connections upc show -flags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.11.8.3 connections upc show -loadbal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.11.9
connections upc units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CHAPTER 4
4.1

4.2

3 - 106
3 - 106
3 - 107
3 - 107
3 - 109
3 - 110
3 - 111
3 - 111
3 - 112
3 - 112
3 - 117
3 - 118
3 - 120
3 - 121
3 - 122

Ethernet Commands

ethernet bridge ESX-3000 Platform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 2


4.1.1
ethernet bridge fdb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 2
4.1.1.1 ethernet bridge fdb flush . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 2
4.1.1.2 ethernet bridge fdb show. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 3
4.1.2
ethernet bridge modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 4
4.1.3
ethernet bridge show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 4
4.1.4
ethernet bridge stp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 5
4.1.4.1 ethernet bridge stp configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 5
4.1.4.1.1
ethernet bridge stp configuration modify . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 5
4.1.4.1.2
ethernet bridge stp configuration show. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 6
4.1.4.2 ethernet bridge stp port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 7
4.1.4.2.1
ethernet bridge stp port configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 7
4.1.4.2.1.1
ethernet bridge stp port configuration
modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 7
4.1.4.2.1.2
ethernet bridge stp port configuration
show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 8
4.1.4.2.2
ethernet bridge stp port status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 9
4.1.4.3 ethernet bridge stp status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 10
ethernet bridge ASX-200BX, ASX-1000, ASX-1200, TNX-210, and TNX-1100
Platforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 11
4.2.1
ethernet bridge fdb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 11
4.2.1.1 ethernet bridge fdb dest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 11
4.2.1.1.1
ethernet bridge fdb dest mcast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 11
4.2.1.1.1.1
ethernet bridge fdb dest mcast show. . . . . . 4 - 12
4.2.1.1.2
ethernet bridge fdb dest show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 12

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

TOC - 5

Table of Contents

4.3

4.4

4.5

4.6

4.7

TOC - 6

4.2.1.2 ethernet bridge fdb flush. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 13


4.2.1.3 ethernet bridge fdb show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 14
4.2.2
ethernet bridge modify. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 15
4.2.3
ethernet bridge show. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 15
4.2.4
ethernet bridge static. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 16
4.2.4.1 ethernet bridge static delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 16
4.2.4.2 ethernet bridge static modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 17
4.2.4.3 ethernet bridge static new . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 17
4.2.4.4 ethernet bridge static show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 18
ethernet igmp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 19
4.3.1
ethernet igmp routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 19
4.3.2
ethernet igmp show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 20
ethernet lec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 21
4.4.1
ethernet lec arp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 21
4.4.1.1 ethernet lec arp flush . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 21
4.4.1.2 ethernet lec arp show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 22
4.4.2
ethernet lec show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 23
4.4.2.1 ethernet lec show -errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 24
4.4.2.2 ethernet lec show -vcc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 24
4.4.3
ethernet lec statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 25
ethernet mpc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 26
4.5.1
ethernet mpc ec. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 26
4.5.1.1 ethernet mpc ec flush . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 26
4.5.1.2 ethernet mpc ec show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 27
4.5.2
ethernet mpc ic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 27
4.5.2.1 ethernet mpc ic flush . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 27
4.5.2.2 ethernet mpc ic show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 28
4.5.3
ethernet mpc show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 28
4.5.4
ethernet mpc statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 30
4.5.4.1 ethernet mpc statistics -errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 31
4.5.4.2 ethernet mpc statistics -purge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 32
ethernet system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 33
4.6.1
ethernet system memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 33
4.6.1.1 ethernet system memory show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 33
4.6.2
ethernet system panic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 34
4.6.2.1 ethernet system panic clear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 34
4.6.2.2 ethernet system panic show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 35
ethernet vlan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 36
4.7.1
ethernet vlan addports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 36
4.7.2
ethernet vlan delete. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 37
4.7.3
ethernet vlan new . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 37
4.7.4
ethernet vlan removeports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 38

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Table of Contents

4.7.5
4.7.6
CHAPTER 5
5.1

5.2
5.3

ethernet vlan rename . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 38


ethernet vlan show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 39
Hardware Commands

hardware cecplus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 2
5.1.1
hardware cecplus alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 2
5.1.1.1 hardware cecplus alarms modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 3
5.1.1.2 hardware cecplus alarms relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 3
5.1.1.2.1
hardware cecplus alarm relays modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 3
5.1.1.2.2
hardware cecplus alarm relays show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 4
5.1.1.3 hardware cecplus alarms show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 5
5.1.1.4 hardware cecplus alarms status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 6
5.1.2
hardware cecplus ip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 6
5.1.2.1 hardware cecplus ip route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 7
5.1.2.1.1
hardware cecplus ip route delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 7
5.1.2.1.2
hardware cecplus ip route new . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 8
5.1.2.1.3
hardware cecplus ip route show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 9
5.1.2.2 hardware cecplus ip show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 9
5.1.3
hardware cecplus modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 10
5.1.4
hardware cecplus rs232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 12
5.1.5
hardware cecplus show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 13
5.1.6
hardware cecplus snmptraps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 14
5.1.6.1 hardware cecplus snmptraps delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 14
5.1.6.2 hardware cecplus snmptraps new . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 15
5.1.6.3 hardware cecplus snmptraps show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 15
5.1.7
hardware cecplus statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 16
5.1.7.1 hardware cecplus statistics icmp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 17
5.1.7.2 hardware cecplus statistics if. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 19
5.1.7.3 hardware cecplus statistics ip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 21
5.1.7.4 hardware cecplus statistics tcp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 23
5.1.7.5 hardware cecplus statistics udp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 24
5.1.8
hardware cecplus timing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 25
5.1.8.1 hardware cecplus timing modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 25
5.1.8.2 hardware cecplus timing references . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 28
5.1.8.2.1
hardware cecplus timing references modify . . . . . . . . . 5 - 28
5.1.8.2.2
hardware cecplus timing references show . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 29
5.1.8.3 hardware cecplus timing show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 30
hardware chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 32
hardware dualscp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 33
5.3.1
hardware dualscp modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 34
5.3.2
hardware dualscp show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 36
5.3.3
hardware dualscp switchover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 38
5.3.4
hardware dualscp synchronize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 38

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

TOC - 7

Table of Contents

5.4

5.5
5.6
5.7

TOC - 8

hardware fabric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 41
5.4.1
hardware fabric modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 41
5.4.2
hardware fabric outputbuffers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 42
5.4.3
hardware fabric show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 45
5.4.4
hardware fabric statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 46
5.4.5
hardware fabric temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 47
5.4.6
hardware fabric thresholds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 48
5.4.7
hardware fabric traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 49
5.4.7.1 hardware fabric traffic modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 50
5.4.7.2 hardware fabric traffic show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 51
hardware fans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 52
hardware inputlookuperrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 53
hardware netmod. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 54
5.7.1
hardware netmod alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 55
5.7.1.1 hardware netmod alarms modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 55
5.7.1.2 hardware netmod alarms show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 56
5.7.2
hardware netmod application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 58
5.7.2.1 hardware netmod application modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 58
5.7.2.2 hardware netmod application show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 59
5.7.2.2.1
hardware netmod application show -appversion . . . . . .5 - 60
5.7.2.2.2
hardware netmod application show -bootversion. . . . . .5 - 60
5.7.2.2.3
hardware netmod application show -panicaction. . . . . .5 - 61
5.7.2.3 hardware netmod application upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 62
5.7.3
hardware netmod fram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 64
5.7.3.1 hardware netmod fram modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 64
5.7.3.2 hardware netmod fram show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 68
5.7.3.2.1
hardware netmod fram show -advanced . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 68
5.7.4
hardware netmod modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 70
5.7.5
hardware netmod panic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 71
5.7.5.1 hardware netmod panic action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 71
5.7.5.1.1
hardware netmod panic action modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 71
5.7.5.1.2
hardware netmod panic action show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 72
5.7.5.2 hardware netmod panic clear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 72
5.7.5.3 hardware netmod panic save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 73
5.7.5.4 hardware netmod panic show. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 73
5.7.6
hardware netmod reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 74
5.7.7
hardware netmod reset_pair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 75
5.7.8
hardware netmod show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 76
5.7.8.1 hardware netmod show -advanced. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 77
5.7.9
hardware netmod test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 78
5.7.9.1 hardware netmod test modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 78
5.7.9.2 hardware netmod test show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 80

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Table of Contents

5.7.10

hardware netmod traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 81


5.7.10.1 hardware netmod traffic c . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 81
5.7.10.1.1 hardware netmod traffic c models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 82
5.7.10.1.2 hardware netmod traffic c modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 83
5.7.10.1.3 hardware netmod traffic c show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 84
5.7.10.1.3.1 hardware netmod traffic c show
-statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 85
5.7.10.2 hardware netmod traffic d . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 86
5.7.10.2.1 hardware netmod traffic d channelStats . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 86
5.7.10.2.1.1 hardware netmod traffic d channelStats
-loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 87
5.7.10.2.1.2 hardware netmod traffic d channelStats
-queue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 88
5.7.10.2.2 hardware netmod traffic d models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 89
5.7.10.2.3 hardware netmod traffic d modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 90
5.7.10.2.4 hardware netmod traffic d pathStats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 93
5.7.10.2.4.1 hardware netmod traffic d pathStats
-loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 93
5.7.10.2.4.2 hardware netmod traffic d pathStats
-queue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 94
5.7.10.2.5 hardware netmod traffic d show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 95
5.7.10.2.5.1 hardware netmod traffic d show
-perclass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 96
5.7.10.2.5.2 hardware netmod traffic d show
-statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 96
5.7.10.3 hardware netmod traffic e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 97
5.7.10.3.1 hardware netmod traffic e buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 97
5.7.10.3.1.1 hardware netmod traffic e buffer
assign . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 97
5.7.10.3.1.2 hardware netmod traffic e buffer
delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 99
5.7.10.3.1.3 hardware netmod traffic e buffer
modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 100
5.7.10.3.1.4 hardware netmod traffic e buffer
new . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 100
5.7.10.3.1.5 hardware netmod traffic e buffer
show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 101
5.7.10.3.2 hardware netmod traffic e customBCS . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 101
5.7.10.3.2.1 hardware netmod traffic e customBCS
default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 102
5.7.10.3.2.2 hardware netmod traffic e customBCS
defaultbcs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 102

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

TOC - 9

Table of Contents

5.7.10.3.2.3

hardware netmod traffic e customBCS


delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 103
5.7.10.3.2.4 hardware netmod traffic e customBCS
modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 103
5.7.10.3.2.5 hardware netmod traffic e customBCS
new . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 104
5.7.10.3.2.6 hardware netmod traffic e customBCS
show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 104
5.7.10.3.3 hardware netmod traffic e modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 105
5.7.10.3.4 hardware netmod traffic e show. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 106
5.7.10.3.4.1 hardware netmod traffic e show
-aal5CntMode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 107
5.7.10.3.4.2 hardware netmod traffic e show
-memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 108
5.7.10.3.4.3 hardware netmod traffic e show
-stats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 109
5.7.10.4 hardware netmod traffic lc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 110
5.7.10.4.1 hardware netmod traffic lc channelStats . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 110
5.7.10.4.2 hardware netmod traffic lc models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 111
5.7.10.4.3 hardware netmod traffic lc modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 112
5.7.10.4.4 hardware netmod traffic lc pathStats . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 113
5.7.10.4.5 hardware netmod traffic lc show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 114
5.7.10.4.5.1 hardware netmod traffic lc show
-statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 115
5.7.10.5 hardware netmod traffic oc48stats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 116
5.7.10.6 hardware netmod traffic le . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 117
5.7.10.6.1 hardware netmod traffic le channelStats . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 117
5.7.10.6.2 hardware netmod traffic le models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 118
5.7.10.6.3 hardware netmod traffic le modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 119
5.7.10.6.4 hardware netmod traffic le pathStats . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 120
5.7.10.6.5 hardware netmod traffic le show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 121
5.7.10.6.5.1 hardware netmod traffic le show
-statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 122
5.7.10.7 hardware netmod traffic sf1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 123
5.7.10.7.1 hardware netmod traffic sf1 modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 123
5.7.10.7.2 hardware netmod traffic sf1 show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 124
5.7.10.8 hardware netmod traffic pc1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 125
5.7.10.8.1 hardware netmod traffic pc1 channelStats . . . . . . . . .5 - 126
5.7.10.8.2 hardware netmod traffic pc1 customBCS . . . . . . . . . .5 - 127
5.7.10.8.2.1 hardware netmod traffic pc1 customBCS
default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 127
5.7.10.8.2.2 hardware netmod traffic pc1 customBCS
defaultbcs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 128

TOC - 10

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Table of Contents

5.7.10.8.2.3

hardware netmod traffic pc1 customBCS


delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.7.10.8.2.4 hardware netmod traffic pc1 customBCS
modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.7.10.8.2.5 hardware netmod traffic pc1 customBCS
new . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.7.10.8.2.6 hardware netmod traffic pc1 customBCS
show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.7.10.8.3 hardware netmod traffic pc1 models. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.7.10.8.4 hardware netmod traffic pc1 modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.7.10.8.5 hardware netmod traffic pc1 pathStats . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.7.10.8.6 hardware netmod traffic pc1 show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.7.10.8.6.1 hardware netmod traffic pc1 show
-statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.7.10.9 hardware netmod traffic pc2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.7.10.9.1 hardware netmod traffic pc2 buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.7.10.9.1.1 hardware netmod traffic pc2 buffer
assign5 - 137
5.7.10.9.1.2 hardware netmod traffic pc2 buffer
delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.7.10.9.1.3 hardware netmod traffic pc2 buffer
modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.7.10.9.1.4 hardware netmod traffic pc2 buffer
new . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.7.10.9.1.5 hardware netmod traffic pc2 buffer
show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.7.10.9.2 hardware netmod traffic pc2 customBCS . . . . . . . . . .
5.7.10.9.2.1 hardware netmod traffic pc2 customBCS
default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.7.10.9.2.2 hardware netmod traffic pc2 customBCS
defaultbcs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.7.10.9.2.3 hardware netmod traffic pc2 customBCS
delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.7.10.9.2.4 hardware netmod traffic pc2 customBCS
modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.7.10.9.2.5 hardware netmod traffic pc2 customBCS
new . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.7.10.9.2.6 hardware netmod traffic pc2 customBCS
show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.7.10.9.3 hardware netmod traffic pc2 modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.7.10.9.4 hardware netmod traffic pc2 show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.7.10.9.4.1 hardware netmod traffic pc2 show
-aal5CntMode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

5 - 128
5 - 129
5 - 129
5 - 130
5 - 131
5 - 132
5 - 133
5 - 134
5 - 135
5 - 136
5 - 136

5 - 139
5 - 140
5 - 140
5 - 141
5 - 142
5 - 142
5 - 143
5 - 143
5 - 144
5 - 144
5 - 145
5 - 146
5 - 147
5 - 148

TOC - 11

Table of Contents

5.7.10.9.4.2

5.8

hardware netmod traffic pc2 show


-memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 149
5.7.10.9.4.3 hardware netmod traffic pc2 show
-stats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 150
hardware port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 151
5.8.1
hardware port ds1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 152
5.8.1.1 hardware port ds1 errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 152
5.8.1.1.1
hardware port ds1 errors modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 153
5.8.1.1.2
hardware port ds1 errors show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 154
5.8.1.2 hardware port ds1 modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 155
5.8.1.3 hardware port ds1 show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 157
5.8.1.4 hardware port ds1 statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 158
5.8.2
hardware port ds3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 160
5.8.2.1 hardware port ds3 errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 160
5.8.2.1.1
hardware port ds3 errors modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 161
5.8.2.1.2
hardware port ds3 errors show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 162
5.8.2.2 hardware port ds3 modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 163
5.8.2.3 hardware port ds3 show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 164
5.8.2.4 hardware port ds3 statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 165
5.8.3
hardware port e1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 168
5.8.3.1 hardware port e1 modify. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 168
5.8.3.2 hardware port e1 show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 170
5.8.3.3 hardware port e1 statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 171
5.8.4
hardware port e3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 173
5.8.4.1 hardware port e3 modify. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 174
5.8.4.2 hardware port e3 show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 175
5.8.4.3 hardware port e3 statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 176
5.8.5
hardware port ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 178
5.8.5.1 hardware port ethernet auto-negotiation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 178
5.8.5.1.1
hardware port ethernet auto-negotiation
modify ESX-3000 Platforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 178
5.8.5.1.2
hardware port ethernet auto-negotiation
modify ASX-200BX, ASX-1000, ASX-1200,
TNX-210, and TNX-1100 Platforms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 179
5.8.5.1.3
hardware port ethernet auto-negotiation show . . . . . .5 - 180
5.8.6
hardware port j2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 181
5.8.6.1 hardware j2 port modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 181
5.8.6.2 hardware j2 port show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 182
5.8.6.3 hardware j2 port statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 183
5.8.7
hardware port modify. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 185
5.8.8
hardware port show. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 186
5.8.8.1 hardware port show -led . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 187

TOC - 12

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Table of Contents

5.8.9

hardware port sonet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


5.8.9.1 hardware port sonet errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.8.9.1.1
hardware port sonet errors modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.8.9.1.2
hardware port sonet errors show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.8.9.2 hardware port sonet modify. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.8.9.3 hardware port sonet show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.8.9.3.1
hardware port sonet show -status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.8.9.4 hardware port sonet statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.8.10
hardware port taxi. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.8.10.1 hardware port taxi modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.8.10.2 hardware port taxi show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.8.11
hardware port tp25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.8.11.1 hardware port tp25 modify. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.8.11.2 hardware port tp25 show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.8.11.3 hardware port tp25 statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.8.12
hardware port traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.8.12.1 hardware port traffic c . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.8.12.1.1 hardware port traffic c modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.8.12.1.2 hardware port traffic c show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.8.12.1.3 hardware port traffic c statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.8.12.2 hardware port traffic d . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.8.12.2.1 hardware port traffic d modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.8.12.2.2 hardware port traffic d show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.8.12.2.2.1 hardware port traffic d show
-advanced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.8.12.2.3 hardware port traffic d statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.8.12.2.3.1 hardware port traffic d statistics
-cellslost. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.8.12.3 hardware port traffic e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.8.12.3.1 hardware port traffic e modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.8.12.3.2 hardware port traffic e show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.8.12.3.2.1 hardware port traffic e show -queues . . . .
5.8.12.3.2.2 hardware port traffic e show -stats. . . . . . .
5.8.12.4 hardware port traffic lc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.8.12.4.1 hardware port traffic lc modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.8.12.4.2 hardware port traffic lc show. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.8.12.4.3 hardware port traffic lc statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.8.12.5 hardware port traffic sf1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.8.12.5.1 hardware port traffic sf1 modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.8.12.5.2 hardware port traffic sf1 show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.8.12.5.3 hardware port traffic sf1 statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

5 - 188
5 - 188
5 - 188
5 - 190
5 - 191
5 - 193
5 - 194
5 - 196
5 - 199
5 - 199
5 - 200
5 - 201
5 - 201
5 - 202
5 - 203
5 - 204
5 - 204
5 - 205
5 - 206
5 - 207
5 - 207
5 - 208
5 - 211
5 - 212
5 - 213
5 - 214
5 - 215
5 - 215
5 - 216
5 - 217
5 - 218
5 - 219
5 - 219
5 - 220
5 - 221
5 - 222
5 - 222
5 - 223
5 - 224

TOC - 13

Table of Contents

5.9

5.10
5.11

5.12

5.13

5.8.12.6 hardware port traffic le . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 225


5.8.12.6.1 hardware port traffic le modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 225
5.8.12.6.2 hardware port traffic le show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 226
5.8.12.6.3 hardware port traffic le statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 227
5.8.12.7 hardware port traffic pc1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 228
5.8.12.7.1 hardware port traffic pc1 modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 228
5.8.12.7.2 hardware port traffic pc1 show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 229
5.8.12.7.3 hardware port traffic pc1 statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 230
5.8.12.8 hardware port traffic pc2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 231
5.8.12.8.1 hardware port traffic pc2 modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 231
5.8.12.8.2 hardware port traffic pc2 show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 232
5.8.12.8.2.1 hardware port traffic pc2 show
-queues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 233
5.8.12.8.2.2 hardware port traffic pc2 show
-stats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 234
hardware portcard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 235
5.9.1
hardware portcard reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 235
5.9.2
hardware portcard show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 236
5.9.2.1 hardware portcard show -stats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 236
hardware power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 237
hardware scp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 240
5.11.1
hardware scp show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 240
5.11.1.1 hardware scp show -prodnum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 242
5.11.2
hardware scp statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 243
hardware tcm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 244
5.12.1
hardware tcm modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 244
5.12.2
hardware tcm references . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 247
5.12.2.1 hardware tcm references modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 247
5.12.2.2 hardware tcm references show. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 248
5.12.2.3 hardware tcm show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 249
5.12.3
hardware tcm txbits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 251
5.12.3.1 hardware tcm txbits modify. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 251
5.12.3.2 hardware tcm txbits show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 252
hardware temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 253

Index

TOC - 14

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Preface

Preface
Preface

This manual provides the technical information needed to configure the ATM Management
Interface (AMI) for the ASX, TNX, and ESX-3000 switches. This document was created
for users with various levels of experience. If you have any questions or problems, please
contact the Marconi Technical Assistance Center (TAC).

Chapter Summaries
Chapter 1 - AMI Overview - Provides an overview of AMI features and syntax.
Chapter 2 - Root Level Commands - Contains a text and graphical description of the root
level AMI commands.
Chapter 3 - Connections Commands - Contains a text and graphical description of the
connections level AMI commands.
Chapter 4 - Ethernet Commands - Contains a text and graphical description of the Ethernet
level AMI commands.
Chapter 5 - Hardware Commands - Contains a text and graphical description of the
hardware level AMI commands.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Preface

Related Manuals
References are made in this manual to the following manuals:
AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual, Part 2 - Describes the interfaces, redundancy,
routing, and security level AMI commands and menus.
AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual, Part 3 - Describes the services, signalling, and
system level AMI commands and menus.
Multiservice Broadband Switch Diagnostics and Troubleshooting Manual - Describes the debug
level AMI commands and menus. Also, describes error messages, loopbacks, SCP diagnostics,
and ATM Forum PNNI debugging information.
Multiservice Broadband Switch Network Configuration Manual - Discusses topics such as LAN
Emulation, Classical IP, and ATM Forum PNNI.
These manuals can be found on the Technical Publications CD and can be read and printed
using Acrobat Reader which is also included on the CD. If Acrobat Reader is installed locally,
run Acrobat and open the manual from the /DOCS directory of the CD. If Acrobat Reader is
not installed locally, run the Acrobat installer to load Acrobat Reader on your machine. Then
run the ACROREAD.EXE file in the /DOCS directory of the CD.

ii

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Preface

Technical Support

1.

Preface

In the U.S.A., customers can reach Marconis Technical Assistance Center (TAC) using any one
of the following methods:
Go to Marconis World Wide Web technical support site:
http://www.marconi.com/tactics/index.cgi
2.

Send questions, via e-mail, to:


support@fore.com

3.

Telephone questions to the TAC at:


1-800-671-3673 or 1-724-742-6999

4.

FAX questions to the TAC at:


724-742-7900

Technical support for customers outside the United States should be handled through the
local distributor or via telephone at the following number:
+1 724-742-6999
No matter which method is used to reach the TAC, customers should be ready to provide the
following:

A support contract ID number

The serial number of each product in question

All relevant information describing the problem or question

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

iii

Preface

Typographical Styles
This manual uses different typefaces to represent different types of user input, system
responses, and GUI objects.
Bold indicates GUI elements, control buttons and keys found on the keyboard. For example:

Drag the ASX-1000 icon to the MPS container and click OK.

Press Enter to proceed.

Courier font represents command line interaction and file names and paths. Bold Courier
indicates commands and input that is typed by the user, and italic courier represents
variable parameters for which you must supply a value. For example:

Issue the uname -a command and check that the SunOS version is 5.5.1 or 5.6.

Enter et1516 in the ELAN Name field.

From the \fvtop directory, change the current directory to \fvtop\install,


and run the fvovlink script.

You can also display spanning tree information for a specific node by entering the
following:
myswitch:routing pnni-> stmap -nodeindex <unsigned>
myswitch:routing pnni-> stmap -nodeindex 1

Menu items are shown in regular typeface, with > characters specifying submenus. For
example:

iv

Select File>New>Shortcut.

Select VLAN>Configure>Devices.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Preface

Important Information Indicators


Preface

To call your attention to safety and otherwise important information that must be reviewed to
ensure correct and complete installation, as well as to avoid damage to the Marconi product or
to your system, Marconi utilizes the following WARNING/CAUTION/NOTE indicators.
WARNING statements contain information that is critical to the safety of the operator and/or
the system. Do not proceed beyond a WARNING statement until the indicated conditions are
fully understood or met. This information could prevent serious injury to the operator,
damage to the Marconi product, the system, or currently loaded software, and is indicated as
follows:

WARNING!

Hazardous voltages are present. To reduce the


risk of electrical shock and danger to personal
health, follow the instructions carefully.

CAUTION statements contain information that is important for proper installation/


operation. Compliance with CAUTION statements can prevent possible equipment damage
and/or loss of data and are indicated as follows:

CAUTION

You risk damaging your equipment and/or


software if you do not follow these instructions.

NOTE statements contain information that has been found important enough to be called to
the special attention of the operator and is set off from the text as follows:

NOTE

If you change the value of the LECS control


parameters while the LECS process is running,
the new values do not take effect until the LECS
process is stopped, and then restarted.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Preface

Laser Radiation Notice

Class 1 Laser Product:


This product conforms to
applicable requirements of
21 CFR 1040 at the date of
manufacture.

Class 1 lasers are defined as products which do not permit human access to laser radiation in
excess of the accessible limits of Class 1 for applicable wavelengths and durations. These
lasers are safe under reasonably foreseeable conditions of operation. Do not view beam with
optical instruments.
Every Marconi network module having a single mode fiber optic interface contains a Class 1
laser.

NOTE

vi

This Laser Notice section only applies to


products or components containing Class 1
lasers.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Preface

Safety Precautions

Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the equipment.

Ensure that the voltage and frequency of your power source matches the voltage
and frequency inscribed on the equipments electrical rating label.

Never push objects of any kind through openings in the equipment. Dangerous
voltages may be present. Conductive foreign objects could produce a short circuit
that could cause fire, electric shock, or damage to your equipment.

Preface

For your protection, observe the following safety precautions when setting up equipment:

Modifications to Equipment
Do not make mechanical or electrical modifications to the equipment. Marconi is not
responsible for regulatory compliance of a modified Marconi product.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

vii

Preface

viii

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

CHAPTER 1

AMI Overview

The user interface to the SCS is called the ATM Management Interface (AMI). AMI can be run
on any Marconi switch running ForeThought switch software version 3.0.1 or later and any
TNX switch running ForeThought switch software version 5.1 or later.
Currently, there are three methods for managing a switch: via AMI, SNMP, or the Element
Manager. This chapter contains a description of how to log in and navigate in AMI.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

1-1

AMI Overview

ForeThought switch software provides switch and connection management, IP connectivity,


and SNMP network management. The Switch Control Software (SCS) resides on the Switch
Control Processor (SCP) and is the brains of the switch. The SCS controls the switch fabric(s)
and handles connection set-up and tear-down duties. The SCS can also communicate with
other Marconi switches to learn network topology and establish connections across multiple
switches. In addition, there is an SNMP agent built into the SCS to allow SNMP management
and control.

AMI Overview

1.1 AMI Syntax


AMI is described throughout this chapter using the following conventions:

All AMI output, including user prompts, is shown in courier font.

All user input is shown in bold courier font.

Each submenu is described in a separate section.

Commands that are submenus are immediately followed by a > symbol. The
> should not be entered as part of the command.

Parameter values that require a choice are separated by vertical bars and are
enclosed in parentheses ( | ) Neither the vertical bar nor the parentheses should
be entered as part of the command.

Flag names are indicated with dashes -. The dash must be entered as part of the
command.

All port names and ATM interface (AtmIf) names are in BNP (board, network
module, port) notation. For example, 1A4 indicates the first switch fabric,
network module A, port 4. For more information about port numbering, see the
Installation and Maintenance Manual for your switch.

AMI commands are not case-sensitive.

Integers that are input with a leading zero are interpreted as OCTAL numbers.
Integers that are input with a leading 0x are interpreted as HEX.

The following is an example of the syntax:


myswitch:connections channel-> new
Usage:
[-iatmif] <AtmIf>

Input AtmIf

[-ivpi] <integer>

Input VPI

[-ivci] <integer>

Input VCI

[-oatmif] <AtmIf>

Output AtmIf

[-ovpi] <integer>

Output VPI

[-ovci] <integer>

Output VCI

[[-upc] <UPC Index>]

UPC Contract (default: 0)

[[-name] <text>]

Name

[[-ctype] <connection_type>]

Connection Type

Some parameters are required and some are optional. Any flag or parameter that is enclosed
in square brackets [ ] is optional. The following is an example:
[-iatmif] <AtmIf>

1-2

Input AtmIf

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

AMI Overview

In this case, you do not have to specify the flag -iatmif, but you must specify the flag
argument <AtmIf>.
In the following example, both the flag -upc and the flag/parameter pair are enclosed in
square brackets so neither need to be specified:
[[-upc] <UPC Index>]

UPC Contract (default: 0)

Commands may be entered in either of the following two ways:


1.

myswitch:connections channel-> new


Usage:
[-iatmif] <AtmIf>

Input AtmIf

[-ivpi] <integer>

Input VPI

[-ivci] <integer>

Input VCI

[-oatmif] <AtmIf>

Output AtmIf

[-ovpi] <integer>

Output VPI

[-ovci] <integer>

Output VCI

[[-upc] <UPC Index>]

UPC Contract (default: 0)

[[-name] <text>]

Name

[[-ctype] <connection_type>]

Connection Type

myswitch:connections channel-> new -iatmif 1a1 -ivpi 0 -ivci 100 -oatmif 1b2
-ovpi 0 -ovci 100 -upc 3

The flags may also be in any order when the flags names are used throughout as
follows:
myswitch:connections channel-> new -ivci 100 -iatmif 1a1 -upc 3 -ivpi 0 -oatmif
1b2 -ovpi 0 -ovci 100

2.

You can simply enter the parameter values. However, these values must be entered
in the order shown in the command. For example:

myswitch:connections channel-> new 1a1 0 100 1b2 0 100 3

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

1-3

AMI Overview

You can enter the flags as part of the command. Once you enter an option in this
way, you must enter all subsequent options with the flag name (along with the
dash) for each parameter that you are using. The flags may be in any order. For
example:

AMI Overview

1.2 AMI Features


AMI consists of commands placed in a directory hierarchy. AMI assumes an 80-column
display with 24 rows, but the number of rows can be adjusted using the rows command. (See
Chapter 2 in Part 1 of this manual for more information.) AMI works with any ANSIcompatible terminal and can be accessed via the serial port or through a telnet session.

1.2.1

Implicit Command Path

AMI allows you to configure and to make statistical queries of various hardware and software
aspects of ASX and TNX switches and network modules by providing a hierarchical directory
system similar to a UNIX file system. The different levels of this hierarchy are called
directories. A single root directory provides a number of commands and subdirectories.
At any given time, the AMI prompt indicates your current location within the AMI hierarchy.
The switch name is displayed in the prompt as shown by myswitch:-> in the examples in
this manual. The prompt can be customized to display something other than the switch name
using the system prompt command. (See Chapter 4 in Part 3 of this manual for more
information.)
You can traverse a directory one level at a time, or can traverse a number of levels
simultaneously if the entire command path is known. When a command is entered, AMI
searches an implicit path in the AMI command hierarchy to find the command. First, it
searches for the command in the current directory. If it cannot find any matches in the current
directory, it then searches the entire command hierarchy. For example, if you type r? you get
the commands and directories that begin with r as follows:
myswitch:-> r?
redo

Execute a previous command

redundancy>

The redundancy directory

routing>

The routing directory

rows

Show/Set the rows for this AMI session

myswitch:-> r

1-4

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

AMI Overview

1.2.2

Context-Sensitive Help

Entering ? provides a context-sensitive help message. If you enter ? at a blank command line,
the commands and directories under the current directory are listed, along with a short
description of each. The following is an example:
myswitch:-> ?
Quit the AMI session

top

Go to the top-level directory

up

Go up one directory

about

Display copyright information

connections>

The connections directory

debug>

The debug directory

ethernet>

The ethernet directory

hardware>

The hardware directory

history

Show the history of commands for this AMI session

interfaces>

The interfaces directory

redo

Execute a previous command

redundancy>

The redundancy directory

routing>

The routing directory

rows

Show/Set the rows for this AMI session

security>

The security directory

services>

The services directory

signalling>

The signalling directory

system>

The system directory

NOTE

AMI Overview

exit

Not all of the above commands and directories


are displayed on every platform. The
redundancy> directory not displayed on an
ESX-3000 switch. The ethernet> directory is
only displayed on an ESX-3000 switch.

Entering ? immediately after the command name, displays all of the commands that begin
with those letters.
Typing a command, an extra space after the command (to designate the end of the command
string), and then typing a ? displays context-sensitive help for that command.
Entering ? does not change the line you are currently typing. When the prompt reappears,
anything that you have typed before entering ? also reappears.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

1-5

AMI Overview

1.2.3

Partial Commands

You only need to enter the minimum number of letters in a command which would make the
command unique to that level. For example, you could enter co c sh instead of
connections channel show. However, the minimum number of letters entered must also
distinguish the command from root commands, such as up. For example, you would have to
enter upc to distinguish upc from the root command up.
You can also abbreviate arguments in a command as long as enough characters are entered to
distinguish between arguments. For example, you could enter conn chan new -ia instead of
conn chan new -iatmif.

1.2.4

Command Completion

If you type the first character of a command and press the <Tab> key, AMI attempts to finish
typing as much of the command at the current cursor position as it can until an ambiguity is
encountered. If AMI cannot add any more characters to the command line because it is too
ambiguous at that level, AMI lists all the possible choices that can entered at the current cursor
position. When performing command completion, AMI ignores all characters after the current
cursor position. If AMI cannot add characters and cannot provide a completion list, the
console bell rings.
Here is an example of command completion:
myswitch:->

ro <Tab>

routing rows

The <Tab> key does not remove the line you are currently typing, although it may add
characters to it when it is able to complete a command. At this point, if you type u and hit the
<Tab> key once more, AMI completes the command as routing since there is only one
possibility that starts with rou.
myswitch:-> routing

Pressing the <RETURN> key changes the prompt to the routing directory.
myswitch:-> routing <RETURN>
myswitch:routing->

1-6

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

AMI Overview

1.2.5

Generic Query Mechanism

The generic query mechanism allows you to query on any argument in a command. For
example, by simply typing the show command, you can display all of the channels.
myswitch:connections channel-> show
Input

Output

AtmIf

VPI

VCI

AtmIf

VPI

VCI

ServCat Protocol Name

1A1

1CTL

45

nrtVBR

fsig

1A1

16

1CTL

46

nrtVBR

fsig

N/A

1A1

123

1A1

124

UBR

pvc

N/A

1A2

1CTL

47

nrtVBR

fsig

N/A

1A2

14

1CTL

36

UBR

spans

N/A

1A2

15

1CTL

35

nrtVBR

spans

N/A

1A2

16

1CTL

48

nrtVBR

fsig

N/A

N/A

AMI Overview

Press q to quit, any other key to continue... q

You can also display just the channels that have an input VCI of 16 as follows:
myswitch:connections channel-> show -ivci 16
Input

Output

AtmIf

VPI

VCI

AtmIf

VPI

VCI

ServCat Protocol Name

1A1

16

1CTL

46

nrtVBR

fsig

N/A

1A2

16

1CTL

48

nrtVBR

fsig

N/A

Press q to quit, any other key to continue... q

NOTE

When the prompt Press <return> for


more, or q to quit... is displayed,
you may type any key to stop the output. Typing
q simply stops the output. Typing any other
key(s) stops the output and echoes those
characters on the command line so that you may
begin typing a new command.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

1-7

AMI Overview

1.2.6

Wild Cards

AMI interprets an asterisk (*) as a wild card character. An asterisk matches zero or more
characters. Each field in a query can have several asterisks. For example:
myswitch:security ipfiltering-> show 1*
Addresses being denied:
1.2.3.4
11.22.33.44
myswitch:security ipfiltering-> show *3*
Addresses being denied:
1.2.3.4
11.22.33.44

The following example would delete signalling on all ports with a VPI of 3 or 4.
myswitch:signalling-> delete * -vpi 3|4

NOTE

1.2.7

This type of query can only be used with show,


modify, and delete commands.

Ranges

When querying on a range, AMI interprets 2 dots (..) as the range operator. It matches against
any value that is defined as being in the specified range, inclusively. The range cannot contain
a wild card. The following are some examples:
myswitch:security ipfiltering-> show 1.2.3.4..7.0.0.0
Addresses being denied:
1.2.3.4
6.7.8.9

The following example deletes all the SPVXs from 1 to 10 which have a -callingvpi of 32:
myswitch:connections smartchannel pnni pp-> delete 1..10 -callingvpi 32

NOTE

1-8

This type of query can only be used with show,


modify, and delete commands.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

AMI Overview

1.2.8

Lists

AMI interprets a vertical bar as an OR operator. It matches against any of the query values in
the bar-separated list. Each field in a query can have several bar-separated members, each of
which can also contain wild cards. The following are some examples:
myswitch:security ipfiltering-> show 1.2.3.4|6.0.0.0..7.0.0.0
Addresses being denied:
1.2.3.4
6.7.8.9

AMI Overview

myswitch:security ipfiltering-> show *66*|*3*


Addresses being denied:
1.2.3.4
11.22.33.44
66.77.88.99

The following example would delete signalling on all ports with a VPI of 3 or 4.
myswitch:signalling-> delete * -vpi 3|4

The following example would delete all SPVXs which have a -callingvpi of 32 or 34:
myswitch:connections smartchannel pnni pp-> delete * -callingvpi 32|34

NOTE

This type of query can only be used with show,


modify, and delete commands.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

1-9

AMI Overview

1.2.9

List Types

Some commands allow you to enter a list of items for one of the arguments on the AMI
command line. The individual items in the list must be separated either by semicolons, or if
the entire list is enclosed in either curly braces or double quotes, then the individual items
must be separated by white space or by semicolons. For list types that support tab completion,
a range may be entered.
For example, the interface ima group new -imalinks <list of Dsx1If> command can
take a list of interfaces as its single argument. The following example shows various valid
methods for entering a list:
myswitch:interfaces ima group-> new -imalinks 1a1;1a2;1a3
myswitch:interfaces ima group-> new -imalinks 1a1; 1a2; 1a3
myswitch:interfaces ima group-> new -imalinks {1a1 1a2 1a3}
myswitch:interfaces ima group-> new -imalinks {1a1; 1a2; 1a3}
myswitch:interfaces ima group-> new -imalinks 1a1 1a2 1a3
myswitch:interfaces ima group-> new -imalinks 1a1; 1a2; 1a3
myswitch:interfaces ima group-> new -imalinks 1a1-1a3

NOTE

When using white space as a separator, you must


use at least one space. More than one white space
is also considered a valid separator.

These methods of entering a list apply to those AMI commands that require a list of type as
an argument such as interface ima group new -imalinks <list of Dsx1If> or
services lane les new -peerlist <list of NSAP Address>.

1 - 10

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

AMI Overview

1.2.10 Command Line Editing


This feature allows easier configuration of the switch. You scroll through the commands
stored in AMIs history. Then you can edit the lines by deleting, inserting, and replacing
characters. This is particularly useful if you need to enter several long command strings that
are similar.
When editing a line, the current cursor position is always in insert mode. Cursor
movements are controlled using standard ANSI terminal escape sequences. Non-ANSI
terminals are not supported.
The following key sequences are supported by this feature:
Description

up and down arrow keys

The up and down arrows keys on a standard keyboard let you toggle through the history
of AMI commands. The up arrow displays the previous command in AMIs history. The
down arrow displays the following command in AMIs history.

left and right arrow keys

The left and right arrows let you move the cursor over a displayed AMI command. The
displayed line is not modified. Only the cursor position is changed.

Control-P

This key sequence has the same effect as using the up arrow key.

Control-N

This key sequence has the same effect as using the down arrow key.

Control-B

This key sequence has the same effect as using the left arrow key.

Control-F

This key sequence has the same effect as using the right arrow key.

Control-A

This key sequence moves the cursor to the beginning of the line being edited.

Control-E

This key sequence moves the cursor to the end of the line being edited.

Control-H

This key sequence deletes the character before the current cursor position.

Control-D

This key sequence deletes the character under the current cursor position.

Control-K

This key sequence deletes everything on the line being edited from the current cursor
position to the end of the line. The deleted characters are saved in a temporary buffer.

Control-U

This key sequence deletes all characters on the current line. The deleted characters are
saved in a temporary buffer.

Control-Y

This key sequence restores the characters that were deleted by the last Control-K or
Control-U sequence. This key sequence has no effect if nothing has been deleted.

Control-J

This key sequence returns the current line to AMI to be executed.

Control-L

This key sequence clears the terminal screen. The current AMI prompt and the current
AMI command are re-displayed at the top of the screen.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

1 - 11

AMI Overview

Key Sequence

AMI Overview

1.2.11 Command Confirmations


Certain command actions need to be confirmed. When an action is asked to be confirmed,
AMI displays the messages, and then asks the user for confirmation. For example, if the
confirmation message is This will cause the switch to reboot, then the AMI session would
look similar to the following:
myswitch:-> reboot
WARNING: This will cause the switch to reboot.
Do you wish to continue? (y or n): n
myswitch:->

To abort the command, type n. To continue with the command, type y.

1.2.12 Canceling an AMI Command


To cancel an AMI command in an AMI console or in a telnet session, use the Control-C key
sequence.

1 - 12

If the Control-C key sequence is entered for a command with multiple table
entries, such as modification of a table via a wild card, AMI finishes processing
the row that it is on at the time that the sequence is entered, and then aborts the
command. This command is most useful if a long table is displaying and you do
not wish to wait for it to complete.

If the Control-C key sequence is entered for an action command, such as a file
transfer, the file transfer software continues the transfer. However, the interactive
question and answer session in AMI is aborted, and AMI returns you back to the
prompt.

If the Control-C key sequence is entered while a command is waiting for user
input, AMI returns you back to the prompt.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

AMI Overview

1.2.13 Querying on a Non-Key Field


ForeThought 7.1.x and greater let you query on non-key fields when doing a modify from AMI.
For example, if you wanted to change an IfName of an Index, but only knew the Interface
Name and not the Index, in releases prior to ForeThought 7.1.x, you had to first display the
information as follows:
myswitch:interfaces if-> show -ifname 8C1
Index Name

Type

1025

atm

8C1

Speed Admin Oper Description


149759768 up

down Atm Interface

AMI Overview

Then you could modify the IfName of the associated Index as follows:
myswitch:interfaces if-> modify 1025 -alias chicago

However, in ForeThought 7.1.x and greater, you can simply enter the IfName (which is a nonkey field) in braces to specify an extended query as follows:
myswitch:interfaces if-> modify { -ifname 8C1 }

-alias chicago

1 entry was modified.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

1 - 13

AMI Overview

1.3 Logging in to a Switch


You can log in to a switch in several different ways:

via the serial port

via telnet

via Element Manager

The first two methods are described here. For information about logging in via Element
Manager, please see the ForeThought Element Manager Quick Start Guide.
Initially, you must log in to the switch through the serial port.

1.3.1

Login from the Serial Port

On a new switch, there is one default userid: ami. This userid is configured with the
password authentication method (the user is prompted for a login ID (userid) and a
password) and with an admin profile (meaning you are allowed to use all AMI commands)
for http, telnet, and console (serial port) logins. This userid is assigned a null password.

NOTE

Older switches that have been upgraded may


also have a default userid called asx. This userid
is assigned a null password, and configured with
the password authentication method and an
admin profile for http, telnet, and console (serial
port) logins.

1.3.1.1 Login from the Serial Port with a Userid


When configured to log in with a userid, at the login prompt, you must enter your userid and
the password that has been assigned for your userid. For security reasons, the switch does not
echo your keystrokes when you enter a password. For example:
login: ami<ENTER>
Password:

After you log in, if your userid has no assigned password, the following message is displayed:
Warning : This userid does not have a local password set.
Please type security login password ami
to set the local password.

1 - 14

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

AMI Overview

NOTE

NOTE

It is highly recommended that you assign a


password to the ami userid and to the asx
userid (on older switches), since these userids
have admin privileges by default. For more
information, see the Multiservice Broadband
Switch Network Configuration Manual and see Part
2 of this manual.

1.3.1.2 Login from the Serial Port with SecurID


If you login with a userid that has been configured for SecurID authentication, you are
prompted for a login ID (userid) and a password. For the password, you need to enter the
two-part SecurID passcode.
The two-part passcode consists of: a secret, memorized personal identification number (PIN)
and the current code generated by the users assigned SecurID token. After a validation check
is made, an AMI session is started (provided that a local AMI session is not already running).
login: securid_userid<ENTER>
Password: <PIN><Code on SecurID Token><ENTER>

If you enter an incorrect passcode three times in a row, you are prompted to enter the two-part
SecurID passcode and the next Tokencode. At the next Tokencode prompt, wait until the
display changes on your SecurID token and enter either your PIN number and that next code
number, or just that next code number.
login: test1
Password:
Login incorrect
login: test1
Password:
Login incorrect
login: test1
Password:
Login incorrect

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

1 - 15

AMI Overview

After three unsuccessful login attempts, there is


a five-second delay before you may attempt to
login again.

AMI Overview

login: test1
Password:
next Tokencode:

Once you enter either the correct local password or the correct SecurID passcode, the
following is displayed and a session is opened on the SCP:
ATM Management Interface v7.1.0
Copyright (c) 1994-2001 FORE Systems, Inc.
General commands:
'?' to get list of commands at the current level
'up' to go up one menu level
'top' to go to the root menu
'exit' to leave AMI
myswitch::>

NOTE

1.3.2

There are several possible login scenarios. See


the Multiservice Broadband Switch Network
Configuration Manual for your switch for a list of
scenarios and the action the switch takes for
each.

Login from Telnet

Three different types of telnet sessions can be requested, depending on the authentication type
you are assigned:

password authentication

Kerberos authentication

SecurID authentication

1.3.2.1 Using Password Authentication


To telnet to the SCP, enter the following parameters at the > prompt on the host:
> telnet <address>

1 - 16

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

AMI Overview

This parameter is defined as follows:


Parameter
address

Description
The IP address of the SCP.

For example, to telnet to an SCP with the IP address 204.95.89.231, enter the following:
> telnet 204.95.89.231

Sorry, this system is engaged.


Connection closed by foreign host.

If no other AMI session is running, something similar to the following is displayed:


Trying 204.95.89.231 ...
Connected to fishtank.
Escape character is '^]'.
S_ForeThought_7.1.0 (1.44214) (asx200bx) (fishtank)

1.3.2.2 Using Kerberos Authentication


If a DES encrypted telnet session has been requested and authentication has been successful,
the following displays:
Trying 169.20.4.21...
Connected to fishtank.
Escape character is '^]'.
[ Kerberos V5 accepts you as ``jsmith@SOMEWHERE.COM'' ]
S_ForeThought_7.1.0 (1.44214) (asx200bx) (fishtank)

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

1 - 17

AMI Overview

Only one user at a time may telnet to an AMI session on an SCP, although a user may be
logged in through the serial port and another may be logged in through telnet at the same
time. If a telnet AMI session is already in use, and you attempt to log in through a telnet
session, you receive a message similar to the following and are prevented from logging into
the switch:

AMI Overview

If Kerberos authentication has failed, the following displays:


Trying 172.19.4.20...
Connected to magic-lab.
Escape character is '^]'.
Authentication negotiation has failed, which is required for encryption.
Good bye.

S_ForeThought_7.1.0 (1.44214) indicates the version of software, (asx200bx)


indicates what type of switch this is, and (fishtank) indicates the name that has been
assigned to this SCP. If (ATM SWITCH) is displayed for the SCP name, this means that no host
name has been assigned yet.
On a new switch, there is one default userid: ami. This userid is configured with the
password authentication method (the user is prompted for a login ID (userid) and a
password) and with an admin profile (meaning you are allowed to use all AMI commands)
for http, telnet, and console (serial port) logins. This userid is assigned a null password.

NOTE

Older switches that have been upgraded may


also have a default userid called asx. This userid
is assigned a null password, and configured with
the password authentication method and an
admin profile for http, telnet, and console (serial
port) logins.

At the login prompt, you must enter your userid. Type your assigned userid for the login and
then enter the assigned password. For example:
login: myuserid<ENTER>
Password:

<ENTER>

For security reasons, the switch does not echo your keystrokes when you enter a password.

NOTE

After three unsuccessful login attempts, the


telnet session is disconnected.

If you do not log in and enter the password within 60 seconds, the telnet session times out
with the following message:
login: Login timed out after 60 seconds

1 - 18

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

AMI Overview

1.3.2.3 Using SecurID Authentication


If you login with a userid that has been configured for SecurID authentication, you are
prompted for a login ID (userid) and a password. For the password, you need to enter the
two-part SecurID passcode.
The two-part passcode consists of: a secret, memorized personal identification number (PIN)
and the current code generated by the users assigned SecurID token. After a validation check
is made, an AMI session is started (provided that a local AMI session is not already running).
login: securid_userid<ENTER>
Password: <PIN><Code on SecurID Token><ENTER>

login: test1
Password:
Login incorrect
login: test1
Password:
Login incorrect
login: test1
Password:
Login incorrect
login: test1
Password:
next Tokencode:

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

1 - 19

AMI Overview

If you enter an incorrect passcode three times in a row, you are prompted to enter the two-part
SecurID passcode and the next Tokencode. At the next Tokencode prompt, wait until the
display changes on your SecurID token and enter either your PIN number and that next code
number, or just that next code number.

AMI Overview

Once you enter either the correct local password or the correct SecurID passcode, the
following is displayed and a session is opened on the SCP:
ATM Management Interface v7.1.0
Copyright (c) 1994-2001 FORE Systems, Inc.
General commands:
'?' to get list of commands at the current level
'up' to go up one menu level
'top' to go to the root menu
'exit' to leave AMI
myswitch::>

NOTE

1 - 20

There are several different possible login


scenarios. See the Multiservice Broadband Switch
Network Configuration Manual for your switch for
a list of scenarios and the action the switch takes
for each.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

AMI Overview

1.4 AMI Commands in This Manual


This manual contains a detailed description of the AMI commands and directories. There are
several commands and directories available at the root level. Directories are immediately
followed by a > symbol.
The main root level directory is shown here.
myswitch:-> ?
Quit the AMI session

top

Go to the top-level directory

up

Go up one directory

about

Display copyright information

connections>

The connections directory

debug>

The debug directory

ethernet>

The ethernet directory

hardware>

The hardware directory

history

Show the history of commands for this AMI session

interfaces>

The interfaces directory

redo

Execute a previous command

redundancy>

The redundancy directory

routing>

The routing directory

rows

Show/Set the rows for this AMI session

security>

The security directory

services>

The services directory

signalling>

The signalling directory

system>

The system directory

whereis

Show old command to new command mapping

NOTE

AMI Overview

exit

Not all of the above commands and directories


are displayed on every platform. The
redundancy> directory not displayed on an
ESX-3000 switch. The ethernet> directory is
only displayed on an ESX-3000 switch.

This part of the manual describes the commands and directories from connections> to
hardware> and the root level commands. Please see the Multiservice Broadband Switch
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting Manual for a description of the debug> directory. Please see
Part 2 of this manual for descriptions of the commands and directories from interfaces> to
security>. Please see Part 3 of this manual for descriptions of the commands and directories
from services> to system>.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

1 - 21

AMI Overview

1 - 22

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

CHAPTER 2

Root Level Commands

This chapter provides a description of the root level AMI commands. By typing a ? at the
root level prompt, the following list of available commands is shown:
myswitch:-> ?
Quit the AMI session

top

Go to the top-level directory

up

Go up one directory

about

Display copyright information

connections>

The connections directory

debug>

The debug directory

ethernet>

The ethernet directory

hardware>

The hardware directory

history

Show the history of commands for this AMI session

interfaces>

The interfaces directory

redo

Execute a previous command

redundancy>

The redundancy directory

routing>

The routing directory

rows

Show/Set the rows for this AMI session

security>

The security directory

services>

The services directory

signalling>

The signalling directory

system>

The system directory

whereis

Show old command to new command mapping

NOTE

Root Level Commands

exit

Not all of the above commands and directories are


displayed on every platform. The redundancy>
directory is only displayed on an ASX-4000 switch.
The ethernet> directory is only displayed on an
ESX-3000 switch.

These commands are described in the following sections in the order in which they display in
AMI.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

2-1

Root Level Commands

2.1 exit
The exit command lets you log out of the main AMI system. When entered, this command
ends all open sessions on the switch control processor.
myswitch:-> exit
Goodbye
Connection closed by foreign host.

2.2 top
By entering the top command at any level, you are sent to the root level of AMI. For example,
if you are at the debug signalling level and you want to go directly to the root level,
simply enter top at the prompt.
myswitch:debug signalling-> top
myswitch:->

2.3 up
The up command allows you to go up one menu level. For example, if you are at the debug
signalling spans level and you want to go one level above that to debug signalling,
simply enter up at the prompt.
myswitch:debug signalling spans-> up
myswitch:debug signalling->

Entering the characters .. has the same effect as entering the command up.
myswitch:debug signalling spans-> ..
myswitch:debug signalling->

2-2

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Root Level Commands

2.4 about
By entering the about command at the root level prompt, you can display the software
copyright information regarding AMI.
myswitch:-> about
Copyright (c) 1996-2000 FORE Systems, Inc., as an unpublished work.
This notice does not imply unrestricted or public access to these
materials which are a trade secret of FORE Systems, Inc. or its
subsidiaries or affiliates (together referred to as FORE), and
which may not be reproduced, used, sold or transferred to any third
party without FORE's prior written consent.
All rights reserved.
U.S. Government Restricted Rights.

Root Level Commands

If you are licensing the Software on behalf of the U.S. Government


(Government), the following provisions apply to you. If the
Software is supplied to the Department of Defense (DoD), it is
classified as Commercial Computer Software under paragraph
252.227-7014 of the DoD Supplement to the Federal Acquisition
Regulations (DFARS) (or any successor regulations) and the
Government is acquiring only the license rights granted herein (the
license rights customarily provided to non-Government users). If
the Software is supplied to any unit or agency of the Government
other than DoD, it is classified as Restricted Computer Software
and the Government's rights in the Software are defined in
paragraph 52.227-19 of the Federal Acquisition Regulations (FAR)
(or any successor regulations) or, in the cases of NASA, in paragraph
18.52.227-86 of the NASA Supplement to the FAR (or any successor
regulations).
VxWorks and FlashLib
Copyright (c) 1984-1998 Wind River Systems, Inc.
All Rights Reserved

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

2-3

Root Level Commands

2.5 connections
By entering connections at the root level, you can access a directory of subcommands that
allow you to configure different types of connections. These subcommands and menus are
described in detail in Chapter 3 of this manual.

2.6 debug
By entering debug at the root level, you can access a directory of subcommands that give you
more information which may help you to troubleshoot specific parts of the software. These
commands are described in detail in the Multiservice Broadband Switch Diagnostics and
Troubleshooting Manual.

2.7 ethernet
By entering ethernet at the root level, you can access a directory of subcommands that let
you configure the Ethernet features supported by the ESX-3000 switch. These commands are
described in detail in Chapter 4 of this manual.

2.8 hardware
By entering hardware at the root level, you can access a directory of subcommands that allow
you to configure various aspects of the switch hardware. These subcommands and menus are
described in detail in Chapter 5 of this manual.

2-4

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Root Level Commands

2.9 history
By entering history at any prompt, you can list up to the last 50 previously typed
commands for that particular session:
1

about

history

hardware

ch

power

scp

show

stat

history

10

top

11

history

By entering interfaces at the root level, you can access a directory of subcommands that
allow you to configure various aspects of the switch interfaces. These subcommands and
menus are described in detail in Chapter 2 of Part 2 of the AMI Configuration Commands
Reference Manual.

2.11 redo
The redo command can be used in conjunction with the history command. It lets you
repeat a command that was given in the same open session. You can access this command by
entering redo at any level. To repeat the last command that was performed, enter redo with
no additional parameters as follows:
myswitch:-> redo

To repeat a command given within the last 50 commands in the same open session, enter the
following parameters:

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

2-5

Root Level Commands

2.10 interfaces

Root Level Commands

myswitch:-> redo <command-number>

This parameter is defined as follows:


Parameter
command-number

Description
The command and the number associated with the command that was previously
performed by the switch during this same session. Enter the history command to list
the previous commands and their associated numbers as shown in the following example.

Type history at the prompt to list the last 50 previously typed commands for that particular
session as follows:
myswitch:-> history
1

oper env cpu

stat

module

show

port

spans

stat scp tcp

udp

10 vcc
11 help
12 history

Then, to repeat a previously given command, type redo and the command number at the
prompt. For example, to repeat command number 8, which is listing statistics for tcp, enter
the following:
myswitch:-> redo 8
tcp Counter

Value

------------------------------ -------------------tcpActiveOpens

tcpPassiveOpens

49

tcpAttemptFails

tcpEstabResets

tcpCurrEstab

tcpInSegs
tcpOutSegs
tcpRetransSegs

2-6

14060
9967
0

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Root Level Commands

2.12 redundancy
By entering redundancy at the root level, you can access a directory of subcommands that let
you configure redundancy for the ASX-4000 switch based on SONET/SDH automatic
protection switching (APS). These commands are described in detail in Chapter 3 of Part 2 of
the AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual.

2.13 routing
By entering routing at the root level, you can access a directory of subcommands that allow
you to configure routing. These subcommands and menus are described in detail in Chapter 4
of Part 2 of the AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual.

By entering rows at the root level, you can display/change the number of rows that the
terminal displays.
myswitch:-> rows
24
myswitch:-> rows ?
[<integer>]

number of rows the screen can display

The parameter is defined as follows:


Parameter
<integer>

Description
The number of terminal rows to be used.

2.15 security
By entering security at the root level, you can access a directory of subcommands that allow
you to configure security. These subcommands and menus are described in detail in Chapter 5
of Part 2 of the AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

2-7

Root Level Commands

2.14 rows

Root Level Commands

2.16 services
By entering services at the root level, you can access a directory of subcommands that allow
you to configure various switch services. These subcommands and menus are described in
detail in Chapter 2 of Part 3 of the AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual.

2.17 signalling
By entering signalling at the root level, you can access a directory of subcommands that
allow you to configure signalling. These subcommands and menus are described in detail in
Chapter 3 of Part 3 of the AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual.

2.18 system
By entering system at the root level, you can access a directory of subcommands that allow
you to configure various aspects of the switch system. These subcommands and menus are
described in detail in Chapter 4 of Part 3 of the AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual.

2.19 whereis
The whereis command allows you to map all ForeThought 6.0.x commands to the
corresponding ForeThought 6.1.x commands. To do so, you must enter the command in one of
two ways:
1.

Enter the old or new command as a full command (i.e., no abbreviations) and put
the entire command string in quotes, as follows:
myswitch:-> whereis operation cdb restore

OR
2.

Enter the old or new command using abbreviations and putting * between the
words without spaces, as follows:
myswitch:-> whereis oper*cdb*rest*

2-8

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Root Level Commands

The following illustrates the second method and the associated result:
myswitch:-> whereis oper*cdb*
(system whereis)
Old Command

: operation cdb backup

Equivalent New Command : system cdb backup


system batch create
system batch show
----------------------------------------------------------------------------Old Command

: operation cdb init

Equivalent New Command : system cdb init


----------------------------------------------------------------------------Old Command

: operation cdb reset

Equivalent New Command : system cdb reset


----------------------------------------------------------------------------Old Command

: operation cdb restore

Equivalent New Command : system cdb restore


system batch run
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

Root Level Commands

To query on a specific FT 6.0 command, type the following:


myswitch:-> whereis ?
[[-oldcmd] <text>]

Old Command

[[-newcmd] <text>]

New Command

NOTE

Please see Appendix A in Part 3 of the AMI


Configuration Commands Reference Manual for a
complete mapping of all FT 6.0.x to FT 6.1.x
commands.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

2-9

Root Level Commands

2 - 10

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

CHAPTER 3

Connections Commands

These commands let you configure different types of connections. You can display the list of
available subcommands by typing ? at the connections level.
myswitch:connections-> ?
atmifname

Display the name for an AtmIf identifier

channel>

The vcc/pvc directory

destnsap

Compute NSAP address for SPVX with this switch as


destination

oam>

The oam directory

path>

The vpc/pvp/vpt directory

qos>

The qos directory

qosext>

The qosext directory

spvcc>

The soft pvc directory

spvpc>

The soft pvp directory

spvxredundancy>

The spvxredundancy directory

upc>

The upc directory

Connections
Commands

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

3-1

Connections Commands

3.1 connections atmifname


The destination port (ATM interface) of originating PMP/PP SPVCs and PP SPVPs and the
source port (ATM interface) of terminating PMP/PP SPVCs and PP SPVPs is displayed as a
port identifier (e.g., 0). If the destination port for an originating PMP/PP SPVC is displayed as
the port identifier x, you can convert this to BNP form by entering this command at the
destination switch with x as the <portidentifier>. For a terminating PMP/PP SPVC,
enter this command on the originating switch to convert the source port identifier to its BNP
format.
myswitch:connections-> atmifname
Usage:
[-index] <integer>

AtmIf Index

This parameter is defined as follows:


Parameter
-index <integer>

3-2

Description
The ATM interface that you want to convert to BNP notation.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Connections Commands

3.2 connections channel


These commands let you configure Permanent Virtual Channels (PVCs), which are also called
Virtual Channel Connections (VCCs). In addition, the delete command lets you delete
Switched Virtual Channels (SVCs). You can display the list of available subcommands by
typing ? at the channel level.
myswitch:connections channel-> ?
delete

Remove a virtual channel

ethernet>

The ethernet directory

new

Create a new virtual channel

outputstat

Display output connection statistics

show

Display virtual channel configuration

statistics

Display virtual channel statistics

3.2.1

connections channel delete

This command allows you to delete an existing PVC or an active SVC. For active SVCs, you
can delete point-to-point or point-to-multipoint SVCs. When using this command for point-tomultipoint SVCs, you can delete all, some, or one of the parties in connection. Enter the
following parameters:

NOTE

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Connections
Commands

When using this command for SVCs, you may


need to perform other administrative actions to
prevent call re-establishment between the
affected parties or to prevent additional parties
from being added to a point-to-multipoint call.
In addition, depending on the endpoint
application, this action could result in the
endpoint releasing additional SVCs. For
example, if you disconnect a LAN Emulation
control SVC between a LES and LEC, additional
SVCs may be disconnected between the LEC and
LAN Emulation services.

3-3

Connections Commands

myswitch:connections channel-> delete


Usage:
[-iatmif] <AtmIf>

Input AtmIf

[-ivpi] <integer>

Input VPI

[-ivci] <integer>

Input VCI

[-oatmif] <AtmIf>

Output AtmIf

[-ovpi] <integer>

Output VPI

[-ovci] <integer>

Output VCI

[[-upc] <UPC Index>]

UPC Contract

[[-name] <text>]

Name

[[-sigprotocol] <chan_sigprotocol>]

Protocol

[[-ctype] <connection_type>]

Connection Type

[[-servCat] <ServCat>]

Service Category

These parameters are defined in Section 3.2.3.

3.2.2

connections channel ethernet

This command, which is displayed on ASX and TNX switch platforms equipped with
Ethernet port cards, lets you create and remove Ethernet channels, or display their attributes.
You can display the list of available subcommands by typing ? at the ethernet level.
myswitch:connections channel ethernet-> ?
delete

Remove an Ethernet channel

new

Create a new Ethernet channel

pair

Create a VC Pair

show

Display Ethernet channel configuration

unpair

Undo VC Pair

3.2.2.1 connections channel ethernet delete


This command lets you delete an existing Ethernet channel. Enter the following parameters:
myswitch:connections channel ethernet-> delete
Usage:
[-iif] <EthernetAtmIf>

Input If

[-ivpi] <integer>

Input VPI(Required for AtmIf)

[-ivci] <integer>

Input VCI(Required for AtmIf)

[-oif] <EthernetAtmIf>

Output If

[-ovpi] <integer>

Output VPI(Required for AtmIf)

[-ovci] <integer>

Output VCI(Required for AtmIf)

[[-index] <integer>]

Index used in pairing

[[-partner] <integer>]

Index of the VC partner

These parameters are defined in Section 3.2.2.2.

3-4

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Connections Commands

3.2.2.2 connections channel ethernet new


This command lets you create a new Ethernet channel. Enter the following parameters:
myswitch:connections channel ethernet-> new
Usage:
[-iif] <EthernetAtmIf>

Input If

[[-ivpi] <integer>]

Input VPI(Required for AtmIf)

[[-ivci] <integer>]

Input VCI(Required for AtmIf)

[-oif] <EthernetAtmIf>

Output If

[[-ovpi] <integer>]

Output VPI(Required for AtmIf)

[[-ovci] <integer>]

Output VCI(Required for AtmIf)

The parameters for delete and new are defined as follows:


Parameter

Description

-iif <EthernetAtmIf>

The incoming Ethernet/ATM interface number.

-ivpi <integer>

The incoming virtual path number. This is a required field if the input interface is ATM; if
the input interface is Ethernet, however, these values cannot be specified (the switch
automatically allocates these values.)

-ivci <integer>

The incoming virtual channel number. This is a required field if the input interface is ATM;
if the input interface is Ethernet, however, these values cannot be specified.

-oif <EthernetAtmIf>

The outgoing Ethernet/ATM interface number.

-ovpi <integer>

The outgoing virtual path number. This is a required field if the output interface is ATM; if
the output interface is Ethernet, however, these values cannot be specified.

-ovci <integer>

The outgoing virtual channel number. This is a required field if the output interface is
ATM; if the output interface is Ethernet, however, these values cannot be specified (the
switch automatically allocates these values.)

Connections
Commands

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

3-5

Connections Commands

3.2.2.3 connections channel ethernet pair


This command lets you create a VC pair. Enter the following parameters:
myswitch:connections channel ethernet-> pair
Usage:
[-index1] <integer>

Index of first VC

[-index2] <integer>

Index of second VC

These parameters are defined as follows:


Parameter

Description

-index1 <integer>

The index that uniquely identifies the first VC in the pair.

-index2 <integer>

The index that uniquely identifies the second VC in the pair.

3-6

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Connections Commands

3.2.2.4 connections channel ethernet show


This command allows you to display existing Ethernet channels. Enter the following
parameters:
myswitch:connections channel ethernet-> show
Input

Output

If

VPI

VCI

If

VPI

VCI

2B1

200

2D1

200

2B1

200

2D1

401

2B2

201

2D1

505

2B3

202

2D1

506

2B4

203

2D1

507

2C1

200

2D1

101

2C1

200

2D1

402

2C2

201

2D1

400

2D1

101

2C1

200

2D1

200

2B1

200

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Field

Description
The incoming Ethernet/ATM interface number of the virtual channel.

Input VPI

The incoming virtual path number.

Input VCI

The incoming virtual channel number.

Output If

The outgoing Ethernet/ATM interface number of the virtual channel.

Output VPI

The outgoing virtual path number.

Output VCI

The outgoing virtual channel number.

3.2.2.4.1

connections channel ethernet show -all

This command allows you to display existing Ethernet channels including channel indices
and pairing partners. Enter the following parameters:
myswitch:connections channel ethernet-> show -all
Input

Output

Index

If

VPI

VCI

If

VPI

VCI

Partner

2A1

39

2D1

101

2A2

41

2D1

201

2D1

101

2A1

39

2D1

201

2A2

40

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

3-7

Connections
Commands

Input If

Connections Commands

3.2.2.5 connections channel ethernet unpair


This command lets you undo a VC pair. Enter the following parameters:
myswitch:connections channel ethernet-> unpair
Usage:
[-index1] <integer>

Index of first VC

[-index2] <integer>

Index of second VC

These parameters are defined as follows:


Parameter

Description

-index1 <integer>

The index that uniquely identifies the first VC in the pair.

-index2 <integer>

The index that uniquely identifies the second VC in the pair.

3-8

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Connections Commands

3.2.3

connections channel new

This command lets you create a new PVC. Enter the following parameters:
myswitch:connections channel-> new
Usage:
[-iatmif] <AtmIf>

Input AtmIf

[-ivpi] <integer>

Input VPI

[-ivci] <integer>

Input VCI

[-oatmif] <AtmIf>

Output AtmIf

[-ovpi] <integer>

Output VPI

[-ovci] <integer>

Output VCI

[[-upc] <UPC Index>]

UPC Contract (default: 0)

[[-name] <text>]

Name

[[-ctype] <connection_type>]

Connection Type

The parameters for delete and new are defined as follows:


Parameter

Description
The incoming ATM interface number.

-ivpi <integer>

The incoming virtual path number.

-ivci <integer>

The incoming virtual channel number.

-ivpi <integer>

The incoming virtual path number.

-oatmif <AtmIf>

The outgoing ATM interface number.

-ovpi <integer>

The outgoing virtual path number.

-ovci <integer>

The outgoing virtual channel number.

-upc <UPC Index>

The integer index that refers to a specific UPC traffic contract. If no index is specified, then
no traffic policing will take place on this VCI. It is assigned a default UPC index of 0, and
all traffic on this VCI is treated as UBR traffic.

-name <text>

The name you want to assign to this PVC to identify it uniquely. It is useful for billing
purposes so you can identify which PVCs are being used by which customers. Can be up
to 32 ASCII characters long.

-sigprotocol
<chan_sigprotocol>

Indicates what type of signalling protocol is running on this channel.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

3-9

Connections
Commands

-iatmif <AtmIf>

Connections Commands

Parameter
-ctype <connection_type>

Description
The channel connection type for the incoming channel. For billing purposes, it denotes on
which switch this PVC is arriving. Valid entries are a combination of the following
parameters (e.g., thru-term-pmp or orig-term-mpp, etc.):
orig (originating) means that the ingress endpoint of the channel is connected to the
source node which is outside the network.
thru (through) means that the ingress endpoint of the channel is connected to a node
within the network.
term (terminating) means that the ingress endpoint of the channel is connected to the
destination node which is outside the network.
pp means this is a point-to-point PVC.
pmp means this is a point-to-multipoint PVC.
mpp means this is a multipoint-to-point PVC.
mpmp means this is a multipoint-to-multipoint PVC.
NOTE: By indicating pp, pmp, mpp, or mpmp, you are only assigning a label for record
keeping purposes. The switch does not necessarily create the type of PVC you have
specified. If you assign a connection type, but do not assign a pp, pmp, mpp, or mpmp label,
the switch assigns a label of pp (point-to-point).

3 - 10

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Connections Commands

3.2.4

connections channel outputstat

You can show VCC traffic statistics for individual network modules. The fields that are
displayed vary depending on the type of network module on which the connections are
output. This command does not apply to Series C network modules.
If the connections are output on a Series D network module, the display varies depending on
whether or not the module packet counter is disabled. If the module packet counter is enabled
under hardware netmod traffic d modify -aal5pktcount, the CLP0 and CLP1 cells
are combined into a single CLP0+1 Tx count. If the module packet counter is disabled under
hardware netmod traffic d modify -aal5pktcount (the default setting), the following
is displayed:
myswitch:connections channel-> outputstat
Input

Output

C e l l s

AtmIf

VPI

VCI

AtmIf

VPI

VCI

1CTL

49

1A1

1CTL

50

1A1

16

1A1

400

1A1

400

1CTL

51

1A2

1CTL

52

1A2

16

Transmitted

Lost

53208

29267

144600

Press q to quit, any other key to continue... q

The fields in these displays are defined as follows:


Field

Description
The incoming ATM interface number.

Input VPI

The incoming virtual path number.

Input VCI

The incoming virtual channel number.

Output AtmIf

The outgoing ATM interface number.

Output VPI

The outgoing virtual path number.

Output VCI

The outgoing virtual channel number.

Cells Transmitted

The total number of cells transmitted on this channel.

Cells Lost

The total number of cells lost on this channel.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Connections
Commands

Input AtmIf

3 - 11

Connections Commands

3.2.4.1 connections channel outputstat -advanced


You can display advanced statistics as follows:
myswitch:connections channel-> outputstat -advanced
Input/Output

Cells

AtmIf

VPI

VCI

1CTL

49

1A1

1CTL

50

1A1

16

1A1

400

1A1

400

1CTL

51

1A2

1CTL

52

1A2

16

Transmitted

C e l l s

L o s t

C L P 0

C L P 1

Intentional Unintentional

N/A

N/A

53224

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

29276

N/A

N/A

144638

N/A

N/A

Press <return> for more, or 'q' to quit...q

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Field

Description

Input/Output AtmIf

The incoming/outgoing ATM interface number.

Input/Output VPI

The incoming/outgoing virtual path number.

Input/Output VCI

The incoming/outgoing virtual channel number.

Cells Transmitted CLP0

The number of CLP=0 cells transmitted on this channel.

Cells Transmitted CLP1

The number of CLP=1 cells transmitted on this channel.

CellsLost Intentional

For AAL5 traffic, counts the first cell of each packet dropped on this channel due to PPD
(Partial Packet Discard). For non-AAL5 traffic, this counter is not incremented.

CellsLost Unintentional

For AAL5 traffic, counts only the first cell of each packet lost on this channel when output
shared memory is full or when the per-port/per-priority CLP (Cell Loss Priority)
thresholds are exceeded. All remaining cells are counted under the CellsLost
Intentional counter. For non-AAL5 traffic, counts all cells lost on this channel when
output shared memory is full or when the per-port/per-priority CLP (Cell Loss Priority)
thresholds are exceeded.

3 - 12

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Connections Commands

3.2.4.2 connections channel outputstat -packets


You can display packet statistics as follows:
myswitch:connections channel-> outputstat -packets
Input

Output

P a c k e t s

AtmIf

VPI

VCI

AtmIf

VPI

VCI

Transmitted

1CTL

49

1A1

N/A

Lost
0

1CTL

50

1A1

16

N/A

N/A

1A1

400

1A1

400

N/A

N/A

1CTL

51

1A2

N/A

1CTL

52

1A2

16

N/A

N/A

1CTL

53

1A3

N/A

1CTL

54

1A3

16

N/A

N/A

1CTL

55

1A4

N/A

1CTL

56

1A4

16

N/A

N/A

1CTL

65

1C1

N/A

N/A

1CTL

66

1C1

16

N/A

N/A

1CTL

67

1C2

N/A

N/A

1CTL

68

1C2

16

N/A

N/A

1CTL

69

1C3

N/A

N/A

1CTL

70

1C3

16

N/A

N/A

1CTL

71

1C4

N/A

N/A

1CTL

72

1C4

16

N/A

N/A

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Field

Description
The incoming ATM interface number.

Input VPI

The incoming virtual path number.

Input VCI

The incoming virtual channel number.

Output AtmIf

The outgoing ATM interface number.

Output VPI

The outgoing virtual path number.

Output VCI

The outgoing virtual channel number.

Packets Transmitted

The total number of packets transmitted on this channel.

Packets Lost

The total number of packets lost on this channel.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Connections
Commands

Input AtmIf

3 - 13

Connections Commands

3.2.5

connections channel qos

The connections channel qos command enables Quality of Service (QOS) information to
be displayed for all SVCs on the switch.
myswitch:connections channel-> qos
Input

---Policing---

AtmIf

VPI VCI

Service

PCR

SCR

MBS

CDVT AAL5 On? Actn Scheme

1A1

100

UBR

N/A

N/A

N/A

250 yes

no

drop ubr1

1A1

101

UBR

N/A

N/A

N/A

250 yes

no

drop ubr1

1A1

102

UBR

N/A

N/A

N/A

250 yes

no

drop ubr1

1A1

103

UBR

N/A

N/A

N/A

250 yes

no

drop ubr1

1A1

104

UBR

N/A

N/A

N/A

250 yes

no

drop ubr1

1A1

105

UBR

N/A

N/A

N/A

250 yes

no

drop ubr1

1A1

106

UBR

N/A

N/A

N/A

250 yes

no

drop ubr1

1A1

107

UBR

N/A

N/A

N/A

250 yes

no

drop ubr1

1A1

108

UBR

N/A

N/A

N/A

250 yes

no

drop ubr1

1A1

109

UBR

N/A

N/A

N/A

250 yes

no

drop ubr1

1A1

118

UBR

N/A

N/A

N/A

250 yes

no

drop ubr1

1A1

119

UBR

N/A

N/A

N/A

250 yes

no

drop ubr1

1A1

120

UBR

N/A

N/A

N/A

250 yes

no

drop ubr1

Press <return> for more, or 'q' to quit...

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Field

Description

Input AtmIf

The incoming ATM interface number.

VPI

The incoming virtual path number.

VCI

The incoming virtual channel number.

Services

The traffic type on the virtual channel. They include: CBR, rtVBR, nrtVBR, ABR, and UBR.

PCR

The peak cell rate (PCR), specified in cells/second.

SCR

The sustained cell rate (SCR), specified in cells/second. This field also identifies the PCR0
value for cbr0 and cbr0tag schemes.

MBS

The maximum burst size (MBS), specified in cells.

CDVT

The channel cell delay variation tolerance (CDVT), specified in microseconds. This value
indicates the time window in which a cell may be received on a channel and be accepted.
A cell received on a channel outside of the CDV window will be dropped or tagged, based
on the Policing Action value. The CDV value overrides the default value of the link.

AAL5

This value indicates whether the connection is AAL 5 or not.

3 - 14

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Connections Commands

Field

Description

Policing On?

This value determines whether or not the connection is policed for traffic violations. yes
indicates that the connection is to be policed. This value will override the policing status
of the ATM interface on which the connection is established. no indicates that the connection is not policed.

Policing Action

This value determines whether the cell will be tagged (tag) or dropped (drop), if it was
received outside of the CDVT window.

Policing Scheme

The policing associated with the UPC contract as defined in the ATM Forum 4.0 specifications. They include: cbr1, cbr0, cbr0tag, vbr1, vbr2, vbr3, abr1, ubr1, and ubr2.
The schemes specific to Marconi switches are cbr0 and cbr0tag.

3.2.6

connections channel show

This command allows you to display existing PVCs. To list all of the existing PVCs on an
individual switch fabric, enter the following parameters:
myswitch:connections channel-> show
Input

Output

VPI

VCI

AtmIf

VPI

VCI

ServCat Protocol Name

1A1

1CTL

37

nrtVBR

fsig

N/A

1A1

14

1CTL

36

UBR

spans

N/A

1A1

15

1CTL

35

nrtVBR

spans

N/A

1A1

16

1CTL

38

nrtVBR

fsig

N/A

1A2

1CTL

41

nrtVBR

fsig

N/A

1A2

14

1CTL

40

UBR

spans

N/A

1A2

15

1CTL

39

nrtVBR

spans

N/A

1A2

16

1CTL

42

nrtVBR

fsig

N/A

1A3

1CTL

45

nrtVBR

fsig

N/A

1A3

14

1CTL

44

UBR

spans

N/A

1A3

15

1CTL

43

nrtVBR

spans

N/A

1A3

16

1CTL

46

nrtVBR

fsig

N/A

Connections
Commands

AtmIf

Press q to quit, any other key to continue... q

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

3 - 15

Connections Commands

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Field

Description

Input AtmIf

The incoming ATM interface number of the virtual channel.

Input VPI

The incoming virtual path number.

Input VCI

The incoming virtual channel number.

Output AtmIf

The outgoing ATM interface number of the virtual channel.

Output VPI

The outgoing virtual path number.

Output VCI

The outgoing virtual channel number.

ServCat

The traffic type on this virtual channel.

Protocol

Indicates what type of signalling protocol is running on this channel. Can be spans, pvc,
fsig, spvc, or rcc. rcc is the routing control channel (0, 18) on PNNI links over which
PNNI exchanges routing information. fsig stands for ATM Forum signalling.

Name

The unique, user-assigned name for this PVC. If no name is assigned, shows N/A.

3.2.6.1 connections channel show -advanced


To list advanced information about all of the existing PVCs on a switch fabric, enter the
following parameters:
myswitch:connections channel-> show -advanced
Input

Output

AtmIf

VPI

VCI

AtmIf

VPI

VCI

UPC

Protocol ConType

1A1

1CTL

37

N/A

fsig

N/A

1A1

14

1CTL

36

N/A

spans

N/A

1A1

15

1CTL

35

N/A

spans

N/A

1A1

16

1CTL

38

N/A

fsig

N/A

1A2

1CTL

41

N/A

fsig

N/A

1A2

14

1CTL

40

N/A

spans

N/A

1A2

15

1CTL

39

N/A

spans

N/A

1A2

16

1CTL

42

N/A

fsig

N/A

1A3

1CTL

45

N/A

fsig

N/A

1A3

14

1CTL

44

N/A

spans

N/A

1A3

15

1CTL

43

N/A

spans

N/A

1A3

16

1CTL

46

N/A

fsig

N/A

Press q to quit, any other key to continue... q

3 - 16

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Connections Commands

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Field

Description

Input AtmIf

The incoming ATM interface number of the virtual channel.

Input VPI

The incoming virtual path number.

Input VCI

The incoming virtual channel number.

Output AtmIf

The outgoing ATM interface number of the virtual channel.

Output VPI

The outgoing virtual path number.

Output VCI

The outgoing virtual channel number.

UPC

The integer index that refers to the specific UPC traffic contract assigned to this VCI.

Protocol

Indicates what type of signalling protocol is running on this channel. Can be spans, pvc,
fsig, spvc, or rcc. rcc is the routing control channel (0, 18) on PNNI links over which
PNNI exchanges routing information. fsig stands for ATM Forum signalling.

ConType

The connection type for the endpoints of this PVC with respect to a particular network.

Connections
Commands

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

3 - 17

Connections Commands

3.2.7

connections channel statistics

You can display virtual channel statistics as follows:


myswitch:connections channel-> statistics
Input

Output

Cells

Cells

AtmIf

VPI

VCI

AtmIf

VPI

VCI

Uptime

Received

Rejected

4A1

4CTL

37

19:14

9236

4A1

14

4CTL

36

19:14

248156

4A1

15

4CTL

35

19:14

565063

4A1

16

4CTL

38

19:14

103979

4A1

18

4CTL

111

19:14

30761

4A2

4CTL

41

19:14

4A2

14

4CTL

40

19:14

4A2

15

4CTL

39

19:14

4A2

16

4CTL

42

19:14

Press q to quit, any other key to continue... q

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Field

Description

Input AtmIf

The incoming ATM interface number.

Input VPI

The incoming virtual path number.

Input VCI

The incoming virtual channel number.

Output AtmIf

The outgoing ATM interface number.

Output VPI

The outgoing virtual path number.

Output VCI

The outgoing virtual channel number.

Uptime

The length of time that this virtual channel has been in its current state.

Cells Received

The total (aggregate) number of cells that were transferred over this channel.

Cells Rejected

The total (aggregate) number of cells over this channel that were rejected (dropped) by the
hardware due to a traffic policing violation. This does not include any cells that may have
been tagged with CLP=1 by the policer, only cells that were discarded.

3 - 18

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Connections Commands

3.3 connections destnsap


This command is used at the destination switch to obtain the NSAP address to be used as the
<destnsap> parameter under the connections spvcc pp new command or <nsap>
parameter under the connections spvcc pmp party new command at the source switch.
myswitch:connections-> destnsap ?
[[-domainid] <integer>]

Domain ID

[[-atmif] <AtmIf>]

AtmIf

[[-nsap] <NSAP Address>]

Destination NSAP Address

These parameters are defined as follows:


Parameter

Description

-domainid <integer>

The PNNI domain ID number on the destination switch fabric. The prefix corresponding
to that routing domain is used to compute the destination NSAP address. For a list of
valid domain identifiers, use the routing domain show command.

-atmif <AtmIf>

The ATM interface on which the permanent portion of the SPVC needs to terminate on the
destination switch.

-nsap <NSAP Address>

The NSAP address of this ATM interface in this domain.

All of the destination NSAP addresses can be displayed as follows:


myswitch:connections-> destnsap
Destination NSAP

7A1

0x47.0005.80.ffe100.0000.f258.0134.0020480d0180.00

7A2

0x47.0005.80.ffe100.0000.f258.0134.0020480d0181.00

7A3

0x47.0005.80.ffe100.0000.f258.0134.0020480d0182.00

7A4

0x47.0005.80.ffe100.0000.f258.0134.0020480d0183.00

7B1

0x47.0005.80.ffe100.0000.f258.0134.0020480d0190.00

7B2

0x47.0005.80.ffe100.0000.f258.0134.0020480d0191.00

7B3

0x47.0005.80.ffe100.0000.f258.0134.0020480d0192.00

7B4

0x47.0005.80.ffe100.0000.f258.0134.0020480d0193.00

CTL

0x47.0005.80.ffe100.0000.f258.0134.0020480d0200.00

Connections
Commands

Domain AtmIf

These fields are defined in the previous example. A specific NSAP address can be displayed as
follows:
myswitch:connections-> destnsap -domain 1 -atmif 7a1
Domain AtmIf

Destination NSAP

0x47.0005.80.ffe100.0000.f258.0134.0020480d0180.00

7A1

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

3 - 19

Connections Commands

3.4 connections oam


When a physical layer fault (loss of carrier, loss of frame, etc.) is detected on a port that has
AIS/RDI (Alarm Indication Signal)/(Remote Defect Indication) enabled, OAM cells are
generated for all through paths, originating paths, PVCs, and PNNI SPVCs that originate on
that port. If a virtual path AIS condition is indicated (by receipt of F4 AIS cells on a
terminating path), OAM cells are generated for only that path and for channels (PVCs and
PNNI SPVCs) that originate on that path.
An AIS is sent in the downstream direction (away from the failure). Receiving an AIS cell
indicates that a physical layer failure condition is present upstream from the receiver. An RDI
cell is sent toward the failure when a physical fault or AIS condition is detected on the virtual
path and channel. Receiving an RDI cell indicates that a fault exists in the transit pathway of
the virtual connection described by the RDI cell.

NOTE

Currently, AIS/RDI OAM cell generation is


supported only for point-to-point connections.

These commands let you display OAM statistics. You can display the list of available
subcommands by typing ? at the oam level.
myswitch:connections oam-> ?
f5

Display oam channel statistics

genais

Display oam pathr statistics

genrdi

Display oam opath statistics

guard

Display guard statistics

received

Display oam pathreceived statistics

3 - 20

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Connections Commands

3.4.1

connections oam f5

The F5 cell is an OAM cell that reports alarm conditions which are relevant to virtual channels.
You can display F5 statistics as follows:
myswitch:connections oam-> f5
AtmIf

VPI

VCI

TxAIS

1A1

100

6233

1A1

200

4482

The fields in this display have the following meanings:


Field

Description

AtmIf

The ATM interface number.

VPI

The virtual path number for this ATM interface.

VCI

The virtual channel number for this ATM interface.

TxAIS

The number of AIS OAM cells sent on this path, ATM interface, and channel.

3.4.2

connections oam genais

This command lets you display AIS OAM cell generation statistics at the virtual path level as
follows:
myswitch:connections oam-> genais
Input

Output

TxAIS

VPI

AtmIf

VPI

3D1

7D3

130

3D1

6B3

130

Connections
Commands

AtmIf

The fields in this display have the following meanings:


Field

Description

Input AtmIf

The incoming ATM interface number.

Input VPI

The incoming virtual path number for this ATM interface.

Output AtmIf

The outgoing ATM interface number.

Output VPI

The outgoing virtual path number for this ATM interface.

TxAIS

The number of AIS OAM cells sent on this path.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

3 - 21

Connections Commands

3.4.3

connections oam genrdi

This command lets you display RDI OAM cell generation statistics at the virtual path level as
follows:
myswitch:connections oam-> genrdi
AtmIf

VPI

TxRDI

3A1

237495

3D1

232514

The fields in this display have the following meanings:


Field

Description

AtmIf

The ATM interface number.

VPI

The virtual path number for this ATM interface.

TxRDI

The number of RDI cells transmitted on this path.

3.4.4

connections oam guard

This command lets you display the last time an OAM cell was transmitted or received by the
fabric as follows:
myswitch:connections oam-> guard
Fabric

OAM Guard

3010704095

The fields in this display have the following meanings:


Field

Description

Fabric

The fabric number.

OAM Guard

The timing, in timeticks (one hundredths of a second) since the last time an OAM cell was
generated/received on this fabric.

3 - 22

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Connections Commands

3.4.5

connections oam received

This command lets you display OAM cell statistics at the virtual path level as follows:
myswitch:connections oam-> received
AtmIf

VPI

RxAIS

RxRDI

3A1

3D1

305

The fields in this display have the following meanings:


Field

Description

AtmIf

The ATM interface number.

VPI

The virtual path number for this ATM interface.

RxAIS

The number of AIS cells received on this path.

RxRDI

The number of RDI cells received on this path.

Connections
Commands

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

3 - 23

Connections Commands

3.5 connections path


These commands let you configure through paths, originating paths, and terminating paths.
You can display the list of available subcommands by typing ? at the path level.
myswitch:connections path-> ?
term>

The term directory

through>

The through directory

3.5.1

connections path term

These commands let you configure Virtual Path Terminators (VPTs), which are also called
originating and terminating paths. You can display the list of available subcommands by
typing ? at the term level.
myswitch:connections path term-> ?
delete

Remove a path

modify

Modify an existing path configuration

new

Create a new path

show

Display paths configuration

3.5.1.1 connections path term delete


This command lets you delete a virtual path terminator. Enter the following parameters:
myswitch:connections path term-> delete
Usage:
[-atmif] <AtmIf>

AtmIf

[-vpi] <integer>

VPI

[-type] (orig|term)

Direction

[[-reservedbw] <Kbps>]

Reserved Bandwidth

[[-allocbw] <Kbps>]

Allocated Bandwidth

[[-minvci] <integer>]

Min VCI

[[-maxvci] <integer>]

Max VCI

[[-trafficsvpi] <integer>]

Traffic Shape VPI

[[-loopvpi] <integer>]

Loop VPI

[[-nrtvbrob] <percent>]

nrtVBR Overbooking

[[-nrtvbrbob] <percent>]

nrtVBR Buffer Overbooking

[[-rtvbrob] <percent>]

rtVBR Overbooking

[[-rtvbrbob] <percent>]

rtVBR Buffer Overbooking

[[-numchannels] <integer>]

Number of Channels

3 - 24

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Connections Commands

[[-sigprotocol] <sigprotocol_type>]

Signaling Protocol

[[-shaping] (flat|shaped|shaped-roundrobin)]

Originating Path Shaping

[[-cells] <Counter>]

Received Cells

[[-rejectedcells] <Counter>]

Rejected Cells

[[-uptime] <timeticks>]

Uptime

[[-cacerrors] <Counter>]

CAC Errors

[[-vcierrors] <Counter>]

VCI Errors

[[-setuperrors] <Counter>]

Setup Errors

[[-cbr] (none|default|qosext_index)]

CBR

[[-rtvbr] (none|default|qosext_index)]

RtVBR

[[-nrtvbr] (none|default|qosext_index)]

NrtVBR

[[-abr] (none|default|qosext_index)]

ABR

[[-ubr] (none|default|qosext_index)]

UBR

NOTE

Virtual Path 0 cannot be deleted on any of the


connections to the inter-fabric ports on an ASX-1000
switch, ASX-1200 switch, or TNX-1100 switch.
Virtual Path 0 cannot be deleted on any of the
connections on a Circuit Emulation Services (CES)
network module.
Virtual Path 0 cannot be deleted on the control port
(CTL) on any switch.

These parameters are defined in Section 3.5.1.3.

3.5.1.2 connections path term modify


Connections
Commands

This command lets you modify an existing virtual path terminator. Enter the following:
myswitch:connections path term-> modify
Usage:
[-atmif] <AtmIf>

AtmIf

[-vpi] <integer>

VPI

[-type] (orig|term)

Direction

[[-reservedbw] <Kbps>]

Reserved Bandwidth

[[-maxvci] <integer>]

Max VCI

[[-cbr] (none|default|qosext_index)]

CBR

[[-rtvbr] (none|default|qosext_index)]

RtVBR

[[-nrtvbr] (none|default|qosext_index)]

NrtVBR

[[-abr] (none|default|qosext_index)]

ABR

[[-ubr] (none|default|qosext_index)]

UBR

These parameters are defined in Section 3.5.1.3.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

3 - 25

Connections Commands

3.5.1.3 connections path term new


This command lets you create a new virtual path terminator. Enter the following parameters:
myswitch:connections path term-> new
Usage:
[-atmif] <AtmIf>

AtmIf

[-vpi] <integer>

VPI

[[-type] (orig|term)]

Direction

[[-reservedbw] <Kbps>]

Reserved Bandwidth

[[-minvci] <integer>]

Min VCI (default: 1)

[[-maxvci] <integer>]

Max VCI (default: 511)

[[-trafficsvpi] <integer>]

Traffic Shape VPI

[[-loopvpi] <integer>]

Loop VPI

[[-nrtvbrob] <percent>]

nrtVBR Overbooking

[[-nrtvbrbob] <percent>]

nrtVBR Buffer Overbooking

[[-rtvbrob] <percent>]

rtVBR Overbooking

[[-rtvbrbob] <percent>]

rtVBR Buffer Overbooking

[[-shaping] (flat|shaped|shaped-roundrobin)]

Originating Path Shaping


(default: flat)

[[-cbr] (none|default|qosext_index)]

CBR

[[-rtvbr] (none|default|qosext_index)]

RtVBR

[[-nrtvbr] (none|default|qosext_index)]

NrtVBR

[[-abr] (none|default|qosext_index)]

ABR

[[-ubr] (none|default|qosext_index)]

UBR

These parameters are defined as follows:


Parameter

Description

-atmif <AtmIf>

The ATM interface number for this vpt.

-vpi <integer>

The path number for this vpt.

-type (orig|term)

orig specifies that the vpt to be created is an originating path.


term specifies that the vpt to be created is a terminating path.

-reservedbw <Kbps>

The amount of bandwidth, in Kbps, that is reserved on this vpt. If this parameter is not
used, an elastic path is created. Elastic paths allocate and de-allocate bandwidth for their
channels from the link. This is the rate to which a path will be shaped on a Series 2 port
card, if the shaping mode is shaped or shaped-roundrobin.

-allocbw <Kbps>

The amount of bandwidth, in Kbps, that is being used by the virtual channels using this
vpt.

-minvci <integer>

The bottom number for the range of VCIs to be reserved for VCCs on this vpt. The default
is 1.

3 - 26

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Connections Commands

Parameter
1

Description

-maxvci <integer>

The top number for the range of VCIs to be reserved for VCCs on this vpt. The default is
511. If the maxvci is modified for the control port and SVx call preservation is enabled,
then the standby SCP must be rebooted as well. After the master SCP reboots and the CDB
is synced, then the standby SCP must be reset for this change to function properly.

-trafficsvpi <integer>2

The output port of a traffic shaping originating vpt. Setting this value configures traffic
shaping on the originating path. Cells bound for the network leave the traffic shaping port
with this VPI. When the traffic shaping port is the WAN port, this value equals the input
VPI of the originating path. If the traffic shaping port is not the WAN port, this value
equals the input VPI of the through path from the shaping port to the WAN port. The
-trafficsvpi parameter only applies to the Series C network modules.

-loopvpi <integer>

The originating vpi will be shaped by a through path going to a Series D network module.
You should enter the input vpi of the through path that goes from the looping port to the
WAN port. This parameter is also used when creating the through path that connects from
the WAN port to the looping port. The through path loopvpi should be the same vpi as the
terminating path on the looping port. See Chapter 1 of the Multiservice Broadband Switch
Network Configuration Manual for an example of this feature.

-nrtvbrob <percent>

The percentage of bandwidth overbooking for nrtVBR connections on this originating


path. Enter an integer value from 1 to 32,767. The default is 100, which means that no
overbooking has been defined. Values less than 100 cause underbooking. Values greater
than 100 cause overbooking.
Overbooking cannot be specified on an elastic path. Therefore, you can only specify an
overbooking factor for an originating path when you also have reserved bandwidth for
the path (i.e., specified the -reservedbw <Kbps> parameter).

-nrtvbrbob <percent>

The percentage of buffer overbooking for nrtVBR connections on this originating path.
Enter an integer value from 1 to 32,767. The default is 100, which means that no
overbooking has been defined. Values less than 100 cause underbooking. Values greater
than 100 cause overbooking.
Overbooking cannot be specified on an elastic path. Therefore, you can only specify an
overbooking factor for an originating path when you also have reserved bandwidth for
the path (i.e., specified the -reservedbw <Kbps> parameter).
The percentage of bandwidth overbooking for rtVBR connections on this originating path.
Enter an integer value from 1 to 32,767. The default is 100, which means that no
overbooking has been defined. Values less than 100 cause underbooking. Values greater
than 100 cause overbooking.
Overbooking cannot be specified on an elastic path. Therefore, you can only specify an
overbooking factor for an originating path when you also have reserved bandwidth for
the path (i.e., specified the -reservedbw <Kbps> parameter).
On Series C, LC, LE, and D network modules, CBR and rtVBR traffic share a queue.
Therefore, configuring overbooking on rtVBR traffic may increase the CDV of the CBR
traffic or may cause the CBR traffic to be dropped due to bursty rtVBR traffic on these
types of network modules.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

3 - 27

Connections
Commands

-rtvbrob <percent>

Connections Commands

Parameter
-rtvbrbob <percent>

Description
The percentage of buffer overbooking for rtVBR connections on this originating path.
Enter an integer value from 1 to 32,767. The default is 100, which means that no
overbooking has been defined. Values less than 100 cause underbooking. Values greater
than 100 cause overbooking.
Overbooking cannot be specified on an elastic path. Therefore, you can only specify an
overbooking factor for an originating path when you also have reserved bandwidth for
the path (i.e., specified the -reservedbw <Kbps> parameter).
On Series C, LC, LE, and D network modules, CBR and rtVBR traffic share a queue.
Therefore, configuring overbooking on rtVBR traffic may increase the CDV of the CBR
traffic or may cause the CBR traffic to be dropped due to bursty rtVBR traffic on these
types of network modules.

-shaping (flat|shaped|
shaped-roundrobin)

The -shaping parameter only applies to originating paths on Series D or Series E


network modules or to originating paths on the Series 2 port cards in an ASX-4000 switch.
flat means there is no path level shaping. All elastic VPTs are flat. Individual
connections can still be shaped using a UPC contract. The default is flat.
shaped means the individual VCCs can be serviced by any scheduling mode.
shaped-roundrobin means the individual VCCs on this VPT are only serviced by the
roundrobin scheduling mode.

-cbr (none|default|
qosext_index)

none means the specified class of service is not supported.


default means the default parameters of 0 CTD, 0 CDV, and 0 CLR are to be used for this
class of service.
qosext_index means the index number of the set of QoS extension parameters found in
the Index field under connections qosext show. The index must exist before it can be
applied to a VPT.

-rtvbr (none|default|
qosext_index)

none means the specified class of service is not supported.


default means the default parameters of 0 CTD, 0 CDV, and 0 CLR are to be used for this
class of service.
qosext_index means the index number of the set of QoS extension parameters found in
the Index field under connections qosext show. The index must exist before it can be
applied to a VPT.

-nrtvbr (none|default|
qosext_index)

none means the specified class of service is not supported.


default means the default parameters of 0 CTD, 0 CDV, and 0 CLR are to be used for this
class of service.
qosext_index means the index number of the set of QoS extension parameters found in
the Index field under connections qosext show. The index must exist before it can be
applied to a VPT.

-abr (none|default|
qosext_index) 3

none means the specified class of service is not supported.


default means the default parameters of 0 CTD, 0 CDV, and 0 CLR are to be used for this
class of service.
qosext_index means the index number of the set of QoS extension parameters found in
the Index field under connections qosext show. The index must exist before it can be
applied to a VPT.

3 - 28

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Connections Commands

Parameter
-ubr (none|default|
qosext_index)

Description
none means the specified class of service is not supported.
default means the default parameters of 0 CTD, 0 CDV, and 0 CLR are to be used for this
class of service.
qosext_index means the index number of the set of QoS extension parameters found in
the Index field under connections qosext show. The index must exist before it can be
applied to a VPT.

1.

In the new command, the -maxvci parameter can be used for any VPT. In the modify command, it is only used on the
control port.

2.

If you want to shape traffic on more than two ports on a given network module, it is recommended that you set the
traffic memory model to 5 for Series C network modules using hardware netmod traffic c modify -model.

3.

The channelized OC-3 port card does not support ABR traffic.

Connections
Commands

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

3 - 29

Connections Commands

3.5.1.4 connections path term show


This command lets you display virtual path terminators for all of the ports on a switch fabric.
Enter the following parameters:
myswitch:connections path term-> show
AtmIf

VPI

Type

ResBW

CurBW

MinVCI

MaxVCI VCs

Protocol

1B1

term

N/A

0.8K

511

pvc

1B1

orig

N/A

0.8K

511

pvc

1B2

term

N/A

0.8K

511

pvc

1B2

orig

N/A

0.8K

511

pvc

1B3

term

N/A

0.8K

511

pvc

1B3

orig

N/A

0.8K

511

pvc

1B4

term

N/A

0.8K

511

pvc

1B4

orig

N/A

0.8K

511

pvc

1CTL

term

N/A

0.0K

1023

19

pvc

1CTL

orig

N/A

0.0K

1023

18

pvc

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Field

Description

AtmIf

The incoming ATM interface number of the vpt.

VPI

The incoming or outgoing virtual path number.

Type

Shows orig if it is an originating path.


Shows term if it is a terminating path.

ResBW

The maximum amount of bandwidth, in Kbps, that is reserved for the virtual channels
using this vpt.
A value of N/A indicates that this path is an elastic path. Elastic paths allocate and deallocate bandwidth for their channels from the link.

CurBW

The amount of bandwidth, in Kbps, that is being used by the virtual channels using this
vpt.

MinVCI

The bottom number for the range of VCIs that are reserved for VCCs on this virtual path
terminator.

MaxVCI

The top number for the range of VCIs that are reserved for VCCs on this virtual path
terminator. Also, this is the maximum VCI number to be supported on the control port.

VCs

The number of virtual channels that are currently using this vpt.

Protocol

The type of protocol running on this channel.

3 - 30

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Connections Commands

3.5.1.4.1

connections path term show -advanced

To list all of the advanced options about all of the existing virtual path terminators, enter the
following parameters:
myswitch:connections path term-> show -advanced
AtmIf

VPI

Type

ShapeVPI LoopVPI Shaping

1B1

term

N/A

1B1

orig

1B2

term

1B2

orig

1B3

term

1B3

orig

1B4

term

1B4

orig

1CTL

term

1CTL

orig

N/A

N/A
flat

N/A

N/A

N/A
flat

N/A

N/A

N/A
flat

N/A

N/A

N/A
flat

N/A

N/A

N/A
flat

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Field

Description

AtmIf

The incoming ATM interface number of the vpt.

VPI

The incoming or outgoing virtual path number.

Type

Shows orig if it is an originating path.


Shows term if it is a terminating path.

ShapeVPI

Shows the output port on which traffic shaping has been enabled for this originating vpt.
This only applies to Series C network modules.
N/A means that shaping has not been configured on this port.

LoopVPI

N/A means that looping has not been configured on this port.
Shaping

This parameter only applies to originating paths on Series D or Series E network modules,
or to originating paths on Series 2 port cards in an ASX-4000 switch.
flat means there is no path level shaping. All elastic VPTs are flat. Individual
connections can still be shaped using a UPC contract. The default is flat.
shaped means the individual VCCs can be serviced by any scheduling mode.
shaped-roundrobin means the individual VCCs on this VPT are only serviced by
the roundrobin scheduling mode.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

3 - 31

Connections
Commands

Shows the looping ATM interface that has been configured to loop traffic on that port for
shaping on a Series D port.

Connections Commands

3.5.1.4.2

connections path term show -overbooking

To display overbooking information about virtual path terminators, enter the following:
myswitch:connections path term-> show -overbooking
nrtVBR

rtVBR

AtmIf

VPI

OB

BuffOB

OB

BuffOB

1B1

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

1B1

port

port

port

port

1B2

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

1B2

port

port

port

port

1B3

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

1B3

port

port

port

port

Press q to quit, any other key to continue... q

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Field

Description

AtmIf

The incoming ATM interface number of the vpt.

VPI

The incoming or outgoing virtual path number.

nrtVBR OB

The percentage of bandwidth overbooking for nrtVBR connections on this originating


path. A value of 100 means that no overbooking has been defined. Values less than 100
denote underbooking. Values greater than 100 denote overbooking.
port means this is an elastic path. Since elastic paths derive their overbooking factors
from their parent ports, use interfaces atmif overbooking show to display the
overbooking value.

nrtVBR BuffOB

The percentage of buffer overbooking for nrtVBR connections on this originating path. A
value of 100 means that no overbooking has been defined. Values less than 100 denote
underbooking. Values greater than 100 denote overbooking.
port means this is an elastic path. Since elastic paths derive their overbooking factors
from their parent ports, use interfaces atmif overbooking show to display the
overbooking value.

rtVBR OB

The percentage of bandwidth overbooking for rtVBR connections on this originating path.
A value of 100 means that no overbooking has been defined. Values less than 100 denote
underbooking. Values greater than 100 denote overbooking.
port means this is an elastic path. Since elastic paths derive their overbooking factors
from their parent ports, use interfaces atmif overbooking show to display the
overbooking value.

rtVBR BuffOB

The percentage of buffer overbooking for rtVBR connections on this originating path. A
value of 100 means that no overbooking has been defined. Values less than 100 denote
underbooking. Values greater than 100 denote overbooking.
port means this is an elastic path. Since elastic paths derive their overbooking factors
from their parent ports, use interfaces atmif overbooking show to display the
overbooking value.

3 - 32

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Connections Commands

3.5.1.4.3

connections path term show -qosext

To display QoS extension parameter information about virtual path terminators, enter the
following parameters:
myswitch:connections path term-> show -qosext
AtmIf

VPI

Type

Cbr

RtVbr

NrtVbr

Abr

Ubr

1B1

term

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

1B1

orig

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

1B2

term

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

1B2

orig

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

1B3

term

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

1B3

orig

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

1B4

term

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

1B4

orig

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

1CTL

term

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

1CTL

orig

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

Press q to quit, any other key to continue... q

The fields in the qosext display are defined as follows:


Field

Description
The ATM interface number.

VPI

The virtual path number.

Type

Shows orig if it is an originating path. Shows term if it is a terminating path.

Cbr

Shows the path QoS metric information for CBR service.

RtVbr

Shows the path QoS metric information for rtVBR service.

NrtVbr

Shows the path QoS metric information for nrtVBR service.

Abr

Shows the path QoS metric information for ABR service.

Ubr

Shows the path QoS metric information for UBR service.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Connections
Commands

AtmIf

3 - 33

Connections Commands

3.5.1.4.4

connections path term show -stats

You can display virtual path terminator statistics and fabric path counters. Fabric path
counters record the number of CAC (Connection Admission Control) failures, VPI allocation
failures, VCI allocation failures, and connection setup errors for each path. Each path counter
only records errors that occurred on that path. The counters are direction specific, meaning
that errors that occurred on the input side are differentiated from errors that occurred on the
output side. Enter the following parameters:
myswitch:connections path term-> show -stats
Cells

Cells

Received

Rejected

CAC

00:16

338

N/A

term

00:16

orig

00:16

338

N/A

term

00:16

1B3

orig

00:16

338

N/A

1B4

term

00:16

1B4

orig

00:16

571

N/A

1CTL

term

00:16

7262

1CTL

orig

00:16

N/A

AtmIf

VPI

Type

Uptime

1B1

term

00:16

1B1

orig

1B2

1B2
1B3

F a i l u r e s
VCI Setup
0

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Field

Description

AtmIf

The ATM interface number.

VPI

The virtual path number.

Type

Shows orig if it is an originating path. Shows term if it is a terminating path.

Uptime

The length of time that this virtual path has been in its current state.

Cells Received

The total (aggregate) number of cells that were transferred over this path.

Cells Rejected

The total (aggregate) number of cells over this path that were rejected (dropped) by the
hardware due to a traffic policing violation. This does not include any cells that may have
been tagged with CLP=1 by the policer, only cells that were discarded.

Failures CAC

The number of CAC failures on this path. this counter. This counter currently does not
increment since CAC is not performed on the input side. (CAC is only performed on the
output side.)

Failures VCI

The number of VCI allocation failures on this path. These failures occur when an input
VCI cannot be allocated because the VCI is already in use, because the VCI is out of range,
or because no more VCIs are available for allocation on the path.

Failures Setup

The number of connection setup failures on this path. These failures occur if the
connection cannot be set up on the fabric because the output network module cannot
support the connection for various reasons, or because a connection ID cannot be allocated on an ASX-1000 fabric, ASX-1200 fabric, or TNX-1100 fabric.

3 - 34

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Connections Commands

3.5.2

connections path through

These commands let you configure Permanent Virtual Paths (PVPs), which are also called
Virtual Path Connections (VPCs), or through paths. You can display the list of available
subcommands by typing ? at the through level.
myswitch:connections path through-> ?
delete

Remove a through path

new

Create a new through path

outputstat

Display Connection Statistics for Output

show

Display through paths configuration

statistics

Display through path statistics

NOTE

Once a VPI is used for any point-to-multipoint


(PMP) connection, it cannot be used for any
connection on that fabric other than to add to a
PMP connection.

Connections
Commands

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

3 - 35

Connections Commands

3.5.2.1 connections path through delete


This command lets you delete an existing virtual through path or an active point-to-point SVP.
The deletion of an SVP will send a release to both endpoints of the call.
Prior to using this command to delete SVPs, you
may need to perform other administrative
actions to prevent call re-establishment between
the affected parties.

NOTE

myswitch:connections path through-> delete


Usage:
[-iatmif] <AtmIf>

Input Port

[-ivpi] <integer>

Input VPI

[-oatmif] <AtmIf>

Output Port

[-ovpi] <integer>

Output VPI

[[-allocbw] <Kbps>]

Allocated Bandwidth

[[-sigprotocol] <path_sigprotocol>]

Signaling Protocol

[[-upc] <UPC Index>]

UPC Index

[[-loopvpi] <integer>]

Loop VPI

[[-name] <text>]

Name

[[-ctype] <connection_type>]

Connection Type

[[-servcat] <ServCat>]

Service Category

These parameters are defined in Section 3.5.2.2.

3.5.2.2 connections path through new


This command lets you create a virtual through path as follows:
myswitch:connections path through-> new
Usage:
[-iatmif] <AtmIf>

Input Port

[-ivpi] <integer>

Input VPI

[-oatmif] <AtmIf>

Output Port

[-ovpi] <integer>

Output VPI

[[-upc] <UPC Index>]

UPC Index (default: 0)

[[-loopvpi] <integer>]

Loop VPI

[[-name] <text>]

Name

[[-ctype] <connection_type>]

Connection Type

3 - 36

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Connections Commands

The parameters for delete and new are defined as follows:


Parameter

Description

-iatmif <AtmIf>

The incoming ATM interface number.

-ivpi <integer>

The incoming virtual path number.1

-oatmif <AtmIf>

The outgoing ATM interface number.

-ovpi <integer>

The outgoing virtual path number.

-allocbw <Kbps>

The amount of bandwidth that you want to reserve on this path, in Kbps.

-sigprotocol
<path_sigprotocol>

The type of signalling protocol running on this channel.

-upc <UPC Index>

The integer index that refers to a specific UPC traffic contract. If no index is specified, then
no traffic policing will take place on this VPI. It is assigned a default UPC index of 0, and
all traffic on this VPI is treated as UBR traffic.

-loopvpi <integer>

This parameter is used to perform shaping. The originating vpi is shaped by a through
path going to a Series D network module. Enter the receive vpi of the through path that
goes from the looping port to the WAN port. This parameter is also used to create the
through path that connects from the WAN port to the looping port. The through path
loopvpi should be the same VPI as the terminating path on the looping port. See Chapter 1
of the Multiservice Broadband Switch Network Configuration Manual for an example of this
feature.

-name <text>

The name you want to assign to this through path to help identify it uniquely. It is most
useful for billing purposes so you can identify which paths are being used by which
customers. Can be up to 32 ASCII characters long.

-ctype <connection_type>

The path connection type. For billing purposes, it denotes on which switch this path is
arriving. Valid entries are a combination of the following parameters (e.g., thru-term-pmp
or orig-term-mpp, etc.):
orig (originating) means that the ingress endpoint of the path is connected to the
source node which is outside the network.

term (terminating) means that the ingress endpoint of the path is connected to the
destination node which is outside the network.
pp means this is a point-to-point path.
pmp means this is a point-to-multipoint path.
mpp means this is a multipoint-to-point path.
mpmp means this is a multipoint-to-multipoint path.
NOTE: By indicating pp, pmp, mpp, or mpmp, you are only assigning a label for record
keeping purposes. The switch does not necessarily create the type of path you have
specified. If you assign a connection type, but do not assign a pp, pmp, mpp, or mpmp label,
the switch assigns a label of pp (point-to-point).
1.

The valid range of incoming and outgoing VPIs is 0 - 1022 (1023 is used for multicast). However, Series D E3 and DS3
network modules can only use VPIs 0 - 510 (511 is used for multicast).

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

3 - 37

Connections
Commands

thru (through) means that the ingress endpoint of the path is connected to a node
within the network.

Connections Commands

3.5.2.3 connections path through outputstat


You can also display virtual path traffic statistics for individual network modules. The fields
that are displayed vary depending on the type of network module on which the connections
are output.
This command does not apply to Series C network modules. If the connections are output on a
Series D network module, then the display will vary depending on whether or not the module
packet counter is disabled. Enter the following:
myswitch:connections path through-> outputstat
Input

Output

C e l l s

AtmIf

VPI

AtmIf

VPI

Transmitted

1A2

40

1C2

Lost

40

N/A

1C2

40

1A2

N/A

40

The fields in these displays are defined as follows:


Field

Description

Input AtmIf

The incoming ATM interface number.

Input VPI

The incoming virtual path number.

Output AtmIf

The outgoing ATM interface number.

Output VPI

The outgoing virtual path number.

Cells Transmitted

The number of cells that were transmitted on this path.

Cells Lost

The number of cells dropped on this path due to EPD (Early Packet Discard).

3 - 38

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Connections Commands

3.5.2.3.1

connections path through outputstat -advanced

You can display advanced statistics as follows:


myswitch:connections path through-> outputstat -advanced
Input

Output

Cells

Transmitted

C e l l s

L o s t

AtmIf

VPI

AtmIf

VPI

C L P 0

C L P 1

Intentional Unintentional

1A2

40

1C2

40

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

1C2

40

1A2

40

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Field

Description

Input AtmIf

The incoming ATM interface number.

Input VPI

The incoming virtual path number.

Output AtmIf

The outgoing ATM interface number.

Output VPI

The outgoing virtual path number.

Cells Transmitted CLP0

The number of CLP=0 cells that were transmitted on this path.

Cells Transmitted CLP1

The number of CLP=1 cells that were transmitted on this path.

CellsLost Intentional

The number of cells dropped on this path due to PPD (Partial Packet Discard).

CellsLost Unintentional

The number of cells dropped on this path due to output memory shortages or the
per-port/per-priority CLP (Cell Loss Priority) thresholds.

Connections
Commands

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

3 - 39

Connections Commands

3.5.2.3.2

connections path through outputstat -packets

You can display advanced statistics as follows:


myswitch:connections path through-> outputstat -packets
Input

Output

P a c k e t s

AtmIf

VPI

AtmIf

VPI

Transmitted

1A2

40

1C2

Lost

40

N/A

1C2

40

1A2

N/A

40

N/A

N/A

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Field

Description

Input AtmIf

The incoming ATM interface number.

Input VPI

The incoming virtual path number.

Output AtmIf

The outgoing ATM interface number.

Output VPI

The outgoing virtual path number.

Packets Transmitted

The number of transmitted packets on this path.

Packets Lost

The number of packets lost on this path.

3 - 40

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Connections Commands

3.5.2.4 connections path through show


This command lets you display existing virtual through paths on an individual switch fabric.
Enter the following parameters:
myswitch:connections path through-> show
Input

Output

AtmIf

VPI

AtmIf

VPI

AllocBW Serv

Protocol Name

Categy
1A1

1A1

0.0K

UBR

pvc

N/A

1A1

1A1

0.0K

UBR

pvc

N/A

1A1

1A1

0.0K

UBR

pvc

N/A

1A1

1A1

0.0K

UBR

pvc

N/A

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Field

Description

AllocBW

The amount of bandwidth reserved on this path, in Kbps.

Input AtmIf

The incoming ATM interface number of the through path.

Input VPI

The incoming virtual path number.

Output AtmIf

The outgoing ATM interface number of the through path.

Output VPI

The outgoing virtual path number.

AllocBW

The amount of bandwidth reserved on this path, in Kbps.

Serv Categy

The traffic type on this virtual path.

Protocol

The type of protocol running on this path.

Name

The user-assigned name which helps to identify this through path uniquely.

Connections
Commands

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

3 - 41

Connections Commands

3.5.2.4.1

connections path through show -advanced

To list advanced information about the existing virtual through paths, enter the following:
myswitch:connections path through-> show -advanced
Input

Output

AtmIf

VPI

AtmIf

VPI

UPC

ConType

1A1

1A1

LoopVPI

N/A

1A1

1A1

N/A

1A1

1A1

N/A

1A1

1A1

N/A

The fields in this are defined as follows:


Field

Description

Input AtmIf

The incoming ATM interface number of the through path.

Input VPI

The incoming virtual path number.

Output AtmIf

The outgoing ATM interface number of the through path.

Output VPI

The outgoing virtual path number.

LoopVPI

Indicates whether or not traffic shaping has been enabled for this path.

UPC

The integer index that refers to a specific traffic contract assigned to this through path.
UPC contracts can be displayed using connections upc show.

ConType

The connection type for the endpoints of this path with respect to a particular network.

3 - 42

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Connections Commands

3.5.2.5 connections path through statistics


You can display virtual path statistics as follows:
myswitch:connections path through-> statistics
Input

Output

AtmIf

VPI

AtmIf

Cells
VPI

Cells

Uptime

Received

Rejected

1A1

75

1B1

75

00:02

1B1

75

1A1

75

00:02

1B2

68

1C1

68

00:00

1C1

68

1B2

68

00:01

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Field

Description

Input AtmIf

The incoming ATM interface number.

Input VPI

The incoming virtual path number.

Output AtmIf

The outgoing ATM interface number.

Output VPI

The outgoing virtual path number.

Uptime

The length of time that this virtual path has been in its current state.

Cells Received

The total (aggregate) number of cells that were transferred over this path.

Cells Rejected

The total (aggregate) number of cells over this path that were rejected (dropped) by the
hardware due to a traffic policing violation. This does not include any cells that may have
been tagged with CLP=1 by the policer, only cells that were discarded.

Connections
Commands

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

3 - 43

Connections Commands

3.6 connections qos


These commands let you delete, create, or display information about Quality of Service (QOS)
entries in the QOS expansion table. The QOS expansion table is used for translating the QOS
class in an incoming connection setup request into parameterized QOS values for Cell
Transfer Delay (CTD), Cell Delay Variation (CDV), and Cell Loss Ratio (CLR). Please refer to
Section 6.5.2.3.5 of the ATM Forum PNNI Specification for more information.
Each entry in the expansion table is indexed by an index and a QOS class. The index is used
for associating entries in the expansion table with signalling interfaces. The table contains 5
default entries with an index of 0. When a new signalling interface is created, an expansion
table index will be associated with it. If no index is specified while creating the signalling
interface, the default entries with index 0 will be used to associate this signalling interface
with the QOS expansion table entries.
You can display the list of available subcommands by typing ? at the qos level.
myswitch:connections qos-> ?
delete

Remove a qos expansion entry

new

Create a new qos expansion entry

show

Display qos expansion configuration

3.6.1

connections qos delete

These commands let you delete an entry from the QOS expansion table. If a QOS expansion
table is currently being used by one or more signalling interfaces or originating SPVCs, then
the expansion entries in that table cannot be deleted. Also, the entries in the default QOS
expansion table (index 0) cannot be deleted.
myswitch:connections qos-> delete
Usage:
[-index] <integer>

Index

[-qosclass] <QoS Class>

QoS Class

[[-fwdctd] (integer|any_value)]

Fwd CTD (us)

[[-fwdcdv] (integer|any_value)]

Fwd CDV (us)

[[-backcdv] (integer|any_value)]

Back CDV (us)

[[-fwdclr] (integer|any_value)]

Fwd CLR

[[-backclr] (integer|any_value)]

Back CLR

[[-name] <text>]

Name

3 - 44

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Connections Commands

The parameters are defined in the same manner as for the connections qos show command
(see Section 3.6.3).

3.6.2

connections qos new

These commands let you add an entry to the QOS expansion table. If an expansion entry is
created without some of the values specified for some of the QOS classes, then it is assumed
that any value is acceptable for all the parameters. If such a partially specified QOS expansion
table is used to create a signalling interface or originating SPVC, then no new expansion
entries can be added to this table. You will be able to add the unspecified expansion entries
once all of the signalling interfaces and originating SPVCs referencing the partially specified
table are deleted.
myswitch:connections qos-> new
Usage:
[-index] <integer>

Index

[-qosclass] <QoS Class>

QoS Class

[[-fwdctd] (integer|any_value)]

Fwd CTD (us) (default: ANY_VAL)

[[-fwdcdv] (integer|any_value)]

Fwd CDV (us) (default: ANY_VAL)

[[-backcdv] (integer|any_value)]

Back CDV (us) (default: ANY_VAL)

[[-fwdclr] (integer|any_value)]

Fwd CLR (default: ANY_VAL)

[[-backclr] (integer|any_value)]

Back CLR (default: ANY_VAL)

[[-name] <text>]

Name (default: )

The parameters are defined in the same manner as for the connections qos show command
(see Section 3.6.3).

Connections
Commands

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

3 - 45

Connections Commands

3.6.3

connections qos show

These commands let you display the entries in the QOS expansion table.
myswitch:connections qos-> show
Index Class

fCtd(us)

fCdv(us)

bCdv(us)

fClr

class0

ANY_VAL

ANY_VAL

ANY_VAL

ANY_VAL

ANY_VAL def_class_0_expn

bClr Name

class1

ANY_VAL

ANY_VAL

ANY_VAL

ANY_VAL

ANY_VAL def_class_1_expn

class2

ANY_VAL

ANY_VAL

ANY_VAL

ANY_VAL

ANY_VAL def_class_2_expn

class3

ANY_VAL

ANY_VAL

ANY_VAL

ANY_VAL

ANY_VAL def_class_3_expn

class4

ANY_VAL

ANY_VAL

ANY_VAL

ANY_VAL

ANY_VAL def_class_4_expn

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Field

Description

Index

The index into the QOS expansion table that is used to associate signalling interfaces with
expansion table entries.

Class

Specifies the QOS class that is to be expanded into parameterized QOS IEs. Can have a
value of 0 to 4.

fCtd(us)

The maximum acceptable forward CTD value to be used for this expansion. Can range
from 0 to 16777215 microseconds. any_value means that any amount of cell transfer
delay is acceptable.

fCdv(us)

The maximum acceptable forward CDV value to be used for this expansion. Can range
from 0 to 16777215 microseconds. any_value means that any amount of cell delay
variation is acceptable.

bCdv(us)

The maximum acceptable backward CDV value to be used for this expansion. Can range
from 0 to 16777215 microseconds. any_value means any amount of cell delay variation is
acceptable.

fClr

The maximum acceptable forward CLR value to be used for this expansion. Can range
from 1 to 15. A CLR value of x means 10-x; e.g., 5 means 10-5. any_value means that any
amount of cell loss is acceptable.

bClr

The maximum acceptable backward CLR value to be used for this expansion. Can range
from 1 to 15. A CLR value of x means 10-x; e.g., 5 means 10-5. any_value means that any
amount of cell loss is acceptable.

Name

An optional text string associated with this entry to help you identify it.

3 - 46

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Connections Commands

3.7 connections qosext


These commands let you delete, create, or display information about Quality of Service (QOS)
extension table entries. The QOS extension table is used to hold a set of QOS parameters of
maxctd, maxcdv, and maxclr. When creating a VPT using the connections path term new
command, the external QOS contribution of an originating/terminating path for a certain
traffic type can be specified by an index pointing to this table. You can display the list of
available subcommands by typing ? at the qosext level.
myswitch:connections qosext-> ?
delete

Remove a qos extension entry

modify

Modify a qos extension entry

new

Create a new qos extension entry

show

Display qos extension configuration

3.7.1

connections qosext delete

This command allows you to delete a QOS extension table entry.


myswitch:connections qosext-> delete
Usage:
[-index] <integer>

Index

[[-maxctd] <integer>]

Max CTD (us)

[[-maxcdv] <integer>]

Max CDV (us)

[[-maxclr] <integer>]

Max CLR (us)

3.7.2

connections qosext modify

This command allows you to modify a set of QOS extension table entry.
myswitch:connections qosext-> modify
Usage:
[-index] <integer>

Index

[[-maxctd] <integer>]

Max CTD (us)

[[-maxcdv] <integer>]

Max CDV (us)

[[-maxclr] <integer>]

Max CLR (us)

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

3 - 47

Connections
Commands

The parameters are defined in the same manner as for the connections qosext show (see
Section 3.7.4).

Connections Commands

The parameters are defined in the same manner as for the connections qosext show (see
Section 3.7.4).

3.7.3

connections qosext new

This command lets you create a set of QOS extension table entry.
myswitch:connections qosext-> new
Usage:
[-index] <integer>

Index

[-maxctd] <integer>

Max CTD (us)

[-maxcdv] <integer>

Max CDV (us)

[-maxclr] <integer>

Max CLR (us)

The parameters are defined in the same manner as for the connections qosext show (see
Section 3.7.4).

3.7.4

connections qosext show

This command allows you to display the QOS extension table.


myswitch:connections qosext-> show
Index

MaxCtd MaxCdv MaxClr


(usec) (usec)

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

The fields are defined as follows:


Field

Description

Index

The index number of the set of QOS extension parameters.

MaxCtd (usec)

The maximum cell transfer delay, in microseconds.

MaxCdv (usec)

The maximum cell delay variation, in microseconds.

MaxClr

The maximum cell loss ratio.

3 - 48

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Connections Commands

3.8 connections spvcc


These commands allow you to configure Smart Permanent Virtual Circuit Connections
(SPVCCs, hereafter referred to as SPVCs), which includes ATM Forum PNNI point-to-point
(PP) or point-to-multipoint (PMP) SPVCs. An SPVC is a connection that goes across multiple
switch fabrics. An SPVC looks like a PVC at the local and remote endpoints with an SVC in the
middle. SPVCs are more robust than PVCs. If a link carrying a PVC goes down, then the PVC
goes down. If a link carrying an SPVC goes down and there is an alternate route, then the end
switch fabrics of the SPVC automatically reroute the SPVC around the failed link.
Unlike the SPANS SPVCs, PNNI SPVCs are inherently bidirectional, which means that a
single signalling call establishes the circuits in both directions. Although PNNI SPVCs are
bidirectional, the endpoint that initiates the call setup is the source (originating) and the other
endpoint is the destination (terminating or party).
Type ? at the spvcc level to display the list of available subcommands.
myswitch:connections spvcc-> ?
parameters

Display/Modify PNNI SPVCC parameters

pmp>

The pmp directory

pp>

The pp directory

spans>

The spans directory

3.8.1

connections spvcc parameters

This command allows you to display and/or modify certain PNNI SPVC parameters. To
display the configuration, enter the following:
Connections
Commands

myswitch:connections spvcc -> parameters


Pace Interval (millisecs):

2000

Pace Calls/Interval:

20

Reroute Interval (millisecs):

10000

Reroute Calls/Interval:

20

Reroute Threshold:

50%

Lowest Priority:

10

Default UBR Bandwidth:

DTL Backoff Interval (secs):

600

Traps Sent for spvcc: reroute


Party Pace Calls/Interval:

10

To modify the parameters, enter the following:

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

3 - 49

Connections Commands

myswitch:connections spvcc -> parameters ?


[[-paceinterval] <integer>]

Pace Interval (millisecs)

[[-pacenumspvcs] <integer>]

Pace Calls/Interval

[[-rerouteinterval] <integer>]

Reroute Interval (millisecs)

[[-reroutenumspvcs] <integer>]

Reroute Calls/Interval

[[-reroutethreshold] <percent>]

Reroute Threshold

[[-lowestpriority] <integer>]

Lowest Priority

[[-defaultubrbandwidth] <integer>]

Default UBR Bandwidth

[[-backoffinterval] <integer>]

DTL Backoff Interval (secs)

[[-trapmode] <spvcc_traps>]

Traps Sent for spvcc

[[-partypacenum] <integer>]

Party Pace Calls/Interval

The parameters are defined as follows:


Parameter

Description

-paceinterval <integer>

The interval, in milliseconds, between call setup attempts. Values can be from 50 to
300,000 ms. The least significant millisecond value is rounded off. For example a value of
6,788 is converted to 6,780. The default is 2,000 ms. If there are a large number of SPVCs
originating from this switch, setting a low pacing interval and a high pacing number may
put excessive load on the switch. Use caution when configuring a very low pacing interval
and a very high pacing number. A pacing interval that is considered low and a pacing
number that is considered high depends on your switchs performance numbers (call
setups/second). See the Installation and Maintenance Manual for your switch for
performance specifications.

-pacenumspvcs <integer>

The number of SPVCs which can be set up at one time during an attempt. Values can be
from 1 to 1000. The default is 20 calls.

-rerouteinterval <integer>

The time interval, in milliseconds between successive callbacks to the SPVC controller to
check for and reroute existing SPVC connections if a better path becomes available. The
least significant millisecond value is rounded off. For example, a value of 6,788 is
converted to 6,780. The default is 10,000 ms. The range of values is 50 to 3,600,000
ms, inclusive.

-reroutenumspvcs <integer> Indicates how many SPVCs that are up, per interval, will be analyzed to determine
whether or not those SPVCs need to be rerouted. The default is 20 SPVCs. The range of
valid values is 1 to 1000, inclusive.
-reroutethreshold <percent>

The minimum percentage improvement in the cost that the new SPVC path must have
over the current SPVC path before a reroute is performed. The default value is 50 percent.
The range of valid values is 1 to 99, inclusive.

-lowestpriority <integer>

The value that you want to be the lowest value (last tried and least often tried) when
determining the order in which and the frequency with which SPVCs are tried for a
connection. This value cannot be less than the priority of an existing SPVC and it cannot
be greater than 100. The default is 10.

-defaultubrbandwidth
<integer>

The default estimated bandwidth value, in kilocells per second, to be used when
calculating load-balanced UBR routing. The value must be an integer from 0 to 65534. The
default is 1 kcps (0.424 Mbps).

3 - 50

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Connections Commands

Parameter
-backoffinterval <integer>

Description
If the back-off mechanism is enabled under connections spvcc pp new, directed DTLs
that fail will be off for the amount of time specified here before they are tried again. This
back-off interval allows the network to stabilize before attempting the failed DTL again.
The amount of time, in seconds, that failed directed DTLs should be held before they are
tried again. This value is used by all point-to-point SPVCs that have the back-off mechanism
enabled. (It is enabled by default.) The value must be an integer from 0 to 90,000 (0 - 25
hours). Entering a value of 0 disables the DTL back-off mechanism for all PNNI point-topoint SPVCs. The default is 600 seconds. If the back-off mechanism is enabled, directed
DTLs that fail will be off for the amount of time specified here before they are tried again.
This back-off interval allows the network to stabilize before attempting the failed DTL again.

-trapmode <spvcc_traps>

In previous ForeThought releases, an spvcRerouteInitiated trap (number 1090) is sent


whenever an SPVC is torn down and rerouted because a more optimal route has become
available. This command gives you more flexibility to configure which trap(s) should be
sent, on a per-switch basis, when an SPVC is set up or torn down. reroute indicates an
spvcRerouteInitiated trap will be sent when an SPVC is torn down because a better
route has become available or because a network failure has occurred. This is the default.
failure indicates a pnniSpvccFail trap will be sent if a call cannot be established after
16 consecutive attempts. A pnniSpvccUp trap is sent if a call is established that has
previously sent a pnniSpvccFail trap. all indicates a pnniSpvccDown trap will be
sent (instead of the spvcRerouteInitiated trap) when an SPVC is torn down because
a better route has become available or because a network failure has occurred. A
pnniSpvccFail trap is sent if a call cannot be established after 16 consecutive attempts.
A pnniSpvccUp trap is sent when a call is established.
none indicates no SPVC traps will be sent.

-partypacenum <integer>

The number of parties within a PMP SPVC which can be set up at one time during an
attempt. The default is 10 parties. This value should not exceed the -pacenumspvcs
value since this will overload the switch.

Connections
Commands

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

3 - 51

Connections Commands

3.8.2

connections spvcc pmp

These commands allow you to configure PNNI (point-to-multipoint) PMP SPVCs. Type ? at
the pmp level to display the list of available subcommands.
myswitch:connections spvcc pmp-> ?
destparty

Display destination PNNI PMP Party SPVCCs

destroot

Display destination PNNI PMP Root SPVCCs

number

Display number of PNNI PMP SPVCCs

origination

Display Source PNNI PMP Root and Party


Information

party>

The party directory

root>

The root directory

termination

Display destination PNNI PMP Root and Party


Information

NOTE

3 - 52

Point-to-multipoint calls are always recorded as


a series of legs. If you have a PMP PVC from A to
B and from A to C, and a filter is applied to only
record PVCs that involve port A, then both legs
will be recorded. If the PMP PVC is from A to B
and from B to C, then the same filter would not
allow the B to C leg to be recorded.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Connections Commands

3.8.2.1 connections spvcc pmp destparty


This command lets you display destination PNNI point-to-multipoint SPVCs as follows:
myswitch:connections spvcc pmp-> destparty
SPVCCID PartyId AtmIf

VPI

VCI

State

UpTime

35

up

00:02

1A1

RGroupID
N/A

PartyNsapAddress: 0x47.0005.80.ffe100.0000.f21c.3965.0020480d0000.00
2

1A1

37

up

00:00

N/A

PartyNsapAddress: 0x47.0005.80.ffe100.0000.f21c.3965.0020480d0000.00

If there are no destination PNNI PMP SPVCs, the following displays:


myswitch:connections spvcc pmp-> destparty
No Destination PNNI PMP Party SPVCCs

The fields are defined as follows:


Field

Description
The index number assigned to this PNNI PMP SPVC by AMI to identify it uniquely from
other PNNI SPVCs that have this switch fabric as their source.

PartyId

The index number assigned to this party for the PMP SPVC.

AtmIf

The port identifier of the party.

VPI

The assigned virtual path number of the party.

VCI

The assigned virtual channel number of the party.

State

The current status of the party.

Uptime

If applicable, shows in HH:MM format, the number of days and time (in hundredths of a
second) since this PNNI PMP SPVC was created or the time since the last successful call
setup occurred.

RGroupID

The APS redundancy group ID.

PartyNSAPAddress

The NSAP ATM address of the PMP SPVC party.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

3 - 53

Connections
Commands

SPVCCID

Connections Commands

3.8.2.2 connections spvcc pmp destroot


This command lets you display destination PNNI point-to-multipoint root SPVCCs.
myswitch:connections spvcc pmp-> destroot
PMP

Bearer

Forward

SPVCCID

AtmIf

VPI

VCI

Class

Qos

Num Of
Parties

CLIP

179

32

classX

class0

no

RootNsapAddress: 0x47.0005.80.ffe100.0000.f21c.3950.0020480d00b3.00
2

179

33

classX

class0

no

RootNsapAddress: 0x47.0005.80.ffe100.0000.f21c.3950.0020480d00b3.00

The fields are defined as follows:


Field

Description

PMP SPVCCID

The index number assigned to this PNNI PMP SPVC by AMI to identify it uniquely from
other PNNI SPVCs that have this switch fabric as their source.

AtmIf

The port identifier of the party.

VPI

The assigned virtual path number of the party.

VCI

The assigned virtual channel number of the party.

Bearer Class

The broadband bearer class specified for this PNNI PMP SPVC. Can be classA, classC,
or classX.

Forward Qos

The requested QoS class for this PMP SPVC in the forward (calling to called) direction.
The default is class0.

Num of Parties

The number of parties in the PM SPVC that are currently active.

CLIP

Indicates whether the PNNI PMP SPVC is susceptible to clipping. Clipping is the loss of a
brief interval at the beginning of a speech spurt during speech transmission. no indicates
this PMP SPVC is not susceptible to clipping. yes indicates this PMP SPVC is susceptible
to clipping. The default is no.

RootNsapAddress

The NSAP ATM address of the root PMP SPVC.

3.8.2.3 connections spvcc pmp number


This command lets you display the number of configured originating and terminating PNNI
PMP SPVCCs.
myswitch:connections spvcc pmp-> number
Originating PNNI PMP SPVCCs

Terminating PNNI PMP SPVCCs

3 - 54

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Connections Commands

3.8.2.4 connections spvcc pmp origination


This command lets you display originating PNNI PMP root and party information.
myswitch:connections spvcc pmp-> origination
Root

Party

SPVCCID AtmIf

VPI

VCI

UPC

State

PartyId AtmIf VPI

VCI

State

35

down

N/A

down

4D1

114

N/A

PartySwitchPrefix: 47.000580ffe1000000f2b10510

These fields are defined as follows:


Field

Description
The index number assigned to this PNNI PMP SPVC by AMI to identify it uniquely from
other PNNI SPVCs that have this switch fabric as their source.

AtmIf

The port identifier on the originating switch fabric that contains the permanent portion for
this PNNI PMP SPVC.

Root VPI

The virtual path number used in the permanent portion of this PNNI PMP SPVC on the
originating switch fabric.

Root VCI

The virtual channel number in the permanent portion of this PNNI PMP SPVC on the
originating switch fabric.

Root UPC

The forward (going from the local switch fabric to the remote switch fabric) UPC contract
index associated with this PNNI PMP SPVC.

Root State

The operational state of this PMP SPVC. Can be up or down.

PartyId

The index number assigned to this party for the PMP SPVC.

Party AtmIf

The port identifier on the terminating switch fabric that contains the permanent portion
for this PNNI PMP SPVC, if the destination end is a Marconi switch. If the port at the
destination switch cannot be determined, a question mark (?) is displayed.

Party VPI

The virtual path number used in the permanent portion of this PNNI PMP SPVC on the
originating switch fabric. any means the user did not specify the VPI to be used at the
origination.

Party VCI

The virtual channel number used in the permanent portion of this PNNI PMP PVC on the
originating switch fabric. any means the user did not specify the VCI to be used at the
origination.

Party State

The operational state of the party. Can be up, down, or connecting

PartySwitchPrefix

The NSAP ATM Address of the PMP SPVC party.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

3 - 55

Connections
Commands

SPVCCID

Connections Commands

3.8.2.5 connections spvcc pmp party


These commands let you configure PNNI PMP parties. Type ? at the party level to display
the list of available subcommands.
myswitch:connections spvcc pmp party-> ?
delete

Delete a source PNNI PMP Party Smart Channel

modify

Modify party info of a PNNI PMP Party Smart


Channel

new

Create a new source PNNI PMP Party Smart Channel

reroute

Attempt Reroute for a party in a PNNI PMP Smart


Channel

show

3.8.2.5.1

Display source PNNI PMP Party spvcc

connections spvcc pmp party delete

This command lets you delete parties within an existing PNNI PMP SPVC.
myswitch:connections spvcc pmp party-> delete
Usage:
[-spvccid] <integer>

PMP SPVCCID

[-partyid] <integer>

Party ID

[[-atmaddr] <NSAP Address>]

Party NSAP Address

[[-vpi] <integer>]

Called VPI

[[-vci] <integer>]

Called VCI

[[-assignedvpi] <integer>]

VPI

[[-assignedvci] <integer>]

VCI

[[-vpvcsel] (noPref|require)]

VPVC Select

[[-state] <partystate>]

State

[[-name] <text>]

Party Name

[[-lastfailcause] <text>]

Last Failure Cause

[[-retrycount] <integer>]

Retry Count

[[-lastchangetime] <timeticks>]

Last Change Time

[[-reroutestatus] <reroutestatus>]

Reroute Status

[[-qosindex] <integer>]

QoS Exp Index

[[-lastlocation] <text>]

Last Fail Location

[[-autodtl] (enabled|disabled)]

Auto DTL

[[-downreason] <downReason>]

Down Reason

[[-routecost] <integer>]

Route Cost

NOTE

For a PMP PVC with multiple parties, deleting


one party does not automatically change the
point-to-multipoint to a point-to-point PVC.

The parameters are defined in the same manner as for the connections spvcc pmp party
new command (see Section 3.8.2.5.3).

3 - 56

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Connections Commands

3.8.2.5.2

connections spvcc pmp party modify

This command lets you modify party information for an existing PNNI PMP SPVC.
myswitch:connections spvcc pmp party-> modify
Usage:
[-spvccid] <integer>

PMP SPVCCID

[-partyid] <integer>

Party ID

[[-reroutestatus] <reroutestatus>]

Reroute Status

[[-autodtl] (enabled|disabled)]

Auto DTL

The parameters are defined in the same manner as for the connections spvcc pmp party
new command (see Section 3.8.2.5.3).
3.8.2.5.3

connections spvcc pmp party new

This command lets you add one or more parties to a PMP SPVC. Parties can be added without
affecting the data transfer to currently active parties within the existing PMP SPVC. The state
of a PMP SPVC changes to up upon successfully establishing a connection to at least one
party.

NOTE

Once a VPI is used for any PMP connection, it


cannot be used for any connection on that fabric
other than to add to a PMP connection.

myswitch:connections spvcc pmp party-> new


Usage:
[-spvccid] <integer>
[-atmaddr] <NSAP Address>
[[-vpi] <integer>]

PMP SPVCCID
Party ID
Party NSAP Address
Called VPI

[[-vci] <integer>]

Called VCI

[[-name] <text>]

Party Name

[[-ftdtlindex] <integer>]

FT-PNNI DTL(DEPRECATED)

[[-reroutestatus] <reroutestatus>]

Connections
Commands

[[-partyid] <integer>]

Reroute Status (default:


rerouteNotRequested)

[[-qosindex] <integer>]

QoS Exp Index (default: 0)

[[-autodtl] (enabled|disabled)]

Auto DTL (default: enabled)

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

3 - 57

Connections Commands

The parameters for delete, modify, and new are defined as follows:
Parameter

Description

-spvccid <integer>

The index number assigned to this PMP SPVC to identify it uniquely. The PMP SPVCC
ID is found in the INDEX field under conn spvcc pmp party show.

-partyid <integer>

The index assigned to the destination switch. This is useful when addressing the party
in other commands. Party IDs are unique among all the parties for a given PMP SPVC.
If a party ID is not specified, it will be assigned upon creation.

-atmaddr <NSAP Address>

The unique NSAP ATM address of the destination switch for a given PMP SPVC.

-vpi <integer>

The virtual path number of the destination switch for a given PMP SPVC.

-vci <integer>

The virtual channel number of the destination switch for a given PMP SPVC.

-name <text>

The optional name assigned to uniquely identify the party.

-ftdtlindex <integer>

NOTE: This parameter has been deprecated and is not used in ForeThought 7.1.x and
later releases.
The FT-PNNI Designated Transit List (DTL) tag, or index number, assigned to this PMP
SPVC party. The DTL specifies the preferred call routing for the SVC portion of the
PMP SPVC. Only one DTL can be configured for a party.

-reroutestatus <reroutestatus>

Indicates whether rerouting was requested for this PNNI PMP SPVC.

-qosindex <integer>

The index number in the QoS expansion table that is used to do QoS class-to-parameter
expansion when sending the PMP SPVC call set-up message across a PNNI link. See the
QoSExpIndex field under connections qos show for this number. The qosindex
that is specified for this PMP SPVC must already be present in the switch. Default is 0.

-autodtl (enabled|disabled)

Indicates whether automatic DTL routing is enabled or disabled. enable means that
dynamic path computation is used to route an SPVC when all of the configured DTLs
fail. disable means that dynamic path computation is not used to route an SPVC when
all of the configured DTLs fail. This feature applies to PNNI DTLs. The default is
enable. This flag does not apply when no DTLs are configured.

-assignedvpi <integer>

The assigned virtual path number of the party.

-assignedvci <integer>

The assigned virtual channel number of the party.

-vpvcsel (noPref|require)

NoPref means that you did not specify which VPI/VCI combination that the
destination switch should use for the permanent portion when this PNNI point-topoint SPVC was created. If the destination switch is a Marconi switch, the values are
displayed in the Destination VPI and Destination VCI fields. If the destination
switch is not a Marconi switch, a ? is displayed in the Destination VPI and
Destination VCI fields. Require means that the destination switch must use the
VPI/VCI combination given for the permanent portion when the PNNI point-to-point
SPVC was created.

-state <partystate>

The operational status of the party.

-lastfailcause <text>

The reason for the last call setup failure for this PNNI PMP SPVC. This parameter is
valid only for originating SPVCs that are down.

3 - 58

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Connections Commands

Parameter

Description

-retrycount <integer>

The number of times the call setup has been attempted since the PNNI PMP SPVC was
created or since the last successful call setup occurred. This is only valid when the
STATE is down.

-lastchangetime <timeticks>

If applicable, shows in HH:MM format, the number of days and time (in hundredths of
a second) since this PNNI PMP SPVC was created or the time since the last successful
call setup occurred.

-lastlocation <text>

The last call setup failure location code for this SPVC. This indicates the switch that
initiated the clearing for the call. This parameter is formatted as a text string with the
following values:
FMT - Indicates diagnostic format.
RMT - Indicates whether a remote switch is the source of the failure or this switch
inserted the location diagnostic.
LINK - Link ID to which the clearing call pertains.
VPI - VPI to which the clearing call pertains.

-downreason <downReason>

Indicates whether the SPVC call was cleared due to a better route being found, a
network failure, or an SPVC deletion.

-routecost <integer>

Specifies the path cost of the call the previous time that this call was up.

3.8.2.5.4

connections spvcc pmp party reroute

Sometimes PMP SPVCs are forced to use a less than optimal route because of temporary link
failures or because of an inconsistent routing database. This command lets you attempt a reroute when PMP SPVCs that are using less than optimal routes and reroute them if a better
route becomes available. For example, for PNNI, a path is considered better than another
path if its administrative weight is lower by a specified percentage. If a party within a PMP
SPVC is currently routed with the DTL specified, the party will not be rerouted. Use the AMI
command connections spvcc party pmp show -advanced to display the current reroute
status.
Connections
Commands

myswitch:connections spvcc pmp party-> reroute


Usage:
[-spvccid] <integer>

PMP SPVCCID

[-partyid] <integer>

Party ID

The parameters are defined as follows:


Parameter

Description

-spvccid <integer>

The index number assigned to this PMP SPVC to identify it uniquely. The PMP SPVCC ID
is found in the INDEX field under connections spvcc pmp party show.

-partyid <integer>

The index number of the party you want to reroute.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

3 - 59

Connections Commands

3.8.2.5.5

connections spvcc pmp party show

This command lets you display source PMP party SPVC information.
myswitch:connections spvcc pmp party-> show
SPVCCID PartyId VPI

VCI

State

VPVCSel

QosExpIndex Time

196

up

noPref

00:07

PartyNsapAddress: 0x47.0005.80.ffe100.0000.f243.0007.0020480d0082.00
1

33

up

noPref

00:07

PartyNsapAddress: 0x47.0005.80.ffe100.0000.f243.0007.0020480d0002.00
2

197

up

noPref

00:07

PartyNsapAddress: 0x47.0005.80.ffe100.0000.f243.0007.0020480d0082.00
2

34

up

noPref

00:07

PartyNsapAddress: 0x47.0005.80.ffe100.0000.f243.0007.0020480d0002.00
3

198

up

noPref

00:07

PartyNsapAddress: 0x47.0005.80.ffe100.0000.f243.0007.0020480d0082.00
3

35

up

noPref

00:07

PartyNsapAddress: 0x47.0005.80.ffe100.0000.f243.0007.0020480d0002.00
4

199

up

noPref

00:07

PartyNsapAddress: 0x47.0005.80.ffe100.0000.f243.0007.0020480d0082.00
4

36

up

noPref

00:07

Press <return> for more, or 'q' to quit... q

If no source PMP party SPVCs have been configured, the following displays:
myswitch:connections spvcc pmp party-> show
No Source PNNI PMP Party spvcc

3 - 60

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Connections Commands

To display advanced information, enter the following:


myswitch:connections spvcc pmp party-> show -advanced
SPVCCID PartyId VPI

VCI

State

VPVCSel QosExpIndex Time

196

up

noPref

00:07

PartyNsapAddress = 0x47.0005.80.ffe100.0000.f243.0007.0020480d0082.00
FtPnniDTL = N/A, RetryCount = 0 , RerouteStatus = rerouteNotRequested
PartyName =

, AutoDTL = enabled

Last Failure Cause = N/A


Failure Location = Not Available
Down Reason = downreasonFailure
Route Cost = 5040
SPVCCID PartyId VPI

VCI

State

VPVCSel QosExpIndex Time

33

up

noPref

00:07

PartyNsapAddress = 0x47.0005.80.ffe100.0000.f243.0007.0020480d0002.00
FtPnniDTL = N/A, RetryCount = 0 , RerouteStatus = rerouteNotRequested
PartyName =

, AutoDTL = enabled

Last Failure Cause = N/A


Failure Location = Not Available
Down Reason = downreasonFailure
Route Cost = 5040
Press <return> for more, or 'q' to quit...q

The fields for show and show -advanced are defined as follows:
Field

Description
The index number assigned to this PNNI PMP SPVC by AMI to identify it uniquely from
other PNNI SPVCs that have this switch fabric as their source.

PartyId

The index number assigned to the party.

VPI

The virtual path number of the party.

VCI

The virtual channel number of the party.

State

The state of the party. Can be up or down.

VPVCSel

NoPref means that you did not specify which VPI/VCI combination that the destination
switch should use for the permanent portion when this PNNI point-to-point SPVC was
created. If the destination switch is a Marconi switch, the values are displayed in the
Destination VPI and Destination VCI fields. If the destination switch is not a
Marconi switch, a ? is displayed in the Destination VPI and Destination VCI fields.
Require means that the destination switch must use the VPI/VCI combination given for
the permanent portion when the PNNI point-to-point SPVC was created.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

3 - 61

Connections
Commands

SPVCCID

Connections Commands

Field

Description

QoSExpIndex

The index number in the QoS expansion table that is used to do QoS class-to-parameter
expansion when sending the PMP SPVC call set-up message across a PNNI link. See the
QoSExpIndex field under connections qos show for this number.

Time

If applicable, shows in HH:MM format, the number of days and time (in hundredths of a
second) since this PNNI PMP SPVC was created or the time since the last successful call
setup occurred.

PartyNSAPAddress

The NSAP ATM address of the PMP SPVC party.

FtPnniDTL

NOTE: This field has been deprecated and is not used in ForeThought 7.1.x and later
releases.
The Designated Transit List (DTL) index number, assigned to this party. The DTL specifies
the preferred call routing for the SVC portion of the SPVC. Only one FT-PNNI DTL can be
configured for a party.

RetryCount

The number of times the call setup has been attempted since the PNNI PMP SPVC was
created or since the last successful call setup occurred. This is only valid when the STATE
is down.

RerouteStatus

Indicates whether rerouting was requested for this PMP SPVC.

PartyName

The name assigned to the PMP SPVC party. N/A displays if a name has not be assigned.

AutoDTL

Indicates whether automatic DTL routing is enabled or disabled. enable means that
dynamic path computation is used to route an SPVC when all of the configured DTLs fail.
disable means that dynamic path computation is not used to route an SPVC when all of
the configured DTLs fail. This feature applies to PNNI DTLs. The default is enable. This
flag does not apply when no DTLs are configured.

LastFailureCause

The reason for the last call setup failure for this PNNI point-to-point SPVC. This field is
only displayed for originating SPVCs that are down.

Failure Location

The last call setup failure location for this SPVC, if applicable. This field indicates the
switch that initiated the clearing for the call. This field is formatted as a text string with the
following values:
FMT - Indicates diagnostic format.
RMT - Indicates whether a remote switch is the source of the failure or this switch
inserted the location diagnostic.
LINK - Link ID to which the clearing call pertains.
VPI - VPI to which the clearing call pertains.

Down Reason

Indicates whether the SPVC call was cleared due to a better route being found, a network
failure, or an SPVC deletion.

Route Cost

Specifies the path cost of the call the previous time that this call was up.

3 - 62

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Connections Commands

3.8.2.6 connections spvcc pmp root


The commands listed under connections spvcc pmp root let you configure root PNNI
PMP SPVCs. Type ? at the root level to display the list of available subcommands.
myswitch:connections spvcc pmp root-> ?
delete

Delete a source PNNI PMP Root Smart Channel

modify

Change the priority of a PNNI PMP Root Smart


Channel

new

Create a new source PNNI PMP Root Smart Channel

show

Display source PNNI PMP Root spvcc

3.8.2.6.1

connections spvcc pmp root delete

This command lets you delete an existing PNNI PMP SPVC from the source switch. You must
specify the PMP SPVCC ID of the PMP SPVC that you want to delete.

All parties must be deleted before a PMP SPVC


can be deleted.

NOTE

myswitch:connections spvcc pmp root-> delete


Usage:
[-spvccid] <integer>

PMP SPVCCID

[[-atmif] <AtmIf>]

AtmIf

[[-vpi] <integer>]

VPI

[[-vci] <integer>]

VCI

[[-upc] <integer>]

UPC
Bearer Class

[[-susceptclip] (no|yes)]

CLIP

[[-fwdqosclass] <QoS Class>]

Forward Qos

[[-state] (up|down|wait)]

State

[[-name] <text>]

Name

[[-priority] <integer>]

Priority

[[-numberofparties] <integer>]

Number Of Parties

[[-nextpartyindex] <integer>]

Next Party Index

[[-domainid] <integer>]

Domain ID

[[-rgroupid] <integer>]

Redundancy Group ID

[[-secondaryvpi] <integer>]

Secondary VPI

[[-secondaryvci] <integer>]

Secondary VCI

Connections
Commands

[[-bearerclass] <bearerclass>]

The parameters are defined in the same manner as for the connections spvcc pmp root
new command (see Section 3.8.2.6.3).

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

3 - 63

Connections Commands

3.8.2.6.2

connections spvcc pmp root modify

This command lets you modify an existing PNNI point-to-multipoint SPVC from the source
switch. The connection does not go down when changing the priority. However, if the DTL is
changed or specified, the currently connected party connection will be torn down and reestablished with the new DTL.
myswitch:connections spvcc pmp root-> modify
Usage:
[-spvccid] <integer>

PMP SPVCCID

[[-priority] <integer>]

Priority

[[-nextpartyindex] <integer>]

Next Party Index

The parameters are defined in the same manner as for the connections spvcc pmp root
new command (see Section 3.8.2.6.3).
3.8.2.6.3

connection spvcc pmp root new

This command lets you create a PNNI point-to-multipoint SPVC.

You need to open a session on the destination


switch to create a PNNI point-to-multipoint
SPVC. This is needed to get the party NSAP
address from the destination switch.

NOTE

myswitch:connections spvcc pmp root-> new


Usage:
[[-spvccid] <integer>]

PMP SPVCCID (default: 1)

[-atmif] <AtmIf>

AtmIf

[-vpi] <integer>

VPI

[-vci] <integer>

VCI

[[-upc] <integer>]

UPC (default: 0)

[[-bearerclass] <bearerclass>]

Bearer Class (default: classX)

[[-susceptclip] (no|yes)]

CLIP (default: no)

[[-fwdqosclass] <QoS Class>]

Forward Qos (default: class0)

[[-name] <text>]

Name

[[-priority] <integer>]

Priority (default: 10)

[[-nextpartyindex] <integer>]

Next Party Index

[[-domainid] <integer>]

Domain ID (default: 1)

[[-rgroupid] <integer>]

Redundancy Group ID

[[-secondaryvpi] <integer>]

Secondary VPI

[[-secondaryvci] <integer>]

Secondary VCI

3 - 64

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Connections Commands

The parameters for delete, modify, and new are defined as follows:
Parameter
-spvccid <integer>

The index number assigned to this PMP SPVC to identify it uniquely. For PNNI PMP
SPVCs, the index number may be assigned either by AMI or by the user. Valid values are
integers between 1 and 65535.

-atmif <AtmIf>

The ATM interface number where the permanent portion of the PMP SPVC resides on the
source (local) switch fabric.

-vpi <integer>

The virtual path number for the permanent portion of the PMP SPVC on the source fabric.

-vci <integer>

The virtual channel number for the permanent portion of the PMP SPVC on the source fabric.
1

-upc <integer>

The forward (going from the local switch fabric to the remote switch fabric) UPC contract
index assigned to this PMP SPVC. To find the index or create a new UPC, use the conn upc
show command. If no index is specified, the default index of 0 (UBR best effort) is used.

-bearerClass <bearerclass>

The requested broadband bearer class for this PMP SPVC. X = all types of ATM media. A =
non-ATM CBR media. C = non-ATM rtVBR, nrtVBR, UBR, and ABR media. X is the default.

-susceptclip (no | yes)

Clipping is the loss of a brief interval at the beginning of a speech spurt during speech
transmission. no indicates this PMP SPVC is not susceptible to clipping. yes indicates this
PMP SPVC is susceptible to clipping. The default is no.

-fwdqosclass <QoS Class>

The requested QoS class for this PMP SPVC in the forward (calling to called) direction.
The default is class0.

-name <text>

An optional name assigned to uniquely identify this PMP SPVC.

-priority <integer>

The order in which and the frequency with which you want a PMP SPVC in the down state
to be tried for a successful connection. Higher priority PMP SPVCs are tried more often than
lower priority SPVCs. All parties within a PMP SPVC have the same priority. The value of
lowestpriority
(configured
under
connections
spvcc
parameters
-lowestpriority) determines the number of times each PMP SPVC is tried before
attempting a lower priority PMP SPVC. Valid values are from 1 to lowestpriority, with
1 being the highest priority (the first and the most often tried). The default value is half of
the value of the lowestpriority. The value for lowestpriority is defaulted to 10.
PMP and PP SPVC priorities are shared. Some PMP or PP SPVCs can be assigned a higher
priority compared to other PMP or PP SPVCs. For PMP and PP SPVCs with equal priority,
PP SPVCs have higher priority over PMP SPVCs.

-nextpartyindex <integer>

The index number of the next party for this PMP SPVC.

-domainid <integer>

The PNNI domain ID number on the source (local) switch fabric. The default is 1, which is
the ID of the default routing domain.

-rgroupid <integer>

The SPVC redundancy group index number.

-secondaryvpi <integer>

The secondary virtual path identifier of an SPVC redundancy group.

-secondaryvci <integer>

The secondary virtual channel identifier of an SPVC redundancy group.

-numberofparties <integer>

The number of parties for this PMP SPVC.

The forward UPC contracts specified must be compatible with the bearerClass parameter for the PMP SPVC (e.g., all
parameters are for VBR traffic or CBR traffic).

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

3 - 65

Connections
Commands

1.

Description

Connections Commands

3.8.2.6.4

connection spvcc pmp root show

This command lets you display source PNNI PMP root SPVCs.
myswitch:connections spvcc pmp root-> show
PMP

Bearer Forward
Qos

Num Of

SPVCCID AtmIf

VPI

VCI

UPC

State Class

CLIP Parties Priority

4D1

35

wait

classX class0

no

10

4D3

45

down

classX class0

no

10

If no source PNNI PMP root SPVCs have been configured, the following displays:
myswitch:connections spvcc pmp root-> show
No Source PNNI PMP Root spvcc

To display advanced information, enter the following:


myswitch:connections spvcc pmp root-> show -advanced
PMP

Bearer Forward

SPVCCID AtmIf

VPI

VCI

UPC

State Class

35

wait

4D1

Qos

classX class0

Num Of
CLIP Parties Priority
no

10

DomainId = 1 , Name =
Redundancy GroupID = N/A, Secondary VPI = N/A, Secondary VCI = N/A
3

4D3

45

down

classX class0

no

10

DomainId = 1 , Name =
Redundancy GroupID = N/A, Secondary VPI = N/A, Secondary VCI = N/A

3 - 66

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Connections Commands

The fields for show and show -advanced are defined as follows:
Field

Description
The index number assigned to this PNNI PMP SPVC by AMI to identify it uniquely from
other PNNI SPVCs that have this switch fabric as their source.

AtmIf

The port identifier on the originating switch fabric that contains the permanent portion for
this PNNI PMP SPVC.

VPI

The virtual path number used in the permanent portion of this PNNI PMP SPVC on the
originating switch fabric.

VCI

The virtual channel number in the permanent portion of this PNNI PMP SPVC on the
originating switch fabric.

UPC

The forward (going from the local switch fabric to the remote switch fabric) UPC contract
index associated with this PMP PNNI SPVC.

State

The state of this PMP SPVC.

BearerClass

The broadband bearer class specified for this PNNI PMP SPVC. Can be classA, classC,
or classX.

Forward QoS

The requested QoS class for this PMP SPVC in the forward (calling to called) direction.
The default is class0.

CLIP

no means this PNNI point-to-point SPVC is not susceptible to clipping and yes means it is
susceptible to clipping.

Num of Parties

The number of parties in the PMP SPVC.

Priority

The order in which and the frequency with which this PMP SPVC is tried for a connection.
Higher priority PMP SPVCs are tried more often than lower priority ones. All parties
within a PMP SPVC have the same priority. Point-to-multipoint and point-to-point SPVC
priorities are shared, meaning some PMP or point-to-point SPVCs can be assigned a
higher priority compared to other PMP or point-to-point SPVCs. For PMP and point-topoint SPVCs with equal priority, point-to-point SPVCs have higher priority over PMP
SPVCs.

DomainId

The PNNI domain ID number on the source (local) switch fabric. The default is 1, which is
the ID of the default routing domain.

Name

An optional name assigned to uniquely identify this PMP SPVC.

Redundancy GroupID

The SPVC redundancy group index number.

Secondary VPI

The secondary virtual path identifier of an SPVC redundancy group.

Secondary VCI

The secondary virtual channel identifier of an SPVC redundancy group.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

3 - 67

Connections
Commands

PMP SPVCCID

Connections Commands

3.8.2.7 connections spvcc pmp termination


This command lets you display terminating PNNI PMP SPVCs.
myswitch:connections spvcc pmp-> termination
Root

Party

SPVCCID AtmIf

VPI

VCI

PartyId AtmIf

VPI

VCI

State

UpTime

32

35

up

00:03

37

up

00:01

179

1A1

RootSwitchPrefix: 47.000580ffe1000000f21c3950
2

179

33

1A1

RootSwitchPrefix: 47.000580ffe1000000f21c3950

If there are no terminating PNNI PMP SPVCs, the following displays:


myswitch:connections spvcc pmp-> termination
This table is currently empty.

The fields are defined as follows::


Field

Description

SPVCCID

The index number assigned to this PNNI PMP SPVC by AMI to identify it uniquely from
other PNNI SPVCs that have this switch fabric as their source.

Root AtmIf

The port number assigned to the source PMP SPVC.

Root VPI

The virtual port identifier assigned to the source PMP SPVC.

Root VCI

The virtual channel identifier assigned to the source PMP SPVC.

PartyId

The index number assigned to the party.

Party AtmIf

The port number assigned to the party.

Party VPI

The virtual port identifier assigned to the party.

Party VCI

The virtual channel identifier assigned to the party.

State

The operating state of the PMP SPVC party (up, down, or failed).

Uptime

The amount of time that this PMP SPVC party has been up.

RootSwitchPrefix

The NSAP prefix of the root (source) PMP SPVC.

3 - 68

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Connections Commands

3.8.3

connections spvcc pp

These commands allow you to configure PNNI point-to-point SPVCs. Type ? at the pp to
display the list of available subcommands.
myswitch:connections spvcc pp-> ?
delete

Delete a source PNNI PP Smart Channel

destination

Display destination PNNI PP spvcc

modify

Change the priority of a PNNI PP Smart Channel

new

Create a new source PNNI PP Smart Channel

number

Display number of PNNI PP spvcc

show

Display source PNNI PP spvcc

3.8.3.1 connections spvcc pp delete


This command allows you to delete an existing PNNI point-to-point SPVC from the source
switch.
myswitch:connections spvcc pp-> delete
Usage:
[-index] <integer>

index

[[-callingatmif] <AtmIf>]

Src AtmIf

[[-callingvpi] <integer>]

Src VPI

[[-callingvci] <integer>]

Src VCI
Destination NSAP

[[-calledatmif] <integer>]

Dst AtmIf

[[-calledvpi] <integer>]

Called VPI

[[-calledvci] <integer>]

Called VCI

[[-calledassignedvpi] <integer>]

Dst VPI

[[-calledassignedvci] <integer>]

Dst VCI

[[-calledvpvcsel] (noPref|require)]

Dst VPVC Sel

[[-fwdupckey] <UPC Index>]

Fwd UPC

[[-bckupckey] <UPC Index>]

Bck UPC

[[-bearerclass] <bearerclass>]

Bearer Class

[[-susceptclip] (no|yes)]

CLIP

[[-fwdqosclass] <QoS Class>]

Fwd QoS

[[-bckqosclass] <QoS Class>]

Bck QoS

[[-lastfailcause] <text>]

Last Fail Cause

[[-retrycount] <integer>]

Retry Count

[[-lastchangetime] <timeticks>]

Last Change Time

[[-status] <status>]

State

[[-name] <text>]

Name

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Connections
Commands

[[-calledatmaddr] <NSAP Address>]

3 - 69

Connections Commands

[[-routecost] <integer>]

Route Cost

[[-activedtlindex] <integer>]

Active DTL Index

[[-activedtlnode] <nodeid>]

Active DTL Node

[[-reroutestatus] (enabled|disabled)]

Reroute Status

[[-callingdomain] <integer>]

Calling Domain

[[-qosindex] <integer>]

QoS Index

[[-backoffstatus] (enabled|disabled)]

Backoff Status

[[-priority] <integer>]

Priority

[[-lastlocation] <text>]

Last Fail Location

[[-dtltag] <integer>]

DTL Tag

[[-autodtl] (enabled|disabled)]

Auto DTL

[[-rgroupid] <integer>]

Redundancy Group ID

[[-secondaryvpi] <integer>]

Secondary VPI

[[-secondaryvci] <integer>]

Secondary VCI

NOTE

3 - 70

When a PNNI DTL is part of any DTL tag table,


it cannot be deleted.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Connections Commands

If you enter an SPVCC ID that does not exist, the following error message is returned:
myswitch:connections spvcc pp-> delete 1234
ERROR: SPVCC does not exist
deletion failed: entry doesn't exist

The parameters are defined in the same manner as for the connections spvcc pp new
command (see Section 3.8.3.4).

3.8.3.2 connections spvcc pp destination


This command allows you to display existing destination PNNI point-to-point SPVCs.
myswitch:connections spvcc pp-> destination
Source

Destination

Redundancy

INDEX ATMIF

VPI

VCI

ATMIF

VPI

VCI

STATE

34

1A1

38

up

179

Group ID
N/A

Source ATM Addr: 0x47.0005.80.ffe100.0000.f21c.3950.0020480d00b3.00


Dest ATM Addr:
2

179

0x47.0005.80.ffe100.0000.f21c.3965.0020480d0000.00
35

1A1

39

up

N/A

Source ATM Addr: 0x47.0005.80.ffe100.0000.f21c.3950.0020480d00b3.00


Dest ATM Addr:

0x47.0005.80.ffe100.0000.f21c.3965.0020480d0000.00

If no destination PNNI PP SPVCs have been configured, the following displays:


myswitch:connections spvcc pp-> destination
No Destination PP spvcc

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

3 - 71

Connections
Commands

The parameters are defined in the same manner as for the connections spvcc pp new
command (see Section 3.8.3.4).

Connections Commands

3.8.3.3 connections spvcc pp modify


This command lets you modify an existing PNNI point-to-point SPVC.
myswitch:connections spvcc pp-> modify
Usage:
[-index] <integer>

index

[[-reroutestatus] (enabled|disabled)]

Reroute Status

[[-backoffstatus] (enabled|disabled)]

Backoff Status

[[-priority] <integer>]

Priority

[[-dtltag] <integer>]

DTL Tag

[[-autodtl] (enabled|disabled)]

Auto DTL

NOTE

When a PNNI DTL is part of any DTL tag table,


it cannot be deleted.

The parameters are defined in the same manner as for the connections spvcc pp new
command (see Section 3.8.3.4).

3 - 72

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Connections Commands

3.8.3.4 connections spvcc pp new


This command lets you create a PNNI point-to-point SPVC.

NOTE

You do not need to open a session to the


destination switch to create a PNNI SPVC
because all PNNI SPVCs are bidirectional.

myswitch:connections spvcc pp-> new


Usage:
[[-index] <integer>]

index (default: 31051)

[-callingatmif] <AtmIf>

Src AtmIf

[-callingvpi] <integer>

Src VPI

[-callingvci] <integer>

Src VCI

[-calledatmaddr] <NSAP Address>

Destination NSAP

[[-calledvpi] <integer>]

Called VPI

[[-calledvci] <integer>]

Called VCI

[[-fwdupckey] <UPC Index>]

Fwd UPC (default: 0)

[[-bckupckey] <UPC Index>]

Bck UPC (default: 0)

[[-bearerclass] <bearerclass>]

Bearer Class (default: classX)

[[-susceptclip] (no|yes)]

CLIP (default: no)

[[-fwdqosclass] <QoS Class>]

Fwd QoS (default: class0)

[[-bckqosclass] <QoS Class>]

Bck QoS (default: class0)

[[-name] <text>]

Name (default: )

[[-reroutestatus] (enabled|disabled)]

Reroute Status (default: disabled

[[-callingdomain] <integer>]

Calling Domain (default: 1)

[[-qosindex] <integer>]

QoS Index (default: 0)


Backoff Status (default: enabled)

[[-priority] <integer>]

Priority (default: 5)

[[-dtltag] <integer>]

DTL Tag (default: 0)

[[-autodtl] (enabled|disabled)]

Auto DTL (default: enabled)

[[-rgroupid] <integer>]

Redundancy Group ID

[[-secondaryvpi] <integer>]

Secondary VPI

[[-secondaryvci] <integer>]

Secondary VCI

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Connections
Commands

[[-backoffstatus] (enabled|disabled)]

3 - 73

Connections Commands

The parameters for delete, destination, modify, and new are defined as follows:
Parameter

Description

-index <integer>

The index number assigned to this point-to-point SPVC to identify it uniquely. For PNNI
SPVCs, the index number may be assigned either by AMI or by the user. Valid values are
integers between 1 and 65535.

-callingatmif <atmif>

The port number where the permanent portion of the SPVC resides on the source (local)
switch fabric.

-callingvpi <integer>

The virtual path number for the permanent portion of the SPVC on the source (local)
switch fabric.

-callingvci <integer>

The virtual channel number for the permanent portion of the SPVC on the source (local)
switch fabric.

-calledatmaddr
Address>

<NSAP The ATM NSAP address of the destination (remote) switch for this SPVC. Use the
connections destnsap command on the destination switch to obtain this address. See
Section for more information.

-calledvpi <integer>

The virtual path number on the destination switch fabric for this PNNI SPVC. When using
this parameter, both the -calledvpi and -calledvci must be specified. If this
parameter is not used, the destination switch uses any available value.

-calledvci <integer>

The virtual channel number on the destination switch fabric for this PNNI SPVC. When
using this parameter, both the -calledvpi and -calledvci must be specified. If this
parameter is not used, the destination switch uses any available value.

-fwdupckey <UPC Index>

The forward (going from the local switch fabric to the remote switch fabric) UPC contract
index assigned to this SPVC. To find the index you want, use the connections upc
show command. If no index is specified, the default index of 0 (UBR best effort) is used.

-bckupckey <UPC Index>

The backward (going from the remote switch fabric to the local switch fabric) UPC
contract index assigned to this SPVC. To find the index you want, use the connections
upc show command. If no index is specified, the default index of 0 (UBR best effort) is
used.

-bearerclass <bearerclass>

The requested broadband bearer class for this point-to-point SPVC. X is for all types of
ATM media. A is for non-ATM CBR media. C is for non-ATM VBR, UBR, and ABR media.
The default is X.

-susceptclip (no|yes)

During speech transmission, clipping is the loss of a brief interval at the beginning of a
speech spurt. no indicates this SPVC is not susceptible to clipping. yes indicates this
SPVC is susceptible to clipping. The default is no.

-fwdqosclass1 <QoS Class>

The requested QoS class for this point-to-point SPVC in the forward (calling to called)
direction. The -fqos and -bqos options must be either both class0 or both a non-zero
class. The default is class0.

-bckqosclass <QoS Class>

The requested QoS class for this point-to-point SPVC in the backward (called to calling)
direction. The -fqos and -bqos options must be either both class0 or both a non-zero
class. The default is class0.

-name <text>

An optional name for the user to assign to this PNNI SPVC to help uniquely identify it.

3 - 74

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Connections Commands

Parameter

Description

-reroutestatus (enabled|dis- enable indicates that this SPVC will be examined periodically to see if it is using a subabled)
optimal route. disable indicates that this SPVC will not be retried, even if a DTL with a
higher priority becomes available. The default state for PNNI SPVCs is enable.
-callingdomain <integer>

The PNNI domain ID number on the source (local) switch fabric. The default is 1, which is
the ID of the default routing domain.

-qosindex <integer>

The index number in the QoS expansion table that is used to do QoS class-to-parameter
expansion when sending the SPVC call set-up message across a PNNI link. See the
QoSExpIndex field under connections qos show for this number. The qosindex that is
specified for this SPVC must already be present in the switch. The default is 0.

-backoffstatus (enabled|dis- enable means the back-off mechanism is used for this point-to-point SPVC. Upon a
abled)
failure, the failed directed DTL is not retried until the amount of time specified under
connections spvcc parameters -backoffinterval has elapsed. This allows old
information to age out and the network to stabilize. disable means the back-off
mechanism is not used for this SPVC and directed DTLs that are configured for this SPVC
are retried continually even after a failure. The default is enable.
-priority <integer>

The order in which and the frequency with which you want this point-to-point SPVC to be
tried for a connection. Valid values are from 1 to lowestpriority, with 1 being the
highest priority (the first and the most often tried) and with lowestpriority being the
value configured under connections spvcc parameters -lowestpriority. The
default value is half of the value of lowestpriority, rounded off to the lowest integer.
The value for lowestpriority is defaulted to 10.
Higher priority SPVCs are tried more often than lower priority SPVCs. The value of
lowestpriority determines the number of times each SPVC is tried before attempting
a lower priority SPVC.
Point-to-point and point-to-multipoint SPVC priorities are shared. Some point-to-point or
PMP SPVCs can be assigned a higher priority compared to other point-to-point or PMP
SPVCs. For point-to-point and PMP SPVCs with equal priority, point-to-point SPVCs have
higher priority over PMP SPVCs.
The Designated Transit List (DTL) tag, or index number, assigned to this SPVC which
corresponds to a list of preferred DTLs that you configure under routing dtltag. The
DTL specifies the preferred call routing for the SVC portion of the SPVC.

-autodtl (enabled|disabled)

enable means that dynamic path computation is used to route an SPVC when all of the
configured DTLs fail. disable means that dynamic path computation is not used to route
an SPVC when all of the configured DTLs fail. This feature applies to PNNI DTLs. The
default is enable. This flag does not apply when no DTLs are configured.

-rgroupid <integer>

The SPVC redundancy group index number.

-secondaryvpi <integer>

The secondary virtual channel identifier of an SPVC redundancy group.

-secondaryvci <integer>

The secondary virtual path identifier of an SPVC redundancy group.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

3 - 75

Connections
Commands

-dtltag <integer>

Connections Commands

Parameter

1.

Description

-calledvpvcsel
(noPref|require)

NoPref means that you did not specify which VPI/VCI combination that the destination
switch should use for the permanent portion when this PNNI point-to-point SPVC was
created. If the destination switch is a Marconi switch, the values are displayed in the
Destination VPI and Destination VCI fields. If the destination switch is not a
Marconi switch, a ? is displayed in the Destination VPI and Destination VCI fields.
Require means that the destination switch must use the VPI/VCI combination given for
the permanent portion when the PNNI point-to-point SPVC was created.

-lastchangetime <timeticks>

If applicable, shows, in hundredths of a second, the time since this PNNI point-to-point
SPVC was created or the time since the last successful call setup occurred. The STATE
shows up.

-lastfailcause <text>

The reason for the last call setup failure for this PNNI point-to-point SPVC. This field is
only displayed for originating SPVCs that are down.

-lastlocation <integer>

Upon a call setup failure for this PNNI point-to-point SPVC, indicates the exact link, VPI,
and NSAP address where the failure occurred.

-retrycount <timeticks>

The number of times the call setup has been attempted since the PNNI PMP SPVC was
created or since the last successful call setup occurred. This is only valid when the STATE
is down.

-routecost <integer>

The current call routing cost for this originating PNNI point-to-point SPVC. If the SPVC is
down, shows N/A.

-status <status>

The state of this PMP SPVC.

-activedtlindex <integer>

The Active Designated Transit List (DTL) index for this SPVPC (Smart Permanent Virtual
Path Circuit). This value along with -activedtlnode uniquely identifies the DTL that is
currently used by the SVC portion of the SPVPC.

-activedtlnode <integer>

The Node index of the Active Designated Transit List for this SPVPC (Smart Permanent
Virtual Path Circuit). The active DTL indexed by the node index and DTL index identifies
the DTL that is currently used by the SVC portion of the SPVPC.

The forward and backward UPC contracts that you specify must be compatible with the bearerClass parameter for
the SPVC (e.g., all parameters are for VBR traffic or CBR traffic).

3 - 76

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Connections Commands

When creating a point-to-point SPVC, the


-fwdqosclass and -bckqosclass options
must be either both class0 or both a non-zero
class. For example, the -fwdqosclass cannot be
class0 and the -bckqosclass be class1. This
combination is invalid. Having an -fwdqosclass
of class0 and a -bckqosclass of class0 is a
valid combination, and having an -fwdqosclass
of class1 and a -bckqosclass of class4 is a
valid combination, but having an -fwdqosclass
of class2 and a -bckqosclass of class0 is not
valid.

NOTE

3.8.3.5 connections spvcc pp number


This command lets you display the number of source and destination PNNI point-to-point
SPVCs.
myswitch:connections spvcc pp-> number
Source PP spvcc

Destination PP spvcc 0

3.8.3.6 connections spvcc pp show


This command allows you to display all of the PNNI point-to-point SPVCs that originate and
terminate on an individual switch fabric.
myswitch:connections spvcc pp-> show
INDEX

Src: ATMIF

VPI

VCI

UPC

Dst: ATMIF

VPI

VCI

UPC

VPVC-SEL

PRIORITY

STATE

Connections
Commands

------------------------------------------------------------------------------1

R1A1

100

100

require

up

Destination: 0x47.0005.80.ffe100.0000.f243.0007.0020480d0000.00
2

R1A1

101

101

require

up

Destination: 0x47.0005.80.ffe100.0000.f243.0007.0020480d0000.00
3

R1A1

102

102

require

up

Destination: 0x47.0005.80.ffe100.0000.f243.0007.0020480d0000.00
4

R1A1

103

103

require

up

Destination: 0x47.0005.80.ffe100.0000.f243.0007.0020480d0000.00
Press <return> for more, or 'q' to quit...q

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

3 - 77

Connections Commands

To display advanced information about PNNI point-to-point SPVCs on this switch, enter the
following:
myswitch:connections spvcc pp-> show -advanced
INDEX

Src: ATMIF

VPI

VCI

UPC

Dst: ATMIF

VPI

VCI

UPC

VPVC-SEL

PRIORITY

STATE

------------------------------------------------------------------------------1

R1A1

100

100

require

up

Destination: 0x47.0005.80.ffe100.0000.f243.0007.0020480d0000.00
DTL Info:
DtlTag = 0 , ActiveDTLIndex = 0 , ActiveDTLNode = 0
Backoff = enabled, AutoDtl = enabled
Advanced Info:
Name = N/A, Cost = 5040, Reroute = disabled, CLIP = no
BearerClass = classX, ForwardQoS = class0, BackwardQos = class0
DomainID = 1 , QoSExpIndex = 0
Last Failure Cause = no-user-responding-Cause18
Failure Location = LCL:0 LINK:65533 VPI:65533 NSAP:47000580ffe1000000f24301f6
uptime = 01:44, Retry Count = 0
Redundancy GroupID = N/A, Secondary VPI = N/A, Secondary VCI = N/A
2

R1A1

101

101

require

up

Destination: 0x47.0005.80.ffe100.0000.f243.0007.0020480d0000.00
DTL Info:
DtlTag = 0 , ActiveDTLIndex = 0 , ActiveDTLNode = 0
Backoff = enabled, AutoDtl = enabled
Advanced Info:
Name = N/A, Cost = 5040, Reroute = disabled, CLIP = no
BearerClass = classX, ForwardQoS = class0, BackwardQos = class0
DomainID = 1 , QoSExpIndex = 0
Last Failure Cause = temporary-failure-Cause41
Failure Location = LCL:0 LINK:65533 VPI:65533 NSAP:47000580ffe1000000f24301f6
uptime = 01:44, Retry Count = 0
Redundancy GroupID = N/A, Secondary VPI = N/A, Secondary VCI = N/A
Press <return> for more, or 'q' to quit... q

3 - 78

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Connections Commands

The fields for show and show -advanced are defined as follows:
Field

Description
The index number assigned to this PNNI point-to-point SPVC by AMI to identify it
uniquely from other PNNI point-to-point SPVCs that have this switch fabric as their
source.

Source ATMIF

The port identifier on the originating switch fabric that contains the permanent portion for
this PNNI point-to-point SPVC.

Source VPI

The virtual path number used in the permanent portion of this PNNI point-to-point SPVC
on the originating switch fabric.

Source VCI

The virtual channel number in the permanent portion of this PNNI point-to-point SPVC
on the originating switch fabric.

Source UPC

The forward (going from the local switch fabric to the remote switch fabric) UPC contract
index associated with this PNNI point-to-point SPVC.

Destination ATMIF

The port identifier on the terminating switch fabric that contains the permanent portion
for this PNNI point-to-point SPVC, if the destination end is a Marconi switch. If the port at
the destination switch cannot be determined, a question mark (?) is displayed. If the
destination is a redundancy group, this number is the index value of the redundancy
group, not the integer value of the destination port.

Destination VPI

The virtual path number used in the permanent portion of this PNNI point-to-point SPVC
on the destination switch fabric. any means the user did not specify the VPI to be used at
the destination.

Destination VCI

The virtual channel number used in the permanent portion of this PNNI point-to-point
SPVC on the destination switch fabric. any means the user did not specify the VCI to be
used at the destination.

Destination UPC

The backward (going from the remote switch fabric to the local switch fabric) UPC
contract index associated with this PNNI point-to-point SPVC.

Destination VPVC-SEL

NoPref means that you did not specify which VPI/VCI combination that the destination
switch should use for the permanent portion when this PNNI point-to-point SPVC was
created. If the destination switch is a Marconi switch, the values are displayed in the
Destination VPI and Destination VCI fields. If the destination switch is not a
Marconi switch, a ? is displayed in the Destination VPI and Destination VCI fields.
Require means that the destination switch must use the VPI/VCI combination given for
the permanent portion when the PNNI point-to-point SPVC was created.

Priority

The order in which this SPVC is tried for a connection. Values are from 1 to
lowestpriority, with 1 being the highest priority (the first tried and the most often
tried) and with lowestpriority being the value configured under connections
spvcc parameters -lowestpriority.
Point-to-point and point-to-multipoint SPVC priorities are shared meaning some point-topoint or PMP SPVCs can be assigned a higher priority compared to other point-to-point or
PMP SPVCs. For point-to-point and PMP SPVCs with equal priority, point-to-point SPVCs
have higher priority over PMP SPVCs.

State

The operational state of this point-to-point SPVC. Can be up or down.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

3 - 79

Connections
Commands

INDEX

Connections Commands

Field

Description

Destination

The NSAP ATM address for the terminating side of the PNNI point-to-point SPVC.

DtlTag

The Designated Transit List (DTL) tag, or index number, assigned to this point-to-point
SPVC which corresponds to a DTL table that you configure under routing dtltable.
The DTL specifies the preferred call routing SVC portion of the point-to-point SPVC.

ActiveDTLIndex

The Active DTL index for this SPVPC. This value, along with the ActiveDTLNode value,
uniquely identifies the DTL that is currently used by the SVC portion of the SPVPC.

ActiveDTLNode

The node index of the Active DTL for this SPVPC. The active DTL indexed by the node
index and DTL index identifies the DTL that is currently used by the SVC portion of the
SPVPC.

Backoff

enabled means the back-off mechanism is used for this point-to-point SPVC. Upon a
failure, directed DTLs that are configured for this point-to-point SPVC are not retried until
the amount of time specified under connections spvcc parameters
-backoffinterval has elapsed. This allows old information to age out and allow the
network to stabilize. disabled means the back-off mechanism is not used for this pointto-point SPVC and directed DTLs that are configured for this point-to-point SPVC are
retried continually upon a failure.

AutoDtl

Indicates whether automatic DTL routing is enabled or disabled. enable means that
dynamic path computation is used to route an SPVC when all of the configured DTLs fail.
disable means that dynamic path computation is not used to route an SPVC when all of
the configured DTLs fail. This feature applies to PNNI DTLs. The default is enable. This
flag does not apply when no DTLs are configured.

Name

The optional name assigned to this PNNI point-to-point SPVC to help identify it. If no
name is assigned, N/A is displayed.

Cost

The current call routing cost for this originating PNNI point-to-point SPVC. If the SPVC is
down, shows N/A.

Reroute

enabled means this SPVC is examined to see if it is using a sub-optimal route. If it is, it is
rerouted according to the parameters in connections spvcc parameters
-reroutestatus. disabled means this point-to-point SPVC is not examined to see if it
is using a sub-optimal route.

CLIP

no means this PNNI point-to-point SPVC is not susceptible to clipping and yes means it is
susceptible to clipping.

BearerClass

The broadband bearer class specified for this PNNI point-to-point SPVC. Can be classA,
classC, or classX.

ForwardQos

The requested quality of service for this point-to-point SPVC in the forward (calling to
called) direction.

BackwardQos

The requested quality of service for this point-to-point SPVC in the backward (called to
calling) direction.

Domainid

The PNNI domain ID number on the source (local) switch fabric.

QoSExpIndex

The index number in the QoS expansion table that is used to do QoS class-to-parameter
expansion when sending the point-to-point SPVC call set-up message across a PNNI link.
See the QoSExpIndex field under connections qos show for this number.

3 - 80

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Connections Commands

Field

Description

Last Failure Cause

The reason for the last call setup failure for this PNNI point-to-point SPVC. This field is
only displayed for originating SPVCs that are down.

Failure Location

Upon a call setup failure for this PNNI point-to-point SPVC, indicates the exact link, VPI,
and NSAP address where the failure occurred.

Last Change Time

If applicable, shows, in hundredths of a second, the time since this PNNI point-to-point
SPVC was created or the time since the last successful call setup occurred. The STATE
shows up.

Uptime

The amount of time that this SPVC has been up.

Retry Count

Displays the number of times the call setup has been attempted since the PNNI point-topoint SPVC was created or since the last successful call setup occurred. This is only
displayed when the STATE is down.

Redundancy GroupID

The SPVC redundancy group index number.

Secondary VPI

The secondary virtual path identifier of an SPVC redundancy group.

Secondary VCI

The secondary virtual channel identifier of an SPVC redundancy group.

Connections
Commands

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

3 - 81

Connections Commands

3.8.4

connections spvcc spans

The commands listed under connections spvcc spans allow you to configure SPANS
SPVCs. To create a SPANS SPVC, you must configure the two ends concurrently on the two
switch fabrics. Therefore, you must have an AMI session open on both the local switch fabric
and the destination switch fabric. Type ? at the spans level to display the list of available
subcommands.
myswitch:connections spvcc spans-> ?
destination>

The destination directory

source>

The source directory

3.8.4.1 connections spvcc spans destination


The commands listed under spvcc spans destination let you delete, create, and display
destination SPANS SPVCCs. Type ? at the destination level to display the list of available
subcommands.
myswitch:connections spvcc spans destination-> ?
delete

Delete a destination SPANS Smart Channel

new

Create a new destination SPANS Smart Channel

show

Display destination SPANS spvcc

3.8.4.1.1

connections spvcc spans destination delete

This command lets you delete an existing SPANS destination SPVC.


myswitch:connections spvcc spans destination-> delete
Usage:
[-spvcid] <integer>

Spvc Id

[[-switchaddr] <SPANS Address>]

Switch Addr

[[-srcspvcid] <integer>]

Src Spvc Id

[[-srcswitchaddr] <SPANS Address>]

Src Switch Addr

[[-outatmif] <AtmIf>]

Out AtmIf

[[-outvpi] <integer>]

Out VPI

[[-outvci] <integer>]

Out VCI

[[-allocbandwidth] <integer>]

Alloc Bandwidth

[[-uptime] <integer>]

Up Time

[[-status] <status>]

Status

3 - 82

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Connections Commands

The parameters are defined in the same manner as for the connections spvcc spans
destination new command (see Section 3.8.4.1.2).
3.8.4.1.2

connections spvcc spans destination new

This command lets you create a new destination (unidirectional SPANS SPVC going from the
remote switch fabric to the local switch fabric) SPANS SPVC.
myswitch:connections spvcc spans destination-> new
Usage:
[-spvcid] <integer>

Spvc Id

[-srcspvcid] <integer>

Src Spvc Id

[-srcswitchaddr] <SPANS Address>

Src Switch Addr

[-outatmif] <AtmIf>

Out AtmIf

[-outvpi] <integer>

Out VPI

[-outvci] <integer>

Out VCI

[[-allocbandwidth] <integer>]

Alloc Bandwidth (default: 0)

The parameters for delete and new are defined as follows:


Parameter

Description
A unique number that the SCP assigned to this SPANS SPVC.

-srcspvcid <integer>

The port number on the local switch fabric.

-srcswitchaddr
<SPANS Address>

The IP address of the remote switch.

-outatmif <AtmIf>

The port number on the remote switch fabric.

-outvpi <integer>

The virtual path number on the remote switch fabric.

-outvci <integer>

The virtual channel number on the remote switch fabric.

-allocbandwidth <integer>

The amount of peak bandwidth allocated for this SPANS SPVC, specified in kilobits
per second. The default is 0.

-uptime <integer>

The amount of time that this SPANS SPVC has been up.

-status <status>

The status of the SPANS SPVC (up, down, or failed).

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

3 - 83

Connections
Commands

-spvcid <integer>

Connections Commands

3.8.4.1.3

connections spvcc spans destination show

This command lets you display destination SPANS SPVCs.


myswitch:connections spvcc spans destination-> show
Local

Remote

State

ID

AtmIf

VPI

VCI

BW

ID

10

1A1

60

up

up

Source ATM Addr: 00000000.f21c3950


11

1A1

61

Source ATM Addr: 00000000.f21c3950

If no destination SPANS SPVCs have been created, the following displays:


myswitch:connections spvcc spans destination-> show
No Destination SPANS spvcc

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Field

Description

ID

A unique number that the SCP assigned to this SPANS SPVC.

Local AtmIf

The port number on the local switch fabric.

VPI

The virtual path number on the remote switch fabric.

VCI

The virtual channel number on the remote switch fabric.

BW

The amount of peak bandwidth allocated for this SPANS SPVC, specified in kilobits
per second. The default is 0.

Remote ID

The fabric ID that is assigned to the remote switch fabric.

State

The status of the SPANS SPVC (up, down, or failed).

Source ATM Addr

The IP address of the source switch.

3 - 84

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Connections Commands

3.8.4.2 connections spvcc spans source


The commands listed under connections spvcc spans source let you delete, create, and
display source SPANS SPVCCs. Type ? at the source level to display the list of available
subcommands.
myswitch:connections spvcc spans source-> ?
delete

Delete a source SPANS Smart Channel

new

Create a new source SPANS Smart Channel

show

Display source SPANS spvcc

3.8.4.2.1

connections spvcc spans source delete

This command lets you delete an existing source SPANS SPVC.


myswitch:connections spvcc spans source-> delete
Usage:
[-spvcid] <integer>

Spvc Id

[[-inatmif] <AtmIf>]

In AtmIf

[[-invpi] <integer>]

In VPI

[[-invci] <integer>]

In VCI

[[-switchaddr] <SPANS Address>]

Switch Addr

[[-destspvcid] <integer>]

Dest Spvc Id

[[-destswitchaddr] <SPANS Address>]

Dest Switch Addr

[[-allocbandwidth] <integer>]

Alloc Bandwidth

[[-uptime] <integer>]

Up Time

[[-status] <status>]

Status

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

3 - 85

Connections
Commands

The parameters are defined in the same manner as for the connections spvcc spans
source new command (see Section 3.8.4.2.2).

Connections Commands

3.8.4.2.2

connections spvcc spans source new

This command lets you create a new source SPANS SPVC (unidirectional SPANS SPVC going
from the local switch fabric to the remote switch fabric).
myswitch:connections spvcc spans source-> new
Usage:
[-spvcid] <integer>

Spvc Id

[-inatmif] <AtmIf>

In AtmIf

[-invpi] <integer>

In VPI

[-invci] <integer>

In VCI

[-destspvcid] <integer>

Dest Spvc Id

[-destswitchaddr] <SPANS Address>


[[-allocbandwidth] <integer>]

Dest Switch Addr


Alloc Bandwidth (default: 0)

The parameters for delete and new are defined as follows:


Parameter

Description

-spvcid <integer>

A unique number that the SCP assigned to this SPANS SPVC.

-inatmif <AtmIf>

The port number on the local switch fabric.

-invpi <integer>

The virtual path number on the local switch fabric.

-invci <integer>

The virtual channel number on the local switch fabric.

-destspvcid <integer>

The port number on the remote switch fabric.

-destwitchaddr
<SPANS Address)

The IP address of the remote switch.

-allocbandwidth <integer>

The amount of peak bandwidth allocated for this SPANS SPVC, specified in kilobits
per second. The default is 0.

-switchaddr <SPANS Address>

The switch SPANS address.

-uptime <integer>

The amount of time that this SPANS SPVC has been up.

-status <status>

The status of the SPANS SPVC (up, down, or failed).

3 - 86

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Connections Commands

3.8.4.2.3

connections spvcc spans source show

This command lets you display SPANS source SPVCs.


myswitch:connections spvcc spans source-> show
Local

Remote

State

ID

AtmIf

VPI

VCI

BW

ID

4B1

50

10

up

11

up

Remote ATM Addr: 00000000.f21c3965


2

4B1

51

Remote ATM Addr: 00000000.f21c3965

If no destination SPANS SPVCs have been created, the following displays:


myswitch:connections spvcc spans source-> show
No Source SPANS spvcc

The fields are defined as follows:


Field

Description
A unique number that the SCP assigned to this SPANS SPVC.

Local AtmIf

The port number on the local switch fabric.

VPI

The virtual path number on the local switch fabric.

VCI

The virtual channel number on the local switch fabric.

BW

The amount of peak bandwidth allocated for this SPANS SPVC, specified in kilobits
per second. The default is 0.

Remote ID

The fabric ID assigned to the remote switch fabric.

State

The operating status of this SPANS SPVC (up, down, or failed).

Remote ATM Addr

The IP address of the remote switch.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Connections
Commands

ID

3 - 87

Connections Commands

3.9 connections spvpc


The commands listed under connections spvpc let you configure Smart Permanent Virtual
Path Connections (SPVPCs, hereafter to referred to as SPVPs). An SPVP is a path that goes
across multiple switch fabrics. An SPVP looks like a PVP at the local and remote endpoints
with a Switched Virtual Path (SVP) in the middle. SPVPs are more robust than PVPs. If an
SPVP goes down and there is an alternate route, then the end switch fabrics of the SPVP
automatically reroute the SPVP around the failed link.

NOTE

SVPs and SPVPs are supported in ATM Forum


PNNI networks. Point-to-multipoint SVPs and
SPVPs are not supported.

Type ? at the spvpc level to display the list of available subcommands.


myswitch:connections spvpc-> ?
delete

Delete a source PNNI spvpc

destination

Display destination PNNI spvpc

modify

Change the priority of a source PNNI spvpc

new

Create a new source PNNI spvpc

number

Display number of PNNI spvpc

parameters

Display/Modify PNNI spvpc parameters

show

Display source PNNI spvpc

3 - 88

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Connections Commands

3.9.1

connections spvpc delete

This command lets you delete an existing SPVP from the source end. You must specify the
index number assigned to the SPVP that you want to delete.
myswitch:connections spvpc-> delete
Usage:
[-index] <integer>

index

[[-callingatmif] <AtmIf>]

Src AtmIf

[[-callingvpi] <integer>]

Src VPI

[[-calledatmaddr] <NSAP Address>]

Destination NSAP

[[-calledatmif] <integer>]

Dst AtmIf

[[-calledvpi] <integer>]

Called VPI

[[-calledassignedvpi] <integer>]

Dst VPI

[[-calledvpvcsel] (noPref|require)]

Dst VPVC Sel

[[-fwdupckey] <UPC Index>]

Fwd UPC

[[-bckupckey] <UPC Index>]

Bck UPC

[[-susceptclip] (no|yes)]

CLIP

[[-fwdqosclass] <QoS Class>]

Fwd QoS CLass

[[-bckqosclass] <QoS Class>]

Bck QoS CLass

[[-lastfailcause] <text>]

Last Fail Cause

[[-retrycount] <integer>]

Retry Count

[[-lastchangetime] <timeticks>]

Last Change Time

[[-status] (up|down)]

Status

[[-name] <text>]

Name

[[-routecost] <integer>]

Route Cost

[[-reroutestatus] (enabled|disabled)]

Reroute Status
Calling Domain

[[-qosindex] <integer>]

Qos Index

[[-priority] <integer>]

Priority

[[-lastlocation] <text>]

Last Location

[[-backoffstatus] (enabled|disabled)]

DTL Backoff Status

[[-activedtlindex] <integer>]

Active DTL Index

[[-activedtlnode] <nodeid>]

Active DTL Node

[[-dtltag] <integer>]

DTL Tag

[[-autodtlstatus] (enabled|disabled)]

Auto DTL

[[-rgroupid] <integer>]

Redundancy Group ID

[[-secondaryvpi] <integer>]

Secondary VPI

Connections
Commands

[[-callingdomain] <integer>]

The parameters are defined in the same manner as for the connections spvpc new
command (see Section 3.9.4).

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

3 - 89

Connections Commands

3.9.2

connections spvpc destination

This command lets you display destination PNNI SPVPs.


myswitch:connections spvpc-> destination
Source

Destination

Redundancy

INDEX

ATMIF

VPI

ATMIF

VPI

STATE

179

1A1

15

up

Source

Group ID
N/A

: 0x47.0005.80.ffe100.0000.f21c.3950.0020480d00b3.00

Destination: 0x47.0005.80.ffe100.0000.f21c.3965.0020480d0000.00
2

179

Source

1A1

16

up

N/A

: 0x47.0005.80.ffe100.0000.f21c.3950.0020480d00b3.00

Destination: 0x47.0005.80.ffe100.0000.f21c.3965.0020480d0000.00

If destination PNNI SPVPs have not been created, the following displays:
myswitch:connections spvpc-> destination
No Destination PNNI spvpc

To display more information, enter the following:


myswitch:connections spvpc-> destination -advanced
Source

Destination

Redundancy

INDEX

ATMIF

VPI

ATMIF

VPI

179

1A1

15

Source

STATE
up

Group ID
N/A

: 0x47.0005.80.ffe100.0000.f21c.3950.0020480d00b3.00

Destination: 0x47.0005.80.ffe100.0000.f21c.3965.0020480d0000.00
ForwardQos = class0, BackwardQos = class0
Uptime = 00:20, Clip = no
2
Source

179

1A1

16

up

N/A

: 0x47.0005.80.ffe100.0000.f21c.3950.0020480d00b3.00

Destination: 0x47.0005.80.ffe100.0000.f21c.3965.0020480d0000.00
ForwardQos = class0, BackwardQos = class0
Uptime = 00:00, Clip = no

The parameters are defined in the same manner as for the connections spvpc new
command (see Section 3.9.4).

3 - 90

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Connections Commands

3.9.3

connections spvpc modify

This command lets you change the priority of an existing SPVP from the source end. Enter the
index number assigned to the SPVP that you want to modify.
myswitch:connections spvpc-> modify
Usage:
[-index] <integer>
[[-priority] <integer>]

index
Priority

[[-backoffstatus] (enabled|disabled)]

DTL Backoff Status

[[-dtltag] <integer>]

DTL Tag

[[-autodtlstatus] (enabled|disabled)]

Auto DTL

The parameters are defined in the same manner as for the connections spvpc new
command (see Section 3.9.4).

Connections
Commands

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

3 - 91

Connections Commands

3.9.4

connections spvpc new

This command lets you create a new SPVP.


myswitch:connections spvpc-> new
Usage:
[[-index] <integer>]

index (default: 14547)

[-callingatmif] <AtmIf>

Src AtmIf

[-callingvpi] <integer>

Src VPI

[-calledatmaddr] <NSAP Address>

Destination NSAP

[[-calledvpi] <integer>]

Called VPI

[[-fwdupckey] <UPC Index>]

Fwd UPC (default: 0)

[[-bckupckey] <UPC Index>]

Bck UPC (default: 0)

[[-susceptclip] (no|yes)]

CLIP (default: no)

[[-fwdqosclass] <QoS Class>]

Fwd QoS CLass (default: class0)

[[-bckqosclass] <QoS Class>]

Bck QoS CLass (default: class0)

[[-name] <text>]

Name (default: )

[[-reroutestatus] (enabled|disabled)]

Reroute Status (default: disabled)

[[-callingdomain] <integer>]

Calling Domain (default: 1)

[[-qosindex] <integer>]

Qos Index (default: 0)

[[-priority] <integer>]

Priority (default: 5)

[[-backoffstatus] (enabled|disabled)]

DTL Backoff Status (default: enabled)

[[-dtltag] <integer>]

DTL Tag

[[-autodtlstatus] (enabled|disabled)]

Auto DTL (default: enabled)

[[-rgroupid] <integer>]

Redundancy Group ID

[[-secondaryvpi] <integer>]

Secondary VPI

The parameters for delete, destination, modify, and new are defined as follows:
Parameter

Description

-index <integer>

The index number assigned to this SPVP to identify it uniquely. For SPVPs, the index
number may be assigned either by AMI or by the user. Valid values are integers between 1
and 65535.

-callingatmif <AtmIf>

The port number where the permanent portion of the SPVP resides on the source (local)
switch fabric.

-callingvpi <integer>

The virtual path number for the permanent portion of the SPVP on the source (local)
switch fabric.

-calledatmaddr
<NSAP Address>

The ATM NSAP address of the destination (remote) switch for this SPVP.

-calledvpi <integer>

The virtual path number on the destination switch fabric for this SPVP. If this parameter is
not used, the destination switch uses any available value.

3 - 92

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Connections Commands

Parameter

Description
The forward (going from the local switch fabric to the remote switch fabric) UPC contract
index assigned to this SPVP. To find the index you want, use the connections upc show
command. If no index is specified, the default index of 0 (UBR best effort) is used.

-bckupckey <UPC Index>

The backward (going from the remote switch fabric to the local switch fabric) UPC
contract index assigned to this SPVP. To find the index you want, use the connections
upc show command. If no index is specified, the default index of 0 (UBR best effort) is
used.

-susceptclip (no | yes)

During speech transmission, clipping is the loss of a brief interval at the beginning of a
speech spurt. no indicates this SPVP is not susceptible to clipping. yes indicates this
SPVP is susceptible to clipping. The default is no.

-fwdqosclass <QoS Class>

The requested QoS class for this SPVP in the forward (calling to called) direction. The -fqos
and -bqos options must be either both class0 or both a non-zero class. The default is class0.

-bckqosclass <QoS Class>

The requested QoS class for this SPVP in the backward (called to calling) direction. The -fqos
and -bqos options must be either both class0 or both a non-zero class. The default is class0.

-name <text>

An optional name for the user to assign to this SPVP to help uniquely identify it.

-reroutestatus
(enabled|disabled)

enabled indicates that this SPVP will be examined periodically to see if it is using a suboptimal route. If it is, it will be rerouted using a better route if configured using
connections spvpc parameters. disabled indicates that this SPVP will not be
examined periodically to see if it is using a sub-optimal route. The default state for SPVPs
is disabled.

-callingdomain <integer>

The PNNI domain ID number on the source (local) switch fabric. The default is 1, which is
the ID of the default routing domain.

-qosindex <integer>

The index number in the QoS expansion table that is used to do QoS class-to-parameter
expansion when sending the SPVP call set-up message across a PNNI link. See the
QoSExpIndex field under connections qos show for this number. The qosindex that
is specified for this SPVP must already be present in the switch. The default is 0.

-priority <integer>

The order in which and the frequency with which you want this SPVP to be tried for a
connection. Higher priority SPVPs are tried more often than lower priority ones. The
value of lowestpriority determines the number of times each SPVP is tried before
attempting a lower priority SPVP. Valid values are from 1 to lowestpriority, with 1
being the highest priority (the first tried) and with lowestpriority being the value
configured under connections spvpc parameters -lowestpriority. The default
value is half of the value of lowestpriority, rounded off to the lowest integer. The
value for lowestpriority is defaulted to 10.

-backoffstatus
(enabled|disabled)

enabled means the back-off mechanism is used for this SPVP. Upon a failure, the failed
directed DTL is not retried until the amount of time specified under connections
spvpc parameters -backoffinterval has elapsed. This allows old information to
age out. disabled means the back-off mechanism is not used for this SPVP and directed
DTLs that are configured for this SPVP are retried continually even after a failure. The
default is enabled. See Chapter 3 of Part 3 of this manual for more information.

-dtltag <integer>

The Designated Transit List (DTL) tag, or index number, assigned to this SPVP which corresponds to a list of preferred DTLs that you configure under routing dtltable. The
DTL specifies the preferred call routing for the SVP portion of the SPVP.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

3 - 93

Connections
Commands

-fwdupckey <UPC Index>

Connections Commands

Parameter

Description

-autodtlstatus
(enabled|disabled)

Indicates whether automatic DTL routing is enabled or disabled. enable means that
dynamic path computation is used to route an SPVC when all of the configured DTLs fail.
disable means that dynamic path computation is not used to route an SPVC when all of
the configured DTLs fail. This feature applies to PNNI DTLs. The default is enable. This
flag does not apply when no DTLs are configured.

-rgroupid <integer>

The SPVC redundancy group index number.

-secondaryvpi <integer>

The secondary virtual path identifier of an SPVC redundancy group.

-activedtlindex <integer>

The Active Designated Transit List (DTL) index for this SPVPC (Smart Permanent Virtual
Path Circuit). This value, along with -activedtlnode, uniquely identifies the DTL that
is currently used by the SVC portion of the SPVPC.

-activedtlnode <integer>

The Node index of the Active Designated Transit List for this SPVPC (Smart Permanent
Virtual Path Circuit). The active DTL indexed by the node index and DTL index identifies
the DTL that is currently used by the SVC portion of the SPVPC.

-calledassignedvpi
<integer>

The virtual path number on the destination switch fabric for this SPVP. If this parameter is
not used, the destination switch uses any available value

-calledatmif <integer>

The port number of the destination switch for this SPVP.

-calledvpvcse1
(noPref|require)

NoPref means that you did not specify which VPI that the destination switch should use
for the permanent portion of the through path when this SPVP was created. If the
destination switch is a Marconi switch, the value is displayed in the Destination VPI
field. If the destination switch is not a Marconi switch, a ? is displayed in the
Destination VPI field. Require means that the destination switch must use the VPI
given when the SPVP was created for the permanent portion of the through path.

-lastchangetime <timeticks>

If applicable, shows, in hundredths of a second, the time since this PNNI point-to-point
SPVC was created or the time since the last successful call setup occurred. The STATE
shows up.

-lastfailcause <text>

The reason for the last call setup failure for this PNNI point-to-point SPVC. This field is
only displayed for originating SPVCs that are down.

-lastlocation <text>

Upon a call setup failure for this PNNI point-to-point SPVC, indicates the exact link, VPI,
and NSAP address where the failure occurred.

-retrycount <integer>

Displays the number of times the call setup has been attempted since the SPVP was
created or since the last successful call setup occurred. This is only displayed when the
STATE is down.

-routecost <integer>

The current call routing cost for this originating PNNI point-to-point SPVC. If the SPVC is
down, shows N/A.

-status (up|down)

The operational status of this SPVP.

-uptime <integer>

The amount of time that this SPVP has been up.

3 - 94

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Connections Commands

3.9.5

connections spvpc number

This command lets you display the number of source and destination PNNI SPVPs.
myswitch:connections spvpc-> number
Source PNNI spvpc

2000

Destination PNNI spvpc 0

3.9.6

connections spvpc parameters

This command lets you display or modify PNNI SPVP parameters. To display the
configuration, enter the following:
myswitch:connections spvpc-> parameters
Pace Interval (millisecs):

2000

Pace Calls/Interval:

20

Reroute Interval (millisecs):

15000

Reroute Calls/Interval:

15

Reroute Threshold:

75%

Lowest Priority:

10

DTL Backoff Interval (secs):

600

Traps Sent for SPVPCs:

reroute

To modify the parameters, enter the following:

[[-paceinterval] <integer>]

Pace Interval (millisecs)

[[-pacenum] <integer>]

Pace Calls/Interval

[[-rerouteinterval] <integer>]

Reroute Interval (millisecs)

[[-reroutenum] <integer>]

Reroute Calls/Interval

[[-reroutethreshold] <percent>]

Reroute Threshold

[[-lowestpriority] <integer>]

Lowest Priority

[[-backoffinterval] <integer>]

DTL Backoff Interval (secs)

[[-trapmode] <spvpc_traps>]

Traps Sent for SPVPCs

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Connections
Commands

myswitch:connections spvpc-> parameters ?

3 - 95

Connections Commands

The parameters are defined as follows:


Parameter

Description

-paceinterval <integer>

The interval, in milliseconds, between call setup attempts. Values can be from 50 to
300,000 ms. The least significant millisecond value is rounded off. For example a value
of 6,788 is converted to 6,780. The default is 2,000 ms.

-pacenum <integer>

The number of SPVPs which can be set up at one time during an attempt. Values can be
from 1 to 1000. The default is 20 calls.

-rerouteinterval <integer>

The time interval, in milliseconds, between successive callbacks to the SPVP controller to
check for and reroute existing SPVPs if a better route becomes available. The least
significant millisecond value is rounded off. For example, a value of 6,788 is converted to
6,780. The default is 15,000 ms. The range of valid values is 50 to 3,600,000 ms,
inclusive.

-reroutenum <integer>

Indicates how many up SPVPs, per interval, will be analyzed to determine whether or not
those SPVPs need to be rerouted. The default is 15 SPVPs.

-reroutethreshold <percent>

The minimum percentage improvement in the cost that the new SPVP must have over the
current SPVP before a reroute is performed. The default value is 75 percent. The range of
valid values is 1 to 99, inclusive.

-lowestpriority <integer>

The value that you want to be the lowest value (last tried and least often tried) when
determining the order in which and the frequency with which SPVPs are tried for a
connection. This value cannot be less than the priority of an existing SPVP and it cannot be
greater than 100. The default is 10.

-backoffinterval <integer>

The amount of time, in seconds, that failed directed DTLs should be held before they are
tried again. This value is used by all SPVPs that have the back-off mechanism enabled. (It
is enabled by default.) The value must be an integer from 0 to 90,000 (0 - 25 hours).
Entering a value of 0 disables the DTL back-off mechanism for SPVPs. The default is 600
seconds. If the backoff mechanism is enabled, directed DTLs that fail will be off for the
amount of time specified here before they are tried again. This backoff interval allows the
network to stabilize before attempting the failed DTL again.

-trapmode <spvpc_traps>

In previous ForeThought releases, an spvcRerouteInitiated trap (number 1090) is sent


whenever an SPVC is torn down and rerouted because a more optimal route has become
available. This command gives you more flexibility to configure which trap(s) should be
sent, on a per-switch basis, when an SPVC is set up or torn down. SPVP traps are
generated only by the source of an SPVP. The destination side of an SPVP does not
generate any traps. reroute indicates an spvcRerouteInitiated trap will be sent
when an SPVP is torn down because a better route has become available or because a
network failure has occurred. This is the default. failure indicates a pnniSpvpcFail
trap will be sent if a call cannot be established after 16 consecutive attempts. A
pnniSpvpcUp trap is sent if a call is established that has previously sent a
pnniSpvpcFail trap. none indicates no SPVC traps will be sent. all indicates a
pnniSpvpcDown trap will be sent (instead of the spvcRerouteInitiated trap) when
an SPVC is torn down because a better route has become available or because a network
failure has occurred. A pnniSpvpcFail trap is sent if a call cannot be established after 16
consecutive attempts. A pnniSpvpcUp trap is sent when a call is established.

3 - 96

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Connections Commands

3.9.7

connections spvpc show

This command lets you display originating and terminating SPVPs associated with this
switch.
myswitch:connections spvpc-> show
Source

Destination

INDEX

ATMIF VPI

UPC

ATMIF VPI

UPC

VPVC-SEL PRIORITY STATE

4C4

57

noPref

10

N/A

down

Destination: 0x47.0005.80.ffe100.0000.f209.0004.0020480d0039.00

If no source PNNI SPVPs have been configured, the following displays:


myswitch:connections spvpc-> show
No Source PNNI spvpc

To display more information, enter the following.


myswitch:connections spvpc-> show -advanced
Source

Destination

INDEX

ATMIF VPI

UPC

ATMIF VPI

UPC

VPVC-SEL PRIORITY STATE

4C4

57

noPref

10

N/A

down

Destination: 0x47.0005.80.ffe100.0000.f209.0004.0020480d0039.00
ForwardQos = class0 , BackwardQos = class0 , Clip = no
DTL Info:
DtlTag = 0
Backoff = enabled , AutoDtl = enabled
Advanced Info:
Domainid = 1 ,

, Reroute = disabled

Connections
Commands

Name = N/A , Cost = 0

QosExpIndex = 0

Last Failure Cause = resource-unavailable-or-unspecified-Cause47


LastFailureLocation=LCL:1 LINK:65533 VPI:65533 NSAP:47000580ffe1000000f21c457
Time = 00:25 , RetryCount = 110
Redundancy GroupID = N/A, Secondary VPI = N/A

The fields for show and show -advanced are defined as follows:
Field
INDEX

Description
The index number assigned to this SPVP by AMI to identify it uniquely from other SPVPs
that have this switch fabric as their source.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

3 - 97

Connections Commands

Field

Description

Source ATMIF

The port identifier on the originating switch fabric that contains the permanent portion for
this SPVP.

Source VPI

The virtual path number used for the through path in the permanent portion of this SPVP
on the originating switch fabric.

Source UPC

The forward (going from the local switch fabric to the remote switch fabric) UPC contract
index associated with this SPVP.

Destination ATMIF

The port identifier on the terminating switch fabric that contains the permanent portion
for this SPVP, if the destination end is a Marconi switch. If the port at the destination
switch cannot be determined, a question mark (?) is displayed.

Destination VPI

The virtual path number on the destination switch fabric that contains the permanent
portion for this SPVP. any means the user did not specify the VPI to be used at the
destination.

Destination UPC

The backward (going from the remote switch fabric to the local switch fabric) UPC
contract index associated with this SPVP.

VPVC-SEL

NoPref means that you did not specify which VPI that the destination switch should use
for the permanent portion of the through path when this SPVP was created. If the
destination switch is a Marconi switch, the value is displayed in the Destination VPI
field. If the destination switch is not a Marconi switch, a ? is displayed in the
Destination VPI field. Require means that the destination switch must use the VPI
given when the SPVP was created for the permanent portion of the through path.

PRIORITY

The order in which this SPVP is tried for a connection. Values are from 1 to
lowestpriority, with 1 being the highest priority (the first tried and the most often
tried) and with lowestpriority being the value configured under connections
spvpc parameters -lowestpriority. This parameter only applies to the source
switch.

STATE

The state of this SPVP. Can be up or down.

Destination

The NSAP ATM address for the terminating side of the SPVP.

ForwardQos

The requested quality of service for this SPVP in the forward (calling to called) direction.

BackwardQos

The requested quality of service for this SPVP in the backward (called to calling) direction.

Clip

no means this SPVP is not susceptible to clipping and yes means it is susceptible to
clipping.

DtlTag

The Designated Transit List (DTL) tag, or index number, assigned to this SPVP which
corresponds to a DTL table that you configure under routing dtltable. The DTL
specifies the preferred call routing for the SVC portion of the SPVP.

Backoff

enabled means the back-off mechanism is used for this SPVP. Upon a failure, directed
DTLs that are configured for this SPVP are not retried until the amount of time specified
under connections spvpc parameters -backoffinterval has elapsed. This allows
old information to age out. disabled means the back-off mechanism is not used for this
SPVP and directed DTLs that are configured for this SPVP are retried continually upon a
failure.

3 - 98

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Connections Commands

Field

Description

AutoDtl

enabled means that dynamic path computation is used to route an SPVP when all of the
configured DTLs fail or when no DTLs are configured. disabled means that dynamic
path computation is not used to route an SPVP when all of the configured DTLs fail or
when no DTLs are configured. This feature applies to PNNI DTLs.

Name

The optional name assigned to this SPVP to help identify it. If no name is assigned, N/A is
displayed.

Cost

The current call routing cost for this originating SPVP. If the SPVP is down, shows N/A.

Reroute

enabled means this SPVP is examined to see if it is using a sub-optimal route. If it is, it is
rerouted according to the parameters in connections spvpc parameters
-reroutestatus. disabled means this SPVP is not examined to see if it is using a suboptimal route.

Domainid

The PNNI domain ID number on the source (local) switch fabric.

QoSExpIndex

The index number in the QoS expansion table that is used to do QoS class-to-parameter
expansion when sending the SPVP call set-up message across a PNNI link. See the
QoSExpIndex field under connections qos show for this number.

Last Failure Cause

The reason for the last call setup failure for this SPVP. This field is only displayed for
originating SPVPs that are down.

LastFailureLocation

Upon a call setup failure for this PNNI SPVC, indicates the exact link, VPI, and NSAP
address where the failure occurred.

Time

If applicable, shows, in hundredths of a second, the time since this SPVP was created or
the time since the last successful call setup occurred.

Retry Count

Displays the number of times the call setup has been attempted since the SPVP was
created or since the last successful call setup occurred. This is only displayed when the
STATE is down.

Redundancy GroupID

The SPVC redundancy group index number.

Secondary VPI

The secondary virtual path identifier of an SPVC redundancy group.

Connections
Commands

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

3 - 99

Connections Commands

3.10 connections spvxredundancy


The commands listed under connections spvxredundancy let you configure PVC
redundancy for SPVCs.
The switched portion (SVC) of an SPVC can be dynamically rerouted in case of network
failures. In the case of failure in the permanent portion (PVC) of an SPVC, or if there is a
failure at the host end of the PVC side, you can switch to another PVC portion on another
interface on the same switch. From an end-to-end perspective of an SPVC, an SPVC can then
be considered fully redundant. Two ports on the same switch can be grouped as primary and
secondary SPVC ports (referred to as SPVC redundancy group). This redundancy group is
assigned an SPVC redundancy group index and a unique NSAP address.
Type ? at the spvxredundancy level to display the list of available subcommands.
myswitch:connections spvxredundancy-> ?
delete

Delete an SPVC Redundancy Group

modify

Modify an SPVC Redundancy Group

new

Create a new SPVC Redundancy Group

nsapaddr

Compute the NSAP address for this SPVC Redundancy Group


as destination

show

Display the SPVC Redundancy Group configuration

switchover

Switchover an SPVC Redundancy Group

3 - 100

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Connections Commands

3.10.1 connections spvxredundancy delete


This command lets you delete an SPVC redundancy group. If there are SPVCs referring to this
index, the entry cannot be deleted. An entry can only be deleted if all SPVCs (active, inactive,
present in the CDB, not shown, etc.) referencing this index are removed.
myswitch:connections spvxredundancy-> delete
Usage:
[-index] <integer>

Redundancy Group ID

[[-primaryatmif] <AtmIf>]

Primary AtmIf

[[-secondaryatmif] <AtmIf>]

Secondary AtmIf

[[-activeatmif] <AtmIf>]

Active AtmIf

[[-name] <text>]

Name

[[-autoswitchover] (enabled|disabled)]

Auto PVC Switch Over

[[-pacingnumber] <integer>]

Pacing Number

[[-pacinginterval] <integer>]

Pacing Interval

[[-nsapaddr] <NSAP Address>]

NSAP Address

[[-switchover] (primary|secondary)]

Switch Over

[[-state] <state>]

State

The parameters are defined in the same manner as for the connections spvxredundancy
new command (see Section 3.10.3).

3.10.2 connections spvxredundancy modify


This command lets you change the switchover port for an entry in an SPVX redundancy
group.
Connections
Commands

myswitch:connections spvxredundancy-> modify


Usage:
[-index] <integer>
[[-switchover] (primary|secondary)]

Redundancy Group ID
Switch Over

The parameters are defined in the same manner as for the connections spvxredundancy
new command (see Section 3.10.3).

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

3 - 101

Connections Commands

3.10.3 connections spvxredundancy new


This command lets you create primary and secondary port pairs. The automatic PVC
switchover indicates if the PVC switchover can be automatic (i.e., when there is a carrier loss).
myswitch:connections spvxredundancy-> new
Usage:
[[-index] <integer>]

Redundancy Group ID (default: 2)

[-primaryatmif] <AtmIf>

Primary AtmIf

[-secondaryatmif] <AtmIf>

Secondary AtmIf

[[-name] <text>]

Name

[[-autoswitchover] (enabled|disabled)]

Auto PVC Switch Over (default:


disabled)

[[-pacingnumber] <integer>]

Pacing Number (default: 200)

[[-pacinginterval] <integer>]

Pacing Interval (millisecs) (default:


2000)

[[-switchover] (primary|secondary)]

Switch Over Command (default:


primary)

The parameters for delete, modify, and new are defined as follows:
Parameter

Description

-index <integer>

The redundancy group index to be assigned to these ports.

-primaryatmif <AtmIf>

The port to be configured as the primary redundant port.

-secondaryatmif <AtmIf>

The port to be configured as the secondary redundant port.

-name <text>

The name of the redundancy group.

-autoswitchover (enabled|disabled)

Enable or disable automatic PVC switch over from active to standby and vice
versa. The default is disabled.

-pacingnumber <integer>

The default pacing number is 200.

-pacinginterval <integer>

The pacing interval is specified in milliseconds and the minimum is 100ms. The
default pacing interval is 2000ms (2 seconds).

-switchover (primary|secondary)

Manually switch from the primary port to the secondary port or vice versa.

-activeatmif <AtmIf>

The active port.

-nsapaddr <NSAP Address>

The NSAP address of the redundancy group.

-state <state>

The current state of the PVC switch over. InProgress means that a PVC
switchover from active to standby is in progress. NotInProgress means there
is no switchover in progress.

3 - 102

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Connections Commands

3.10.4 connections spvxredundancy nsapaddr


This command lets you compute and display the destination NSAP address for a redundancy
group. Since there may be multiple domains in a switch and an SPVC can be attached to a
particular domain, the NSAP address can be different for different domains. This NSAP
address should be used as the destination address in SPVC creation if any SPVC needs to be
terminated on this redundancy group. This command uses the -domainid from the routing
domain command.
myswitch:connections spvxredundancy-> nsapaddr
Usage:
[-domainid] <integer>

Domain ID

[-rgroupid] <integer>

Redundancy Group ID

myswitch:connections spvxredundancy-> nsapaddr 1 1


Rgroup Destination NSAP : 0x47.000580ffe1000000f21c4571.0020480d0001.80

The parameters are defined as follows:


Parameter

Description

-domainid <integer>

The PNNI domain ID on the destination switch. The prefix corresponding to


that domain is used to compute the destination NSAP address.

-rgroupid <integer>

The redundancy group index for these ports.

Connections
Commands

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

3 - 103

Connections Commands

3.10.5 connections spvxredundancy show


This command lets you display a list of all entries or a specific entry for a redundancy group.
myswitch:connections spvxredundancy-> show
RGroup Primary
Index AtmIf
1 1C1

Secondary Active

RGroup

AtmIf

AtmIf

Name

SwitchOver
State

1C2

1C1

N/A

NotInProgress

To list more details, enter the following:


myswitch:connections spvxredundancy-> show -advanced
RGroup Primary
Index AtmIf
1 1C1

Secondary Active

RGroup

SwitchOver

SwitchOver

AtmIf

AtmIf

Name

State

Command

1C2

1C1

N/A

NotInProgress primary

AutoPVCSwitchOver: disabled PacingNumber: 200 PacingInterval: 2000 msecs


NSAP Addr: 0x47.0005.80.ffe100.00ae.1e2e.0104.0020480d0001.80

The fields for show and show -advanced are defined as follows:
Field

Description

RGroup Index

The redundancy group index assigned to these ports.

Primary AtmIf

The port to be configured as the primary redundant port.

Secondary AtmIf

The port to be configured as the secondary redundant port.

Active AtmIf

The active port number.

RGroup Name

The name of the primary and secondary port pairs.

SwitchOver State

Indicates the switch over state (InProgress or NotInProgress). Modifying the


switch over state changes the active AtmIf.

SwitchOver Command

Indicates whether the primary or secondary AtmIf is active.

AutoPVCSwitchOver

Indicates whether the automatic PVC switch over from active to standby or
vice versa is enabled or disabled. The default is disabled.

PacingNumber

The default pacing number is 200.

PacingInterval

The pacing interval is specified in milliseconds and the minimum is 100ms. The
default pacing interval is 2000ms (2 seconds).

NSAP Addr

The NSAP address of the redundancy group.

3 - 104

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Connections Commands

3.10.6 connections spvxredundancy switchover


This command lets you switch over all SPVCs from the primary to secondary ports for a
particular group index. Executing this command will switch over from the active port to the
standby port.
myswitch:connections spvxredundancy-> switchover
Usage:
[-index] <integer>

Redundancy Group ID

[-switchoverto] (primary|secondary)

Switchover To

The parameters are defined as follows::


Parameter

Description

-index <integer>

The redundancy group index assigned to these ports.

-switchoverto (primary|secondary)

Switch over to the primary or secondary redundant port.

Connections
Commands

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

3 - 105

Connections Commands

3.11 connections upc


These commands let you create, delete, or display usage parameter control (UPC) traffic
contracts. These contracts can then be applied to PVCs using the connections channel new
or the connections path through new command. You can display the list of available
subcommands by typing ? at the upc level.
myswitch:connections upc-> ?
delete

Remove a upc contract

fratm>

The fratm directory

new

Create a new upc contract

new-abr

Create a new ABR contract

new-cbr

Create a new CBR contract

new-ubr

Create a new UBR contract

new-vbr

Create a new VBR contract

show

Display upc configuration

units

Change/Display the units used for upc tables

3.11.1 connections upc delete


This command allows you to delete an existing UPC contract. Enter the following parameters:
myswitch:connections upc-> delete
Usage:
[-index] <integer>
[[-servcat] <ServCat>]

Index
Service Category

[[-pscheme] <pScheme>]

Policing Scheme

[[-pcr] <integer>]

PCR

[[-scr] <integer>]

SCR

[[-mbs] <integer>]

MBS

[[-cdvt] <integer>]

CDVT

[[-name] <text>]

Name

[[-gcra] (on|off)]

GCRA Policing

[[-aal5] (yes|no)]

AAL5

[[-pktdisc] (on|off)]

Packet Discard

[[-pppol] (on|off)]

PP Policing

[[-schdmod] <SchedMode>]

Scheduling Mode

[[-altclp] (on|off)]

Alt CLP Threshold

[[-mcr] <integer>]

ABR MCR

[[-aal5cnt] <CountMode>]

AAL5 Counting Mode

3 - 106

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Connections Commands

[[-subcat] <integer (1..16)>]

Service Sub-category

[[-lbmincr] <integer>]

Load Balanced MinCR

[[-lbpcr] <integer>]

Load Balanced PCR

[[-bcs] <integer>]

Behavior Class Selector

These parameters are defined in Section 3.11.7.

3.11.2 connections upc fratm


These commands let you create or display Frame Relay UPC contracts. These contracts can be
applied to PVCs using the connections channel new or the connections path through
new command. You can display the list of available subcommands by typing ? at the fratm
level.
myswitch:connections upc fratm-> ?
new

Create Frame Relay Contracts

show

Display Frame Relay Contract

3.11.2.1 connections upc fratm new


This command lets you create a Frame Relay UPC contract. This command is only used on
VBR Frame Relay PVCs that are output on Series D network modules. The -schdmod
smoothed option must be used on the Series D network modules. Enter the following:
myswitch:connections upc fratm-> new
Usage:
[[-index] <integer>]

Index (default: 1)
VBR Policing Scheme

[-bc] <integer>

Committed burst size in bits

[-be] <integer>

Burst in excess in bits

[-cir] <integer>

Committed Information Rate in Kbps

[-ar] <integer>

Access Rate in Kbps

[-frsize] <integer>

Frame Size in bytes

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Connections
Commands

[-frame_pscheme] (vbr1|vbr2|vbr3)

3 - 107

Connections Commands

These parameters are defined as follows:


Parameter

Description

-index <integer>

The integer index that refers to this specific traffic contract. Valid index numbers are from
0 to 32,767.

-frame_pscheme
(vbr1|vbr2|vbr3)

The policing scheme for this UPC contract as defined in the ATM Forum TM 4.0
Specification.

-bc <integer>

The committed burst size of a connection, in bits. Can only be used on a Frame Relay
connection. The bc + be must be less than or equal to the ar.

-be <integer>

The excess burst size of a connection, in bits. Can only be used on a Frame Relay
connection. The bc + be must be less than or equal to the ar.

-cir <integer>

The committed information rate of a connection, in kbps. Can only be used on a Frame
Relay connection. The cir must be less than or equal to the ar. Entering 0 for this
parameter means the traffic is treated as best-effort.

-ar <integer>

The access rate of a Frame Relay UNI, in kbps. Can only be used on a Frame Relay
connection. The default value is 64. If multiple timeslots are used, you must modify this
value accordingly. The access rate for one timeslot is 64 Kbps, and the access rate for two
timeslots is 128 Kbps, etc. The access rate for 24 timeslots (max. for DS1) is 1536 Kbps and
the access rate for 31 timeslots (max. for E1) is 1984 Kbps.

-frsize <integer>

The maximum payload frame size, in bytes. Can only be used on a Frame Relay
connection. This value must not exceed 4,092. The default value is 4092.

You can then apply any UPC contract that uses these options to a Frame Relay PVC using the
-faupc <UPC Index> and -afupc <UPC Index> options under services fratm pvc new,
services fratm network-pvc new, or services fratm service-pvc new. When these
options are used, they are converted to ATM UPC parameters and are displayed as ATM
parameters.

3 - 108

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Connections Commands

3.11.2.2 connections upc fratm show


This command lets you display Frame Relay UPC contracts as follows:
myswitch:connections upc fratm-> show
Index

VBR

Committed

Excess

Committed

Access

Frame

Policing

Burst

Burst

Information Rate

Rate

Size

(bits)

(bits)

(Kbps)

(Kbps)

(bytes)

vbr1

256000

256

1544

1000

vbr2

320000

384000

256

1544

1000

These fields are defined as follows:


Parameter

Description

Index

The integer index that refers to this specific traffic contract.

VBR Policing

The VBR policing scheme for this UPC contract as defined in the ATM Forum TM 4.0
Specification.

Committed Burst

The committed burst size of a connection, in bits.

Excess Burst

The excess burst size of a connection, in bits.

Committed Information Rate The committed information rate of a connection, in kbps.


Access Rate

The access rate of a Frame Relay UNI, in kbps.

Frame Size

The maximum payload frame size, in bytes.

Connections
Commands

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

3 - 109

Connections Commands

3.11.3 connections upc new


This command lets you create a UPC contract. Enter the following parameters:
myswitch:connections upc-> new
Usage:
[-index] <integer>
[[-servcat] <ServCat>]

Index
Service Category (default: UBR)

[[-pscheme] <pScheme>]

Policing Scheme (default: ubr1)

[[-pcr] <integer>]

PCR (default: )

[[-scr] <integer>]

SCR (default: )

[[-mbs] <integer>]

MBS (default: )

[[-cdvt] <integer>]

CDVT

[[-name] <text>]

Name (default: )

[[-gcra] (on|off)]

GCRA Policing (default: off)

[[-aal5] (yes|no)]

AAL5 (default: no)

[[-pktdisc] (on|off)]

Packet Discard (default: on)

[[-pppol] (on|off)]

PP Policing (default: off)

[[-schdmod] <SchedMode>]

Scheduling Mode (default: default)

[[-altclp] (on|off)]

Alt CLP Threshold (default: off)

[[-mcr] <integer>]

ABR MCR (default: )

[[-aal5cnt] <CountMode>]

AAL5 Counting Mode (default: default)

[[-subcat] <integer (1..16)>]

Service Sub-category (default: default)

[[-lbmincr] <integer>]

Load Balanced MinCR

[[-lbpcr] <integer>]

Load Balanced PCR

[[-bcs] <integer>]

Behavior Class Selector

These parameters are defined in Section 3.11.7.

3 - 110

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Connections Commands

3.11.4 connections upc new-abr


This command lets you create an ABR UPC contract. Enter the following parameters:
myswitch:connections upc-> new-abr
Usage:
[[-index] <integer>]

Index (default: 8)

[-pcr] <integer>

PCR

[-mcr] <integer>

ABR MCR

[[-cdvt] <integer>]

CDVT

[[-name] <text>]

Name (default: )

[[-gcra] (on|off)]

GCRA Policing (default: on)

[[-aal5] (yes|no)]

AAL5 (default: no)

[[-pktdisc] (on|off)]

Packet Discard (default: on)

[[-pppol] (on|off)]

PP Policing (default: off)

[[-schdmod] <SchedMode>]

Scheduling Mode (default: default)

[[-aal5cnt] <CountMode>]

AAL5 Counting Mode (default: default)

[[-subcat] <integer (1..16)>]

Service Sub-category (default: default)

These parameters are defined in Section 3.11.7.

3.11.5 connections upc new-cbr


This command lets you create a CBR UPC contract. Enter the following parameters:
myswitch:connections upc-> new-cbr
Usage:
[[-index] <integer>]

Index (default: 8)
Policing Scheme

[-pcr] <integer>

PCR

[[-scr] <integer>]

SCR (default: )

[[-cdvt] <integer>]

CDVT

[[-name] <text>]

Name (default: )

[[-gcra] (on|off)]

GCRA Policing (default: on)

[[-aal5] (yes|no)]

AAL5 (default: no)

[[-pktdisc] (on|off)]

Packet Discard (default: on)

[[-pppol] (on|off)]

PP Policing (default: off)

[[-schdmod] <SchedMode>]

Scheduling Mode (default: default)

[[-altclp] (on|off)]

Alt CLP Threshold (default: off)

[[-aal5cnt] <CountMode>]

AAL5 Counting Mode (default: default)

[[-subcat] <integer (1..16)>]

Service Sub-category (default: default)

Connections
Commands

[-pscheme] (cbr1|cbr0|cbr0tag)

These parameters are defined in Section 3.11.7.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

3 - 111

Connections Commands

3.11.6 connections upc new-ubr


This command lets you create a UBR UPC contract. Enter the following parameters:
myswitch:connections upc-> new-ubr
Usage:
[[-index] <integer>]
[-pscheme] (ubr1|ubr2)

Index (default: 8)
Policing Scheme

[[-name] <text>]

Name (default: )

[[-aal5] (yes|no)]

AAL5 (default: no)

[[-pktdisc] (on|off)]

Packet Discard (default: on)

[[-altclp] (on|off)]

Alt CLP Threshold (default: off)

[[-aal5cnt] <CountMode>]

AAL5 Counting Mode (default: default)

[[-subcat] <integer (1..16)>]

Service Sub-category (default: default)

[[-lbmincr] <integer>]

Load Balanced MinCR

[[-lbpcr] <integer>]

Load Balanced PCR

[[-bcs] <integer>]

Behavior Class Selector

These parameters are defined in Section 3.11.7.

3.11.7 connections upc new-vbr


This command lets you create a VBR UPC contract. Enter the following parameters:
myswitch:connections upc-> new-vbr
Usage:
[[-index] <integer>]
[-servcat] (rtVBR|nrtVBR)

Index (default: 8)
Service Category

[-pscheme] (vbr1|vbr2|vbr3)

Policing Scheme

[-pcr] <integer>

PCR

[-scr] <integer>

SCR

[-mbs] <integer>

MBS

[[-cdvt] <integer>]

CDVT

[[-name] <text>]

Name (default: )

[[-gcra] (on|off)]

GCRA Policing (default: on)

[[-aal5] (yes|no)]

AAL5 (default: no)

[[-pktdisc] (on|off)]

Packet Discard (default: on)

[[-pppol] (on|off)]

PP Policing (default: off)

[[-schdmod] <SchedMode>]

Scheduling Mode (default: default)

[[-altclp] (on|off)]

Alt CLP Threshold (default: off)

[[-aal5cnt] <CountMode>]

AAL5 Counting Mode (default: default)

[[-subcat] <integer (1..16)>]

Service Sub-category (default: default)

3 - 112

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Connections Commands

The parameters for delete, new, new-abr, new-cbr, new-ubr, and new-vbr are defined as
follows:
Parameter

Description

-index <integer>

The integer index that refers to this specific traffic contract. Valid index numbers are from
0 to 32,767.

-servcat <ServCat>

The service category of the traffic that uses this contract.

-pscheme <pScheme>

The policing scheme for this UPC contract as defined in the ATM Forum TM 4.0
Specification. The cbr and cbr0 schemes are specific to Marconi switches.

-pcr <integer>

Indicates the peak cell rate.

-scr <integer>

Indicates the sustainable cell rate.

-mbs <integer>

Indicates the maximum burst size.

-cdvt <integer>

The Cell Delay Variation Tolerance (CDVT) associated with the peak cell rates, in
microseconds. If the CDVT is not specified here, the default CDVT value associated with
the port is used. (See hardware port show, interfaces atmif show, and
interfaces atmif modify -cdvt for more information).

-name <text>

The user-defined name associated with this UPC traffic contract. This helps you
remember for what traffic type this specific contract is used.

-gcra (on|off)

off means that GCRA policing is disabled on connections using this contract.
on means that GCRA policing is enabled on connections using this contract.
The default value that is displayed is dynamic based on the service category that is
entered. For the UBR service category, the default is off. For all other service categories,
the default is on.
You must use the on option when applying a UPC contract to the outbound signalling
channel using the -outputsigupc <UPC Index> variable under signalling new to
prevent the outbound signalling channel from being policed.
yes means that the connection is using the AAL5 Adaptation Layer. no means that the
connection is not using the AAL5 Adaptation Layer. The default is no.

-pktdisc (on|off)

This parameter can only be used if the connection is AAL5 (i.e., the -aal5 option is yes).
on enables EPD/PPD (AAL5 packet discard) on AAL5 connections. off disables EPD/
PPD (AAL5 packet discard) on AAL5 connections. The default is on.

-pppol (on|off)

Can only be used if the connection is AAL5 (i.e., the -aal5 option is yes). on means that
Partial Packet Policing is going to be performed on this connection. off means that Partial
Packet Policing is not going to be performed on this connection. The default is off. The
HDCOMP ASIC must be version 1 or greater to support AAL5 partial packet policing. To
display the ASIC version, use the hardware inputlookuperrors command.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

3 - 113

Connections
Commands

-aal5 (yes|no)

Connections Commands

Parameter
-schdmod <SchedMode>

Description
The scheduling mode to be used for servicing traffic on the output side of Series 2 port
cards or on Series D or Series E network modules:
roundrobin means that all service for these connections comes from one of the
round-robin queues in the network module. This is the default mode for both SVCs
and PVCs.
smoothed means that all service for these connections comes from the network
modules rate controller, which ensures that cells for these connections are transmitted
into the network at a fixed rate of R cells per second.
guaranteed is a combination of the round-robin and smoothed modes. Service for
these connections are scheduled with both fixed rate R from the rate controller, and
they have an entry in the appropriate round-robin queue.
This -schdmod <SchedMode> parameter has an effect only on connections with outputs
on Series 2 port cards or on Series D or Series E network modules. All other network
module platforms only use roundrobin scheduling. The default is default.

-altclp (on|off)

Applies to connections on Series D or Series E network modules, or to Series 2 port cards.


on means that the alternate CLP threshold (configured using hardware netmod
traffic d modify -altclp01thresh -altclp1thresh) should be used for all
connections created with this UPC contract. off means that the alternate CLP threshold
should not be used. The default is off.

-mcr <integer>

Indicates the minimum cell rate for all cells. ABR connections with an MCR equal to 0 use
the roundrobin scheduling discipline. ABR connections with an MCR greater than 0 use
the guaranteed scheduling discipline. However, if there are no suitable rate groups in the
rate controller, the ABR connections with an MCR greater than 0 are rejected. This
parameter is supported only on Series D or Series E network modules, or on Series 2 port
cards.

-aal5cnt <CountMode>

This parameter only applies to Series D or Series E network modules, or to Series 2 port
cards in an ASX-4000 switch.
packet means AAL5 packets are counted when gathering statistics for AAL5
connections.
cell means AAL5 cells are counted when gathering statistics for AAL5 connections.
default means the mode configured at the port card or network module level (packet or
cell) is used when gathering statistics for AAL5 connections. The default value is default.

-subcat <integer (1..16)>

The service subcategory for this connection. A set of connections can be grouped within a
service category. This index is used when assigning classes to a group of connections on
the Series 2 port cards in an ASX-4000 switch. The default value is default.

-lbmincr <integer>

The minimum amount of UBR bandwidth expected for this call, in kilocells/second. (The
units are entered in cells per second or kilobits per second depending on what is
configured under connections upc units. However, this number is converted to
kilocells per second and rounded up to the next whole number if needed.)
This amount is still reserved even if the actual measured amount of UBR traffic is less than
this value. Applies only to UBR connections. This value is used by the load-balanced UBR
routing feature. See Chapter 6 in the Multiservice Broadband Switch Network Configuration
Manual for more information about load-balanced UBR routing.
If the -bcs parameter is used, then this parameter must be set to 0.

3 - 114

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Connections Commands

Parameter
-lbpcr <integer>

Description
The maximum amount of UBR bandwidth expected for this call, in kilocells/second. (The
units are entered in cells per second or kilobits per second depending on what is
configured under connections upc units. However, this number is converted to
kilocells per second and rounded up to the next whole number if needed.)
This value is used by path computation to determine on which path to route the call.
Applies only to UBR connections. See Chapter 6 in the Multiservice Broadband Switch
Network Configuration Manual for more information about path computation and loadbalanced UBR routing.

-bcs <integer>

The index number of the custom Behavior Class Selector (BCS) that you want to apply to
this UPC contract. For Series E network modules, this number is found in the BCS field
under hardware netmod traffic e customBCS show. For Series 1 port cards, this
number is found in the BCS field under hardware netmod traffic pc1 customBCS
show. For Series 2 port cards, this number is found in the BCS field under hardware
netmod traffic pc2 customBCS show. When this parameter is used, the -lbmincr
parameter must be set to 0.

NOTE

NOTE

NOTE

The units for pcr, scr, and mbs are specified


either in cells per second or in bits per second,
depending on what you configured under
connections upc units. To display the current
setting, use connections upc units show. The
default is cps (cells per second).
For more information about traffic contracts, refer
to the ATM Forum UNI 4.0 Specification and the
ATM Forum TM 4.0 Specification.

interfaces atmif modify


-gcranrtvbr -gcrartvbr

Connections
Commands

PVCs that use UPC contracts that contain any of


the -gcra, -aal5, -pktdisc, and -pppol
options are valid only when the following
commands are set to svcOn or svcOff:
-gcracbr

interfaces atmif modify -aal5pktdcbr


-aal5pktdnrtvbr
-aal5pktdrtvbr
-aal5pktdubr
interfaces atmif modify
-pppnrtvbr -ppprtvbr

-pppcbr

interfaces atmif modify -ubrtagging

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

3 - 115

Connections Commands

Use interfaces atmif show -tm and


interfaces atmif show -advancedtm to check
these settings.

3 - 116

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Connections Commands

3.11.8 connections upc show


This command lets you display all of the UPC contracts as follows:
myswitch:connections upc-> show
Service

Police

Index Category Scheme

PCR

SCR

MBS

UBR

ubr1

CBR

cbr1

111

CBR

cbr0

222

111

nrtVBR

vbr1

111

100

110

nrtVBR

vbr2

222

200

210

ABR

abr1

333

CBR

cbr1

UBR

ubr1

MCR

CDVT Name
default_ubr
cbr
cbr0
vbr
vbr0

22

abr
cbr
lbubr

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Field
Index

The UPC contracts listed by index number.

Service Category

The service category of the traffic that uses this contract.

Police Scheme

The policing scheme for this UPC contract as defined in the ATM Forum TM 4.0
Specification. The cbr and cbr0 schemes are specific to Marconi switches.

PCR1

The peak cell rate for all cells for this contract.

SCR

The sustainable cell rate for all cells in this contract.

MBS

The maximum burst size for all cells in this contract.

MCR

The minimum cell rate for all cells in this ABR contract.

CDVT

The Cell Delay Variation Tolerance (CDVT) associated with the peak cell rates, in
microseconds.

Name

The user-defined name associated with this UPC traffic contract.

The units for PCR, SCR, and MBS are shown either in cps or in bps, depending on what you configured under
connections upc units. The default is cps.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

3 - 117

Connections
Commands

1.

Description

Connections Commands

3.11.8.1 connections upc show -advanced


This command lets you display advanced information for all of the UPC contracts as follows:
myswitch:connections upc-> show -advanced
Scheduling

AAL5

Index AAL5 BCS

Mode

CntMode

Service
Sub-category Name

no

N/A

default

default

default

default_ubr

no

N/A

default

default

default

cbr

no

N/A

default

default

default

cbr0

no

N/A

default

default

default

vbr

no

N/A

default

default

default

vbr0

no

N/A

guaranteed

default

default

abr

no

N/A

default

default

default

cbr

no

N/A

default

default

default

lbubr

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Field

Description

Index

The UPC contracts listed by index number.

AAL5

yes means that the connection is using the AAL5 Adaptation Layer.
no means that the connection is not using the AAL5 Adaptation Layer.

BCS

The index number of the custom Behavior Class Selector (BCS) that you want to apply to
this UPC contract.

Scheduling Mode

The scheduling mode that dictates the way traffic is serviced on the output side of Series 2
port cards or on Series D or Series E network modules.
roundrobin means that all service for these connections comes from one of the
round-robin queues in the network module. This is the default mode for both SVCs
and PVCs.
smoothed means that all service for these connections comes from the network
modules rate controller, which ensures that cells for these connections are transmitted
into the network at a fixed rate of R cells per second.
guaranteed is a combination of the round-robin and smoothed modes. Service for
these connections are scheduled with both fixed rate R from the rate controller, and
they have an entry in the appropriate round-robin queue.
default means the scheduling mode configured under interfaces atmif
schedule modify is used.

3 - 118

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Connections Commands

Field
AAL5 CntMode

Description
This parameter only applies to Series D or Series E network modules, or to Series 2 port
cards in an ASX-4000 switch.
packet means AAL5 packets are counted when gathering statistics for AAL5
connections.
cell means AAL5 cells are counted when gathering statistics for AAL5 connections.
default means the mode configured at the Series 2 port card level (packet or cell) is
used when gathering statistics for AAL5 connections. The default value is default.

Service Sub-category

The service subcategory for this connection. A set of connections can be grouped within a
service category. This index is used when assigning classes to a group of connections on
the Series 2 port cards in an ASX-4000 switch.

Name

The user-defined name associated with this UPC traffic contract.

Connections
Commands

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

3 - 119

Connections Commands

3.11.8.2 connections upc show -flags


This command lets you display the traffic management flags for the UPC contracts as follows:
myswitch:connections upc-> show -flags
Service
Index Category GCRApol PPpol AAL5 PktDisc AltCLP Name
0

UBR

off

off

no

N/A

off

default_ubr

CBR

on

off

no

N/A

off

cbr

CBR

on

off

no

N/A

off

cbr0

nrtVBR

on

off

no

N/A

off

vbr

nrtVBR

on

off

no

N/A

off

vbr0

ABR

on

off

no

N/A

off

abr

CBR

on

off

no

N/A

off

cbr

UBR

off

off

no

N/A

off

lbubr

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Field

Description

Index

The UPC contracts listed by index number.

Service Category

The service category of the traffic that uses this contract.

GCRApol

on means that GCRA policing is enabled on all connections that use this contract.
off means that GCRA policing is disabled on all connections that use this contract.

PPpol

on means that partial packet policing is enabled on all connections that use this contract.
off means that partial packet policing is disabled on all connections that use this contract.

AAL5

yes means that this is an AAL5 connection. no means that this is not an AAL5 connection.

PktDisc

on means that packet discard is enabled on all AAL5 connections that use this contract.
off means that packet discard is disabled on all AAL5 connections that use this contract.
This field only applies to AAL5 connections.

AltCLP

on means that the alternate CLP threshold (configured using hardware netmod
traffic d modify -altclp01thresh -altclp1thresh) should be used for all
connections created with this UPC contract.
off means that the alternate CLP threshold should not be used.
This field only applies to connections on Series 2 port cards or on Series D or Series E
network modules.

Name

3 - 120

The user-defined name associated with this UPC traffic contract.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Connections Commands

3.11.8.3 connections upc show -loadbal


This command lets you display UBR load-balanced routing information for the UPC contracts
as follows:
myswitch:connections upc-> show -loadbal
Index MinCR

PeakCR

Name

default_ubr

cbr

cbr0

vbr

vbr0

abr

cbr

1500

2000

lbubr

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Field

Description
The UPC contracts listed by index number.

MinCR

The minimum amount of UBR bandwidth expected for this call, in kilocells/second. This
amount is still reserved even if the actual measured amount of UBR traffic is less than this
value. Applies only to UBR connections. This value is used by the load-balanced UBR
routing feature. See Chapter 6 in the Multiservice Broadband Switch Network Configuration
Manual for more information about load-balanced UBR routing.

PeakCR

The maximum amount of UBR bandwidth expected for this call, in kilocells/second. This
value is used by path computation to determine on which path to route the call. Applies
only to UBR connections. See Chapter 6 in the Multiservice Broadband Switch Network
Configuration Manual for more information about path computation and load-balanced
UBR routing.

Name

The user-defined name associated with this UPC traffic contract.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

3 - 121

Connections
Commands

Index

Connections Commands

3.11.9 connections upc units


This command allows you to change the type of units that are being used when configuring
and displaying UPC contracts. To change the units, enter the following parameters:
myswitch:connections upc-> units ?
[[-choice] <cps/bps>]

cells or bits per second

This parameter is defined as follows:


Parameter
-choice <cps/bps>

Description
cps indicates that UPC contracts are being configured and displayed in cells per second.
The default is cps.
bps means that UPC contracts are being configured and displayed in bits per second.
When UPC contracts are created with the units as bps, any input that is not an exact
multiple of 424 bits (the equivalent of one ATM cell) is rounded off to the next higher multiple of 424 bits. For example, 650 bits is rounded off to 848 bits.

To display the type of units that are being used currently, enter the following parameters:
myswitch:connections upc-> units
Units: cps

NOTE

3 - 122

In ForeThought 6.2.x and later releases, when the


units are configured as bps, and you create a
UPC contract with the PCR, MCR, or MBS
parameter, you must enter an alpha letter k, m, or
g after the number for the switch to accept the
desired values. The alpha letter k stands for
kilobits, m stands for megabits, and g stands for
gigabits.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

CHAPTER 4

Ethernet Commands

Marconis ASX-200BX, ASX-1000, ASX-1200, TNX-210, TNX-1100, and ESX-3000 switches all
support Ethernet port functionality to their backplanes when equipped with appropriate port
cards. The physical specifications of these port cards, as well as installation and hotswapping
procedures, are detailed in the hardware and quickstart manuals which accompany the
switches and/or port cards. Please consult these documents when you have questions
concerning hardware-specific issues.
This section explains the AMI commands that are accessible to switches with properly
configured Ethernet port cards. Many of the commands and subcommands are platform
specific; that is, some of the following commands/subcommands only apply to port cards
installed in an ESX-3000 switch, while others only pertain to ASX or TNX platforms. When a
command or subcommand is only supported on a certain platform or switch, the limitation is
duly noted.
On the ESX-3000 switch, the following subcommands are displayed:
myswitch:ethernet-> ?
bridge>

The bridge directory

igmp>

The igmp directory

lec>

The lec directory

mpc>

The mpc directory

system>

The system directory

vlan>

The vlan directory

On the ASX-200BX, ASX-1000, ASX-1200, TNX-210, and TNX-1100 switches, the following
subcommand is displayed:
myswitch:ethernet-> ?
bridge>

The bridge directory

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

4-1

Ethernet Commands

Please refer to the following sections which apply to your switch platform to receive details on
how to use the Ethernet features via AMI.

Ethernet Commands

4.1 ethernet bridge ESX-3000 Platform


These commands allow you to configure a virtual Ethernet bridge for a VLAN on an ESX-3000
switch. You can display the list of subcommands by typing ? at the bridge level.
myswitch:ethernet bridge-> ?
fdb>

The fdb directory

modify

Modify bridge parameters

show

Display bridge parameters

stp>

The stp directory

4.1.1

ethernet bridge fdb

This command allows you to flush/view the bridge forwarding database. Enter the following:
myswitch:ethernet bridge fdb-> ?
flush

Flush bridge Forwarding DataBase

show

Display bridge Forwarding DataBase

4.1.1.1 ethernet bridge fdb flush


This command allows you to flush the specified forwarding database entries. Enter the
following:
myswitch:ethernet bridge fdb-> flush ?
[[-port] <EthernetIf>]

Port

This parameter is defined as follows:


Parameter
-port <EthernetIf>

NOTE

4-2

Description
The port number of the forwarding database entry you wish to flush.

If you do not specify a specific port, the entire


forwarding database table is flushed. It is not
possible to flush the forwarding database table
for an individual VLAN.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Ethernet Commands

4.1.1.2 ethernet bridge fdb show


This command allows you to view the forwarding database entries. Enter the following:
myswitch:ethernet bridge fdb-> show
Port

VLAN

1A1

elan1

MAC Address(es) Learned


00:01:00:00:00:01
00:01:00:00:00:02

1A2

elan2

00:03:00:00:00:03
00:03:00:00:00:04
00:03:00:00:00:05

1A3

elan3

1A4

elan4

00:05:00:00:00:05
00:07:00:00:00:07
00:07:00:00:00:08

1A5

elan5

N/A

1A6

elan6

00:11:00:00:00:11

1A7

elan7

00:13:00:00:00:13

Press <return> for more, or 'q' to quit... q

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Field

Description

Port

The bridge port on which you wish to view the MAC addresses learned.

VLAN

The VLAN on the bridge on which you wish to view the MAC addresses learned.

MAC Address(es) Learned

The MAC address learned on the specified port in the VLAN.

Ethernet Commands

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

4-3

Ethernet Commands

4.1.2

ethernet bridge modify

This command allows you to modify the aging time and enable/disable the spanning tree
instance of a bridge. Enter the following:
myswitch:ethernet bridge-> modify
Usage:
[-name] <text>

Bridge Name

[[-time] <integer>]

Aging Time

[[-stpmode] (enabled|disabled)]

STP mode

These parameters are defined as follows:


Parameter

Description

-name <text>

The uniquely-identifiable name assigned to this bridge. The maximum number of


characters is 32.

-time <unsigned>

The timeout period in seconds for aging out dynamically-learned MAC addresses. Values
may range from 10 to 1000000 seconds, with a default of 3600 seconds upon bridge
creation.

-stpmode (enabled|disabled) May be set to enabled or disabled, with a default of enabled for newly-created bridge
instances.

4.1.3

ethernet bridge show

This command allows you to list the configured bridges in the switch. Enter the following:
myswitch:ethernet bridge-> show
VLAN Name

STP

MAC Address

default

enabled

00:20:48:65:08:66

#Ports
24

Bridge Type
transparentOnly

Aging Time
3600

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Field

Description

VLAN Name

The uniquely-identifiable name assigned to this VLAN.

STP

The spanning tree protocol status; enabled by default.

MAC Address

The MAC address used by this bridge when it must be referred to in a unique fashion.
When concatenated with Priority, a unique Bridge Identifier is formed which is used in
the Spanning Tree Protocol.

#Ports

The number of ports in the bridge group.

Bridge Type

Indicates the type of bridging performed.

Aging Time

The timeout period in seconds for aging out dynamically-learned MAC addresses.

4-4

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Ethernet Commands

4.1.4

ethernet bridge stp

This command directory allows you to configure/display the bridge STP and port
parameters. Enter the following:
myswitch:ethernet bridge stp-> ?
configuration>

The configuration directory

port>

The port directory

status

Display the STP parameters of a bridge

4.1.4.1 ethernet bridge stp configuration


This command allows you to configure/display the bridge STP parameters. Enter the
following:
myswitch:ethernet bridge stp configuration-> ?
modify

Modify the STP parameters of a bridge

show

Display the STP parameters of a bridge

4.1.4.1.1

ethernet bridge stp configuration modify

This command allows you to modify the bridge STP parameters. Enter the following:
myswitch:ethernet bridge stp configuration-> modify
Usage:
[-name] <text>

Bridge Name

[[-priority] <integer>]

Priority

[[-maxage] <integer>]

STP Max Age

[[-hellotime] <integer>]

STP Hello Time

[[-forwarddelay] <integer>]

STP Forward Delay

These parameters are defined as follows:


Parameter

Description
The uniquely-identifiable name assigned to this bridge.

-priority <integer>

The value of the write-able portion of the Bridge ID (i.e., the first two octets of the 8-octetlong Bridge ID). The value may be an integer between 0 and 65535. The last 6 octets of the
Bridge ID are given by the value of Base Bridge Address. Used to determine the root for
the STP.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

4-5

Ethernet Commands

-name <text>

Ethernet Commands

Parameter

Description

-maxage <integer>

The maximum age of Spanning Tree Protocol information learned from the network on
any port before it is discarded, in seconds. This is the value that this bridge (and all others)
would use if/when this bridge were to become the root.

-hellotime <integer>

The amount of time between the transmission of Configuration bridge PDUs by this node
on any port when it is the root of the spanning tree, or trying to become so, in seconds.

-forwarddelay <integer>

Controls how fast a port changes its spanning state when moving toward the Forwarding
state, in seconds. The value determines how long the port stays in each of the Listening
and Learning states, which precede the Forwarding state. This value is also used, when a
topology change has been detected and is underway, to age all dynamic entries in the
Forwarding Database. Note that this is the value that this bridge and all others would start
using if/when this bridge were to become the root.

4.1.4.1.2

ethernet bridge stp configuration show

This command allows you to list the bridge STP parameters of configured bridges in the
switch. Enter the following:
myswitch:ethernet bridge stp configuration-> show
VLAN Name

STP Priority

Max Age

Hello Time

Hold Time

Forward Delay

hithere

32768

20

15

hothere

32768

20

15

default

32768

20

15

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Field

Description

VLAN Name

The uniquely-identifiable name assigned to this VLAN.

STP Priority

The value of the write-able portion of the Bridge ID (i.e., the first two octets of the 8-octetlong Bridge ID). The value may be an integer between 0 and 65535. The last 6 octets of the
Bridge ID are given by the value of Base Bridge Address.

Max Age

The maximum age of Spanning Tree Protocol information learned from the network on
any port before it is discarded, in seconds.

Hello Time

The amount of time between the transmission of Configuration bridge PDUs by this node
on any port when it is the root of the spanning tree, or trying to become so, in seconds.

Hold Time

Determines the interval length during which no more than two Configuration bridge
PDUs shall be transmitted by this node, in seconds.

Forward Delay

Controls how fast a port changes its spanning state when moving toward the Forwarding
state, in seconds. The value determines how long the port stays in each of the Listening
and Learning states, which precede the Forwarding state. This value is also used, when a
topology change has been detected and is underway, to age all dynamic entries in the
Forwarding Database. Note that this is the value that this bridge and all others would start
using if/when this bridge were to become the root.

4-6

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Ethernet Commands

4.1.4.2 ethernet bridge stp port


This command directory allows you to display/modify the bridge STP port configuration and
status parameters. Enter the following:
myswitch:ethernet bridge stp port-> ?
configuration>

The configuration directory

status

Display port parameters of a bridge

4.1.4.2.1

ethernet bridge stp port configuration

This command allows you to configure/list the bridge STP port configuration parameters.
Enter the following:
myswitch:ethernet bridge stp port configuration-> ?
modify

Modify port parameters of a bridge

show

Display port parameters of a bridge

4.1.4.2.1.1

ethernet bridge stp port configuration modify

This command allows you to modify the bridge STP port configuration parameters. Enter the
following:
myswitch:ethernet bridge stp port configuration-> modify
Usage:
[-port] <text>

Bridge Port

[[-priority] <integer>]

Priority

[[-enable] (Yes|No)]

Port Enabled

[[-pathcost] <integer>]

Path Cost

These parameters are defined as follows:


Parameter

Description
The port number of the port for which this entry contains Spanning Tree Protocol
management information.

-priority <integer>

The value of the priority field which is contained in the first (in network byte order) octet
of the (2 octet long) Port ID. The other octet of the Port ID is given by the value of Port.
The value may be an integer between 0 and 255.

-enable (Yes|No)

Port can be enabled (Yes) or disabled (No).

-pathcost <integer>

The contribution of this port to the path cost of paths towards the spanning tree root
which include this port. It is recommended that the default value of this parameter be in
inverse proportion to the speed of the attached LAN.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

4-7

Ethernet Commands

-port <text>

Ethernet Commands

4.1.4.2.1.2

ethernet bridge stp port configuration show

This command allows you to list the bridge STP port configuration parameters. Enter the
following:
myswitch:ethernet bridge stp port configuration-> show
Port

Priority

Enabled

Path Cost

VLAN Name

1A1

128

Yes

100

bear

1A2

128

Yes

100

chicken

1A3

128

Yes

100

horse

1A4

128

Yes

100

goat

1A5

128

Yes

100

default

1A6

128

Yes

100

default

1A7

128

Yes

100

default

1A8

128

Yes

100

default

1A9

128

Yes

100

default

1A10

128

Yes

100

default

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Field

Description

Port

The port number of the port for which this entry contains Spanning Tree Protocol
management information. This is a read-only field.

Priority

The value of the priority field which is contained in the first (in network byte order) octet
of the (2 octet long) Port ID. The other octet of the Port ID is given by the value of Port.

Enabled

The enabled/disabled status of the port.

Path Cost

The contribution of this port to the path cost of paths towards the spanning tree root
which include this port. It is recommended that the default value of this parameter be in
inverse proportion to the speed of the attached LAN.

VLAN Name

The uniquely-identifiable name assigned to this VLAN.

4-8

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Ethernet Commands

4.1.4.2.2

ethernet bridge stp port status

This command allows you to display the bridge STP port status parameters. Enter the
following:
myswitch:ethernet bridge stp port-> status
Port

State

Designated Bridge

Forward

Designated

Transitions

Cost

Port

1A1

forwarding

32768-00:20:48:65:08:66

1A2

forwarding

32768-00:20:48:65:08:66

1A3

forwarding

32768-00:20:48:65:08:66

1A4

forwarding

32768-00:20:48:65:08:66

1A5

forwarding

32768-00:20:48:65:08:66

1A6

forwarding

32768-00:20:48:65:08:66

1A7

forwarding

32768-00:20:48:65:08:66

1A8

forwarding

32768-00:20:48:65:08:66

1A9

forwarding

32768-00:20:48:65:08:66

1A10

forwarding

32768-00:20:48:65:08:66

10

Press <return> for more, or 'q' to quit...q

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Field

Description
The port number of the port for which this entry contains Spanning Tree Protocol
management information.

State

The ports current state as defined by application of the Spanning Tree Protocol. This state
controls what action a port takes on reception of a frame. If the bridge detects a port that is
malfunctioning, it places that port into the broken state. For ports which are
administratively disabled, this object has a value of disabled.

Designated Bridge

The Bridge Identifier of the bridge which this port considers to be the Designated Bridge
for this ports segment.

Forward Transitions

The number of times this port has transitioned from the Learning state to the Forwarding
state.

Designated Cost

The path cost of the Designated Port of the segment connected to this port. This value is
compared to the Root Path Cost field in received bridge PDUs. A cost of 0 (zero) means
that this bridge considers itself to be the root.

Designated Port

The Port Identifier of the port on the Designated Bridge for this ports segment.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Ethernet Commands

Port

4-9

Ethernet Commands

4.1.4.3 ethernet bridge stp status


This command directory allows you to display/modify the bridge STP status parameters.
Enter the following:
myswitch:ethernet bridge stp-> status
VLAN Name

Designated Root

default

32768-00:20:48:65:08:66

Root

Root Time Since #TopoChanges

Cost

Port TopoChange

30161

50

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Field

Description

VLAN Name

The uniquely-identifiable name assigned to this VLAN.

Designated Root

The bridge identifier of the spanning tree root as determined by the Spanning Tree
Protocol as executed by this node. This value is used as the Root Identifier parameter in all
Configuration Bridge PDUs originated by this node. This is a read-only field.

Root Cost

The cost of the path to the root as seen from this bridge. This is a read-only field.

Root Port

The port number of the port which offers the lowest cost path from this bridge to the root
bridge. This is a read-only field.

Time Since TopoChange

The time (in seconds) since the last time a topology change was detected by the bridge
entity. This is a read-only field.

#TopoChanges

The total number of topology changes detected by this bridge since the management
entity was last reset or initialized. This is a read-only field.

4 - 10

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Ethernet Commands

4.2 ethernet bridge ASX-200BX, ASX-1000, ASX-1200,


TNX-210, and TNX-1100 Platforms
These commands allow you to configure a virtual Ethernet bridge on an ASX-200BX,
ASX-1000, ASX-1200, TNX-210, or TNX-1100 switch. You can display the list of subcommands
by typing ? at the bridge level.
myswitch:ethernet bridge-> ?
fdb>

The fdb directory

modify

Modifies the aging timer of the bridge

show

Display bridge parameters

static>

The static directory

4.2.1

ethernet bridge fdb

This command allows you to flush/view the bridge forwarding database as well as view
information on destination MAC addresses. Enter the following:
myswitch:ethernet bridge fdb-> ?
dest>

The dest directory

flush

Flush bridge Forwarding DataBase

show

Display bridge Forwarding DataBase

4.2.1.1 ethernet bridge fdb dest


This command allows you to view information about the bridge forwarding database. Enter
the following:
myswitch:ethernet bridge fdb dest-> ?
mcast>

The mcast directory

show

Display bridge Forwarding DataBase

Ethernet Commands

4.2.1.1.1

ethernet bridge fdb dest mcast

This command allows you to view the ports comprising a multicast group.
myswitch:ethernet bridge fdb dest mcast-> ?
show

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

4 - 11

Ethernet Commands

4.2.1.1.1.1

ethernet bridge fdb dest mcast show

This command allows you to view the ports comprising a multicast group. Enter the
following:
myswitch:ethernet bridge fdb dest mcast-> show ?
[[-bridgeName] <text>]

Bridge Name

[[-grpNum] <integer>]

Group Number

[[-dPorts] <list of PVCPort>]

Destination Ports

These parameters are defined as follows:


Parameter

Description

-bridgeName <text>

The name of the bridge of the forwarding database entry whose ports you wish to view.

-grpNum <integer>

The multicast group number whose ports you wish to view.

-dPorts <list of PVCPort>

The list of destination ports you wish to view.

4.2.1.1.2

ethernet bridge fdb dest show

This command allows you to view the contents of the bridge forwarding database(s). Enter
the following:
myswitch:ethernet bridge fdb dest-> show
MCast
DestMAC Address(es) SourcePort

DestPort

Grp

Description

00:00:0c:47:ae:22

2D1/0/101

2A1

N/A

Forward-

00:00:0c:47:ae:22

2A1

2D1/0/101

N/A

Forward-

00:00:0c:47:ae:2e

2D1/0/101

2A1

N/A

Forward-

ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff

2A2

2D1/0/201

N/A

Static-Forward-

ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff

2D1/0/201

2A2

N/A

Static-Forward-

ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff

2D1/0/101

2A1

N/A

Static-Forward-

ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff

2A1

N/A

Static-Forward-

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Field

Description

MAC Address(es)

The unicast source or destination MAC address for which the row represents the
forwarding information.

SourcePort

The port number on which a frame having a source address equal to the value of the
corresponding MAC address is seen. An entry of 0 indicates that the port number has not
been learned but that the bridge has forwarding/filtering information about the address.

4 - 12

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Ethernet Commands

Field

Description

Port

The port to which the frames with the corresponding MAC address will be sent out if
received on the listed source port.

MCast Grp

The multicast group to which traffic is sent, if the traffic received on the source port is
being multicasted.

Description

A brief description of the entrys status.

4.2.1.2 ethernet bridge fdb flush


This command allows you to flush the specified forwarding database entries. Enter the
following:
myswitch:ethernet bridge fdb-> flush ?
[[-bridgeName] <text>]

Bridge Name

This parameter is defined as follows:


Parameter
-bridgeName <text>

NOTE

Description
The name of the bridge of the forwarding database entry you wish to flush.

If you do not specify a bridge name, the entire


forwarding database table is flushed. It is not
possible to flush the forwarding database table
for an individual VLAN.

Ethernet Commands

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

4 - 13

Ethernet Commands

4.2.1.3 ethernet bridge fdb show


This command allows you to view the forwarding database entries. Enter the following:
myswitch:ethernet bridge fdb-> show
SrcMAC Address(es)

SourcePort

PairPort

Status

Description

00:00:0c:47:ae:22

2A1

N/A

learned

Lookup Dest-

00:00:0c:47:ae:2e

2D1/0/101

2D1/0/101

learned

Lookup Dest-

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Field

Description

MAC Address

The unicast source or destination MAC address for which the row represents the
forwarding information.

SourcePort

The port number on which a frame having a source address equal to the value of the
corresponding MAC address is seen. An entry of 0 indicates that the port number has not
been learned but that the bridge has forwarding/filtering information about the address.

PairPort

The port to which the frames with the corresponding MAC address will be sent out if
received on the listed source port.

Status

The entrys status, which can be:

Description

4 - 14

invalid - entry is no longer valid (learned but since aged-out), but


has not yet been flushed from the table.

learned - the value of the corresponding port was learned and still
in use.

self - the value of the corresponding instance of MAC address


represents one of the bridges addresses. The corresponding instance
of port indicates which of the bridges ports has this address.

mgmt - the value of the corresponding instance of MAC address is


also the value of an existing instance of MAC address in the static
filtering table.

other - entry is currently in use but the conditions under which it


will be used are different from each of the following values.

A brief description of the entrys status.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Ethernet Commands

4.2.2

ethernet bridge modify

This command allows you to modify the aging time of a bridge. Enter the following:
myswitch:ethernet bridge-> modify
Usage:
[-bridgeName] <text>

Bridge Name

[[-agingTime] <integer>]

Timer value for aging

These parameters are defined as follows:


Parameter

Description

-bridgeName <text>

The uniquely-identifiable name assigned to this bridge.

-agingTime <integer>

The timeout period in seconds for aging out dynamically-learned MAC addresses.

4.2.3

ethernet bridge show

This command allows you to list the configured bridges in the switch. Enter the following:
myswitch:ethernet bridge-> show
Name

MAC Address

2C

00:00:0c:47:ae:22

NPorts Bridge Type

AgingTimer(secs)

STP Mode

300

disabled

5 transparentOnly

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Field

Description
The uniquely-identifiable name assigned to this bridge.

MAC Address

The MAC address used by this bridge when it must be referred to in a unique fashion. The
numerically-smallest MAC address of all ports that belong to the bridge.

NPorts

The number of ports in the bridge group.

Bridge Type

Indicates the type of bridging performed.

AgingTimer (secs)

The timeout period in seconds for aging out dynamically-learned forwarding information.

STP Mode

Not supported at this time.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Ethernet Commands

Name

4 - 15

Ethernet Commands

4.2.4

ethernet bridge static

This command allows you to delete, modify, create, and display static filters. Enter the following:
myswitch:ethernet bridge static-> ?
delete

Delete a Static Filter entry

modify

Modify Static Filters

new

Create a new Static Filter entry

show

Display Static Filtering Table

4.2.4.1 ethernet bridge static delete


This command allows you to delete a static filter. Enter the following:
myswitch:ethernet bridge static-> delete
Usage:
[-bridgeName] <text>

Bridge Name

[-name] <text>

Unique Filter Name

[[-dmacAddr] <Mac Address>]

Destination Address

[[-smacAddr] <Mac Address>]

Source Address

[[-etherType] <list of EtherType value>]

EtherType

[[-type] <block/forward>]

FilterType

[[-status] <Static Filter Status>]

Status

[[-priority] <integer>]

Priority

These parameters are defined as follows:


Parameter

Description

-bridgeName <text>

The name of the bridge to which the filter applies.

-name <text>

The uniquely-identifiable name assigned to the filter.

-dmacAddr <Mac Address>

The Destination MAC Address in a frame to which the entrys filter information applies.

-smacAddr <Mac Address>

The Source MAC Address in a frame to which the entrys filter information applies.

-etherType
<list of EtherType Value>

The list of EtherTypes that are applied to the filter which can include NetBios, NetBeui,
IPX, and AppleTalk.

-type <block/forward>

Specifies whether frames are blocked (block) or filtered (forward).

4 - 16

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Ethernet Commands

Parameter
-status <Static Filter Status>

-priority <integer>

Description
The entrys status, which can be:

Other - entry is currently in use but the conditions under which it


will be used are different from each of the following values.

Permanent - entry is currently in use and will remain so after the


next reset of the bridge. This is the status default value.

DeleteOnReset - entry is currently in use and will remain so until


the next reset of the bridge.

DeleteOnTimeout - entry is currently in use and will remain so


until it is aged out. The timeout value can be configured from the
bridge menu.

An integer value that assigns priority to a filter. Filters are applied in the order of
increasing priorityin cases where two filters conflict, the one assigned the higher
priority is implemented.

4.2.4.2 ethernet bridge static modify


This command allows you to modify a static filters priority. Enter the following:
myswitch:ethernet bridge static-> modify
Usage:
[-bridgeName] <text>

Bridge Name

[-name] <text>

Unique Filter Name

[[-priority] <integer>]

Priority

These parameters are defined in Section 4.2.4.1.

4.2.4.3 ethernet bridge static new


This command allows you to create a static filter. Enter the following:
myswitch:ethernet bridge static-> new
Usage:
[-bridgeName] <text>

Bridge Name

[-name] <text>

Unique Filter Name


Destination Address

[[-smacAddr] <Mac Address>]

Source Address

[[-etherType] <list of EtherType value>]

EtherType

[[-type] <block/forward>]

FilterType (default: block)

[[-status] <Static Filter Status>]

Status (default: permanent)

[[-priority] <integer>]

Priority (default: 10)

Ethernet Commands

[[-dmacAddr] <Mac Address>]

These parameters are defined in Section 4.2.4.1.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

4 - 17

Ethernet Commands

4.2.4.4 ethernet bridge static show


This command allows you to display a static filtering table. Enter the following:
myswitch:ethernet bridge static-> show
Filter

Source

Destination

Ether

Name

MAC

MAC

Type

N/A

aa:bb:cc:dd:ee:ff

ipx

11:22:33:44:55:66

N/A

N/A

The fields in this display are defined in Section 4.2.4.1.

4 - 18

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Ethernet Commands

4.3 ethernet igmp


These commands allow you to display information about the Internet Group Management
Protocol (IGMP) on ESX-3000 switches equipped with Ethernet port cards. IGMP allows a
host to ask a local router to send it data addressed to a specific multicast group. You can
display the list of subcommands by typing ? at the igmp level.
myswitch:ethernet igmp-> ?
routers

Display router port group

show

Display multicast port group

4.3.1

ethernet igmp routers

This command allows you to display information about the router port group. Enter the
following:
myswitch:ethernet igmp-> routers
Vlan Name

Router Port(s)

elan1

7A1

elan2

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Field

Description

Vlan Name

The uniquely-identifiable name assigned to this VLAN.

Router Port(s)

Port number that an IGMP capable router has been discovered on.

Ethernet Commands

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

4 - 19

Ethernet Commands

4.3.2

ethernet igmp show

This command allows you to display information about the multicast port group. Enter the
following:
myswitch:ethernet igmp-> show
Vlan Name

IP M/cast Address

Port Group

elan1

238.1.0.0

2A1

2A2

2A3

2A6

2A7

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Field

Description

Vlan Name

The uniquely-identifiable name assigned to this VLAN.

IP M/cast Address

IP Multicast address(s) detected on particular VLAN.

Port Group

Port numbers that belong to the IP multicast group.

4 - 20

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Ethernet Commands

4.4 ethernet lec


These commands allow you to display information associated with the automatically-created
ESX-3000 LANE clients. You can display the list of subcommands by typing ? at the lec level.
myswitch:ethernet lec-> ?
arp>

The arp directory

show

Display VLAN/LEC status

statistics

Display VLAN/LEC statistics

4.4.1

ethernet lec arp

This command allows you to flush/view the LECs ARP cache entries.
myswitch:ethernet lec arp-> ?
flush

Flush VLAN/LEC ARP cache

show

Display VLAN/LEC ARP cache

4.4.1.1 ethernet lec arp flush


This command allows you to flush the specified LECs ARP cache entries. Enter the following:
myswitch:ethernet lec arp-> flush ?
[[-lecindex] <integer>]

LEC Index

[[-name] <text>]

VLAN Name

These parameters are defined as follows:


Parameter

Description

-lecindex <integer>

Unique number assigned to identify a LEC to facilitate interoperability.

-name <text>

The name of the VLAN whose ARP table you wish to flush.

Ethernet Commands

NOTE

If you do not specify a specific VLAN Name or


LEC Index, the entire LE ARP table is flushed.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

4 - 21

Ethernet Commands

4.4.1.2 ethernet lec arp show


This command allows you to view the specified LECs ARP cache. Enter the following:
myswitch:ethernet lec arp-> show
VLAN Name
green

MAC Address
00:00:ef:04:42:30

ATM Address
0x47.0005.80.ffe100.0000.f41a.01b9.0000ef044234.02

green

00:20:48:0e:55:67

0x47.0005.80.ffe100.0000.f21a.5a78.0020480e5567.02

red

00:00:ef:04:99:00

0x47.0005.80.ffe100.0000.f21a.00fe.0000ef049904.03

grey

00:00:ef:04:42:30

0x47.0005.80.ffe100.0000.f41a.01b9.0000ef044234.00

grey

00:00:ef:06:90:70

0x47.0005.80.ffe100.0000.f21a.33d7.0000ef069071.00

grey

00:20:48:08:90:17

0x47.0005.80.ffe100.0000.f21a.33d7.002048089017.02

grey

00:50:04:d0:34:04

0x47.0005.80.ffe100.0000.f21a.33d7.00a036008bc8.0b

grey

08:00:20:a2:17:94

0x47.0005.80.ffe100.0000.f21a.33d7.00a036008bc8.0b

grey

08:00:20:b0:c8:27

0x47.0005.80.ffe100.0000.f21a.33d7.00a036008bc8.0b

grey

08:00:20:b0:c9:87

0x47.0005.80.ffe100.0000.f21a.33d7.00a036008bc8.0b

grey

1e:20:48:06:53:c3

0x47.0005.80.ffe100.0000.f21a.264c.0020480653c3.14

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Field

Description

VLAN Name

The name of the LEC/VLAN whose ARP cache you wish to view.

MAC Address

The MAC address of the destination.

ATM Address

The ATM address of the destination.

4 - 22

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Ethernet Commands

4.4.2

ethernet lec show

This command allows you to list the LECs status parameters. The parameters displayed with
this command are read-only.
myswitch:ethernet lec-> show
LEC
VLAN Name

If Interface

Index LECID Index State

default

Max External
Mode Frame ELAN Name

1048 lecsConnect auto

1516 default

LEC : 0x47.0005.80.ffe100.0000.f258.0048.002048650b86.03
LECS: 0x47.0079.00.000000.0000.0000.0000.00a03e000001.00
LES : 0x0000000000000000000000000000000000000000
button

1246 lecsConnect auto

1516 -1

LEC : 0x47.0005.80.ffe100.0000.f258.0048.0020486509f6.0b
LECS: 0x47.0079.00.000000.0000.0000.0000.00a03e000001.00
LES : 0x0000000000000000000000000000000000000000
hook

1247 lecsConnect auto

1516 ()

LEC : 0x47.0005.80.ffe100.0000.f258.0048.00204865079e.03
LECS: 0x47.0079.00.000000.0000.0000.0000.00a03e000001.00
LES : 0x0000000000000000000000000000000000000000

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Field

Description
The uniquely-identifiable name assigned to this VLAN.

LEC Index

The MIB index.

LECID

The unique LEC identifier.

If Index

The IfIndex.

Interface State

The state the LEC is currently in. Possible states include: initial, lecsConnect,
configure, joining, initialReg, busConnect, and operational.

Mode

Set to automatic, not user-modifiable.

Max Frame

The MTU of the specified VLAN.

External ELAN Name

The LAN name as reported by the LES join phase.

LEC

The ATM address of the LEC.

LECS

The LECS address being used by the VLAN/ELAN.

LES

The LES address discovered through the LECS configuration phase.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Ethernet Commands

VLAN Name

4 - 23

Ethernet Commands

4.4.2.1 ethernet lec show -errors


This command allows you to display the LECs status error parameters. Enter the following:
myswitch:ethernet lec-> show -errors
VLAN Name

InterfaceState

LastErrorState

default

lecsConnect

initialState

LastError
none

car

lecsConnect

initialState

none

truck

lecsConnect

initialState

none

van

lecsConnect

initialState

none

cycle

lecsConnect

initialState

none

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Field

Description

VLAN Name

The name of the VLAN associated with the LEC you wish to display error information for.

InterfaceState

The current state of the LEC.

LastErrorState

The last failure state of the LEC.

LastError

The cause of the last failure state of the LEC.

4.4.2.2 ethernet lec show -vcc


This command allows you to display the LECs status vcc parameters. Enter the following:
myswitch:ethernet lec-> show -vcc
Config

Control

Control

Multicast Multicast

VLAN Name

Direct

Direct

Dist

Send

Forward

default

5A 0.0

5A 0.0

5A 0.0

5A 0.0

5A 0.0

birch

1A 0.0

1A 0.0

1A 0.0

1A 0.0

1A 0.0

oak

7A 0.0

7A 0.0

7A 0.0

7A 0.0

7A 0.0

maple

1A 0.0

1A 0.0

1A 0.0

1A 0.0

1A 0.0

ash

2A 0.0

2A 0.0

2A 0.0

2A 0.0

2A 0.0

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Field

Description

VLAN Name

The uniquely-identifiable name assigned to this VLAN.

Config Direct

The signalling parameter used by the LEC when establishing the configuration direct
VCC.

Control Direct

The signalling parameter used by the LEC when establishing the control direct VCC.

4 - 24

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Ethernet Commands

Field

Description

Control Dist

The signalling parameter used by the LEC when establishing the control distribute VCC.

Multicast Send

The signalling parameter used by the LEC when establishing the multicast send VCC.

Multicast Forward

The signalling parameter used by the LEC when establishing the multicast forward VCC.

4.4.3

ethernet lec statistics

This command allows you to display the LEC statistics. Enter the following:
myswitch:ethernet lec-> statistics
LEC

ArpReq

ArpReq

ArpRep

ArpRep

Index

In

Out

In

Out

default

tiger

cheetah

lion

leopard

VLAN Name

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Field

Description

VLAN Name

The uniquely-identifiable name assigned to this VLAN.

LEC Index

The uniquely-identifiable conceptual row in the statistics table.

ArpReq In

The number of LE_ARP_REQUESTs received over the LUNI by the LEC. Requests may
arrive on the Control Direct VCC or on the Control Distribute VCC, depending upon how
the LES is implemented and the chances it has had for learning. This counter covers both
VCCs.

ArpReq Out

The number of LE_ARP_REQUESTs sent over the LUNI by the LEC.

ArpResp In

The number of LE_ARP_RESPONSEs received over the LUNI by the LEC. This count
includes all such replies, whether solicited or not. Replies may arrive on the Control Direct
VCC or on the Control Distribute VCC, depending upon how the LES is implemented.
This counter covers both VCCs.

ArpResp Out

The number of LE_ARP_RESPONSEs sent over the LUNI by the LEC.

Ethernet Commands

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

4 - 25

Ethernet Commands

4.5 ethernet mpc


These commands allow you to modify and display information about Multiprotocol Over
ATM (MPOA) Multiple Protocol Clients (MPC)s on an ESX-3000 switch equipped with
Ethernet port cards. You can display the list of subcommands by typing ? at the mpc level.
myswitch:ethernet mpc-> ?
ec>

The ec directory

ic>

The ic directory

show

Display Mpc Actual Table Configuration

statistics

Display Mpc Statistics Table Configuration

4.5.1

ethernet mpc ec

These commands allow you to flush or display information on the VLAN MPC Egress Cache
Table. Enter the following:
myswitch:ethernet mpc ec-> ?
flush

Flushes VLAN mpcEgressCache

show

Display Mpc Egress Cache Table Configuration

4.5.1.1 ethernet mpc ec flush


This command allows you to flush the VLAN MPC Egress Cache Table. Enter the following:
myswitch:ethernet mpc ec-> flush
Usage:
[-name] <text>

VLAN Name

This parameter is defined as follows:


Parameter
-name <text>

4 - 26

Description
The name of the VLAN whose MPC egress cache table you wish to flush.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Ethernet Commands

4.5.1.2 ethernet mpc ec show


This command allows you to display the VLAN MPC Egress Cache Table. Enter the following:
myswitch:ethernet mpc ec-> show
VLAN Name

MPCID

CacheId

elan5

Dest IP Addr
5.5.5.106

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Field

Description

VLAN Name

The uniquely-identifiable name assigned to this VLAN.

MPCID

The uniquely-identifiable index assigned to this MPOA client.

CacheId

The uniquely-identifiable index assigned to this cache entry.

Dest IP Addr

Destination IP address of MPOA shortcut.

4.5.2

ethernet mpc ic

These commands allow you to flush or display information on the VLAN MPC Ingress Cache
Table. Enter the following:
myswitch:ethernet mpc ic-> ?
flush

Flushes VLAN/MPC Ingress cache

show

Display Mpc Ingress Cache Table Entry

4.5.2.1 ethernet mpc ic flush


This command allows you to flush the VLAN MPC Ingress Cache Table. Enter the following:
myswitch:ethernet mpc ic-> flush
Usage:
[-name] <text>

VLAN Name

Parameter
-name <text>

Ethernet Commands

This parameter is defined as follows:


Description
The name of the VLAN whose MPC ingress cache table you wish to flush.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

4 - 27

Ethernet Commands

4.5.2.2 ethernet mpc ic show


This command allows you to display the VLAN MPC Ingress Cache Table. Enter the
following:
myswitch:ethernet mpc ic-> show
VLAN Name

: elan1

Dest. IP Address

: 5.5.5.106

Dest. ATM Address : 0x47.0005.80.ffe100.0000.f258.12da.00204866c31e.00

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Field

Description

VLAN Name

The uniquely-identifiable name assigned to this VLAN.

Dest. IP Address

Destination IP address of MPOA shortcut.

Dest. ATM Address

Corresponding NSAP address of destination.

4.5.3

ethernet mpc show

This command allows you to view MPC status parameters. Enter the following:
myswitch:ethernet mpc-> show
VLAN Name

Mpc

Disc

SC Setup

Index

Time

Frame Time

default

Mode
automatic

Retry

Max Retry

Hold

Time

Time

Time

40

160

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Field

Description

VLAN Name

The uniquely-identifiable name assigned to this VLAN.

Mpc Index

A unique value for each MPOA client which this SNMP agent manages. It is
recommended that values are assigned contiguously starting from 1. The value for each
MPOA Client must remain constant, even if the MPOA Client or SNMP agent is
re-initialized.

Disc Time

Discontinuity Time. The value of sysUpTime on the most recent occasion at which any one
or more of this MPC's counters experienced a discontinuity. The relevant counters are the
specific instances associated with this MPC. If discontinuities have not occurred since the
last re-initialization of the local management subsystem, then this object contains a zero
value.

SC Setup Frame Time

Shortcut Setup Frame Time. The shortcut setup frame time, in seconds.

4 - 28

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Ethernet Commands

Field

Description

Mode

Configuration Mode. Indicates whether this MPC should auto-configure the next time it is
(re-)initialized. During the (re-)initialization of this MPC, if the mode is automatic(1), the
LECS is contacted and requests are made for all MPC-p* parameters. Otherwise, if the
mode is manual(2), the values of the configuration parameters are obtained from the
mpcConfigTableand the mpcProtocolTable. In other words, when the MPC is first
initialized, it can use the default or configured values from the mpcConfigTable and
mpcProtocolTable. If the mode is manual (2), no further.

Retry Time

Initial Retry Time. MPC-p4 is the initial value for the retry time out period used for timing
out MPOA Resolution Requests in seconds. Retry time consists of this initial time-out
(MPC-p4) and a retry multiplier (MPC-c1). If a response is not received, then another
request is sent with a timeout of Retry Time * MPC-c1 seconds, or until
mpcRetryTimeMaximum.

Max Retry Time

Maximum Retry Time. MPC-p5 cumulative max value for Retry Time (MPC-p4). Retries
are attempted at intervals determined by the algorithm described in the definition of
mpcIntialRetryTime.

Hold Time

Hold Down Time. Minimum time to wait before re-initiating a failed resolution attempt.
Default is mpcRetryTimeMaximum * 4.

Ethernet Commands

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

4 - 29

Ethernet Commands

4.5.4

ethernet mpc statistics

This command allows you to view MPC packet statistics. Enter the following:
myswitch:ethernet mpc-> statistics
VLAN Name

Resolve

Imposition

Tx Reqs

Rx Reply Acks

Rx Reqs

Tx Reply Acks

default

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Field

Description

VLAN Name

The uniquely-identifiable name assigned to this VLAN.

Resolve Tx Reqs

The number of MPOA Resolve Requests transmitted by this MPC. Discontinuities in the
value of this counter can occur at re-initialization of the management system, and/or
re-initialization of the MPC, and at other times, as indicated by the value of
mpcDiscontinuityTime.

Resolve Rx Reply Acks

The number of positively acknowledged MPC Resolved Replies received by this MPC
with an MPOA CIE Code of 0x00 (Success). Discontinuities in the value of this counter can
occur at re-initialization of the management system, and/or re-initialization of the MPC,
and at other times, as indicated by the value of mpcDiscontinuityTime.

Imposition Rx Reqs

The number of MPOA Cache Imposition Requests received by this MPC. Discontinuities
in the value of this counter can occur at re-initialization of the management system, and/
or re-initialization of the MPC, and at other times, as indicated by the value of
mpcDiscontinuityTime.

Imposition Tx Reply Acks

The number of successful MPOA Cache Imposition replies transmitted by this MPC with
an MPOA CIE Code of 0x00 Success. Discontinuities in the value of this counter can occur
at re-initialization of the management system, and/or re-initialization of the MPC, and at
other times, as indicated by the value of mpcDiscontinuityTime.

4 - 30

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Ethernet Commands

4.5.4.1 ethernet mpc statistics -errors


This command allows you to view MPC packet error statistics. Enter the following:
myswitch:ethernet mpc-> statistics -errors
VLAN Name

default

Unrecog.Ext

Loops Detected :

Proto.Addr Unreachable : 0

: 0

Proto.Errors

SDU Size Exceeded

Invalid Ext.

Hop Cnt Exceeded

Auth. Failure

: 0
: 0

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Field

Description
The uniquely-identifiable name assigned to this VLAN.

Unrecog. Ext

The number of Error Indication packets received by this MPC with the error code
Unrecognized Extension. Discontinuities in the value of this counter can occur at
re-initialization of the management system, and/or re-initialization of the MPC, and at
other times, as indicated by the value of mpcDiscontinuityTime.

Loops Detected

The number of Error Indication packets received by this MPC with the error code Loop
Detected. Discontinuities in the value of this counter can occur at re-initialization of the
management system, and/or re-initialization of the MPC, and at other times, as indicated
by the value of mpcDiscontinuityTime.

Proto. Addr Unreachable

The number of Error Indication packets received by this MPC with the error code Protocol
Address Unreachable. Discontinuities in the value of this counter can occur at
re-initialization of the management system, and/or re-initialization of the MPC, and at
other times, as indicated by the value of mpcDiscontinuityTime.

Proto. Errors

The number of Error Indication packets received by this MPC with the error code Protocol
Errors. Discontinuities in the value of this counter can occur at re-initialization of the
management system, and/or re-initialization of the MPC, and at other times, as indicated
by the value of mpcDiscontinuityTime.

SDU Size Exceeded

The number of Error Indication packets received by this MPC with the error code SDU
Size Exceeded. Discontinuities in the value of this counter can occur at re-initialization of
the management system, and/or re-initialization of the MPC, and at other times, as
indicated by the value of mpcDiscontinuityTime.

Invalid Ext.

The number of Error Indication packets received by this MPC with the error code Invalid
Extensions. Discontinuities in the value of this counter can occur at re-initialization of the
management system, and/or re-initialization of the MPC, and at other times, as indicated
by the value of mpcDiscontinuityTime.

Hop Cnt Exceeded

The number of Error Indication packets received by this MPC with the error code Hop
Count Exceeded. Discontinuities in the value of this counter can occur at re-initialization
of the management system, and/or re-initialization of the MPC, and at other times, as
indicated by the value of mpcDiscontinuityTime.

Auth. Failure

The number of Error Indication packets received by this MPC with the error code
Authentication Failure. Discontinuities in the value of this counter can occur at
re-initialization of the management system, and/or re-initialization of the MPC, and at
other times, as indicated by the value of mpcDiscontinuityTime.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

4 - 31

Ethernet Commands

VLAN Name

Ethernet Commands

4.5.4.2 ethernet mpc statistics -purge


This command allows you to view MPC packet purge statistics. Enter the following:
myswitch:ethernet mpc-> statistics -purge
VLAN Name

EC

default

Data Plane

Tx Reqs

Rx

Tx

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Field

Description

VLAN Name

The uniquely-identifiable name assigned to this VLAN.

EC Tx Reqs.

The number of MPOA Egress Cache Purge Requests transmitted by this MPC.
Discontinuities in the value of this counter can occur at re-initialization of the
management system, and/or re-initialization of the MPC, and at other times, as indicated
by the value of mpcDiscontinuityTime.

Data Plane Rx

The number of MPOA Data Plane Purge messages received by this MPC. Discontinuities
in the value of this counter can occur at re-initialization of the management system, and/
or re-initialization of the MPC, and at other times, as indicated by the value of
mpcDiscontinuityTime.

Data Plane Tx

The number of MPOA Data Plane Purge messages transmitted by this MPC.
Discontinuities in the value of this counter can occur at re-initialization of the
management system, and/or re-initialization of the MPC, and at other times, as indicated
by the value of mpcDiscontinuityTime.

4 - 32

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Ethernet Commands

4.6 ethernet system


These commands allow you to modify/view port card memory and panic data. You can
display the list of subcommands by typing ? at the system level.
myswitch:ethernet system-> ?
memory>

The memory directory

panic>

The panic directory

4.6.1

ethernet system memory

This command allows you to display the port card memory statistics. Enter the following:
myswitch:ethernet system memory-> ?
show

Ethernet portcard memory statistics

4.6.1.1 ethernet system memory show


This command allows you to view the port card memory statistics. Enter the following:
myswitch:ethernet system memory-> show
Portcard

Bytes

Bytes

Blocks

Max Free

Free

Used

Free

Block

19719676

10637996

466

17851336

20063396

10294276

462

18231868

20069796

10287876

458

18237308

20069796

10287876

456

18238592

19743004

10614668

468

17908116

19803452

10554220

460

13936732

20070548

10287124

460

18239364

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Description

Portcard

The slot that the Ethernet card is installed in.

Bytes Free

The total amount of unused memory available on the port card.

Bytes Used

The total amount of memory currently allocated to system programs on the port card.

Blocks Free

The number of free blocks.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

4 - 33

Ethernet Commands

Field

Ethernet Commands

Field

Description

Max Free Block

The maximum free block size.

This command is useful for detecting memory


leaks on the port card system memory.

NOTE

4.6.2

ethernet system panic

This command allows you to access the port card panic trace features. Enter the following:
myswitch:ethernet system panic-> ?
clear

Clear panic trace on the portcard(s)

show

Display portcard panic trace

4.6.2.1 ethernet system panic clear


This command allows you to clear the panic trace on all port cards. Enter the following:
myswitch:ethernet system panic-> clear
Panic trace cleared on All ethernet portcard(s)

To clear the panic trace on a specific port card, enter the following:
myswitch:ethernet system panic-> clear ?
[[-portcard] <integer>]

Portcard

This parameter is defined as follows:


Parameter
-portcard <integer>

4 - 34

Description
The port card on which you wish to clear the panic trace.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Ethernet Commands

4.6.2.2 ethernet system panic show


This command allows you to view the action on a panic. Enter the following:
myswitch:ethernet system panic-> show
Panic trace from portcard 1
No panic trace found
Panic trace from portcard 2
No panic trace found
Panic trace from portcard 3
No panic trace found
Panic trace from portcard 4
No panic trace found
Panic trace from portcard 5
No panic trace found

Ethernet Commands

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

4 - 35

Ethernet Commands

4.7 ethernet vlan


These commands allow you to configure VLANs. You can display the list of subcommands by
typing ? at the vlan level.
myswitch:ethernet vlan-> ?
addports

Add port(s) to a VLAN

delete

Delete a VLAN

new

Create a VLAN

removeports

Remove port(s) from a VLAN

rename

Rename a VLAN

show

Show VLAN(s)

Port names must be enclosed within quotes and


separated by white space (1x1 1y1 1z1) when
executing any of the following commands with
more than one port.

NOTE

4.7.1

ethernet vlan addports

This command allows you to add ports to a VLAN. Enter the following:
myswitch:ethernet vlan-> addports
Usage:
[-name] <text>

VLAN Name

[-ports] <text>

VLAN Port List

These parameters are defined as follows:


Parameter

Description

-name <text>

The name of the VLAN you wish to add ports to.

-ports <text>

The list of ports you wish to add to the VLAN.

4 - 36

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Ethernet Commands

4.7.2

ethernet vlan delete

This command allows you to a delete a VLAN. Enter the following:


myswitch:ethernet vlan-> delete
Usage:
[-name] <text>

VLAN Name

[[-ports] <text>]

VLAN Port List

These parameters are defined as follows:


Parameter

Description

-name <text>

The name of the VLAN you wish to delete.

-ports <text>

The ports associated with the VLAN to be deleted.

The ports associated with the VLAN must be


unconfigured prior to deletion. The ports are
associated with any other VLAN(s) until a
subsequent ethernet vlan addports or
ethernet vlan new command is executed.

NOTE

4.7.3

ethernet vlan new

This command allows you to create a new VLAN. Enter the following:
myswitch:ethernet vlan-> new
Usage:
[-name] <text>

VLAN Name

[-ports] <text>

VLAN Port List

These parameters are defined as follows:


Parameter

Description
The name you wish to call the new VLAN. The maximum number of characters is 32.

-ports <text>

The list of ports you wish to add to the new VLAN.

NOTE

Ethernet Commands

-name <text>

If a VLAN with the same name as the one you


attempt to configure already exists, the message
ERROR: creation failed: duplicate entry
appears.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

4 - 37

Ethernet Commands

4.7.4

ethernet vlan removeports

This command allows you to remove ports from a VLAN. Enter the following:
myswitch:ethernet vlan-> removeports
Usage:
[-name] <text>

VLAN Name

[-ports] <text>

VLAN Port List

These parameters are defined as follows:


Parameter

Description

-name <text>

The name of the VLAN you wish to remove the ports from.

-ports <text>

The list of ports you wish to remove from the VLAN.

4.7.5

ethernet vlan rename

This command allows you to rename a VLAN. Enter the following:


myswitch:ethernet vlan-> rename
Usage:
[-currentname] <text>

Current VLAN Name

[-newname] <text>

New VLAN Name

These parameters are defined as follows:


Parameter

Description

-currentname <text>

The name of the VLAN you wish to rename.

-newname <text>

The new name of the VLAN.

4 - 38

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Ethernet Commands

4.7.6

ethernet vlan show

This command allows you to list the configured VLANs. Enter the following:
myswitch:ethernet vlan-> show
Name

Ports

quartz

1A2

ruby

1A1

diamond

1A3

sapphire

1A5

default

1A6

1A7

1A8

1A9

1A10 1A11 1A12 1A13 1A14 1A15

1A16 1A17 1A18 1A19 1A20 1A21 1A22 1A23 1A24 2A1
2A2

2A3

2A4

2A5

2A6

2A7

2A8

2A9

2A10 2A11

2A12 2A13 2A14 2A15 2A16 2A17 2A18 2A19 2A20 2A21
2A22 2A23 2A24 3A1
3A8

3A9

3A2

3A3

3A4

3A5

3A18 3A19 3A20 3A21 3A22 3A23 3A24 4A1


4A4

4A5

3A6

3A7

3A10 3A11 3A12 3A13 3A14 3A15 3A16 3A17


4A6

4A7

4A8

4A9

4A2

4A3

4A10 4A11 4A12 4A13

4A14 4A15 4A16 4A17 4A18 4A19 4A20 4A21 4A22 4A23
4A24 5A1

5A2

5A3

5A4

5A5

5A6

5A7

5A8

5A9

5A10 5A11 5A12 5A13 5A14 5A15 5A16 5A17 5A18 5A19
5A20 5A21 5A22 5A23 5A24 6A1
6A6

6A7

6A8

6A9

6A2

6A3

6A4

6A5

6A10 6A11 6A12 6A13 6A14 6A15

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Field

Description

Name

The name of the VLAN whose configuration parameters you wish to see.

Ports

The list of ports associated with the VLAN you specify.

NOTE

An asterisk in front of a port name indicates that


that particular port is out of service (i.e., the
blade is pulled out of the chassis). For example, if
blade 2 is pulled, any ports on blade 2 will be
denoted *2A1, *2A1, and so on.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Ethernet Commands

NOTE

If no VLANs are configured on the switch, the


message There are no VLANs configured
is displayed.

4 - 39

Ethernet Commands

4 - 40

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Hardware Commands

These commands let you configure various aspects of the hardware. You can display the list of
available subcommands by typing ? at the hardware level.
myswitch:hardware-> ?
cecplus>

The cecplus directory

chassis

Display chassis information

dualscp>

The dualscp directory

fabric>

The fabric directory

fans

Display fan bank information

inputlookuperrors

Display hdcomp/input-lookup-error statistics

netmod>

The netmod directory

port>

The port directory

power

Display power supply information

scp>

The scp directory

tcm>

The tcm directory

temperature

Display temperature sensors information

NOTE

The cecplus> directory is only displayed on switch


platforms that can support a CEC-Plus. The tcm>
directory is only displayed on ASX-4000 switches
that have a TCM installed.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

5-1

Hardware Commands

CHAPTER 5

Hardware Commands

5.1 hardware cecplus


The cecplus commands let you configure the Timing Control Module (TCM) on a CEC-Plus.
The CEC-Plus is an environmental/timing management subsystem that may be installed in an
ASX-1000 switch, ASX-1200 switch, or TNX-1100 switch. To display the cecplus commands,
a TCM must be installed in the switch. You can display the list of available subcommands by
typing ? at the cecplus level.
myswitch:hardware cecplus-> ?
alarms>

The alarms directory

ip>

The ip directory

modify

Modify TCM configuration

rs232

Display serial port information

show

Display TCM Configuration

snmptraps>

The snmptraps directory

statistics>

The statistics directory

timing>

The timing directory

5.1.1

hardware cecplus alarms

This submenu lets you configure alarm conditions that are a result of various environmental
and synchronization timing conditions. You can display the list of available subcommands by
typing ? at the alarms level.
myswitch:hardware cecplus alarms-> ?
modify

Enable or disable an alarm

relays>

The relays directory

show

Display alarm configuration

status

Show major and minor relay state

5-2

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Hardware Commands

Hardware Commands

5.1.1.1 hardware cecplus alarms modify


This command lets you enable or disable a CEC-Plus alarm. Enter the following parameters:
myswitch:hardware cecplus alarms-> modify
Usage:
[-type] <ecpAlarm>

Type

[[-minorcategory] (enabled|disabled)]

Minor Category

[[-majorcategory] (enabled|disabled)]

Major Category

These parameters are defined as follows:


Parameter

Description

-type <ecpAlarm>

Indicates the alarm condition. Valid parameters are displayed in the AlarmType field
when the command hardware cecplus alarms show is entered.

-minorcategory
(enabled | disabled)

Designates that the specified alarm type causes a minor alarm when that condition occurs.

-majorcategory
(enabled | disabled)

Designates that the specified alarm type causes a major alarm when that condition occurs.

5.1.1.2 hardware cecplus alarms relays


These commands let you configure or display alarm relays. You can show the list of available
subcommands by typing ? at the relays level.
myswitch:hardware cecplus alarms relays-> ?
modify

Modify alarm relay function

show

Display alarm relay functions

5.1.1.2.1

hardware cecplus alarm relays modify

This command lets you set an alarm relay. Enter the following parameters:
myswitch:hardware cecplus alarms relays-> modify
Usage:
[-relay] <integer>
[[-function] (major|minor|unused)]

Relay Number
Alarm Function

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

5-3

Hardware Commands

These parameters are defined as follows:


Parameter

Description

-relay <integer>

The number that corresponds to one of the five alarm relay LEDs on the front of the ECP.

-function
(major|minor|unused)

Indicates if you want the alarm relay to be major, minor, or unused.

5.1.1.2.2

hardware cecplus alarm relays show

This command lets you display the alarm relays. Enter the following parameters:
myswitch:hardware cecplus alarms relays-> show
Relay

Alarm

Number

Current

Function

State

major

on

minor

on

unused

off

unused

off

major

on

The fields in this display are defined are defined as follows:


Field

Description

Relay Number

Shows the number which corresponds to one of the five alarm relay LEDs on the front of
the ECP.

Alarm Function

Shows whether the alarm relay has been configured as major, minor, or unused.

Current State

Shows whether the alarm relay is on (in a state of alarm) or off (not in a state of alarm).

If no CEC-Plus is installed in the switch, then the following is displayed:


myswitch:hardware cecplus alarms relays-> show
No CEC alarm relays available

5-4

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Hardware Commands

This command lets you display the configuration of all CEC-Plus alarms. Enter the following:
myswitch:hardware cecplus alarms-> show
AlarmType

AlarmStatus

MinorAlarm

MajorAlarm

powerSupplyInputFailed

active

disabled

enabled

powerSupplyOutputFailed

active

disabled

enabled

fanBankFailed

active

disabled

enabled

tempSensorOverTemp

inactive

disabled

enabled

powerSupplyOverCurrent

inactive

disabled

enabled

powerSupply5VoltFailed

inactive

disabled

enabled

faultyorMissingStandbyTcm

inactive

disabled

disabled

esiLossOfSyncSrc

active

enabled

disabled

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Field

Description

AlarmType

Displays the name of the alarm.

AlarmStatus

Shows whether the state of the alarm is active (alarming) or inactive (not alarming). An
alarm is active if the underlying condition is detected. For power supplies, the input failed
alarm condition is active if the input voltage is not within the nominal range for the
supply. This does not necessarily mean that an output failure will result. A power supply
output failure condition is active if any power supply is failing or if it is physically
removed.

MinorAlarm

disabled means that this alarm type will not cause a minor alarm.
enabled means that this alarm type causes a minor alarm.

MajorAlarm

disabled means that this alarm type will not cause a major alarm.
enabled means that this alarm type causes a major alarm.

NOTE

The faultyorMissingStandbyTcm alarm is


displayed only on a master TCM. This alarm is
registered only if the number of installed TCMs
is configured to be 2, or if the number of
installed TCMs is configured to be auto under
oper env tcms (in EMI) and if a standby TCM
is physically present in a slot at any time. After
being registered, the alarm is continuously
monitored and updated. After it is registered, the
only way to stop displaying the alarm is to
reconfigure the value to 1 manually.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

5-5

Hardware Commands

5.1.1.3 hardware cecplus alarms show

Hardware Commands

5.1.1.4 hardware cecplus alarms status


This command lets you display the status of all CEC-Plus alarms. Enter the following:
myswitch:hardware cecplus alarms-> status
Major alarm relay status: on
Minor alarm relay status: off

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Field

Description

Major alarm relay status

off means that no major alarms are currently active.


on means that one or more major alarms are currently active.
Look at the AlarmStatus field to see which condition is in a state of alarm.

Minor alarm relay status

off means that no minor alarms are currently active.


on means that one or more minor alarms are currently active.
Look at the AlarmStatus field to see which condition is in a state of alarm.

If there is no TCM installed in the switch, then the following is displayed:


myswitch:hardware cecplus alarms-> status
This table is currently empty.

5.1.2

hardware cecplus ip
The ie0 and ie1 interfaces of all installed TCMs
and the ie0 interface of all installed SCPs must
all reside on the same subnet.

NOTE

These commands let you change the IP configuration of the TCMs interfaces. You can display
the list of available subcommands by typing ? at the ip level.
myswitch:hardware cecplus ip-> ?
route>

The route directory

show

Display IP Configuration

5-6

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Hardware Commands

These command allow you to delete a static IP route from the local IP routing table, add a
static IP route to the local IP routing table, or list the current static IP routes in the local IP
routing table for one of the TCMs IP interfaces. You can display the list of available
subcommands by typing ? at the route level.
myswitch:hardware cecplus ip route-> ?
delete

Delete a route

new

Create a new route

show

Display Routing Information

5.1.2.1.1

hardware cecplus ip route delete

This command lets you delete an IP route from one of the TCMs IP interfaces. Enter the
following parameters:
myswitch:hardware cecplus ip route-> delete
Usage:
[-slot] (X|Y)

Slot

[-destination] (default | <IP Address>)


[[-gateway] <IP Address>]

Destination
Gateway

[[-ifname] (ie0|ie1|lo0)]

Interface

[[-metric] (0|1)]

Metric

[[-type] (host | net)]

Route Type

[[-flags] <text>]

Flags

These parameters are defined as follows:


Parameter

Description

-slot (X|Y)

Indicates the TCM slot on which you want to delete a route.

-destination (default |
<destination IP Address>)

default indicates that you want to delete a default route. destination IP Address
indicates the destination IP network number of the route that you want to delete.

-gateway <IP Address>

Indicates the gateway address to the destination IP network number.

-ifname (ie0|ie1|lo0)

The local IP interface used to get to the destination IP network.

-metric (0|1)

Indicates the number of hops to the destination IP network. The default value is 1.

-type (host|net)

host indicates this is a host-specific route with the destination being a specific nodes IP
address. net indicates this is a network-specific route with the destination being a
network IP address.

-flags <text>

H indicates the route is host-specific. G indicates the route is network-specific.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

5-7

Hardware Commands

5.1.2.1 hardware cecplus ip route

Hardware Commands

5.1.2.1.2

hardware cecplus ip route new

This command lets you create an IP route for one of the TCMs IP interfaces. Enter the
following parameters:
myswitch:hardware cecplus ip route-> new
Usage:
[-slot] (X|Y)

Slot

[-destination] (default | <IP Address>)

Destination

[-gateway] <IP Address>

Gateway

[[-metric] (0|1)]

Metric (default: 1)

[[-type] (host | net)]

Route Type (default: net)

These parameters are defined as follows:


Parameter

Description

-slot (X|Y)

Indicates the TCM slot on which you want to create a route.

-destination
(default|<IP Address>)

default indicates that you want to create a default route. IP Address indicates the
destination IP network number of the route that you want to create.

-gateway <IP Address>

Indicates the gateway address to the destination IP network number.

-metric (0|1)

Indicates the number of hops to the destination IP network. The default value of 1 is used
if no value is entered. If 1 is specified, the route is created with the RTF_GATEWAY flag.

-type (host|net)

host indicates this is a host-specific route with the destination being a specific nodes IP
address. net indicates this is a network-specific route with the destination being a
network IP address. The default value of net is used if no value is entered.

5-8

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Hardware Commands

hardware cecplus ip route show

This command lets you display the current IP routes for the TCMs IP interfaces. Enter the
following parameters:
myswitch:hardware cecplus ip route-> show
Destination

Gateway

Metric

Interface

Flags

default

198.29.31.75

ie0

127.0.0.1

127.0.0.1

lo0

169.144.85.3

198.29.31.75

ie0

198.29.31.0

198.29.31.28

ie0

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Field

Description

Destination

Indicates the destination IP network number.

Gateway

Indicates the gateway address to the destination IP network number.

Metric

Shows the number of hops to the destination IP network.

Interface

Shows the local IP interface used to get to the destination IP network.

Flags

Shows H if the route is host-specific (created with the RTF_HOST flag set). Shows G if the
route is network-specific (created with the RTF_GATEWAY flag set).

5.1.2.2 hardware cecplus ip show


This command lets you display configuration information for the TCMs IP interfaces. Enter
the following parameters:
myswitch:hardware cecplus ip-> show
interface

state

address

netmask

broadcast

ie0

up

169.144.28.125

255.255.255.0

169.144.28.255

ie1

up

169.144.28.225

255.255.255.0

169.144.28.255

lo0

up

127.0.0.1

255.0.0.0

N/A

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Field

Description

interface

Indicates the name of the IP interface.

state

Shows the administrative state of the IP interface.

address

Displays the IP address of the IP interface.

netmask

Shows the netmask address of the IP interface.

broadcast

Indicates the broadcast address of the IP interface.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

5-9

Hardware Commands

5.1.2.1.3

Hardware Commands

5.1.3

hardware cecplus modify

This command lets you set or change the name, date, and the time zone on the TCM. Enter the
following parameters:
myswitch:hardware cecplus-> modify
Usage:
[-slot] (X|Y)

Slot

[[-name] <text>]

Name

[[-timezone] <text>]

Time Zone

These parameters are defined as follows:


Parameter

Description

-slot (X|Y)

Indicates the TCM slot that you want to configure.

-name <text>

Indicates the new system name for the TCM.

-timezone <text>

The time zone configured for this TCM. The TCM supports and automatically converts
from Standard to Daylight Savings time for the following time zones: EST5EDT (Eastern
Standard Time), CST6CDT (Central Standard Time), MST7MDT (Mountain Standard Time),
PST8PDT (Pacific Standard Time), and AKST9AKDT (Alaska Standard Time).

5 - 10

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Hardware Commands

stdoffset [dst[offset][, start[/time], end[/time]]]


The time zones have the following meanings:
Field

Description

std and dst

Indicates 3 or more bytes that designate standard (std) or Daylight Savings Time (dst).
Only std is required; if dst is omitted, then it does not apply in this location. Can use
uppercase or lowercase letters and any characters, except a leading colon(:), digits, comma
(,), minus (-), plus (+), and ACSII NUL.

offset

Indicates the value to add to local time to equal Greenwich Mean Time. offset is of the
form:
hh[:mm[:ss]]
Hour (hh) is required and can be a single digit between 0 and 24. Minutes (mm) and
seconds (ss) are optional and are between 0 and 59. If no offset follows dst, it is
assumed to be one hour ahead of std. If preceded by a -, the time zone is east of the
Prime Meridian; otherwise it is west (with an optional +)

start[/time], end[/time]

start indicates the date when the change occurs from std to dst. end indicates the date
when you change back. Both start and end are of the form:
Mm.n.d
d is the d-th day ( 0 d 6 ) of week n of month m of the year ( 1 n 5, 1 m 12 ),
where week 5 is the last d day in month m, which can occur in either the fourth or the fifth
week). Week 1 is the first week in which the d-th day occurs. Day 0 is Sunday. time is of
the same format as offset, except that no leading - or + is allowed. If time is not
entered, the default of 02:00:00 is used.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

5 - 11

Hardware Commands

Locations outside of the time zones listed for -timezone <text> must supply the following
POSIX standard 1003.1-1988 formula for switching between Daylight Savings Time and
Standard Time:

Hardware Commands

5.1.4

hardware cecplus rs232

This command allows you to display the settings for the RS-232 serial port on the TCM. Enter
the following parameters:
myswitch:hardware cecplus-> rs232
Port

Type

rs232

Speed

Flow

Bits

9600

none

Stops

Parity

one

none

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Field

Description

Port

Shows the physical port designation.

Type

Shows the signalling standard used.

Speed

Shows the receive/transmit rate in bits per second.

Flow

Shows the type of flow control implemented on the given port.

Bits

Shows the number of bit times in a single character.

Stops

Shows the number of stop bits in a character frame.

Parity

Shows the parity setting for the ports.

If no TCM is installed, then the following is displayed:


myswitch:hardware cecplus-> rs232
There is no CEC on this switch

5 - 12

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Hardware Commands

hardware cecplus show

This command lets you display information about the TCM to which you are logged in. Enter
the following parameters:
myswitch:hardware cecplus-> show
Name:

linus

Type:

cec-plus

Uptime:

5 days 18:43

Hardware Version A ,Software Version T_ForeThought_6.1.0 (1.46581)


Serial Number:

30

Slot:

State:

active

TimeZone:

N/A

External Inputs (1-5): off, off, off, off, off


ESI module is present
Other TCM Status is unknown

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Field

Description

Name

This TCMs system name.

Type

Shows what type of TCM this is.

Uptime

The amount of time (in days, hours, and minutes) since this TCM has been rebooted.

Hardware Version

The hardware version of this TCM.

Software Version

The software version being used by this TCM.

Serial Number

The serial number of this TCM card.

Slot

Indicates the TCM slot for which information is being displayed. X indicates the top slot
and Y indicates the bottom slot.

State

The current state of this TCM. active means this TCM is the controller and is functioning
properly. standby means this is the standby TCM. offline means the timing has failed
on this TCM.

TimeZone

The time zone configured for this TCM any offset from GM time. If this field reads N/A,
then this value has not been configured yet.

External Inputs (1 - 5)

The current state of each of the five front panel external inputs from the viewpoint of this
TCM. Can be either on (input being received) or off (no input).

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

5 - 13

Hardware Commands

5.1.5

Hardware Commands

Field

Description

ESI module is present.

The External Synchronization Interface (ESI) card status from the viewpoint of this TCM.
This should always be present. absent indicates a failure of the ESI interface logic.

Other TCM

If another TCM is not plugged in, nothing is displayed. If another TCM is plugged in,
shows the software status of the other TCM from the viewpoint of this TCM. If this TCM is
the controller, normal means the standby TCM is actively updating and waiting to be
called into service, and unknown means the standby TCM is down. If this TCM is the
standby, active means the controller TCM is functioning normally.

5.1.6

hardware cecplus snmptraps

These commands enable you to manage SNMP traps. You can display the list of available
subcommands by typing ? at the snmptraps level.
myswitch:hardware cecplus snmptraps-> ?
delete

Delete a trap destination

new

Add a trap destination

show

Display trap destinations

5.1.6.1 hardware cecplus snmptraps delete


This command allows you to delete an existing SNMP trap destination. Before deleting a trap
that may need to be recreated later, show the list of current SNMP traps and either copy and
save the screen or write down the trap destinations. You can display the list of current SNMP
traps to find the number of the trap to be deleted. Enter the following parameters:
myswitch:hardware cecplus snmptraps-> delete
Usage:
[-slot] (X|Y)

Slot

[-trapdest] <IP Address>

Trap Destination

These parameters are defined as follows:


Parameter

Description

-slot (X|Y)

Indicates the TCM slot on which you want to delete a trap.

-trapdest <IP Address>

The number of the trap destination in the list of current SNMP traps that is to be removed.

5 - 14

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Hardware Commands

This command allows you to specify a host to which an TCM can send SNMP traps. Enter the
IP address of the SNMP trap destination to be added. Repeat this for as many SNMP trap
destinations as needed. Traps are active as soon as they are set. Enter the following
parameters:
myswitch:hardware cecplus snmptraps-> new
Usage:
[-slot] (X|Y)

Slot

[-trapdest] <IP Address>

Trap Destination

These parameters are defined as follows:


Parameter

Description

-slot (X|Y)

Indicates the TCM slot on which you want to create a trap.

-trapdest <IP Address>

The IP address of the trap destination that is to be created.

5.1.6.3 hardware cecplus snmptraps show


This command enables you to list all of the current SNMP traps. Enter the following:
myswitch:hardware cecplus snmptraps-> show
Trap

Destination

192.88.243.18

198.29.16.14

198.29.16.18

198.29.23.39

198.29.31.130

If no SNMP traps have been configured, the following message is displayed:


myswitch:hardware cecplus snmptraps-> show
No SNMP trap destinations configured

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

5 - 15

Hardware Commands

5.1.6.2 hardware cecplus snmptraps new

Hardware Commands

5.1.7

hardware cecplus statistics

This section contains a detailed description of the statistics commands that display
operational performance and error information received by the CEC-Plus.

NOTE

The
hardware
cecplus
statistics
commands are only displayed on the platforms
that can support a CEC-Plus. For more
information about the CEC-Plus, see the
CEC-Plus Installation and Users Manual.

Type ? at the statistics level to display the available commands:


myswitch:hardware cecplus statistics-> ?
icmp

Display ICMP statistics

if

Display interface statistics

ip

Display IP statistics

tcp

Display TCP statistics

udp

Display UDP statistics

5 - 16

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Hardware Commands

You can list ICMP statistics for the TCM by entering icmp at the statistics level as
follows:
myswitch:hardware cecplus statistics-> icmp
ICMP Counter for slot X
----------------------Msgs:

In

Delta

-----------------------

Out

Delta

-----------------------

35

(35)

39031

(39031)

Errors:

(0)

39003

(39003)

Dest Unreachs:

(7)

38875

(38875)

Time Excds:

(0)

128

(128)

Parmprobs:

(0)

(0)

Src Quenchs:

(0)

(0)

Redirects:

(0)

(0)

28

(28)

(0)

Echo Replys:

(0)

28

(28)

Timestamps:

(0)

(0)

Timestamp Replys:

(0)

(0)

Addrmasks:

(0)

(0)

Addrmask Replys:

(0)

(0)

Echos:

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Field

Description

Msgs In

The total number of ICMP messages received. This counter includes all those counted by
Errors In.

Msgs Out

The total number of ICMP messages which this entity attempted to send. This counter
includes all those counted by Errors Out.

Errors In

The number of ICMP messages received but determined as having ICMP-specific errors
(bad ICMP checksums, bad length, etc.).

Errors Out

The number of ICMP messages which this entity did not send due to problems discovered
within ICMP such as a lack of buffers. This value should not include errors discovered
outside the ICMP layer such as the inability of IP to route the resultant datagram. In some
implementations there may be no types of error which contribute to this counters value.

Dest Unreachs In

The number of ICMP Destination Unreachable messages received.

Dest Unreachs Out

The number of ICMP Destination Unreachable messages sent.

TimeExcds In

The number of ICMP Time Exceeded messages received.

TimeExcds Out

The number of ICMP Time Exceeded messages sent.

Parmprobs In

The number of ICMP Parameter Problem messages received.

Parmprobs Out

The number of ICMP Parameter Problem messages sent.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

5 - 17

Hardware Commands

5.1.7.1 hardware cecplus statistics icmp

Hardware Commands

Field

Description

Src Quenchs In

The number of ICMP Source Quench messages received.

Src Quenchs Out

The number of ICMP Source Quench messages sent.

Redirects In

The number of ICMP Redirect messages received.

Redirects Out

The number of ICMP Redirect messages sent. For a host, this object is always zero, since
hosts do not send redirects.

Echos In

The number of ICMP Echo (request) messages received.

Echos Out

The number of ICMP Echo (request) messages sent.

Echo Replys In

The number of ICMP Echo Reply messages received.

Echo Replys Out

The number of ICMP Echo Reply messages sent.

Timestamps In

The number of ICMP Timestamp (request) messages received.

Timestamps Out

The number of ICMP Timestamp (request) messages sent.

Timestamp Replys In

The number of ICMP Timestamp Reply messages received.

Timestamp Replys Out

The number of ICMP Timestamp Reply messages sent.

AddrMasks In

The number of ICMP Address Mask Request messages received.

AddrMasks Out

The number of ICMP Address Mask Request messages sent.

AddrMask Replys In

The number of ICMP Address Mask Reply messages received.

AddrMask Replys Out

The number of ICMP Address Mask Reply messages sent.

NOTE

5 - 18

The In and Out columns display the current


value of the counter. The Delta columns display
the change in the counter since the last time you
checked this value. The counters are reset when
the switch is restarted.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Hardware Commands

You can list interface statistics for the TCM by entering if at the statistics level as
follows:
myswitch:hardware cecplus statistics-> if
Slot X, ie0 Counter

In

Delta

Out

Delta

-----------------------

-----------------------

-----------------------

Octets:

4294967295 (4294967295)

4294967295 (4294967295)

Unicast Packets:

1418897

(1418897)

48811

Non-unicast Packets:

(0)

(0)

Discards:

(0)

(0)

Errors:

(0)

(0)

Unknown Protocols:

(0)

Qlen:

(48811)

Slot X, ie1 Counter

In

Delta

Out

Delta

-----------------------

-----------------------

-----------------------

Octets:

4294967295 (4294967295)

4294967295 (4294967295)

Unicast Packets:

12715678

(12715678)

3577037

Non-unicast Packets:

(0)

(0)

Discards:

(0)

(0)

Errors:

(0)

(0)

Unknown Protocols:

(0)

Qlen:

(3577037)

Press return for more, q to quit: q

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Field

Description

Octets In

The total number of octets received on the interface, including framing characters.

Octets Out

The total number of octets transmitted out of the interface, including framing characters.

Unicast Packets In

The number of subnetwork-unicast packets delivered to a higher-layer protocol.

Unicast Packets Out

The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested be transmitted to a


subnetwork-unicast address, including those that were discarded or not sent.

Non-unicast Packets In

The number of non-unicast (i.e., subnetwork-broadcast or subnetwork-multicast) packets


delivered to a higher-layer protocol.

Non-unicast Packets Out

The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested be transmitted to a nonunicast (i.e., a subnetwork-broadcast or subnetwork-multicast) address, including those
that were discarded or not sent.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

5 - 19

Hardware Commands

5.1.7.2 hardware cecplus statistics if

Hardware Commands

Field

Description

Discards In

The number of inbound packets that were chosen to be discarded even though no errors
had been detected to prevent their being deliverable to a higher-layer protocol. One
possible reason for discarding such a packet could be to free up buffer space.

Discards Out

The number of outbound packets which were chosen to be discarded even though no
errors had been detected to prevent their being transmitted. One possible reason for
discarding such a packet could be to free up buffer space.

Errors In

The number of inbound packets that contained errors preventing them from being
deliverable to a higher-layer protocol.

Errors Out

The number of outbound packets that could not be transmitted because of errors.

Unknown Protocols In

The number of packets received via the interface which were discarded because of an
unknown or unsupported protocol.

QLen Out

The length of the output packet queue (in packets).

NOTE

5 - 20

The In and Out columns display the current


value of the counter. The Delta columns display
the change in the counter since the last time you
checked this value. The counters are reset when
the switch is restarted.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Hardware Commands

Hardware Commands

5.1.7.3 hardware cecplus statistics ip


You can display IP statistics for the TCM by entering ip at the statistics level as follows:
myswitch:hardware cecplus statistics-> ip
IP Counter for slot X
-----------------------------In Receives:

Value

Delta

----------

-----------

12510067

(12510067)

Inhdr Errors:

(0)

In Addr Errors:

(5)

Forw Datagrams:

(3)

In Unknown Protos:

(7)

Indiscards:

(0)

Indelivers:

12509924

(12509924)

Outrequests:

1796389

(1796389)

Outdiscards:

(0)

Out No Routes:

(0)

Reasm Reqds:

(0)

Reasm Oks:

(0)

Reasm Fails:

(0)

Frag Oks:

(0)

Frag Fails:

(0)

Frag Creates:

(0)

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Field

Description

In Receives

The total number of input datagrams received from interfaces, including those received in
error.

Inhdr Errors

The number of input datagrams discarded due to errors in their IP headers, including bad
checksums, version number mismatch, other format errors, time-to-live exceeded, errors
discovered in processing their IP options, etc.

In Addr Errors

The number of input datagrams discarded because the IP address in their IP headers
destination field was not a valid address to be received at this entity. This includes invalid
addresses (e.g., 0.0.0.0) and addresses of unsupported Classes (e.g., Class E). For entities
which are not IP Gateways and, therefore, do not forward datagrams, this includes
datagrams discarded because the destination address was not local.

Forw Datagrams

The number of input datagrams for which this entity was not their final IP destination, as
a result of which an attempt was made to find a route to forward them to that final
destination. In entities which do not act as IP Gateways, this counter includes only those
packets which were Source-Routed via this entity, and the Source-Route option processing
was successful.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

5 - 21

Hardware Commands

Field

Description

In Unknown Protos

The number of locally-addressed datagrams received successfully but discarded because


of an unknown or unsupported protocol.

Indiscards

The number of input IP datagrams for which no problems were encountered to prevent
their continued processing, but which were discarded (e.g., for lack of buffer space). This
counter does not include any datagrams discarded while awaiting re-assembly.

Indelivers

The total number of input datagrams successfully delivered to IP user-protocols


(including ICMP).

Outrequests

The total number of IP datagrams which local IP user-protocols (including ICMP)


supplied to IP in requests for transmission. This counter does not include datagrams
counted in ipForwDatagrams.

Outdiscards

The number of output IP datagrams for which no problem was encountered to prevent
their transmission to their destination, but which were discarded (e.g., for lack of buffer
space). This counter includes datagrams counted in ipForwDatagrams if any such
packets met this (discretionary) discard criterion.

Out No Routes

The number of IP datagrams discarded because no route could be found to transmit them
to their destination. This counter includes any packets counted in ipForwDatagrams
which meet this no-route criterion. This includes datagrams which a host cannot route
because all of its default gateways are down.

Reasm Reqds

The maximum number of seconds which received fragments are held while they are
awaiting reassembly at this entity.

Reasm Oks

The number of IP datagrams successfully reassembled.

Reasm Fails

The number of failures detected by the IP reassembly algorithm (for whatever reason:
timed out, errors, etc.). This is not necessarily a count of discarded IP fragments since
some algorithms (notably the algorithm in RFC-815) can lose track of the number of
fragments by combining them as they are received.

Frag Oks

The number of IP datagrams that have been successfully fragmented at this entity.

Frag Fails

The number of IP datagrams that have been discarded because they needed to be
fragmented at this entity but could not be (e.g., because their Dont Fragment flag was
set).

Frag Creates

The number of IP datagram fragments that have been generated as a result of


fragmentation at this entity.

NOTE

5 - 22

The Value column shows the current value of the


counter. The Delta column shows the change in
the counter since the last time you checked it.
The counters are reset when the switch is
restarted.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Hardware Commands

Hardware Commands

5.1.7.4 hardware cecplus statistics tcp


You can display TCP statistics for the TCM by entering tcp at the statistics level:
myswitch:hardware cecplus statistics-> tcp
TCP Counter for slot X

Value

Delta

----------

-----------

Active Opens:

(0)

Passive Opens:

(6)

Attempt Fails:

(0)

Established Resets:

(0)

------------------------------

Current Established:
In Segments:

0
2988

(2988)

Out Segments:

(0)

Retrans Segments:

(0)

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Field

Description

Active Opens

The number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to the SYN-SENT
state from the CLOSED state.

Passive Opens

The number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to the SYN-RCVD
state from the LISTEN state.

Attempt Fails

The number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to the CLOSED state
from either the SYN-SENT state or the SYN-RCVD state, plus the number of times TCP
connections have made a direct transition to the LISTEN state from the SYN-RCVD state.

Established Resets

The number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to the CLOSED state
from either the ESTABLISHED state or the CLOSE-WAIT state.

Current Established

The number of TCP connections for which the current state is either ESTABLISHED or
CLOSE-WAIT.

In Segments

The total number of segments received, including those received in error. This count
includes segments received on currently established connections.

Out Segments

The total number of segments sent, including those on current connections but excluding
those containing only retransmitted octets.

Retrans Segments

The total number of segments retransmitted; i.e., the number of TCP segments transmitted
containing one or more previously transmitted octets.

NOTE

The Value column displays the current value of


the counter. The Delta column displays the
change in the counter since the last time you
checked this value. The counters are reset when
the switch is restarted.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

5 - 23

Hardware Commands

5.1.7.5 hardware cecplus statistics udp


You can display UDP statistics for the TCM by entering udp at the statistics level as
follows:
myswitch:hardware cecplus statistics-> udp
UDP Counter for slot X
-----------------------------In Datagrams:
Out Datagrams:
NonExistant Ports:
In Errors:

Value

Delta

----------

-----------

12318903

(12318903)

1755476

(1755476)

227221

(227221)

(0)

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Field

Description

In Datagrams

The total number of UDP datagrams delivered to UDP users.

Out Datagrams

The total number of UDP datagrams sent from this entity.

NonExistant Ports

The total number of received UDP datagrams for which there was no application at the
destination port.

In Errors

The number of received UDP datagrams that could not be delivered for reasons other than
the lack of an application at the destination port.

NOTE

5 - 24

The Value column displays the current value of


the counter. The Delta column displays the
change in the counter since the last time you
checked this value. The counters are reset when
the switch is restarted.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Hardware Commands

hardware cecplus timing

These commands let you configure external synchronization timing. Type ? at the timing
level to display the list of available subcommands.
myswitch:hardware cecplus timing-> ?
modify

Modify timing configuration

references>

The references directory

show

Display current timing configuration

5.1.8.1 hardware cecplus timing modify


This command lets you configure timing on a CEC-Plus:
myswitch:hardware cecplus timing-> modify
Usage:
[[-mode] <requestedref>]

Requested Timing Ref

[[-primary] <refsource>]

Primary Ref Source

[[-secondary] <refsource>]

Secondary Ref Source

[[-revertiveswitching] (enabled|disabled)]

Revertive Switching

[[-revertivedelay] <integer>]

Revertive Switching Delay (sec)

[[-failoverdelay] <integer>]

Failover Switching Delay (sec)

[[-framing] <bitsframing>]

Bits Framing Format

[[-coding] (ami|b8zs|hdb3)]

Bits Coding Format

[[-level] (0.6|1.2|1.8|2.4|3.0)]

Bits Output Level

These parameters are defined as follows:


Parameter
-mode <requestedref>

Description
Indicates the timing reference1 to be used on the TCM:
freerun indicates that the TCM must use the local oscillator as its timing source.
primary indicates that the TCM must use the primary timing source.
secondary indicates that the TCM must use the secondary timing source.
automatic is the default mode. See the CEC-Plus Installation and Users Manual for a
description of how this mode works.
bits indicates that the TCM will automatically use the most appropriate BITS input.
See the CEC-Plus Installation and Users Manual for a description of how this mode
works.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

5 - 25

Hardware Commands

5.1.8

Hardware Commands

Parameter

Description

-primary <refsource>

Indicates the primary timing source is to be taken from one of the exported clocks (either
primary or secondary) from one of the switch fabrics (1 - first (leftmost slot), 2 - second
slot, 3 - third slot, 4 fourth slot) switch fabric. Before configuring the primary source, use
the hardware cecplus timing references show command to display all of the
possible clocking references, their specific sources, and whether or not they are actually
available for you to use. The freerun oscillator is not listed there because it is always
available.

-secondary <refsource>

Indicates the secondary timing source is to be taken from one of the exported clocks
(either primary or secondary) from one of the switch fabrics (1 - first (leftmost slot), 2 second slot, 3 - third slot, 4 fourth slot) switch fabric. Before configuring the secondary
source, use the hardware cecplus timing references show command to display all
of the possible clocking references, their specific sources, and whether or not they are
actually available for you to use. The freerun oscillator is not listed there because it is
always available.

-revertiveswitching
(enabled|disabled)

enabled indicates that the revertive timing delay is going to be turned on. disabled
indicates that the revertive timing delay is going to be turned off.
When you disable revertive switching, you only turn it off. If you enable it again, the TCM
uses the value that you last configured for the delay using hardware cecplus timing
modify -revertivedelay.

-revertivedelay <integer>

Indicates the amount of time after the restoration of the primary timing reference before
the TCM is instructed to return to the primary timing reference. The default is 3 seconds.

-failoverdelay <integer>

Indicates the amount of time after the failure of the primary reference before the TCM is
instructed to switch to the secondary reference. The default is 0 seconds. The failover
delay should be left at 0 under normal circumstances. This parameter is only meaningful
when the timing mode is automatic.

-framing <bitsframing>

Indicates the type of framing format to be used for DS1 BITS interface or E1 BITS interface
for this TCM. The following formats are supported for a DS1 interface:
d4 indicates that D4 (also known as Superframe (SF)) framing should be used for the
BITS interface on the TCM. SF consists of 12 frames of 192 bits each, with the 193rd bit
providing error checking and other functions.
esf indicates that Extended Superframe (ESF) framing should be used for the BITS
interface on the TCM. ESF provides frame synchronization, cyclic redundancy, and
data link bits.
The following formats are supported for an E1 interface:
fas indicates E1 framing that makes use of the Frame Alignment Signal.
fascrc4 indicates E1 framing that makes use of the Frame Alignment Signal and
CRC-4 checksums.
mfas indicates E1 framing that makes use of the Multi-Frame Alignment Signal
(sometimes referred to as TS16).
mfascrc4 indicates E1 framing that makes use of the Multi-Frame Alignment Signal
and CRC-4 checksums.

5 - 26

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Hardware Commands

-coding (ami|b8zs|hdb3)

Description
Indicates the type of coding to be used for the DS1 BITS interface or the E1 BITS interface
for this TCM:
ami indicates that Alternate Mark Inversion (AMI) coding should be used for the BITS
interface on the TCM. This means zeros are represented by 01 during each bit cell, and
ones are represented by 11 or 00, alternately, during each bit cell. This technique
requires that the sending device maintain ones density. Ones density is not maintained
independent of the data stream.
b8zs indicates that Binary 8-Zero Substitution (B8ZS) coding should be used for the
TCM. This means a special code is substituted whenever eight consecutive zeros are
sent through the link. This code is then interpreted at the remote end of the connection.
This technique guarantees ones density independent of the data stream.
hdb3 indicates that High Density Bipolar (HDB3) coding should be used for the TCM.
HDB3 is a bipolar coding method that does not allow more than 3 consecutive zeroes.
HDB3 is only supported for an E1 interface.

-level (0.6|1.2|1.8|2.4|3.0)

Indicates the output level (dB) of the DS1 BITS interface for this TCM. This parameter is
not valid when using an E1 source.
0.6 indicates that the output level for the BITS interface is 0.6 dB.
1.2 indicates that the output level for the BITS interface is 1.2 dB.
1.8 indicates that the output level for the BITS interface is 1.8 dB.
2.4 indicates that the output level for the BITS interface is 2.4 dB.
3.0 indicates that the output level for the BITS interface is 3.0 dB.

1.

It is recommended that the freerun, primary, and secondary modes only be used during diagnostics and
maintenance because the TCM will not failover to another source when it is in one of these modes. automatic mode
is only valid when the primary and secondary sources are recovered from network modules.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

5 - 27

Hardware Commands

Parameter

Hardware Commands

5.1.8.2 hardware cecplus timing references


These commands let you configure or display the timing reference sources and their status.
Type ? at the references level to display the list of available subcommands.
myswitch:hardware cecplus timing references-> ?
modify

Modify reference sources quality/admin status

show

Display all reference sources and their status

5.1.8.2.1

hardware cecplus timing references modify

This commands lets you display all of the possible timing references from the switch. Enter
the following parameters:
myswitch:hardware cecplus timing references-> modify
Usage:
[-reference] <esirefsource>

Reference

[[-refqual] <refqual>]

RefQual

[[-admin] (up|down)]

Admin

These parameters are defined as follows:


Parameter

1.

Description

-reference <esirefsource>

Indicates for which timing source you are changing the administrative status. Can be
primary or secondary.

-refqual <refqual>

clear indicates that you want to clear1 a reference quality (RefQual) failure for a timing
source. Once a RefQual failure has been declared for a timing source, it is considered
invalid and cannot be used as a timing source until the failure is cleared. You can use this
command to clear the failure and make the source a valid one again.

-admin (up|down)

up means you are enabling this timing source. down means you are disabling this timing
source.

Before clearing a refqual failure, it is recommended that you investigate the cause of the failure and correct it.

5 - 28

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Hardware Commands

hardware cecplus timing references show

This commands lets you display all of the possible timing references from the switch. Enter
the following parameters:
myswitch:hardware cecplus timing references-> show
Reference

Source

Status

Admin

RefQual

fabric1_Primary

1C1

unavailable

up

ok

fabric1_Secondary

1 (No Timing)

unavailable

up

ok

fabric2_Primary

2 (Down)

unavailable

up

ok

fabric2_Secondary

2 (Down)

unavailable

up

ok

fabric3_Primary

3A1

available

up

ok

fabric3_Secondary

3 (No Timing)

unavailable

up

ok

fabric4_Primary

4 (No Timing)

unavailable

up

ok

fabric4_Secondary

4 (No Timing)

unavailable

up

ok

tcmX_bits1

BITS1

unavailable

up

ok

tcmY_bits2

BITS2

unavailable

up

ok

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Fields

Description

Reference

Shows the name of the timing reference.

Source

Shows from which network module port or BITS clock the timing is being derived for this
fabric or TCM. If the port is listed in regular BNP notation (e.g., 3B2), this indicates the
exported timing source from this port. If the port is listed as 3 (No Timing), then this
network module does not support distributed timing. If the port is listed as 3 OSC, this
indicates the timing source is the crystal oscillator on that network module. If the port is
listed as 3 (Down), then this network module has been removed.

Status

Shows if the timing source is available or not.

Admin

Shows the administrative status of the timing reference. up means it is enabled and down
means it is disabled.

RefQual

Shows the reference quality (RefQual) status of the timing reference. ok means the source
is valid. fail means the source has gone out of specification. It is recommended that you
investigate and correct the cause prior to resetting. To make the source valid, you must
manually reset the RefQual status of that source using the hardware cecplus timing
references modify -refqual command.

If no TCM is installed, then the following is displayed:


myswitch:hardware cecplus timing references-> show
No ESI board found

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

5 - 29

Hardware Commands

5.1.8.2.2

Hardware Commands

5.1.8.3 hardware cecplus timing show


This command lets you display the timing information that has been configured. Enter the
following parameters:
myswitch:hardware cecplus timing-> show
ESI module on linus

Card Type DS1_Stratum_4

BITS interface framing d4


line coding ami

, output level 0.6dB

PLL Status:

locked

Current Timing Reference:

secondary

Requested Timing Reference:

automatic

Primary Reference

(1C1

unavailable

Secondary Reference(3A1

available

BITS1 Reference

unavailable

BITS2 Reference

unavailable

Revertive Switching:

enabled

Revertive Switching Delay:

Failover Switching Delay:

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Field

Description

ESI module

Shows the name of the TCM.

Card Type

Shows the ESI card type for this TCM.

BITS interface framing

Shows the framing format of the BITS interface for this TCM. For DS1, can be: d4 or esf,
and for E1, can be: fas, fascrc4, mfas, or mfascrc4.

line coding

Shows the coding format of the BITS interface for this TCM. For DS1, can be: ami or b8zs,
and for E1, can be: hdb3.

output level

Shows the output level, in dB, of the DS1 BITS interface for this TCM. Can be 0.6, 1.2,
1.8, 2.4, or 3.0.

5 - 30

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Hardware Commands

PLL Status

Description
Shows the phase-locked loop (PLL) status for this TCM. Can be one of the following:
freerun means the local oscillator on the TCM is being used.
locked means the current clock is good.
holdover means the TCM has detected a clock source error and is using the last valid
clock source.
acquire means the TCM is trying to lock on to the current clock (this may take up to
five minutes).
refqual means the reference quality of the new clock is out of specification.

Current Timing Reference

Shows the actual timing reference that is currently being used. Can be BITS1, BITS2,
primary, secondary, or freerun.

Requested Timing Reference Shows the timing reference that was configured. If this source fails, it will not match what
is currently being used. Can be bits, automatic, primary, secondary, or freerun.
Primary Reference

Shows the timing source configured as the primary source. Can be one of the primary or
secondary clocks exported from one of the switch fabrics.

Secondary Reference

Shows the timing source configured as the secondary source. Can be one of the primary or
secondary clocks exported from one of the switch fabrics.

BITS1 Reference

Shows whether the BITS1 timing source is currently available or unavailable.

BITS2 Reference

Shows whether the BITS2 timing source is currently available or unavailable.

Revertive Switching

Shows whether revertive switching is enabled or disabled.

Revertive Switching Delay

Shows the amount of time, in seconds, between the time that the primary clock is restored
and the time that the TCM switches back to the primary clock again.

Failover Switching Delay

Shows the amount of time, in seconds, after the failure of the primary clock source before
the TCM switches to the secondary clock source.

If no TCM is installed, then the following is displayed:


myswitch:hardware cecplus timing-> show
There is no TCM on this switch

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

5 - 31

Hardware Commands

Field

Hardware Commands

5.2 hardware chassis


This command enables you to display information about the CEC on an ASX-1000 switch,
ASX-1200 switch, TNX-1100 switch, or the backplane on an ASX-4000 switch. The following is
displayed:
myswitch:hardware-> chassis
Type:

64

Revision:

SerialNumber: 1007

The fields in these displays are defined as follows:


Field

Description

Type

The board type of the CEC on an ASX-1000 switch, ASX-1200 switch, or TNX-1100 switch,
or the hardware revision of the backplane on an ASX-4000 switch.

Revision

The hardware revision of the CEC on an ASX-1000 switch, ASX-1200 switch, or TNX-1100
switch, or the hardware revision of the backplane on an ASX-4000 switch.

Serial Number

The serial number of the CEC on an ASX-1000 switch, ASX-1200 switch, or TNX-1100
switch, or the hardware revision of the backplane on an ASX-4000 switch.

The following is displayed on all other types of switches:


myswitch:hardware-> chassis
No chassis information available

5 - 32

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Hardware Commands

These commands let you configure failover support in a switch when two SCPs are installed
in a single switch fabric.

NOTE

Only HA-based SCPs or Pentium-based SCPs


support dual SCP configuration. Using an earlier
version SCP in a redundant configuration can
cause irreparable damage to your switch fabric.
These commands are not available locally on an
ESX-3000 switch.
For proper synchronization of information
between SCPs, ensure that the amount of free
space on both SCPs is roughly equal before
performing these commands.

You can display the list of available subcommands by typing ? at the dualscp level.
myswitch:hardware dualscp-> ?
modify

Modify parameters of the dualscp configuration

show

Show dualscp information

switchover

Enable Dualscp Switchover

synchronize

Synchronize with dual scp

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

5 - 33

Hardware Commands

5.3 hardware dualscp

Hardware Commands

5.3.1

hardware dualscp modify

This command lets you configure failover support of two SCPs in a fabric. Enter the following:
myswitch:hardware dualscp-> modify
Usage:
[[-primary] (X|Y)]

Primary SCP

[[-failover] (enabled|disabled)]

Auto Failover

[[-threshold] <integer>]

Failover Threshold (sec)

[[-autoremove] (enabled|disabled)]

Auto Remove Old Files

[[-cdbsyncmode] (manual|automatic)]

CDB Sync Mode

[[-resetstandby] (enabled|disabled)]

Reset Standby SCP

These parameters are defined as follows:


Parameter
-primary

(X|Y)1

Description
Designates which SCP is to control the switch at start-up:
X indicates that the SCP in the left slot of the ASX-4000, ASX-200BX fabric or TNX-210
fabric (the top slot in an ASX-1000 fabric, ASX-1200 fabric, or TNX-1100 fabric) is the
primary SCP. This is the default.
Y indicates that the SCP in the right slot of the ASX-4000, ASX-200BX fabric or TNX210 fabric (the bottom slot in an ASX-1000 fabric, ASX-1200 fabric, or TNX-1100 fabric)
is the primary SCP.

-failover (enabled|disabled)

Lets you enable or disable failover to a second SCP in the event of a hardware failure on
the controlling SCP. The default is enabled.
If SCP failover is disabled, the standby SCP will not take control of the switch fabric if
the controlling SCP fails, regardless of how other dualscp parameters are set.

-threshold <integer>

The threshold time, in seconds, that the standby SCP waits for a heartbeat from the
controlling SCP before taking control of the switch. The minimum and default value is 2
seconds. The maximum value is 300 seconds.

-autoremove
(enabled|disabled)2

enabled indicates that autoremove is enabled on the standby SCP. When enabled, the
SCP automatically deletes unused files and directories (i.e., old versions of switch
software), if necessary, when files are being synchronized by the controlling SCP.
disabled indicates that autoremove is disabled on the standby SCP. If disabled, you
are not prompted and synchronization attempts fail in the event that there is not enough
free space in FLASH. This is the default.

-cdbsyncmode
(manual|automatic)3

manual indicates that you want to synchronize files manually between the controlling
and standby SCPs.
automatic indicates that automatic synchronization will be enabled on the SCP. This is
the default. When enabled, the CDB is saved to the standby SCP every time the CDB is
written to FLASH on the controlling SCP. The standby SCP then rereads the CDB once it
has been completely received. In addition, you can configure the controlling SCP to
automatically copy the password file to the standby SCP if changes are made to it.

5 - 34

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Hardware Commands

Description

-resetstandby
(enabled|disabled)

enabled lets you force the standby SCP to reboot.

1.

The primary SCP and the controlling SCP are not necessarily the same. Primary refers to the SCP that is supposed to
control the switch after it boots. Controlling refers to the SCP that actually controls the switch. For example, if the SCP
in slot X fails at start-up, the SCP in slot Y controls the switch even though it is not designated as the primary SCP.

2.

Autoremove deletes old copies of the OS if no space is available during the synchronization process. When the OS is
being synchronized, it also removes the CURRENT copy of the OS if that is the only file that can be deleted to make
room for the new OS. When synchronizing the FLASH, the controlling SCP first instructs the standby SCP to delete
any files in its FLASH that are not on the controlling SCPs FLASH. This could remove older copies or the CURRENT
copy of the OS, if those versions of the OS are not already present on the controlling SCPs FLASH.

3.

Choosing automatic does not cause the automatic synchronization of switch software; only the CDB, password file,
and other system configuration files are synchronized.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

5 - 35

Hardware Commands

Parameter

Hardware Commands

5.3.2

hardware dualscp show

This command lets you display the settings for dual SCP mode as follows:
myswitch:hardware dualscp-> show
Threshold Auto
SCP State

Primary Failover (in secs) Remove

CDB

Sync

SyncMode

Requests Failures

Sync

------------------------------------------------------------------------------1X

standalone

enabled

Synchronization queue

: CDB

Synchronization state

: Idle

disabled automatic

SVx/SPVx state transfer %: 100


SVx/SPVx dropped calls

: 0

SVx/SPVx transfer status : OK


Last switchover time

: N/A

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Field

Description

SCP

The SCP for which the information is being displayed. For example, 3X indicates that
information for the SCP in slot X of switch fabric 3 is being displayed.

State

The state of the SCP. standalone means that there is only one SCP in the switch fabric.
dual means that there are two SCPs installed in the switch fabric, and the SCPs are communicating with one another. other means that there are two SCPs installed in the switch
fabric, but they are not communicating with one another.

Primary

Shows which SCP (X or Y) is the primary SCP. The SCP in slot X is set to primary by default.

Failover

Shows if failover is enabled on the switch fabric. failover is enabled by default.

Threshold (in secs)

The amount of time, in seconds, that the standby SCP waits to receive a heartbeat from the
controlling SCP before taking control of the switch. The maximum threshold is 300 seconds. The minimum and default threshold value is 2 seconds.

Auto Remove

Shows if autoremove is enabled on the standby SCP. autoremove is disabled by default.

CDB SyncMode

automatic means that CDB synchronization occurs automatically (autosync is enabled


on the controlling SCP). manual means that CDB synchronization does not occur automatically (autosync is disabled on the controlling SCP). The default is automatic.

Sync Requests

The number of synchronization requests that have been made between the controlling and
standby SCP.

Sync Failures

The number of synchronizations requests that have failed between SCPs.

Synchronization queue

The number of synchronization requests waiting to be processed.

5 - 36

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Hardware Commands

Description
1

1.

Synchronization state

The state of the current synchronization attempt between the controlling and standby SCP.
Suspended means either that the switch is not in dual SCP mode, or that the SCPs are
running different versions of switch software. Idle means synchronization is not taking
place between SCPs. Manual means a manual synchronization is taking place between
SCPs. Automatic means an automatic synchronization is taking place between SCPs.

SVx/SPVx state transfer

When SVx/SPVx Call Preservation is enabled, call state information will be transferred
from the Active SCP to the Standby SCP. Therefore, this field provides the completion percentage of the information transfer.

SVx/SPVx dropped calls

The number of calls for which SVx/SPVx Call Preservation has failed to transfer state
from the Active SCP to the Standby SCP. If this field contains a number other than zero
and you wish to initiate recovery procedures, you must disable and then re-enable SVx
Call Preservation. This procedure will re-initiate the state transfer for all the calls.

SVx/SPVx transfer status

When SVx/SPVx Call Preservation is enabled, call state information will be transferred
from the Active SCP to the Standby SCP. Therefore, this field indicates the status of the
information transfer. OK indicates a successful transmission and Failed indicates a failure in the transfer process.

Last switchover time

Displays the time when the last switchover occurred, if applicable.

When manual or automatic synchronization is taking place between SCPs, the name of the file being synchronized is
also displayed.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

5 - 37

Hardware Commands

Field

Hardware Commands

5.3.3

hardware dualscp switchover

This command lets you force the standby SCP to take control of the switch. Enter the
following parameters:
myswitch:hardware dualscp-> switchover
WARNING:

Switch over to the standby processor? (y or n): n

NOTE

NOTE

5.3.4

This command also lets you switch manually


between two TCMs in an ASX-4000 switch.

When SVx call preservation is enabled and the


switchover command is executed, a warning
message displays notifying you that the switch
to the standby SCP may take longer than usual
because the call connections have to be
synchronized on the standby SCP. Refer to
system modify in Chapter 4 of Part 3 of the
AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual
for more information on SVx call preservation.

hardware dualscp synchronize

To ensure a reliable failover mechanism, the information contained on both SCPs should be
synchronized. Synchronizing the FLASH between SCPs is requested manually by the user via
AMI. The CDB, LECS configuration, and switch software version can also be synchronized
between SCPs.
When the hardware dualscp modify -autoremove option is enabled, the switch deletes
old copies of the OS if no space is available during the synchronization process. When the OS
is being synchronized, that feature also deletes the CURRENT copy of the OS if that is the only
file that can be deleted to make room for the new OS.

5 - 38

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Hardware Commands

Hardware Commands

When synchronizing the FLASH, the controlling


SCP first instructs the standby SCP to delete any
files in its FLASH that are not on the controlling
SCPs FLASH. This could remove older copies or
the CURRENT copy of the OS, if those versions
of the OS are not already present on the
controlling SCPs FLASH.

NOTE

To synchronize information between SCPs, enter the following:


myswitch:hardware dualscp-> synchronize
[-synchronize] <syncfile>

Manual Sync Request

These parameters are defined as follows:


Parameter
-synchronize <syncfile>

Description
To ensure a reliable failover mechanism, the information contained on both SCPs should
be synchronized. The following files may be synchronized:
Flash indicates that all directories and files in FLASH on the controlling SCP will be
copied to the standby SCP.
CDB indicates that the Configuration Database (CDB) will be copied from the
controlling to the standby SCP. The CDB is automatically synchronized at startup and
whenever a change is made to the CDB.
LECS indicates that the LAN Emulation Configuration Services (LECS) configuration
database file will be copied from the controlling to the standby SCP.
OS1 indicates the switch software will be copied from the controlling SCP to the
standby SCP.
Securid indicates that the SecurID sdconf.rec configuration file will be copied
from the controlling SCP to the standby SCP. The SecurID file is automatically
synchronized whenever a change is made to it.
Secret indicates that the SecurID node secret file will be copied from the
controlling SCP to the standby SCP.
Init indicates that the FLASH on the standby SCP will be re-initialized.
Loader indicates that the Mini Loader will be copied from the controlling to the
standby SCP.
Krb5KeyTab indicates that the Kerberos v5srvtab file will be copied from the
controlling SCP to the standby SCP.

1.

Only the version of switch software to which CURRENT is pointing is copied to the standby SCP.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

5 - 39

Hardware Commands

CAUTION

NOTE

Using the -synchronize init option formats


the FLASH on the standby SCP. This removes all
information from the FLASH.

When synchronizing the FLASH, the hardware


dualscp -autoremove setting must be set to
enabled to replace a previously existing file
located on the FLASH of the standby SCP. If this
action is not done, the synchronization request
will fail.

Once synchronization is complete, reset the standby SCP from the active SCP by entering the
following at the prompt:
myswitch:hardware dualscp-> modify -resetstandby enabled
Reset standby processor [n]? y

NOTE

5 - 40

Make sure that the FLASH, CDB, LECS


configuration file, Securid, Mini Loader, and
switch software have been synchronized
between SCPs before performing the reset.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Hardware Commands

This submenu lets you configure default values for the switch fabric. Type ? at the fabric
level to display the available subcommands.
myswitch:hardware fabric-> ?
modify

Set multicast space

outputbuffers

Display outbuffer statistics

show

Display board configuration

statistics

Display fabric statistics

temperature

Display fabric temperature state

thresholds

Get/Set fabric alarm/trap temperature thresholds

traffic>

The traffic directory

5.4.1

hardware fabric modify

This command lets you configure the amount of multicast space on a switch fabric for an
ASX-4000 switch, an ESX-3000 switch, or a switch that contains Series E or Series LC network
modules. This command dictates which memory model (under hardware netmod traffic
pc1 models, hardware netmod traffic le models, hardware netmod traffic lc
models, or hardware netmod traffic e models) can be used. If you change the multicast
space, the memory models are changed to a compatible model (i.e., a model with the name
that matches the mcastspace size) when the switch software is restarted. Enter the following:
myswitch:hardware fabric-> modify
Usage:
[-fabric] <board>

Fabric

[[-mcastspace] <mcastSpace>]

Multicast Space

These parameters are defined as follows:


Parameter

Description

-fabric <board>

The number of the fabric for which the amount of multicast space is being configured. On
an ASX-4000 switch, an ASX-1200 switch, an ASX-1000 switch, or a TNX-1100 switch, this
can be 1, 2, 3, or 4, with 1 being the leftmost of the fabric slots. On a ESX-3000 switch, this
can be 1 or 2, with 1 being the lower fabric slot. On an ASX-200BX switch, or a TNX-210
switch, this value is always 1.

-mcastspace <mcastSpace>

The amount of multicast space that you want to use for this fabric. The mcast8K option is
only available on fabrics that contain only Series 1 OC-48c port cards. The default is
mcast512 for all Series 1 port cards and for all Series E network modules. The default for
an ESX-3000 fabric is mcast1K. Series LC and Series E network modules in the same
fabric must support the same number of multicast connections. Other network modules in
the same fabric such as Series C and Series D do not need to have multicast space setting
that is compatible with Series LC and Series E.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

5 - 41

Hardware Commands

5.4 hardware fabric

Hardware Commands

5.4.2

hardware fabric outputbuffers

You can display output buffer statistics for all of the network modules in an individual switch
fabric. The statistics on an ASX-200BX switch and TNX-210 switch are displayed as follows:
myswitch:hardware fabric-> outputbuffers
Destination PriorityName

State

BufferSize Q-Length ClpLoss/Overflows

1A

ABR/UBR

enabled

512

1A

CBR/rtVBR/nrtVBR

enabled

512

1B

ABR/UBR

enabled

512

1B

CBR/rtVBR/nrtVBR

enabled

512

The statistics on an ASX-1000 switch and TNX-1100 switch (with an SM-1100 fabric) are
displayed as follows:
myswitch:hardware fabric-> outputbuffers
Destination PriorityName

State

BufferSize Q-Length ClpLoss/Overflows

4B

ABR/UBR

enabled

4096

4B

CBR/rtVBR/nrtVBR

enabled

4096

4C

ABR/UBR

disabled

4C

CBR/rtVBR/nrtVBR

disabled

4D

ABR/UBR

disabled

4D

CBR/rtVBR/nrtVBR

disabled

4CTL

ABR/UBR

enabled

4096

20009

4CTL

CBR/rtVBR/nrtVBR

enabled

4096

19765

The statistics on an ASX-1200 switch and TNX-1100 switch (with an SM-1100-B fabric) are
displayed as follows:
myswitch:hardware fabric-> outputbuffers
Destination PriorityName

State

BufferSize

Q-Length ClpLoss/Overflows

1B

ABR/UBR

enabled

26832

1B

CBR/rtVBR/nrtVBR

enabled

26832

1C

ABR/UBR

enabled

26832

1C

CBR/rtVBR/nrtVBR

enabled

26832

1D

ABR/UBR

enabled

26832

1D

CBR/rtVBR/nrtVBR

enabled

26832

1CTL

ABR/UBR

enabled

26832

10540

1CTL

CBR/rtVBR/nrtVBR

enabled

26832

10113

5 - 42

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Hardware Commands

Hardware Commands

The statistics on an ESX-3000 switch are displayed as follows:


myswitch:hardware fabric-> outputbuffers
Destination PriorityName

State

BufferSize Q-Length ClpLoss/Overflows

UCAST/UBR

enabled

59552

MCAST/UBR

enabled

3328

UCAST/nrtVBR

enabled

59552

MCAST/nrtVBR

enabled

3328

UCAST/ABR

enabled

59552

MCAST/ABR

enabled

3328

UCAST/CBR_rtVBR

enabled

59552

MCAST/CBR_rtVBR

enabled

3328

Press return for more, q to quit: q

On an ASX-4000 switch, each port card is divided into two logical network modules (A and B or
C and D). The output buffer statistics for the logical network modules on an ASX-4000 switch
are displayed as follows:
myswitch:hardware fabric-> outputbuffers
Destination PriorityName

State

BufferSize Q-Length ClpLoss/Overflows

1A

UCAST/UBR

enabled

119104

1A

MCAST/UBR

enabled

6656

1A

UCAST/nrtVBR

enabled

119104

1A

MCAST/nrtVBR

enabled

6656

1A

UCAST/ABR

enabled

119104

1A

MCAST/ABR

enabled

6656

1A

UCAST/CBR_rtVBR

enabled

119104

1A

MCAST/CBR_rtVBR

enabled

6656

1B

UCAST/UBR

enabled

119104

1B

MCAST/UBR

enabled

6656

1B

UCAST/nrtVBR

enabled

119104

1B

MCAST/nrtVBR

enabled

6656

1B

UCAST/ABR

enabled

119104

1B

MCAST/ABR

enabled

6656

1B

UCAST/CBR_rtVBR

enabled

119104

1B

MCAST/CBR_rtVBR

enabled

6656

Press <return> for more, or 'q' to quit...q

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

5 - 43

Hardware Commands

The fields in these displays are defined as follows:


Field

Description

Destination

The number of the output port.

PriorityName

The name of the traffic priority for each queue.


On an ASX-200BX switch and a TNX-210 switch, there are two queues. One
corresponds to ABR/UBR traffic and one corresponds to CBR/VBR traffic.
On an ASX-1000 switch, an ASX-1200 switch, and a TNX-1100 switch, there are four
queues: one for each of the traffic types (UBR, VBR, ABR, and CBR).
On an ASX-4000 switch and an ESX-3000 switch, there are 8 queues: one for each of
the following traffic types: multicast UBR traffic, unicast UBR traffic, multicast VBR
traffic, unicast VBR traffic, multicast ABR traffic, unicast ABR traffic, multicast CBR
traffic, and unicast CBR traffic.

State

Shows whether the buffer is enabled or disabled.

BufferSize

The buffer size.

Q-Length

The number of cells currently in this queue. For an ASX-1200 switch or a TNX-1100 switch
(with an SM-1100-B fabric), this field only displays the size of the unicast queues.

CLP Loss

The number of cells that were dropped for this port and priority due to the CLP (Cell Loss
Priority) threshold. This field only applies to an ASX-1200 switch, TNX-1100 switch (with
an SM-1100-B fabric), ASX-4000 switch or ESX-3000 switch.

Overflows

The number of overflows in this queue. This field does not display for an ASX-4000 switch
or ESX-3000 switch.

5 - 44

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Hardware Commands

hardware fabric show

This command shows the current configuration of the switch fabric. Enter the following
parameters:
myswitch:hardware fabric-> show
Fabric

Model

Ver

S/N

NMs

CtlPort Multicast

asx200bx

9036

56

N/A

The following is displayed on an ESX-3000 switch:


myswitch:hardware fabric-> show
Fabric

Model

Ver

S/N

NMs

CtlPort Multicast

esx3000

46

12

512

mcast1K

The following is displayed on an ASX-4000 switch:


myswitch:hardware fabric-> show
Fabric

Model

Ver

S/N

NMs

CtlPort Multicast

asx4000

98460501

1024

mcast512

The fields in these displays are defined as follows:


Field

Description

Fabric

The number of the slot in which the switch fabric is installed.

Model

The type of switch this is.

Ver

The manufacturing revision number.

S/N

The serial number of this switch board.

NMs

The number of network modules or port cards installed in this switch fabric.

CtlPort

The number of the control port.

Multicast

The multicast space configured for this switch fabric. This field only applies to an
ASX-4000 switch.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

5 - 45

Hardware Commands

5.4.3

Hardware Commands

5.4.4

hardware fabric statistics

You can display switch board statistics for all switch boards on an ASX-4000 switch by
entering statistics at the fabric level as follows:
myswitch:hardware fabric-> statistics
Fabric

Statistic

Value

Overflows

UBR EPD/PPD Loss

VBR EPD/PPD Loss

ABR EPD/PPD Loss

CBR EPD/PPD Loss

Overflows

UBR EPD/PPD Loss

VBR EPD/PPD Loss

ABR EPD/PPD Loss

CBR EPD/PPD Loss

Overflows

UBR EPD/PPD Loss

VBR EPD/PPD Loss

ABR EPD/PPD Loss

CBR EPD/PPD Loss

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Field

Description

Fabric

The board (switch fabric number).

Statistic

Indicates what type of statistic is being displayed.

Value

The number of cells that were lost due to overflow.

If this command is entered on a switch other than an ASX-4000 switch, the following is
displayed:
myswitch:hardware fabric-> statistics
No fabric information available

5 - 46

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Hardware Commands

hardware fabric temperature

The current temperature and state values are displayed for all installed fabrics in an ASX-1000
switch, ASX-1200 switch, or TNX-1100 switch only as follows:
myswitch:hardware fabric-> temperature
Index

Deg C

State

34

normal

37

norma

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Field

Description

Index

The number of the fabric currently installed in the switch. Switch fabric 1 (index 1) is in
the slot labeled 1 on the enclosure, switch fabric 2 is in the slot labeled 2 on the enclosure,
etc.

Deg C

The current temperature of the switch fabrics in degrees Celsius.

State

Shows overTemp if an alarm has been tripped because of this sensor, based on the trip
and reset values that have been configured. Shows normal if otherwise, or if the alarm
has reset.

The following is displayed on all other platforms:


myswitch:hardware fabric-> temperature
No fabric temperature information available

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

5 - 47

Hardware Commands

5.4.5

Hardware Commands

5.4.6

hardware fabric thresholds

This command allows you to set or display the thresholds at which a temperature alarm is
tripped and then later reset on an ASX-1000 switch, ASX-1200 switch, or TNX-1100 switch.
Any temperature can cause the switch to display a state of normal or overTemp, depending
on the trip and reset thresholds that you have set. For example, a temperature of 55 oC shows
a state of normal if the trip threshold was 60 oC and the switch fabric temperature never
reached 60 oC, but it would show a state of overTemp if the switch fabric temperature reached
60 oC, and then had dropped to 55 oC, but had not yet reached a reset threshold set at 50 oC.
To modify the thresholds, enter the following:
myswitch:hardware fabric-> thresholds ?
[[-triptemp] <integer>]

Trip Temperature

[[-resettemp] <integer>]

Reset Temperature

To display the configured thresholds, enter the following:


myswitch:hardware fabric-> thresholds
Trip Threshold:

65

Reset Threshold: 60

These parameters are defined as follows:


Parameter

Description
o

-triptemp <integer>

The temperature in C at which an overtemperature alarm trips. The default is 65 oC.

-resettemp <integer>

The temperature in oC at which an overtemperature alarm is reset. The default is 60 oC.

The following is displayed on all other platforms:


myswitch:hardware fabric->

thresholds

This switch does not support fabric temperature thresholds

5 - 48

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Hardware Commands

hardware fabric traffic

ForeThought 6.0 and greater supports early packet discard (EPD) and partial packet discard
(PPD) for ASX-4000 switch fabrics. The modify command under hardware fabric
traffic allows you to configure the EPD threshold. EPD is used to avoid unwanted
congestion in packet traffic. If the amount of the buffer space consumed at an outgoing port
exceeds a threshold, EPD discards new packets while packets already partially transmitted
remain unaffected.
When an AAL5 packet arrives after the EPD threshold has been exceeded, then the first cell of
the packet is dropped by EPD. The remaining cells are dropped by PPD actions. PPD is not
configured, but occurs because of EPD cell drop.
The commands listed under the traffic menu let you configure the EPD threshold on an
ASX-4000 fabric. Type ? at the traffic level to display the list of available subcommands.
myswitch:hardware fabric traffic-> ?
modify

Set the fabric traffic management configuration

show

Display fabric traffic management information

NOTE

EPD/PPD is disabled when establishing a


connection to the control port.

NOTE

These commands are valid only on an ASX-4000


switch.

The EPD/PPD setting for all the VCCs on the fabric is off by default in FT 5.3.x as it was not
supported in that release. VCCs can be configured as: AAL5 or non AAL5. Connection
preservation, which was first supported in ForeThought 5.3.0, can also have two states: enabled
or disabled. For more information about connection preservation, see Chapter 4 in Part 3 of
this manual.
The following scenarios can occur regarding connection preservation and EPD/PPD when
upgrading from 5.3.x to 6.1.x:

In 5.3.x, if connection preservation is disabled and AAL5 is off = Connection is


torn down.

In 5.3.x, if connection preservation is disabled and AAL5 is on (This instance may


occur if the switch was running 6.0 with AAL5, downgraded to 5.3.x, and then
upgraded back to 6.0.) = Connection is torn down.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

5 - 49

Hardware Commands

5.4.7

Hardware Commands

In 5.3.x, if connection preservation is enabled and AAL5 off = Connection is


preserved.

In 5.3.x, if connection preservation is enabled and AAL5 on = Connection state is


modified without tearing down the connection. In this case, if any cells are lost
due to EPD/PPD, they will not be accounted for since the 5.3.x does not support
EPD/PPD. You may want to disable connection preservation before performing a
downgrade or leave connection preservation enabled, delete and recreate all VCs
that have EPD/PPD enabled, one at a time.

5.4.7.1 hardware fabric traffic modify


This command lets you configure the EPD threshold on an ASX-4000 switch. EPD can be
applied on a per-AAL5 VC, per-priority basis. Enter the following parameters:
myswitch:hardware fabric traffic-> modify
Usage:
[-fabric] <board>

Fabric

[-priority] <fabric priority>

Priority

[-feature] <traffic_feature>
[[-value] <percent>]

Feature
Value

The parameters in the display are defined as follows:


Field

Description

-fabric <board>

The number of the slot in which the switch fabric is installed.

-priority <fabric priority>

The type of traffic to which EPD applies.

-feature <traffic_feature>

The traffic feature that is to be modified.

-value <percent>

The EPD threshold of shared memory as a percentage. The designated buffer discards
traffic once the threshold has been surpassed. OFF sets the threshold to 100 percent of the
shared space for all priorities. DEFAULT sets the threshold to 90 percent of the shared
space for all priorities.

5 - 50

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Hardware Commands

This command lets you display EPD configuration information for an ASX-4000 switch. Enter
the following:
myswitch:hardware fabric traffic-> show
Fabric Priority

Feature

Value

UBR

epd

90%

nrtVBR

epd

90%

ABR

epd

90%

CBR_rtVBR epd

90%

UBR

epd

90%

nrtVBR

epd

90%

ABR

epd

90%

CBR_rtVBR epd

90%

The fields in these displays are defined as follows:


Field

Description

Fabric

The number of the slot in which the switch fabric is installed.

Priority

The traffic type to which the feature applies

Feature

The traffic feature.

Value

The EPD threshold of shared memory as a percentage. The designated buffer discards
traffic once the threshold has been surpassed. OFF sets the threshold to 100 percent of the
shared space for all priorities. DEFAULT sets the threshold to 90 percent of the shared
space for all priorities.

The following is displayed on all other platforms:


myswitch:hardware fabric traffic-> show
Fabric traffic management not supported on this platform

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

5 - 51

Hardware Commands

5.4.7.2 hardware fabric traffic show

Hardware Commands

5.5 hardware fans


This command enables you to display information about the fans on an ASX-1000 switch,
ASX-1200 switch, TNX-1100 switch, ESX-3000 switch, or an ASX-4000 switch. The following
is displayed:
myswitch:hardware-> fans
FanBank State

SerialNumber Type Revision

normal N/A

N/A

N/A

normal N/A

N/A

N/A

normal N/A

N/A

N/A

normal N/A

N/A

N/A

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Field

Description

FanBank

On an ASX-1000 switch, ASX-1200 switch, or TNX-1100 switch, this field corresponds to a


single fan, indicating the number of the fan. On an ASX-4000 switch, this field
corresponds to a fan tray. 1 indicates the upper fan tray and 2 indicates the lower fan tray.

State

The current state of the fan. If the fan is functioning properly, it reads normal. If the fan
has malfunctioned, it reads failed.

Serial Number

The serial number of the fan tray. This field only applies to an ASX-4000 switch.

Type

The type of fan tray installed. This field only applies to an ASX-4000 switch.

Revision

The hardware revision number of the fan tray. This field only applies to an ASX-4000.

The following is displayed on all other platforms:


myswitch:hardware-> fans
No fan bank information available

5 - 52

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Hardware Commands

You can display version information about the HDCOMP ASIC on an individual switch fabric
and display the input lookup error statistics as follows:
myswitch:hardware-> inputlookuperrors
HDCOMP

Version

VPI-Lookup-Errors

VCI-Lookup-Errors

32748

13

Something similar to the following is displayed on an ESX-3000 switch:


myswitch:hardware-> inputlookuperrors
HDCOMP

Version

VPI-Lookup-Errors

VCI-Lookup-Errors

32748

13

22765

10

Something similar to the following is displayed on an ASX-4000 switch:


myswitch:hardware-> inputlookuperrors
HDCOMP

Version

VPI-Lookup-Errors

VCI-Lookup-Errors

1A

15091

1B

12298

15

2C

11092

2D

10943

11

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Field

1.

Description

HDCOMP

The number of the slot in which the board (switch fabric) is installed.

Version1

The version number of the HDCOMP ASIC on this switch board.

VPI-Lookup-Errors

The number of cells that do not match any VPI lookup tables. On an ASX-4000 switch and
ESX-3000 switch, this number reflects the aggregate of all of the port cards (network
modules) in the switch.

VCI-Lookup-Errors

The number of cells that do not match any VCI lookup tables. On an ASX-4000 switch and
ESX-3000 switch, this number reflects the aggregate of all of the port cards (network
modules) in the switch.

The HDCOMP ASIC must be version 1 or greater to support the AAL5 partial packet policing command under
interfaces atmif modify -pppcbr, -pppnrtvbr, and -pppnrtvbr and to support changing the clockscale
under system modify -clockscalingfactor.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

5 - 53

Hardware Commands

5.6 hardware inputlookuperrors

Hardware Commands

5.7 hardware netmod


These commands let you configure the network modules in your switch fabric. The list of
available subcommands is displayed by typing ? at the netmod level.
myswitch:hardware netmod-> ?
alarms>

The alarms directory

application>

The application directory

fram>

The fram directory

modify

Set netmod admin status to up/down

reset

Reset Netmod Hardware

show

Display netmod configuration

test>

The test directory

traffic>

The traffic directory

NOTE

The fram> commands are not available on an


ESX-3000 switch nor on an ASX-4000 switch.

The following menu is displayed on an ASX-4000 switch:


myswitch:hardware netmod-> ?
alarms>

The alarms directory

application>

The application directory

modify

Set netmod admin status to up/down

panic>

The panic directory

reset

Reset Netmod Hardware

reset_pair

Reset the netmod and its partner.

show

Display netmod configuration

test>

The test directory

traffic>

The traffic directory

NOTE

5 - 54

The panic> and reset_pair commands are


only available on an ASX-4000 switch.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Hardware Commands

hardware netmod alarms

These commands, used in conjunction with the system alarm modify command, allow you
to configure alarms that notify you of the physical removal of a network module or a port card
from a particular slot in the switch fabric. You can display the list of available subcommands
by typing ? at the alarms level.
myswitch:hardware netmod alarms-> ?
modify

Modify the priority

show

Display netmod alarms

5.7.1.1 hardware netmod alarms modify


This command lets you configure priorities for the alarms on an individual network module
in a switch fabric. These alarms alert you when a network module has been removed from the
switch fabric.
On an ASX-4000 switch and an ESX-3000 switch, the network module slots are physically
labeled as 1A/B, 1C/D, etc. for each port card. Each port card contains two logical network
modules. On an ASX-4000 switch and an ESX-3000 switch, these alarms alert you when a port
card has been removed from those slots. Enter the following:
myswitch:hardware netmod alarms-> modify
Usage:
[-netmod] <Netmod>

Netmod

[[-priority] <alarm_priority>]

Priority

These parameters are defined as follows:


Parameter

Description

-netmod <Netmod>

The netmod on which you want to configure an alarm priority.

-priority <alarm_priority>

The priority you want to assign to the netmod or port card. Each netmod or port card may
be assigned a different priority: high, low, or none. high means that the
netmodRemovedHighPrio alarm is activated when a network module or port card is
removed from that slot. low means that the netmodRemovedLowPrio alarm is activated
when a network module or port card is removed from that slot. none means that no alarm
is activated when a network module or port card is removed from that slot. The default is
none.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

5 - 55

Hardware Commands

5.7.1

Hardware Commands

5.7.1.2 hardware netmod alarms show


This command lets you display the current configuration of the network module alarms. Enter
the following parameters:
myswitch:hardware netmod alarms-> show
Netmod

Priority

Status

1A

none

present

1B

none

present

1C

none

present

1D

none

present

The following is displayed on an ASX-4000 switch:


myswitch:hardware netmod alarms-> show
Netmod

Priority

Status

1A

none

absent

1B

none

absent

1C

none

absent

1D

none

absent

2A

none

present

2B

none

present

2C

none

absent

2D

none

absent

The following is displayed on an ESX-3000 switch:


myswitch:hardware netmod alarms-> show
Netmod

Priority

Status

1A

none

absent

1B

none

absent

1C

none

absent

1D

none

absent

2A

none

absent

2B

none

absent

2C

none

absent

2D

none

absent

Press return for more, q to quit: q

5 - 56

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Hardware Commands

Field

Description

Netmod

The network module or port card slot in the switch fabric.

Priority

The priority assigned to this slot. Can be none, high, or low.


high means that the netmodRemovedHighPrio alarm is activated when a network
module or port card is removed from that slot.
low means that the netmodRemovedLowPrio alarm is activated when a network
module or port card is removed from that slot.
none means that no alarm is activated when a network module or port card is
removed from that slot. The default is none.

Status

Shows present or absent depending on whether or not a network module or port card
is currently installed in that slot.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

5 - 57

Hardware Commands

The fields in this display are defined as follows:

Hardware Commands

5.7.2

hardware netmod application

These commands let you upgrade or display information about the application software on a
FramePlus network module, an IMA network module, or a Frame-based ATM over SONET/
SDH / Packet over SONET/SDH (FAST/POS) port card for the ASX-4000 switch. The list of
available subcommands is displayed by typing ? at the application level.
myswitch:hardware netmod application-> ?
modify

Modify application module entries

show

Display application module configuration

upgrade

Upgrade the software on a netmod

5.7.2.1 hardware netmod application modify


This command lets you configure what action to take if the on-board processor fails on an
IMA network module. Enter the following:
myswitch:hardware netmod application-> modify
Usage:
[-index] <AppBN>

Index

[[-action] <action_type>]

Panic Action

These parameters are defined as follows:


Parameter

Description

-index <AppBN>

The board number of the IMA module you want to configure; e.g., 1A.

-action <action_type>

The action to take upon a panic of an IMA network modules on-board processor:
reset - the IMA network module automatically resets upon experiencing a panic.
This is the default action.
suspend - the network module hangs in a suspended state upon experiencing a panic.
There is no panic record logged. This allows a way to perform debugging.

NOTE

It is highly recommended that you only use the


suspend mode for diagnostic purposes. If
suspend is the configured mode and the
network modules processor panics, the network
module hangs until the user manually resets it.
No automatic reset will occur.
This command does not apply to the FramePlus
network modules.

5 - 58

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Hardware Commands

This command lets you display information about the application software on a FramePlus or
IMA network module. Enter the following:
myswitch:hardware netmod application-> show
Netmod

Application

LED

State

Status

4B

ima

off

up

Netmod Up & Running

4C

FRATM_SERVICE_APPL

off

up

Netmod Up & Running

4D

FRAM_FUNI_APPL

off

up

Netmod Up & Running

These fields are defined as follows:


Field

Description

Netmod

The board number of the FramePlus or IMA module that has been configured.

Application

The current application that is running on this network module. Displays


FRATM_SERVICE_APPL for Frame Relay running service interworking (FRF8),
FRATM_NETWORK_APPL for Frame Relay running network interworking (FRF5),
FRAM_FUNI_APPL for FUNI, or ima for IMA.

LED

The current color of the out-of-service (OOS) LED on the network module. off means the
module is in-service. red means the module is out-of-service.

State

The current operational state of the network module. Can be one of the following:
notConfigured, hwinitInProgress, up, shutDownInProgress, down, or failed.

Status

The detailed reason that the network module is in its current state. This field can help in
troubleshooting a problem.

The following is displayed for the POS application software on a FAST/POS port card for the
ASX-4000 switch. Enter the following:
myswitch:hardware netmod application-> show
Expected Version: ForeThought_POS_1.1.0 Development (1.64125)
Flash Version:

ForeThought_POS_1.1.0 Development (1.64125)

Compatibility:

Compatible version (same version)

File Location:

FT7.1/POSOC312.EXE

These fields are defined as follows:


Field

Description

Expected Version

The version of the FAST/POS port card software expected by the SCP software.

Flash Version

The version of the FAST/POS port card software stored in the FLASH.

Compatibility

The degree of compatibility between the expected and FLASH version.

File Location

The location of the POS application software.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

5 - 59

Hardware Commands

5.7.2.2 hardware netmod application show

Hardware Commands

5.7.2.2.1

hardware netmod application show -appversion

This command lets you display which version of application software is running on a
FramePlus or IMA network module. Enter the following:
myswitch:hardware netmod application-> show -appversion
Netmod

AppVersion

4B

N_IMA_ForeThought_03.00.00 FCS (1.54337)

4C

2.0.0

4D

N_FR_ForeThought_2.0.00 FCS (1.50652)

These fields are defined as follows:


Field

Description

Netmod

The board number of the FramePlus or IMA module.

AppVersion

The embedded software release that is currently running on this network module. If a
FramePlus network module is running BOOT PROM version 1.0.0, then the embedded
software version simply displays a number; e.g., 1.4.0, rather than a string.

5.7.2.2.2

hardware netmod application show -bootversion

This command lets you display which version of software is running on the boot PROM on a
FramePlus or IMA network module. Enter the following:
myswitch:hardware netmod application-> show -bootversion
Netmod

BootVersion

4B

1.1

4C

1.0.0

4D

1.2.1

These fields are defined as follows:


Field

Description

Netmod

The board number of the FramePlus or IMA module that has been configured.

BootVersion

The version of software running on the boot PROM on this network module.

5 - 60

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Hardware Commands

hardware netmod application show -panicaction

This command lets you display what action is taken if the on-board processor fails on an IMA
network module. Enter the following:
myswitch:hardware netmod application-> show -panicaction
Netmod

PanicAction

4B

reset

4C

N/A

4D

N/A

These fields are defined as follows:


Field
Netmod
PanicAction

Description
The board number of the IMA module that has been configured.
The action to take upon a panic of the on-board processor:
reset - the network module automatically resets upon experiencing a panic and a
panic record is logged. This is the default action.
suspend - the network module hangs in a suspended state upon experiencing a panic.
There is no panic record logged. This allows a way to perform debugging. It also
provides a way to avoid the teardown of PVCs. PVCs are preserved so you can choose
a more convenient time for resetting the network module.
This field displays N/A for FramePlus network modules. They have a default panic action
to reset.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

5 - 61

Hardware Commands

5.7.2.2.3

Hardware Commands

5.7.2.3 hardware netmod application upgrade


This command lets you upgrade the software on a FramePlus or IMA network module, or on a
Frame-based ATM over SONET/SDH / Packet over SONET/SDH (FAST/POS) port card for
the ASX-4000 switch.

For more information about FramePlus network modules, see Appendix D in the
Multiservice Broadband Switch Network Configuration Manual.

For more information about IMA network modules, see Appendix F in the Multiservice Broadband Switch Network Configuration Manual.

For more information about upgrading application software on FAST/POS port


cards, see Appendix G in the ASX-4000 Switch Installation and Maintenance Manual.

The following command is displayed for a FramePlus or IMA network module:


myswitch:hardware netmod application-> upgrade
Usage:
[-netmod] <Netmod>

Netmod to upgrade

[-url] <URL>

URL of form [(ftp|tftp)://]<host>/<full filepath>

The following command is displayed for a FAST/POS port card:


myswitch:hardware netmod application-> upgrade
Usage:
[-url] <URL>

URL of form [(ftp|tftp)://]<host>/<full filepath>

The appropriate version of the port card


application software is installed automatically
for all of the FAST/POS port cards in a switch
when the ForeThought switch software is
upgraded on the switch SCPs. Therefore, it is
generally not necessary to use this command for
FAST/POS port cards.

NOTE

These parameters are defined as follows:


Parameter

Description

-netmod <Netmod>

The FramePlus or IMA network module on which you want to upgrade the software.

-url <URL>

The upgrade information:


ftp or tftp - the protocol used for the upgrade
host - the IP address of the remote host on which the upgrade file resides
full filepath - the full path name of the upgrade file

5 - 62

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Hardware Commands

All of the FramePlus or IMA network modules


must be running a software application version
which is compatible to the software running on
the switch SCP(s). If the FramePlus or IMA
network modules and the switch SCP(s) are not
running corresponding releases, the protocols are
incompatible and an error message results. Please
see the following web sites for hardware and
software compatibility matrices for these service
network modules:

Hardware Commands

NOTE

http://www.marconi.com/html/solutions/
marconiatmswitchhardcompatmatrix.htm
or
http://www.marconi.com/html/solutions/
ForeThoughtSoftwareCompatibilityMatrix.htm

NOTE

You should upgrade the software on the switch


SCPs before upgrading the application software
on the FramePlus or IMA network modules.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

5 - 63

Hardware Commands

5.7.3

hardware netmod fram

These commands let you configure or display information about FramePlus network modules.
The list of available subcommands is displayed by typing ? at the fram level.
myswitch:hardware netmod fram-> ?
modify

Modify FRAM Netmod Configuration

show

Show FRAM Netmods

5.7.3.1 hardware netmod fram modify


This command lets you configure FramePlus network modules. Enter the following:
myswitch:hardware netmod fram-> modify
Usage:
[-module] <Netmod>

Netmod

[[-epdppdbufferproportion] <epdppdbufferproportion>]
Epd Ppd Buffer Proportion
[[-epdclp1highprio] (25|37|50|62)]

Epdclp1 High Prio

[[-epdclp0highprio] (50|62|75|87)]

Epdclp0 High Prio

[[-ppdclp1highprio] (50|62|75|87)]

Ppdclp1 High Prio

[[-epdclp1lowprio] (25|37|50|62)]

Epdclp1 Low Prio

[[-epdclp0lowprio] (50|62|75|87)]

Epdclp0 Low Prio

[[-ppdclp1lowprio] (50|62|75|87)]

Ppdclp1 Low Prio

[[-oamf5supervision] (enabled|disabled)]

Oam F5 Supervision

[[-oamf5aisrxperiod] (1|2|3|4|5)]

Oam F5 AISRX Period (s)

[[-oamf5aistxperiod] (1|2|3|4|5)]

Oam F5 AISTX period (s)

[[-oamf5rdirxperiod] (1|2|3|4|5)]

Oam F5 RDIRX period (s)

[[-oamf5rditxperiod] (1|2|3|4|5)]

Oam F5 RDITX period (s)

[[-application] <application>]

Application

[[-statsmonitor] (enabled|disabled)]

Stats Monitor

5 - 64

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Hardware Commands

Hardware Commands

If you manually admin a network module down


prior to the change (using hardware netmod
modify -admin down), you must manually
admin it up after the change (using hardware
netmod modify -admin up). However, if you
modify a parameter while the network module is
in the admin up state, the software automatically
admins it down, makes the change, and then
admins it back up without any additional user
intervention.

NOTE

These parameters are defined as follows:


Parameter

Description

-module <Netmod>

The FramePlus network module that is to be configured.

-epdppdbufferproportion
<epdppdbufferproportion>

The model for partitioning the buffer between the two (EPD and PPD) priorities:
highzero - The high priority buffer will have 0 cells and the low priority buffer will
have 32,768 cells. (This implies that the epdclp1highprio, epdclp0highprio, and
ppdclp1highprio options will have no meaning if they are used.) This is the
default.
high1quarter - The high priority buffer will have 8,192 cells and the low priority buffer
will have 24,576 cells.
high2quarter - The high priority buffer will have 16,384 cells and the low priority
buffer will have 16,384 cells.
high3quarter - The high priority buffer will have 24,576 cells and the low priority
buffer will have 8,192 cells. See Appendix D in the Multiservice Broadband Switch
Network Configuration Manual for more information about setting this value.

-epdclp1highprio1
(25|37|50|62)

The threshold for CLP1EPD, in percentage of the available size, for the high priority
queue buffer. The default value is 37%. EPD discards packets once this CLP=1 threshold
has been surpassed. See Appendix D in the Multiservice Broadband Switch Network
Configuration Manual for more information about setting this value.

-epdclp0highprio
(50|62|75|87)

The threshold for CLP0EPD, in percentage of the available size, for the high priority
queue buffer. The default value is 62%. EPD discards packets once this CLP=0 threshold
has been surpassed. See Appendix D in the Multiservice Broadband Switch Network
Configuration Manual for more information about setting this value.

-ppdclp1highprio
(50|62|75|87)

The threshold for CLP1PPD, in percentage of the available size, for the high priority queue
buffer. The default value is 50%. PPD discards cells once this CLP=1 threshold has been
surpassed.

-epdclp1lowprio
(25|37|50|62)

The threshold for CLP1EPD, in percentage of the available size, for the low priority queue
buffer. The default value is 37%. EPD discards packets once this CLP=1 threshold has been
surpassed. See Appendix D in the Multiservice Broadband Switch Network Configuration
Manual for more information about setting this value.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

5 - 65

Hardware Commands

Parameter

Description

-epdclp0lowprio
(50|62|75|87)

The threshold for CLP0EPD, in percentage of the available size, for the low priority queue
buffer. The default value is 62%. EPD discards packets once this CLP=0 threshold has been
surpassed. See Appendix D in the Multiservice Broadband Switch Network Configuration
Manual for more information about setting this value.

-ppdclp1lowprio
(50|62|75|87)

The threshold for CLP1PPD, in percentage of the available size, for the low priority queue
buffer. The default value is 50%. PPD discards cells once this CLP=1 threshold has been
surpassed.

-oamf5supervision2
(enabled|disabled)

enabled indicates that OAM F5 (path) cells will be generated on the specified FramePlus
network module. disabled indicates that OAM F5 (path) cells will not be generated on
the specified FramePlus network module. The default is enabled.

-oamf5aisrxperiod
(1|2|3|4|5)

Time interval, in seconds, at which an AIS OAM cell is to be received. The default is 3.

-oamf5aistxperiod
(1|2|3|4|5)

Time interval, in seconds, at which an AIS OAM cell is to be transmitted. The default is 1.

-oamf5rdirxperiod
(1|2|3|4|5)

Time interval, in seconds, at which an RDI OAM cell is to be received. The default is 3.

-oamf5rditxperiod
(1|2|3|4|5)

Time interval, in seconds, at which an RDI OAM cell is to be transmitted. The default is 1.

-application <application>

The application to be used on this FramePlus network module: FRATM_SERVICE_APPL


(Frame Relay service interworking), FRATM_NETWORK_APPL (Frame Relay network
interworking), or FRAM_FUNI_APPL (FUNI). FramePlus network modules run Frame
Relay service interworking by default. You can look at the Appln field under hardware
netmod application show to see which application is currently running.
The application should be changed only if you want to reconfigure the network module to
run a different application. When you change the application, the switch deletes all
existing services and PVCs that use a different application, and removes them from the
CDB.

-statsmonitor
(enabled|disabled)

enabled means statistics are collected on the designated FramePlus network module. The
default is enabled.
disabled means statistics are not collected on the designated FramePlus network module.
When statistics are disabled, the counters display N/A.

1.

There are CLP0PPD high and low thresholds that are automatically set for you as 87.5% of the buffer size and cannot be
changed. (They are not displayed in AMI, but you need to know these values because the other thresholds are
calculated on the remaining buffer size.)

2.

This parameter only affects Frame Relay service on a FramePlus network module. It does not have any effect when the
FUNI application is being used.

5 - 66

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Hardware Commands

NOTE

If
you
modify
any
of
the
-epdppdbufferproportion,
-epdclp0highprio,
-ppdclp1highprio,
-epdclp1lowprio, -epdclp0lowprio, or
-ppdclp1lowprio parameters, then the buffer
calculations are displayed.

Hardware Commands

NOTE

To propagate OAM error information from the


ATM side to the Frame Relay side you need to
enable three parameters:
Enable
-oamf5supervision
under
hardware netmod fram modify (this is
enabled by default).
Enable -aisrdi under interfaces atmif
modify (this is not enabled by default).
Enable -atmlayeroam under system
modify (this is not enabled by default).

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

5 - 67

Hardware Commands

5.7.3.2 hardware netmod fram show


This command lets you display information about FramePlus network modules as follows:
myswitch:hardware netmod fram-> show
Stats

Oam

Netmod Monitor

Monitor

Application

ProductNumber

4C

enabled

enabled

FRATM_SERVICE_APPL

NMFR-4/DS1A

4D

enabled

enabled

FRATM_SERVICE_APPL

NMFR-4/E1A

These fields are defined as follows:


Field

Description

Netmod

The FramePlus network module that has been configured.

Stats Monitor

Shows if statistics collection is enabled (on) or disabled (off) for this FramePlus network
module.

Oam Monitor

Shows if OAM F5 cell generation is enabled (on) or disabled (off) for this FramePlus
network module.

Application

Shows the application type that has been configured for this FramePlus network module.

Product Number

The Marconi product number for this module.

5.7.3.2.1

hardware netmod fram show -advanced

This command lets you display advanced information about the configuration of a FramePlus
network module. Enter the following:
myswitch:hardware netmod fram-> show -advanced
Clp0Epd

Clp1Ppd

Clp1Epd

Netmod Proportion

PPD Buffer

high low

high low

high low

4C

highzero

N/A

62

N/A

50

N/A

4D

highzero

N/A

62

N/A

50

N/A

5 - 68

rx

tx

rx

tx

(s)

(s)

(s)

(s)

37

37

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Hardware Commands

Field

Description

Netmod

The FramePlus network module that has been configured.

PPD Buffer Proportion

The configured model for partitioning the cell buffer between the two (EPD and PPD)
priorities:
highzero - The high priority buffer has 0 cells and the low priority buffer has 32,768
cells. (This implies that the epdclp1highprio, epdclp0highprio, and
ppdclp1highprio options have no meaning if they are used.) This is the default
value.
high1quarter - The high priority buffer has 8,192 cells and the low priority buffer has
24,576 cells.
high2quarter - The high priority buffer has 16,384 cells and the low priority buffer has
16,384 cells.
high3quarter - The high priority buffer has 24,576 cells and the low priority buffer has
8,192 cells.

Clp0Epd high

The CLP0EPD threshold for the high priority buffer, in percentage of the available size.
The default value is 62%. EPD discards packets once this CLP=0 threshold has been
surpassed.

Clp0Epd low

The CLP0EPD threshold for the low priority buffer, in percentage of the available size. The
default value is 62%. EPD discards packets once this CLP=0 threshold has been surpassed.

Clp1Ppd high

The CLP1PPD threshold for the high priority buffer, in percentage of the available size.
The default value is 50%. PPD discards cells once this CLP=1 threshold has been
surpassed.

Clp1Ppd low

The CLP1PPD threshold for the low priority buffer, in percentage of the available size. The
default value is 50%. PPD discards cells once this CLP=1 threshold has been surpassed.

Clp1Epd high

The CLP1EPD threshold for the high priority buffer, in percentage of the available size.
The default value is 37%. EPD discards packets once this CLP=1 threshold has been
surpassed.

Clp1Epd low

The CLP1EPD threshold for the low priority buffer, in percentage of the available size. The
default value is 37%. EPD discards packets once this CLP=1 threshold has been surpassed.

AIS rx

The time interval, in seconds, at which an AIS OAM cell is to be received.

AIS tx

The time interval, in seconds, at which an AIS OAM cell is to be transmitted.

RDI rx

The time interval, in seconds, at which an RDI OAM cell is to be received.

RDI tx

The time interval, in seconds, at which an RDI OAM cell is to be transmitted.

NOTE

There is a CLP0PPD threshold that is set by


default as 87.5% of the buffer size and cannot be
changed. (It is not displayed.)

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

5 - 69

Hardware Commands

These fields are defined as follows:

Hardware Commands

5.7.4

hardware netmod modify

This command allows you to change the state of a network module up or down. This
command should only be used when you want to test the network module. Enter the following parameters:
myswitch:hardware netmod-> modify
Usage:
[-module] <Netmod>

Netmod

[[-admin] <admin_type>]

Admin State

These parameters are defined as follows:


Parameter

Description

-module <Netmod>

The network module that is to be started or stopped.

-admin <admin_type>

up brings that network module back on-line. down causes the designated network module
to be be taken off-line temporarily so that it can be tested.

NOTE

NOTE

5 - 70

This command has no effect on Circuit


Emulation Services (CES) DS1 and E1 network
modules. You can only administer the individual
ports on a CES module up or down using the
hardware port modify -adminstatus
command.

When a network module is administered down,


no configuration changes can be made under the
redundancy menu or under the interfaces
menu, except for interfaces ima group,
interfaces ima link, and interfaces if.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Hardware Commands

hardware netmod panic

These commands allow you to view or clear any panic traces on the module control processor
(MCP) and to set the action to be taken when the MCP panics on a logical network module on
a FAST/POS port card on an ASX-4000 switch. Enter the following:
myswitch:hardware netmod panic-> ?
action>

The action directory

clear

Clear panic trace

save

Save netmod panic information

show

Netmod panic trace

5.7.5.1 hardware netmod panic action


This command lets you set or view the course of action that the MCP on a FAST/POS port
card on an ASX-4000 switch takes upon experiencing a panic condition. Enter the following:
myswitch:hardware netmod panic action-> ?
modify

This determines the Netmod action on a panic

show

Netmod action on a panic

5.7.5.1.1
hardware netmod panic action modify
This command allows you to set the course of action that the MCP on a FAST/POS port card
on an ASX-4000 switch takes upon experiencing a panic condition. Enter the following:
myswitch:hardware netmod panic action-> modify
Usage:
[-netmod] <Netmod>

Netmod

[[-panicAction] <reset/suspend>]

Action - Suspend/Reset

These parameters are defined as follows:


Parameter

Description

-netmod <Netmod>

The network module on a FAST/POS port card on which you want to set the action for the
MCP to take upon experiencing a panic condition.

-panicAction
<reset/suspend>

reset means that the MCP will automatically reset upon experiencing a panic. A
panic record is logged. This is the default action.
suspend means that the MCP will hang in a suspended state upon experiencing a
panic. There is no panic record logged. This allows a way to perform debugging. It
also provides a way to avoid the teardown of PVCs. PVCs are preserved so that you
can choose a more convenient time for resetting the MCP.
M

NOTE

It is highly recommended that you only use the


suspend mode for diagnostic purposes. If
suspend is the configured mode and the MCP
panics, the MCP hangs until the user manually
resets the MCP. No automatic reset will occur.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

5 - 71

Hardware Commands

5.7.5

Hardware Commands

5.7.5.1.2

hardware netmod panic action show

To display course of action that the MCP on a FAST/POS port card on an ASX-4000 switch
takes upon experiencing a panic condition, enter the following:
myswitch:hardware netmod panic action-> show
Current panic action is to reset.

5.7.5.2 hardware netmod panic clear


This command lets you clear the panic acknowledgment flag without viewing the contents of
the panic dump file. Once the flag is cleared, you may return to normal operation of the
switch.

Do not clear a panic condition until after you


have performed the following three steps.

NOTE

1.

Use the hardware netmod panic save command in AMI to transfer the panic
file to a remote host.

2.

Send the panic file via e-mail to Marconis TAC along with a description of the
events leading up to the panic. Ask the TAC staff to open a case for you based on
that information. Once you have sent them the information, you may clear the
panic record.

Enter the following parameters to clear a panic record:


myswitch:hardware netmod panic-> clear
[-netmod] <Netmod>

Netmod

This parameter is defined as follows:


Parameter
-netmod <Netmod>

5 - 72

Description
The network module on which you want to clear the panic condition.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Hardware Commands

This command lets you save the contents of the panic dump file on a FAST/POS port card on
an ASX-4000 switch. The dump file contains information about what happened to the MCP
when it panicked. Enter the following:
myswitch:hardware netmod panic-> save
Usage:
[-netmod] <Netmod>

Netmod

[-url] <URL>

URL of form [(ftp|tftp)://<host>/]<filepath>

This parameter is defined as follows:


Parameter

Description

-netmod <Netmod>

The network module for which you want to save the panic file.

[-url] <URL>

This command lets you directly transfer the contents of the panic dump file to a remote
host. The URL includes the IP address and path name of the remote host.

5.7.5.4 hardware netmod panic show


This command lets you view the contents of the panic dump file on a FAST/POS port card on
an ASX-4000 switch as follows:
myswitch:hardware netmod panic-> show
Panic trace from netmod 2C
CDA Version: ForeThought_OC3/OC12_POS_1.1.0 FCS (1.72820)
Task Id is 0x3c0fcac and name is Runtime
Data Abort
Current Processor Status Register: 0x80000013
r0=0xe59ff0f4

r1=0xe5a0d693

r2=0x3b9b5d8

r3=0x3b9b964

PC 0x000483d4 _painGetNextLayer
0x0006f04c _PainConnHandlerCB
0x000473a0 _CpCleanup
0x000626b0 _CyanideRxPacketHandler
0x00073ee4 _Runtime
0x0008aa74 _vxTaskEntry

If no panic condition has occurred on this network module since it was last reset, the following message is displayed:
Panic trace from netmod 3A
No panic trace Found

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

5 - 73

Hardware Commands

5.7.5.3 hardware netmod panic save

Hardware Commands

5.7.6

hardware netmod reset

This command is the software equivalent of removing and immediately re-inserting a


network module while the switch is powered on. This command lets you reset the connections
on a given network module without having physical access to the switch. Enter the following:
myswitch:hardware netmod-> reset
Usage:
[-netmod] <Netmod>

Netmod

This parameter is defined as follows:


Parameter
-netmod <Netmod>

Description
The network module that you want to reset.

NOTE

All SVCs associated with this network module


are torn down upon a reset and attempt to
reconnect as needed.
If connection preservation is enabled (system
modify
-connectionpreservation
enabled, all PVCs associated with this network
module are left intact.
If connection preservation is disabled, all PVCs
associated with this network module are torn
down and set up again upon a reset. Depending
on the number of PVCs configured and the type
of processor in your switch, it may take a short
time for all of the PVCs to be re-established after
a reset.

For example, if you want to reset network module 3B, enter the following:
myswitch:hardware netmod-> reset 3b

The switch then cautions you that all connections will be torn down. To abort the reset, type n
or press <ENTER>. To continue with the reset, type y.
Resetting the network module will destroy the
existing connections temporarily.
Reset the network module [n]? y

5 - 74

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Hardware Commands

hardware netmod reset_pair

This command lets you protect a given logical network module or port card on an ASX-4000
switch. Enter the following:
myswitch:hardware netmod-> reset_pair
Usage:
[-module] <Netmod>

Netmod

This parameter is defined as follows:


Parameter
-module <Netmod>

Description
The logical network module or port card on an ASX-4000 switch that you want to protect.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

5 - 75

Hardware Commands

5.7.7

Hardware Commands

5.7.8

hardware netmod show

This command displays general information about network modules or port cards that are
currently installed in a fabric. Something similar to the following is displayed:
myswitch:hardware netmod-> show
Netmod Series Admin

Speed

Ports Timing Rev.

S/N

ProductNumber

4A

up

45.0M

yes

97090002

NM-4/DS3D

4B

up

155.0M

no

1.0

N/A

NM-4/155UTP5C

4C

up

155.0M

yes

82401086

NM-4/155MMSCD

4D

up

1.544M

yes

2.0

N/A

NM-2/DS1C

4E

up

2560.0M

no

1.0

N/A

NM-4/BPB

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Field

Description

Netmod

Shows each network module or port card currently installed in the switch fabric. 1 means
that it is the switch fabric in slot 1. The letter shows the position of the network module or
port card in the switch fabric. E is the intra-fabric port to the other switch fabrics in an
ASX-1000 chassis, ASX-1200 chassis, or a TNX-1100 chassis.

Series

The hardware series of the network module or port card. C is a Series C network module.
LC is a Series LC network module. C2 is a circuit emulation services (CES) module or a
FramePlus network module. LE is an interface group on an ESX-3000 switch. PC1 is a
Series 1 logical network module on a port card in an ASX-4000 switch. D is a Series D
network module. E is a Series E network module. SF1 is special fabric Series 1, which is
the logical network module for the OC-48c fabric for an ASX-1200 switch, or for a
TNX-1100 switch with SM-1100-B fabrics.

Admin

up means this network module or port card is enabled.


down means this network module or port card is disabled.

Speed

The speed in Mbps of the ports.

Ports

The number of ports on the network module or port card.

Timing

yes means this network module or port card supports distributed timing and no means it
does not.

Rev.

The hardware revision level of this network module or port card.


1

1.

S/N

The serial number of this network module or port card.

ProductNumber

The Marconi product number for this module or port card. NM is network module, CE is
circuit emulation, FR is FramePlus, IMA is Inverse multiplexing over ATM (IMA), PC is
port card, BPB is the ASX-1000 switch, ASX-1200 switch, or TNX-1100 switch intra-fabric
module.

This field is not available for some older versions of network modules.

5 - 76

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Hardware Commands

You can display advanced information about the configuration of a network module or port
card as follows:
myswitch:hardware netmod-> show -advanced
Netmod Series

Uptime

CLEI

4A

20:24

N/A

4B

20:24

N/A

4C

20:24

N/A

4D

20:24

N/A

4E

20:24

N/A

These fields are defined as follows:


Field

Description

Netmod

Shows each network module or port card currently installed in the switch fabric.

Series

The hardware series of the network module or port card.

Uptime

Shows the amount of time in hours and seconds since this network module or port card
was last reset.

CLEI

The Common Language Equipment Identification (CLEI) of this network module or port
card.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

5 - 77

Hardware Commands

5.7.8.1 hardware netmod show -advanced

Hardware Commands

5.7.9

hardware netmod test

This command lets you perform various shared memory ASIC self-tests and display the
results on Series D and Series E network modules only. The list of available subcommands is
displayed by typing ? at the test level.
myswitch:hardware netmod test-> ?
modify

Modify netmod tests status

show

Show hardware memory tests status

5.7.9.1 hardware netmod test modify


This command lets you perform various shared memory ASIC self-tests on Series D and Series
E network modules only.

NOTE

The tests take approximately five to ten minutes


to finish.

Before you can test a Series D or Series E network module, you must first take it out of service
by administering it down as follows:
hardware netmod modify -netmod <Netmod> -admin down
When this command is entered, a warning message is displayed as follows:
Disabling the network module will destroy all existing connections on the module.
Disable the network module [n]? y

Entering n or pressing <ENTER> aborts the command. Entering y tears down all of the
existing connections and temporarily places the network module out of service. You can then
test the network module using the following AMI command:
myswitch:hardware netmod test-> modify
Usage:
[-netmod] <Netmod>
[[-testadminstatus] <testadminstatus_type>]

5 - 78

Netmod
Test Admin Status

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Hardware Commands

Parameter

Description

-netmod <Netmod>

The Series D or Series E network module that is to be tested. Enter the board number and
network module; e.g., 3A.

-testadminstatus
<testadminstatus_type>

Indicates the test status of the network module:


normal indicates the hardware is okay on the network module.
startTest starts the hardware tests on the network module.
abortTest aborts the test if the network module is under test.

To test module A on switch fabric 3, enter the following:


hardware netmod test modify -netmod 3A -testadminstatus startTest
You receive the following message:
Testing a network module may take 5-10 minutes
Start the test?

[n]? y

Press the ENTER key to abort the test!!


Testing SRAM Bank 0......
Testing SRAM Bank 1.......
DRAM..........................................................................
..............................................................................
..............................................................................
.................................................................
Network module tests successful
Do you want to abort the tests [n]?

To abort the self-tests, press <ENTER> at any time during the test. You receive the following
message:
Do you want to abort the tests [n]?

Entering n or pressing <ENTER> allows you to resume the tests. Entering y stops the tests. You
receive the following message:
Abort the test [n]? y
Network module test aborted.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

5 - 79

Hardware Commands

This parameter is defined as follows:

Hardware Commands

When you are finished testing the network module, use the following command to put the
network module back into service.
hardware netmod modify -netmod <Netmod> -admin up
At that point, PVCs that are stored in the configuration database are re-established and SVCs
are dynamically re-established.

5.7.9.2 hardware netmod test show


This command lets you display information about the shared memory ASIC self-tests on
Series D or Series E network modules only.
myswitch:hardware netmod test-> show
Admin

Oper

Detailed

Netmod

Status

Status

Information

4A

normal

normal

N/A

4B

normal

testUnsupported

N/A

4C

normal

testUnsupported

N/A

4D

normal

testUnsupported

N/A

4E

normal

testUnsupported

N/A

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Field

Description

Netmod

The Series D or Series E network module that has been tested.

Admin Status

Indicates the hardware test configuration of the network module:


startTest starts the hardware tests on the network module.
abortTest aborts the test if the network module is under test.
normal means the test has ended or has been aborted.

Oper Status

The status of the hardware tests on the network module:


normal indicates that the network module has never undergone hardware tests.
underTest means the tests are currently running on the network module.
testSuccessful means the tests have completed successfully on the module.
testFailed means the tests have completed unsuccessfully on the module.
testAborted means the tests have been aborted.
testUnsupported displays for network modules that do not support hardware
tests; e.g., Series LC network modules.

Detailed Information

5 - 80

A message describing the status of the current test.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Hardware Commands

These commands enable you to configure or to display information about the traffic on the
network modules. To list the available subcommands, type ? at the traffic level.
myswitch:hardware netmod traffic-> ?
c>

The c directory

d>

The d directory

e>

The e directory

lc>

The lc directory

oc48stats

Display OC48 Traffic Management Statistics

sf1>

The sf1 directory

The following is displayed on an ESX-3000 switch:


myswitch:hardware netmod traffic-> ?
le>

The le directory

The following is displayed on an ASX-4000 switch:


myswitch:hardware netmod traffic-> ?
oc48stats

Display OC48 Traffic Management Statistics

pc1>

The pc1 directory

pc2>

The pc2 directory

5.7.10.1 hardware netmod traffic c


These commands let you configure or display information about the traffic on Series C
network modules. To list the available subcommands, type ? at the c level.
myswitch:hardware netmod traffic c-> ?
models

Display netmod memory models

modify

Modify netmod traffic configuration

show

Display netmod traffic configuration

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

5 - 81

Hardware Commands

5.7.10 hardware netmod traffic

Hardware Commands

5.7.10.1.1

hardware netmod traffic c models

This command allows you to display the different types of traffic memory models on a
network module. Enter the following parameters:
myswitch:hardware netmod traffic c-> models
Model

Memory Ucasts Mcasts

32Kx48

MOuts

Cells

512

1024

2048

default

128Kx48

128Kx48

6144

512

1024

12288

default

11264

1024

2048

10240

128Kx48

2048

more conns

2048

16384

8192

VP shaping

128Kx48

32Kx48

3072

128

1024

13312

more cells

2048

256

1024

2560

more cells

4096

Name

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Field
1

Model

Memory

Description
The shared memory model for this configuration. This is the number to enter for the
-index <integer> parameter when using hardware netmod traffic c modify.
The size of this shared memory configuration, in bytes.

The maximum number of unicast connections supported for this model. Half of these
connections are reserved for low-priority connections (nrtVBR, ABR, UBR) and half are
reserved for high-priority connections (rtVBR, CBR). For example, if a model supports 4K
unicast connections, it really supports 2K rtVBR or CBR connections and 2K nrtVBR, ABR,
or UBR connections.

Mcasts

The number of input multicast connections supported from the switch fabric to the
network module for this shared memory model. Half of these connections are reserved for
low-priority connections (nrtVBR, ABR, UBR) and half are reserved for high-priority
connections (rtVBR, CBR). A multicast connection can have multiple outputs on the same
network module. The number of outputs does not figure into this constraint.

MOuts

The number of output multicast connections supported from the network module to the
link for this shared memory model. Any multicast connection can have multiple outputs
on the same network module or the same port. If one multicast connection has four
outputs, it requires 1 mcast and 4 mouts. Adding an output to a multicast connection can
fail if all of the outputs are in use. Adding the multicast connection might not fail.

Cells

The total amount of cell buffering that is supported for this shared memory model.

Name

The identifier for this shared memory model.

Ucasts

1.

Memory model 4 has been removed.

2.

The Series C network modules offer an ABR-ready ATM interface. A future ForeThought release will support ABR QoS
operation on these interfaces. ABR options in the current release will apply in that ForeThought release.

5 - 82

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Hardware Commands

hardware netmod traffic c modify

Hardware Commands

5.7.10.1.2

This command lets you configure traffic on Series C network modules. Enter the following:
myswitch:hardware netmod traffic c-> modify
Usage:
[-netmod] <Netmod>

Netmod

[[-model] <integer>]

Model Used

[[-epd] <percent>]

Early Packet Discard

[[-fifoblock] (normal|enabled)]

FIFO Blocking

These parameters are defined as follows:


Parameter

Description
1

-netmod <Netmod>
-model

<integer>2

The Series C network module to be configured for Early Packet Discard.


The predefined memory model to be used for this Series C network module. The models
make different trade-offs between the number of cell buffers, and the number of unicast
and multicast connections. Enter the number found in the Model field of the hardware
netmod traffic c models command for the shared memory configuration that you
want to use.

-epd <percent>

The AAL5 packet drop threshold to be set, in percent of cells. By default, this value is set
to 90% of the shared buffer size.

-fifoblock (normal|enabled)

normal means that the network module passes traffic normally. enabled means that
FIFO blocking takes place on the network module when the buffers are full. The default is
normal.

1.

The following Series C network modules can only use the following traffic memory models: NM-6/25UTPEC and
NM-4/155UTP5EC can only use models 1 and 7; all other Series C network modules can only use models 2 - 6.

2.

The network module must be reset for this command to take effect.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

5 - 83

Hardware Commands

5.7.10.1.3

hardware netmod traffic c show

This command enables you to display traffic model information about the Series C network
modules. Enter the following parameters:
myswitch:hardware netmod traffic c-> show
Netmod

Memory

Model

EPD

FIFOblock

4B

128Kx48

90%

normal

4C

128Kx48

90%

normal

4D

128Kx48

90%

normal

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Field

Description

Netmod

The network module that has been configured.

Memory

The hardware configuration this shared memory model supports, in units of 48-bit words
(x48).

Model

The shared memory model used for this network module. See hardware netmod
traffic c models for more information.

EPD

The threshold for AAL5 Early Packet Discard on this network module in percent of the
buffer size.

FIFOblock

Displays enabled if FIFO blocking is enabled on this network module. Otherwise,


displays normal.

5 - 84

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Hardware Commands

hardware netmod traffic c show -statistics

This command enables you to display statistics about the Series C network modules. Enter the
following parameters:
myswitch:hardware netmod traffic c-> show -statistics
Unicast

Multicast Multicast Current Shared

Netmod Connections Connections

Outputs

Used

Cells Memory Memory

4B

23

8928

4C

32

7392

16
9

4D

11

10464

16

The fields in these displays are defined as follows:


Field

Description

Netmod

The Series C network module for which information is being displayed.

Unicast Connections

The number of unicast connections that are currently active on this Series C network
module.

Multicast Connections

The number of multicast connections that are currently active on this Series C network
module.

Multicast Outputs

The number of multicast outputs that are currently active on this Series C network
module.

Current Cells

The number of cells currently in the dedicated queues and in the shared memory for this
Series C network module.

Shared Memory

The amount of shared memory that is configured for this Series C network module.

Used Memory

The amount of shared memory that is currently being used on this Series C network
module.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

5 - 85

Hardware Commands

5.7.10.1.3.1

Hardware Commands

5.7.10.2 hardware netmod traffic d


These commands let you configure or display information about the traffic on Series D and
IMA network modules. To list the available subcommands, type ? at the d level.
myswitch:hardware netmod traffic d-> ?
channelStats

Display channel statistics

models

Display netmod memory models

modify

Modify netmod traffic configuration

pathStats

Display through path statistics

show

Display netmod traffic configuration

5.7.10.2.1

hardware netmod traffic d channelStats

You can show channel traffic statistics for Series D and IMA network modules as follows:
myswitch:hardware netmod traffic d -> channelStats
Output

Packets

AtmIf

VPI

VCI

4B1

4B1

CLP0

CLP1

Tx

Cells Tx

Cells Tx

4B1

606

4B1

15

449849

4B1

16

73148

4B2

4B2

4B2

15

449849

Press q to quit, any other key to continue...q

The fields in these displays are defined as follows:


Field

Description

Output AtmIf

The outgoing port number.

Output VPI

The outgoing virtual path number.

Output VCI

The outgoing virtual channel number.

Packets Tx

Counts the number of packets transmitted on this channel.

CLP0 Cells Tx

The number of CLP0 cells on this channel that were transmitted.

CLP1 Cells Tx

The number of CLP1 cells on this channel that were transmitted.

5 - 86

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Hardware Commands

hardware netmod traffic d channelStats -loss

Hardware Commands

5.7.10.2.1.1

You can show VCC traffic statistics for Series D and IMA network modules as follows:
myswitch:hardware netmod traffic d->channelStats -loss
Output

EPD

Intent

Unintent

CLP1

CLP01

Loss

Loss

Loss

Loss

Loss

4B1

4B1

15

4B1

16

4B2

4B2

4B2

15

AtmIf

VPI

VCI

4B1

4B1

Press q to quit, any other key to continue...q

The fields in these displays are defined as follows:


Field

Description

Output AtmIf

The outgoing port number.

Output VPI

The outgoing virtual path number.

Output VCI

The outgoing virtual channel number.

EPD Loss

For AAL5 traffic, counts only the first cell of each packet dropped on this channel due to
EPD (Early Packet Discard). For non-AAL5 traffic, this counter is not incremented.

Intent Loss

For AAL5 traffic, counts the first cell of each packet dropped on this channel due to PPD
(Partial Packet Discard). For non-AAL5 traffic, this counter is not incremented.

Unintent Loss

For AAL5 traffic, counts only the first cell of each packet lost on this channel when output
shared memory is full or when the per-port/per-priority CLP (Cell Loss Priority)
thresholds are exceeded. All remaining cells are counted under the CellsLost Intent
counter. For non-AAL5 traffic, counts all cells lost on this channel when output shared
memory is full or when the per-port/per-priority CLP (Cell Loss Priority) thresholds are
exceeded.

CLP1 Loss

For AAL5 traffic, counts only the first cell of each packet lost on this channel when the
per-VC CLP=1 threshold is exceeded. All remaining cells are counted under the
CellsLost Intent counter. For non-AAL5 traffic, counts all cells lost on this channel
when the per-VC CLP=1 threshold is exceeded.

CLP01 Loss

For AAL5 traffic, counts only the first cell of each packet lost on this channel when the
per-VC CLP=0+1 threshold is exceeded. All remaining cells are counted under the
CellsLost Intent counter. For non-AAL5 traffic, counts all cells lost on this channel
when the per-VC CLP=0+1 threshold is exceeded.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

5 - 87

Hardware Commands

5.7.10.2.1.2

hardware netmod traffic d channelStats -queue

You can display the current per-connection queue length for Series D and IMA network
modules as follows:
myswitch:hardware netmod traffic d->channelStats -queue
Output

Current

AtmIf

VPI

VCI

4B1

Qsize
0

4B1

4B1

4B1

15

4B1

16

4B2

4B2

4B2

15

Press q to quit, any other key to continue...q

The fields in these displays are defined as follows:


Field

Description

Output AtmIf

The outgoing port number.

Output VPI

The outgoing virtual path number.

Output VCI

The outgoing virtual channel number.

Current Qsize

The current queue length.

5 - 88

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Hardware Commands

hardware netmod traffic d models

This command allows you to display the different types of traffic memory models on a Series
D or IMA network module. Enter the following parameters:
myswitch:hardware netmod traffic d-> models
Cell
Model

Memory

Table
Memory Ucasts Mcasts

MOuts

Cells Counters Name

256Kx32

256Kx32

12288

1024

4096

16352

8 16K cells OC-12

256Kx32

256Kx32

12288

1024

4096

16352

8 16K cells OC-3

256Kx32

256Kx32

10240

512

4096

16352

8 16K cells DSn/En

512Kx32

256Kx32

12288

1024

4096

32736

8 32K cells OC-12

512Kx32

256Kx32

12288

1024

4096

32736

8 32K cells OC-3

512Kx32

256Kx32

10240

512

4096

32736

8 32K cells DSn/En

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Field

The shared memory model for this configuration. This is the number to enter for the -index
<integer> parameter when using the hardware netmod traffic d modify command.

Cell Memory2

The hardware configuration this shared memory model supports, in units of 32-bit words
(x32).

Table Memory

The hardware configuration this shared memory model supports, in units of 32-bit words (x32).

Ucasts

The maximum number of unicast connections supported by this shared memory configuration.

Mcasts

The number of input multicast connections supported from the switch fabric to the network
module by this shared memory configuration.

MOuts

The number of output multicast connections supported from the network module to the link
for this shared memory model. Any multicast connection can have multiple outputs on the
same network module or the same port. If one multicast connection has four outputs, it
requires 1 mcast and 4 mouts.

Cells

The total amount of cell buffering that is supported by this shared memory configuration.
3

1.

Description

Model1

Counters

The number of per-connection counters that is supported by this shared memory configuration.
The counters are: 1 - Transmit (CLP=0) counter, 2 - Transmit (CLP=1) counter, 3 - EPD counter, 4
- Unintentional cell loss counter, 5 - CLP=1 threshold counter, 6 - CLP=0+1 threshold counter, 7
- Intentional PPD counter, and 8 - Transmit packet counter.

Name

The identifier for this shared memory model.

The following Series D network modules can only use the following traffic memory models: OC-12 network modules
can only use model 4; OC-3 network modules can only use model 5; and DS3, E3, DS1, and E1 network modules can
only use model 6. Models 1, 2, and 3 are not used.

2.

The Cell and Table Memory sizes determine which memory models are appropriate for a given network module.

3.

If the module packet counter is enabled under hardware netmod traffic d modify -aal5pktcount, the Transmit
CLP=0 and CLP=1 counters are combined into a single Transmit CLP0+1 count.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

5 - 89

Hardware Commands

5.7.10.2.2

Hardware Commands

5.7.10.2.3

hardware netmod traffic d modify

This command lets you configure traffic on Series D and IMA network modules. Enter the
following:
myswitch:hardware netmod traffic d-> modify
Usage:
[-netmod] <Netmod>

Netmod

[[-model] <integer>]

Model Used

[[-epd] <percent>]

Early Packet Discard

[[-epdubr] <percent>]

Early Packet Discard for UBR

[[-efcion] <integer>]

EFCI On

[[-efcioff] <integer>]

EFCI Off

[[-aal5pktcount] (disabled|enabled)]

Count Packets

[[-altclp01thresh] <integer>]

Alt CLP01 Threshold

[[-altclp1thresh] <integer>]

Alt CLP1 Threshold

[[-vcclp01cbr] <integer>]

VC CLP01 For CBR-rtVBR

[[-vcclp01nrtvbr] <integer>]

VC CLP01 For nrtVBR

[[-vcclp01ubr] <integer>]

VC CLP01 For UBR

[[-vcclp01abr] <integer>]

VC CLP01 For ABR

[[-vcclp1cbr] <integer>]

VC CLP1 For CBR-rtVBR

[[-vcclp1nrtvbr] <integer>]

VC CLP1 For nrtVBR

[[-vcclp1ubr] <integer>]

VC CLP1 For UBR

[[-vcclp1abr] <integer>]

VC CLP1 For ABR

These parameters are defined as follows:


Parameter

Description
1

-netmod <Netmod>
-model

<integer>2

The Series D network module to be configured.


The predefined memory model to be used for this Series D network module. The various
models make different trade-offs between the number of cell buffers, and the number of
unicast and multicast connections, and the number of per-connection counters. Enter the
number found in the Model field of the hardware netmod traffic d models
command for the shared memory configuration that you want to use.

-epd <percent>

The AAL5 packet drop threshold to be set for CBR, VBR, and ABR AAL5 connections, in
percent of cells. The default value is set to 75% of the total cell buffer size on IMA network
modules and to 90% of the total cell buffer size on all other Series D network modules.

-epdubr <percent>

The AAL5 packet drop threshold to be set for AAL5 UBR connections only, in percent of
cells. The default value is set to 75% of the total cell buffer size on IMA network modules
and to 90% of the total cell buffer size on all other Series D network modules.

-efcion <integer>

The number of cells at which the EFCI bit will be set, indicating that there is congestion.
This number must be entered in increments of 32. The default is 256 cells.

5 - 90

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Hardware Commands

Description

-efcioff <integer>

The number of cells at which the EFCI bit will be cleared, indicating that there is no
congestion. This number must be entered in increments of 32. The default is 192 cells.

-aal5pktcount
(disabled|enabled)4

enable means the network module will count the number of transmitted AAL5 PDUs.
disable means the network module will not count the number of transmitted AAL5
PDUs. The default is disable.

-altclp01thresh <integer>

The number of cells in the per-connection buffer at which the connection drops CLP=0+1
cells. Applying a CLP=0+1 threshold means that when the current cell count for a
connection is greater than this threshold, cells are dropped, regardless of their CLP bit.
This threshold must be greater than the CLP=1 threshold. This threshold can only be
adjusted in increments of multiples of 16 cells (e.g., 16, 32, 48). For CLP=0+1, the
minimum value is the CLP=1 threshold + 16 cells, the maximum is 4,080 cells, and the
default is 4,080 cells.

-altclp1thresh <integer>

The number of cells in the per-connection buffer at which the connection drops CLP=1
cells. Applying a CLP=1 threshold means that when the current cell count for a connection
is greater than this threshold, cells that have a CLP=1 are dropped. This threshold must be
less than the CLP=0+1 threshold. This threshold can only be adjusted in increments of
multiples of 16 cells (e.g., 16, 32, 48). For CLP=1, the minimum value is 0, the maximum is
the CLP=0+1 threshold - 16 cells, and the default is 256 cells.

-vcclp01cbr <integer>

The number of cells in the buffer at which CBR and rtVBR traffic type drops CLP=0+1
cells. Applying a CLP=0+1 threshold means that when the current cell count for a
connection is greater than this threshold, cells are dropped, regardless of their CLP bit.
This threshold must be greater than the CLP=1 threshold. This threshold can only be
adjusted in increments of multiples of 16 cells (e.g., 16, 32, 48). For CLP=0+1, the
minimum value is the CLP=1 threshold + 16 cells, the maximum is 4,080 cells, and the
default is 4,080 cells.

-vcclp01nrtvbr <integer>

The number of cells in the buffer at which nrtVBR traffic type drops CLP=0+1 cells.
Applying a CLP=0+1 threshold means that when the current cell count for a connection is
greater than this threshold, cells are dropped, regardless of their CLP bit. This threshold
must be greater than the CLP=1 threshold. This threshold can only be adjusted in
increments of multiples of 16 cells (e.g., 16, 32, 48). For CLP=0+1, the minimum value is
the CLP=1 threshold + 16 cells, the maximum is 4,080 cells, and the default is 4,080 cells.

-vcclp01ubr <integer>

The number of cells in the buffer at which UBR traffic type drops CLP=0+1 cells. Applying
a CLP=0+1 threshold means that when the current cell count for a connection is greater
than this threshold, cells are dropped, regardless of their CLP bit. This threshold must be
greater than the CLP=1 threshold. This threshold can only be adjusted in increments of
multiples of 16 cells (e.g., 16, 32, 48). For CLP=0+1, the minimum value is the CLP=1
threshold + 16 cells, the maximum is 4,080 cells, and the default is 4,080 cells.

-vcclp01abr <integer>

The number of cells in the buffer at which ABR traffic type drops CLP=0+1 cells. Applying
a CLP=0+1 threshold means that when the current cell count for a connection is greater
than this threshold, cells are dropped, regardless of their CLP bit. This threshold must be
greater than the CLP=1 threshold. This threshold can only be adjusted in increments of
multiples of 16 cells (e.g., 16, 32, 48). For CLP=0+1, the minimum value is the CLP=1
threshold + 16 cells, the maximum is 4,080 cells, and the default is 4,080 cells.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

5 - 91

Hardware Commands

Parameter

Hardware Commands

Parameter

Description

-vcclp1cbr <integer>

The number of cells in the buffer at which CBR and rtVBR traffic type drops CLP=1 cells.
Applying a CLP=1 threshold means that when the current cell count for a connection is
greater than this threshold, cells that have a CLP=1 are dropped. This threshold must be
less than the CLP=0+1 threshold. This threshold can only be adjusted in increments of
multiples of 16 cells (e.g., 16, 32, 48). For CLP=1, the minimum value is 0, the maximum is
the CLP=0+1 threshold - 16 cells, and the default is 256 cells.

-vcclp1nrtvbr <integer>

The number of cells in the buffer at which nrtVBR traffic type drops CLP=1 cells.
Applying a CLP=1 threshold means that when the current cell count for a connection is
greater than this threshold, cells that have a CLP=1 are dropped. This threshold must be
less than the CLP=0+1 threshold. This threshold can only be adjusted in increments of
multiples of 16 cells (e.g., 16, 32, 48). For CLP=1, the minimum value is 0, the maximum is
the CLP=0+1 threshold - 16 cells, and the default is 256 cells.

-vcclp1ubr <integer>

The number of cells in the buffer at which UBR traffic type drops CLP=1 cells. Applying a
CLP=1 threshold means that when the current cell count for a connection is greater than
this threshold, cells that have a CLP=1 are dropped. This threshold must be less than the
CLP=0+1 threshold. This threshold can only be adjusted in increments of multiples of 16
cells (e.g., 16, 32, 48). For CLP=1, the minimum value is 0, the maximum is the CLP=0+1
threshold - 16 cells, and the default is 256 cells.

-vcclp1abr <integer>

The number of cells in the buffer at which ABR traffic type drops CLP=1 cells. Applying a
CLP=1 threshold means that when the current cell count for a connection is greater than
this threshold, cells that have a CLP=1 are dropped. This threshold must be less than the
CLP=0+1 threshold. This threshold can only be adjusted in increments of multiples of 16
cells (e.g., 16, 32, 48). For CLP=1, the minimum value is 0, the maximum is the CLP=0+1
threshold - 16 cells, and the default is 256 cells.

1.

The following Series D network modules can only use the following traffic memory models: OC-12 network modules
can only use model 4; OC-3 network modules can only use model 5; and DS3, E3, DS1, and E1 network modules can
only use model 6. Models 1, 2, and 3 are not used. Since there is currently only one valid model for each type of
network module, the software will not allow you to change the memory model for a Series D network module.

2.

The network module must be reset for this command to take effect.

3.

The value for the efcioff threshold must always be less than or equal to the value for the efcion threshold.

4.

You must reset the network module once you have entered this command.

5 - 92

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Hardware Commands

hardware netmod traffic d pathStats

Hardware Commands

5.7.10.2.4

You can show path traffic statistics for Series D and IMA network modules as follows:
myswitch:hardware netmod traffic d-> pathStats
Output
AtmIf

VPI

4B1

75

Packets

CLP0

CLP1

Tx

Cells Tx

Cells Tx

The fields in these displays are defined as follows:


Field

Description

Output AtmIf

The outgoing port number.

Output VPI

The outgoing virtual path number.

Packets Tx

The number of transmitted packets on this path.

CLP0 Cells Tx

The number of CLP=0 cells on this path that were transmitted.

CLP1 Cells Tx

The number of CLP=1 cells on this path that were transmitted.

5.7.10.2.4.1

hardware netmod traffic d pathStats -loss

You can show traffic statistics that show losses on the paths for Series D and IMA network
modules as follows:
myswitch:hardware netmod traffic d> pathStats -loss
Output
AtmIf

VPI

4B1

75

Unintent

CLP1

CLP01

Loss

Loss

Loss

The fields in these displays are defined as follows:


Field

Description

Output AtmIf

The outgoing port number.

Output VPI

The outgoing virtual path number.

Unintent Loss

The number of cells dropped on this path due to output memory shortages or the
per-port/per-priority CLP (Cell Loss Priority) thresholds.

CLP1 Loss

The number of cells lost on this path due to the per-VC CLP=1 threshold.

CLP01 Loss

The number of cells lost on this path due to the per-VC CLP=0+1 threshold.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

5 - 93

Hardware Commands

5.7.10.2.4.2

hardware netmod traffic d pathStats -queue

You can display the current per-path queue length for Series D and IMA network modules as
follows:
myswitch:hardware netmod traffic d> pathStats -queue
Output

Current

AtmIf

VPI

4B1

75

Qsize
0

The fields in these displays are defined as follows:


Field

Description

Output AtmIf

The outgoing port number.

Output VPI

The outgoing virtual path number.

Current Qsize

The current queue length.

5 - 94

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Hardware Commands

hardware netmod traffic d show

This command lets you display traffic model information about the Series D and IMA
network modules. Enter the following parameters:
myswitch:hardware netmod traffic d-> show
CBR-rtVBRCell
Netmod

nrtVBR-ABR

Memory Model

UBR EFCI EFCI

EPD

EPD

On

AAL5

Off PktCnt

AltVC Thresholds
CLP0+1

CLP1

1A

512Kx32

90%

90%

256

192 disabled

4080

256

1B

512Kx32

75%

75%

256

192 disabled

4080

256

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Field

Description

Netmod

The Series D network module that has been configured.

Cell Memory

The size of this shared memory cell RAM configuration (x32).

Model

The shared memory model used for this network module. See hardware netmod
traffic d models for more information.

CBR-rtVBR-nrtVBR-ABR
EPD

The AAL5 packet drop threshold for CBR, rtVBR, nrtVBR, and ABR traffic on this Series D
network module, in cells.

UBR EPD

The AAL5 packet drop threshold for UBR traffic on this Series D network module, in cells.

EFCI On

The threshold value at which the EFCI bit will be set (turned on), signalling congestion,
for all traffic, in cells.

EFCI Off

The threshold value at which the EFCI bit will be cleared (turned off), indicating no
congestion for all traffic, in cells.

AAL5 PktCnt

enable means the network module counts the number of transmitted AAL5 PDUs.
disable means the network module does not count the number of transmitted AAL5
PDUs.

AltVC Threshold CLP0+1

The alternate threshold at which cells are dropped, regardless of their CLP bit, when the
current cell count for a connection is greater than this threshold. This threshold is used
instead of the VC CLP0+1 threshold if the hardware port traffic d modify
-altclpcbr -altclpnrtvbr -altclpubr command is applied or if it is enabled
using the -AltCLP option under connections upc new.

AltVC Threshold CLP1

The alternate threshold at which cells that are CLP=1 are dropped when the current cell
count for a connection is greater than this threshold. This threshold is used instead of the
VC CLP1 threshold if the hardware port traffic d modify -altclpcbr
-altclpnrtvbr -altclpubr command is applied or if it is enabled using the -AltCLP
option under connections upc new.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

5 - 95

Hardware Commands

5.7.10.2.5

Hardware Commands

5.7.10.2.5.1

hardware netmod traffic d show -perclass

You can display traffic information about the Series D and IMA network modules on a
per-class basis as follows:
myswitch:hardware netmod traffic d-> show -perclass
VC Thresholds
CLP0+1

CLP1

Netmod

CBR-rtVBR

nrtVBR

UBR

ABR

CBR-rtVBR

nrtVBR

UBR

ABR

1B

4080

4080

4080

4080

256

256

256

256

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Field

Description

Netmod

The Series D network module that has been configured.

VC Thresholds CLP0+1

The threshold at which cells are dropped for the specified traffic type, regardless of their
CLP bit, when the current cell count for a connection is greater than this threshold for this
traffic type.

VC Thresholds CLP1

The threshold at which cells that are CLP=1 are dropped for the specified traffic type
when the current cell count for a connection is greater than this threshold for this traffic
type.

5.7.10.2.5.2

hardware netmod traffic d show -statistics

This command lets you show traffic statistics about all of the Series D and IMA network
modules as follows:
myswitch:hardware netmod traffic d-> show -statistics
Unicast

Multicast Multicast Current Shared

Netmod Connections Connection


1B

22

Outputs
4

Cells Memory
1

28640

The fields in these displays are defined as follows:


Field

Description

Netmod

The Series D network module for which information is being displayed.

Unicast Connections

The number of unicast connections that are currently active on this Series D network
module.

Multicast Connection

The number of multicast connections that are currently active on this Series D network
module.

Multicast Outputs

The number of multicast outputs that are currently active on this Series D network
module.

Current Cells

The number of cells currently in the dedicated queues and in the shared memory for this
Series D network module.

Shared Memory

The amount of shared memory that is configured for this Series D network module.

5 - 96

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Hardware Commands

These commands let you configure or display information about the traffic on Series E
network modules. To list the available subcommands, type ? at the e level.
myswitch:hardware netmod traffic e-> ?
buffer>

The buffer directory

customBCS>

The customBCS directory

modify

Modify Series E Netmod Traffic Configuration

show

Display Series E Netmod Traffic Configuration

5.7.10.3.1

hardware netmod traffic e buffer

These commands lets you configure the buffer class or traffic type for Series E network
modules. The ASICs in the Series E network modules provide a total of eight buffer classes.
The first five classes support ATM Forum TM4.0 traffic categories (base buffers for CBR,
rtVBR, nrtVBR, ABR, and UBR service categories) and the remaining three classes can be used
to create new buffer classes. Default buffer classes cannot be deleted. To list the available
subcommands, type ? at the buffer level.
myswitch:hardware netmod traffic e buffer-> ?
assign>

The assign directory

delete

Remove a buffer class

modify

Modify a buffer class

new

Create a new buffer class

show

Display Series E buffer classes

5.7.10.3.1.1

hardware netmod traffic e buffer assign

These commands let you create, remove, and display buffer class assignments on Series E
network modules. Buffer classes are assigned for the new subcategory created as per the UPC
contract. Assignment of a different subcategory traffic into the base buffer of a service
category is not allowed. For example, assigning part of nrt-VBR PVC traffic into the CBR base
buffer is not allowed. A subcategory cannot be assigned to two different buffer classes. ABR
traffic can be served only by its base buffer class. Additionally, no other subcategory traffic can
be assigned to ABR buffer class. This is required because of the special characteristics of the
ABR traffic (e.g., ER and RM cell features). All SVCs will be created with subcategory 1. To list
the available subcommands, type ? at the assign level.
myswitch:hardware netmod traffic e buffer assign-> ?
delete
Remove a buffer class assignment
new
Create a new buffer class assignment
show
Display Series E buffer class assignments

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

5 - 97

Hardware Commands

5.7.10.3 hardware netmod traffic e

Hardware Commands

hardware netmod traffic e buffer assign delete


This command lets you delete a buffer class assignment on a Series E network module. Enter
the following parameters:
A network module reset is required for the
command to take effect.

NOTE

myswitch:hardware netmod traffic e buffer assign-> delete


Usage:
[-netmod] <netmod>

Netmod

[-servcat] <ServCat>

Service Category

[-subcat] <integer (1..16)>


[[-buffer] <text>]

Service Sub-category
Buffer

These parameters are defined in the next section.


hardware netmod traffic e buffer assign new
This command lets you create a buffer class assignment on a Series E network module. Enter
the following parameters:
A network module reset is required for the
command to take effect.

NOTE

myswitch:hardware netmod traffic e buffer assign-> new


Usage:
[-netmod] <netmod>

Netmod

[-servcat] <ServCat>

Service Category

[-subcat] <integer (1..16)>

Service Sub-category

[-buffer] <text>

Buffer

The parameters for delete and new are defined as follows:


Parameter

Description

-netmod <netmod>

The Series E network module to be configured.

-servcat <servcat>

The service category to which the buffer class assignment will apply. Can be CBR, rtVBR,
nrtVBR, ABR, or UBR.

-subcat <integer (1..16)>

The service subcategory for this buffer class assignment. A set of connections can be
grouped within a service category. This index is used when assigning classes to a group of
connections on Series E network modules.

-buffer <text>

The buffer class or traffic type.

5 - 98

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Hardware Commands

This command lets you display the buffer class assignments on a Series E network module as
follows:
myswitch:hardware netmod traffic e buffer assign-> show
Service

Service

Netmod

Category

Sub-category

Buffer
Class

2C

CBR

default

cbr_1

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Field

Description

Netmod

The Series E network module that has been configured.

Service Category

The service category to which the buffer class assignment applies.

Service Sub-category

The service subcategory for this buffer class assignment. A set of connections can be
grouped within a service category. This index is used when assigning classes to a group of
connections on Series E network modules.

Buffer Class

The buffer class name.

5.7.10.3.1.2

hardware netmod traffic e buffer delete

This command lets you delete a buffer class on a Series E network module. Enter the following
parameters:
myswitch:hardware netmod traffic e buffer-> delete
Usage:
[-netmod] <netmod>

Netmod

[-buffer] <text>

Buffer

[[-epd] <percent>]

EPD Threshold

These parameters are defined in Section 5.7.10.3.1.4.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

5 - 99

Hardware Commands

hardware netmod traffic e buffer assign show

Hardware Commands

5.7.10.3.1.3

hardware netmod traffic e buffer modify

This command lets you modify a buffer class assignment on a Series E network module. Enter
the following parameters:
myswitch:hardware netmod traffic e buffer-> modify
Usage:
[-netmod] <netmod>

Netmod

[-buffer] <text>

Buffer

[[-epd] <percent>]

EPD Threshold

These parameters are defined in Section 5.7.10.3.1.4.


5.7.10.3.1.4

hardware netmod traffic e buffer new

This command lets you create a buffer class assignment on a Series E network module. Enter
the following parameters:
myswitch:hardware netmod traffic e buffer-> new
Usage:
[-netmod] <netmod>

Netmod

[-buffer] <text>

Buffer

[[-epd] <percent>]

EPD Threshold (default: 90%)

The parameters for delete, modify, and new are defined as follows:
Parameter

Description

-netmod <netmod>

The Series E network module to be configured.

-buffer <text>

The buffer class category for this Series E network module.

-epd <percent>

The threshold for AAL5 Early Packet Discard on this Series E network module in percent
of the buffer size. The default is 90%.

5 - 100

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Hardware Commands

hardware netmod traffic e buffer show

This command lets you display the buffer classes on a Series E network module. Enter the
following parameters:
myswitch:hardware netmod traffic e buffer-> show
Buffer

EPD

Netmod

Name

Threshold

1B

ABR

90%

1B

CBR

90%

1B

UBR

90%

1B

nrtVBR

90%

1B

rtVBR

90%

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Field

Description

Netmod

The Series E network module that has been configured.

Buffer Name

The buffer class category for this Series E network module.

EPD Threshold

The threshold for AAL5 Early Packet Discard on this Series E network module in percent
of the buffer size.

5.7.10.3.2

hardware netmod traffic e customBCS

These commands let you configure or display custom UBR Behavior Class Selector (BCS)
information on Series E network modules. To list the available subcommands, type ? at the
customBCS level.
myswitch:hardware netmod traffic e customBCS-> ?
default

Show Default Series E UBR BCS Configuration

defaultbcs

Show Default Series E UBR BCS Configuration

delete

Remove Series E Custom UBR BCS Configuration

modify

Modify Series E Custom UBR BCS Configuration

new

Create Series E Custom UBR BCS Configuration

show

Display Series E Custom UBR BCS Configuration

NOTE

For more information about how to configure a


custom UBRbcs, please see Chapter 1 in the
Multiservice
Broadband
Switch
Network
Configuration Manual.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

5 - 101

Hardware Commands

5.7.10.3.1.5

Hardware Commands

5.7.10.3.2.1

hardware netmod traffic e customBCS default

This command lets you enter a BCS value on a Series E network module and have the switch
return the corresponding weight. Enter the following parameters:
myswitch:hardware netmod traffic e customBCS-> default
Usage:
[-netmod] <netmod>

Netmod

[-bcs] <integer>

Behavior Class Selector

These parameters are defined in Section 5.7.10.3.2.5.


5.7.10.3.2.2

hardware netmod traffic e customBCS defaultbcs

This command lets you use a pre-configured, default UBRbcs configuration on an individual
Series E network module or on all Series E network modules in the switch fabric. The predefined BCS values are 10000, 20000, and 30000. Enter the following parameter:
myswitch:hardware netmod traffic e customBCS-> defaultbcs ?
[[-netmod] <netmod>]

Netmod

This parameter is defined in Section 5.7.10.3.2.5.


If a specific network module is entered, the default UBRbcs configuration is used just on that
network module. If no network module is entered, the default configuration is applied to all
Series E network modules in the switch fabric.

NOTE

To take effect, this command requires a reset of


the network module(s).

This command is currently not supported.


NOTE

5 - 102

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Hardware Commands

hardware netmod traffic e customBCS delete

This command lets you delete a custom UBRbcs configuration on a Series E network module.
Enter the following parameters:
myswitch:hardware netmod traffic e customBCS-> delete
Usage:
[-netmod] <netmod>

Netmod

[-bcs] <integer>

Behavior Class Selector

[[-buffer] <text>]

Buffer

[[-weight] <integer>]

Weight

These parameters are defined in Section 5.7.10.3.2.5.


5.7.10.3.2.4

hardware netmod traffic e customBCS modify

This command lets you modify a custom UBRbcs configuration on a Series E network module.
Enter the following parameters:
myswitch:hardware netmod traffic e customBCS-> modify
Usage:
[-netmod] <netmod>

Netmod

[-bcs] <integer>

Behavior Class Selector

[[-buffer] <text>]

Buffer

[[-weight] <integer>]

Weight

These parameters are defined in Section 5.7.10.3.2.5.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

5 - 103

Hardware Commands

5.7.10.3.2.3

Hardware Commands

5.7.10.3.2.5

hardware netmod traffic e customBCS new

This command lets you create a custom UBRbcs configuration on a Series E network module.
Enter the following parameters:
myswitch:hardware netmod traffic e customBCS-> new
Usage:
[-netmod] <netmod>

Netmod

[-bcs] <integer>

Behavior Class Selector

[[-buffer] <text>]

Buffer

[[-weight] <integer>]

Weight

The parameters for default, defaultbcs, delete, modify, and new are defined as
follows:
Parameter

Description

-netmod <netmod>

The Series E network module to be configured.

-bcs <integer>

A user-assigned index number that uniquely identifies this BCS.

-buffer <text>

The user-assigned UBR buffer class for this BCS.

-weight <integer>

A user-assigned weight for this BCS. This number indicates how many cells get serviced
at a time from the UBR queue. The range of values is from 1 to 255. The default value (of
all UBR traffic) is 1, so this value should be greater than 1.

5.7.10.3.2.6

hardware netmod traffic e customBCS show

This command lets you display custom UBRbcs configuration information on a Series E
network module. Enter the following parameters:
myswitch:hardware netmod traffic e customBCS-> show
Network
Module

BCS

Buffer

Weight

1B

UBR

1B

UBR2

1B

UBR3

1B

UBR4

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Field

Description

Network Module

The Series E network module that has been configured.

BCS

A user-assigned index number that uniquely identifies this BCS.

Buffer

The user-assigned buffer class for this BCS.

Weight

A user-assigned weight for this BCS.

5 - 104

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Hardware Commands

hardware netmod traffic e modify

This command lets you modify the configuration on a Series E network module. Enter the
following parameters:
myswitch:hardware netmod traffic e-> modify
Usage:
[-netmod] <netmod>

Netmod

[[-ucastConns] <integer>]

Unicast Connections

[[-efcion] <integer>]

EFCI On

[[-efcioff] <integer>]

EFCI Off

[[-aal5cntMode] (cell|packet)]

AAL5 Counting Mode

[[-aal5cntOverride] (on|off)]

AAL5 Counting Mode Override

[[-overbookingHw] (disabled|enabled)]

Hardware Overbooking Switch

These parameters are defined as follows:


Parameter

Description

-netmod <netmod>

The Series E network module to be configured.

-ucastConns <integer>

The maximum number of unicast connections supported by this shared memory


configuration.

-efcion <integer>

The threshold value at which the EFCI will be set (turned on), indicating congestion for
ABR traffic, in cells.

-efcioff <integer>

The threshold value at which the EFCI will be cleared (turned off), indicating no
congestion for ABR traffic, in cells.

-aal5cntMode (cell|packet)

The AAL5 counting mode by which the Series E network module counts the number of
transmitted AAL5 PDUs:
packet means AAL5 packets are counted when gathering statistics for AAL5
connections.
cell means AAL5 cells are counted when gathering statistics for AAL5 connections.

-aal5cntOverride (on|off)

This parameter lets you override the current AAL5 counting mode at the per-connection
level:
on means the Series E network module counts the number of transmitted AAL5
PDUs, regardless of the current counting mode at the per-connection level.
off means the Series E network module does not count the number of transmitted
AAL5 PDUs, regardless of the current counting mode at the per-connection level. The
default is off.

-overbookingHw
(disabled|enabled)

disabled turns off nrtVBR and rtVBR overbooking in the hierarchical shaper on this
network module. The default is disabled.
enabled turns on nrtVBR and rtVBR overbooking in the hierarchical shaper on this
network module.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

5 - 105

Hardware Commands

5.7.10.3.3

Hardware Commands

5.7.10.3.4

hardware netmod traffic e show

This command lets you display the configuration on a Series E network module. Enter the
following parameters:
myswitch:hardware netmod traffic e-> show
Network

MDup

EFCI

EFCI

Module

Ucast

Max Connections
Mcast

List

On

Off

Hardware
Overbooking

1B

32256

512

2046

256

192

disabled

1D

32256

512

2046

256

192

disabled

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Field

Description

Network Module

The Series E network module currently present in the switch fabric.

Max Connections Ucast

The total number of unicast connections that this Series E network module can support.

Max Connections Mcast

The total number of multicast connections that this Series E network module can support.

MDup List

The maximum number of multicast legs per port.

EFCI On

The threshold value at which the EFCI will be set (turned on), indicating congestion for
ABR traffic, in cells.

EFCI Off

The threshold value at which the EFCI will be cleared (turned off), indicating no
congestion for ABR traffic, in cells.

Hardware Overbooking

disabled turns off nrtVBR and rtVBR overbooking in the hierarchical shaper on this
network module.
enabled turns on nrtVBR and rtVBR overbooking in the hierarchical shaper on this
network module.

5 - 106

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Hardware Commands

hardware netmod traffic e show -aal5CntMode

This command lets you display the Series E network module AAL5 counting mode
configuration as follows:
myswitch:hardware netmod traffic e-> show -aal5CntMode
Network

AAL5 Counting

Module

Mode

Override

1B

packet

off

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Field

Description

Network Module

The Series E network module that has been configured.

AAL5 Counting Mode

The AAL5 counting mode by which the logical network module counts the number of
transmitted AAL5 PDUs:
packet means AAL5 packets are counted when gathering statistics for AAL5
connections.
cell means AAL5 cells are counted when gathering statistics for AAL5 connections.

AAL5 Counting Override

Indicates whether the current AAL5 counting mode at the per-connection level can be
overridden:
on means the logical network module counts the number of transmitted AAL5 PDUs,
regardless of the current counting mode at the per-connection level.
off means the logical network module does not count the number of transmitted
AAL5 PDUs, regardless of the current counting mode at the per-connection level. The
default is off.

If no Series E network modules have been configured, the following is displayed:


myswitch:hardware netmod traffic e-> show -aal5CntMode
There are no entries matching your query.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

5 - 107

Hardware Commands

5.7.10.3.4.1

Hardware Commands

5.7.10.3.4.2

hardware netmod traffic e show -memory

This command lets you display Series E network module memory configuration information
as follows:
myswitch:hardware netmod traffic e-> show -memory
Network
Module

Cell

Table

Scheduler

Shared

Memory

Memory

Memory

Memory

1B

128K

512Kx32

256Kx32

129248

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Field

Description

Network Module

The Series E network module that has been configured.

Cell Memory

The hardware configuration this memory model supports.

Table Memory

The hardware configuration this memory model supports, in 32-bit words (x32).

Scheduler Memory

The scheduler memory size, in 32-bit words (x32).

Shared Memory

The total amount of cell buffering that is supported by this shared memory configuration.

If no Series E network modules have been configured, the following is displayed:


myswitch:hardware netmod traffic e-> show -memory
There are no entries matching your query.

5 - 108

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Hardware Commands

hardware netmod traffic e show -stats

Hardware Commands

5.7.10.3.4.3

This command lets you display Series E network module statistics information as follows:
myswitch:hardware netmod traffic e-> show -stats
Network

MDup

Cells

Module

Current Connections
Ucast

Mcast

Used

Buffered

1B

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Field

Description

Network Module

The Series E network module that has been configured.

Current Connections Ucast

The current number of active unicast connections on this Series E network module.

Current Connections Mcast

The current number of active multicast connections on this Series E network module.

MDup Used

The maximum number of multicast legs used per port.

Cells Buffered

The current number of cells buffered.

If no Series E network modules have been configured, the following is displayed:


myswitch:hardware netmod traffic e-> show -stats
There are no entries matching your query.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

5 - 109

Hardware Commands

5.7.10.4 hardware netmod traffic lc


These commands let you configure or display information about the traffic on Series LC
network modules. To list the available subcommands, type ? at the lc level.
myswitch:hardware netmod traffic lc-> ?
channelStats

Display channel statistics

models

Display netmod memory models

modify

Modify netmod traffic configuration

pathStats

Display through path statistics

show

Display netmod traffic configuration

5.7.10.4.1

hardware netmod traffic lc channelStats

You can show channel traffic statistics for Series LC network modules as follows:
myswitch:hardware netmod traffic lc-> channelStats
Output

C e l l s

L o s t

Cells

AtmIf VPI

VCI

Total Intentional Unintentional

Transmitted

1B1

1B1

1B1

45600

1B1

15

166098

1B1

16

88906

1B1

100

4294967295

Press q to quit, any other key to continue...q

The fields in these displays are defined as follows:


Field

Description

Output AtmIf

The outgoing ATM interface number.

Output VPI

The outgoing virtual path number.

Output VCI

The outgoing virtual channel number.

Cells Lost Total

The number of cells on this channel that were dropped by the output network module.

Cells Lost Intentional

The number of cells dropped on this channel due to EPD (Early Packet Discard) or PPD
(Partial Packet Discard).

Cells Lost Unintentional

The number of cells dropped on this channel due to output memory shortages or the CLP
(Cell Loss Priority) threshold.

Cells Transmitted

The number of cells transmitted out this channel.

5 - 110

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Hardware Commands

hardware netmod traffic lc models

This command allows you to display the different types of traffic memory models on a Series
LC network module. Enter the following parameters:
myswitch:hardware netmod traffic lc-> models
Cell
Model

Memory

Table
Memory Ucasts Mcasts

Cells Counters Name

256Kx64

32Kx32

6144

512

32768

0 default

256Kx64

32Kx32

6144

512

16384

1 one counter

256Kx64

32Kx32

6144

512

8192

256Kx64

64Kx32

6144

512

32768

2 default

512Kx64

64Kx32

6144

512

65536

2 default

256Kx64

32Kx32

4096

1024

24576

1 more mcast

256Kx64

64Kx32

4096

1024

32768

2 more mcast

512Kx64

64Kx32

4096

1024

65536

2 more mcast

256Kx64

32Kx32

6144

256

32768

0 8-port default

10

256Kx64

32Kx32

4096

512

32768

0 8-port more mcast

11

256Kx64

32Kx32

4096

512

24576

1 8-port one counter

12

256Kx64

32Kx32

4096

512

14336

2 8-port two counters

2 two counters

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Field

Description

Model

The shared memory model for this configuration. This is the number to enter for the
-index <integer> parameter when using hardware netmod traffic lc modify.

Cell Memory2

The hardware configuration this shared memory model supports, in units of 64-bit words
(x64).

Table Memory

The hardware configuration this shared memory model supports, in units of 32-bit words
(x32).

Ucasts

The maximum number of unicast connections supported by this shared memory


configuration.

Mcasts3

The number of input multicast connections supported from the switch fabric to the
network module by this shared memory configuration.

Cells

The total amount of cell buffering that is supported by this shared memory configuration.

Counters

The number of per-connection counters that is supported by this shared memory


configuration. 0 means there are no per-connection counters. 1 means there are
per-connection counters for cells transmitted and for cells lost. 2 means there are
per-connection counters for cells transmitted, for cells lost, for intentional cells lost, and
for unintentional cells lost.

Name

The identifier for this shared memory model.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

5 - 111

Hardware Commands

5.7.10.4.2

Hardware Commands

1.

For proper operation, all Series LC network modules in a switch must use memory models that support the same number of unicast connections. Therefore, all Series LC modules in a switch should either use models 1-5 OR models 6-8.
The following Series LC network modules can only use the following models: OC-3 MM and UTP can only use models
1, 2, 3, and 6; OC-3 SM can only use models 4 and 7; and OC-12 MM and SM can only use models 5 and 8.

2.

The Cell Memory and Table Memory sizes determine which memory models are appropriate for any given network
module.

3.

Only one multicast output is supported per port for each multicast connection.

5.7.10.4.3

hardware netmod traffic lc modify

This command lets you configure traffic on Series LC network modules. Enter the following:
myswitch:hardware netmod traffic lc-> modify
Usage:
[-netmod] <Netmod>

Netmod

[[-model] <integer>]

Model used

[[-epd] <percent>]

Early Packet Discard

[[-epdubr] <percent>]

Early Packet Discard for UBR

[[-efcion] <integer>]

EFCI On

[[-efcioff] <integer>]

EFCI Off

[[-vbrpriority] (rt|nrt)]

VBR Priority

These parameters are defined as follows:


Parameter
-netmod <Netmod>
-model

<integer>1

Description
The Series LC network module to be configured.
The predefined memory model to be used for this Series LC network module. The various
models make different trade-offs between the number of cell buffers, and the number of
unicast and multicast connections, and the number of per-connection counters. Enter the
number found in the Model field of the hardware netmod traffic lc models AMI
command for the shared memory configuration that you want to use.

-epd <percent>

The AAL5 packet drop threshold to be set for AAL5 CBR, VBR, and ABR connections, in
percent of cells. By default, this value is set to 90% of the shared buffer size.

-epdubr <percent>

The AAL5 packet drop threshold to be set for AAL5 UBR connections only, in percent of
cells. By default, this value is set to 90% of the shared buffer size.

-efcion <integer>

The number of cells at which the ABR2 cells have the EFCI bit set, signalling that there is
congestion. The default for the on threshold is 64. The default for the off threshold is 1.

-efcioff <integer>3

The number of cells at which the ABR cells have the EFCI bit cleared, signalling that there
is no congestion. The default for the on threshold is 64. The default for the off threshold
is 1.

5 - 112

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Hardware Commands

-vbrpriority (rt|nrt)

1.

Description
rt places the VBR traffic in the high priority queue. nrt places the VBR traffic in the low
priority queue. The default is nrt. This parameter does not apply to the Port Expansion
Module (PEM) (1D) or to any other switch platform.

For proper operation, all Series LC network modules in a switch must use memory models that support the same number of unicast connections. Therefore, all Series LC modules in a switch should either use models 1-5 OR models 6-8.
The following Series LC network modules can only use the following traffic memory models: OC-3 MM and UTP can
only use models 1, 2, 3, and 6; OC-3 SM can only use models 4 and 7; and OC-12 MM and SM can only use models 5
and 8.

2.

The Series LC network modules offer an ABR-ready ATM interface. A future ForeThought release will support ABR QoS
operation on these interfaces. ABR options in the current release will apply in that ForeThought release.

3.

The value for the off threshold must always be less than the value for the on threshold.

5.7.10.4.4

hardware netmod traffic lc pathStats

You can show path traffic statistics for Series LC network modules as follows:
myswitch:hardware netmod traffic lc-> pathStats
Output

C e l l s

AtmIf VPI

Total

L o s t

Cells

Intentional Unintentional

Transmitted

1B1

75

1B2

98

1B2

99

The fields in these displays are defined as follows:


Field

Description

Output AtmIf

The outgoing ATM interface number.

Output VPI

The outgoing virtual path number.

Cells Lost Total

The number of cells on this path that were dropped by the output network module.

Cells Lost Intentional

The number of cells dropped on this path due to EPD (Early Packet Discard) or PPD
(Partial Packet Discard).

Cells Lost Unintentional

The number of cells dropped on this path due to output memory shortages or the CLP
(Cell Loss Priority) threshold.

Cells Transmitted

The number of cells transmitted out this path for this priority.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

5 - 113

Hardware Commands

Parameter

Hardware Commands

5.7.10.4.5

hardware netmod traffic lc show

This command lets you display traffic model information on Series LC network modules as
follows:
myswitch:hardware netmod traffic lc-> show
Cell
Netmod Series
4D

LC

Memory
256Kx64

Table

CBR-VBR-ABR

UBR EFCI EFCI

Memory Model

EPD

EPD

On

32Kx32 1

90%

90%

64

Off VBR-Queue
1 N/A

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Field

1.

Description

Netmod

The network module that has been configured.

Series

Indicates what series of network module this is.

Cell Memory

The size of this shared memory cell RAM configuration (x64).

Table Memory

The size of this shared memory table RAM configuration (x32).

Model

The shared memory model used for this logical network module. See hardware netmod
traffic lc models for more information.

CBR-VBR-ABR EPD

The AAL5 packet drop threshold for CBR, VBR, and ABR traffic on this logical network
module, in percent of the buffer size.

UBR EPD

The AAL5 packet drop threshold for UBR traffic on this logical network module, in
percent of the buffer size.

EFCI On

The threshold value at which the EFCI will be set (turned on), signalling congestion, for
ABR1 traffic, in cells.

EFCI Off

The threshold value at which the EFCI will be cleared (turned off), indicating no
congestion for ABR traffic, in cells.

VBR-Queue

This field does not apply to Series LC network modules.

The Series LC network modules offer an ABR-ready ATM interface. A future ForeThought release will support ABR QoS
operation on these interfaces. ABR options in the current release will apply in that ForeThought release.

5 - 114

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Hardware Commands

hardware netmod traffic lc show -statistics

This command lets you show traffic statistics about all of the Series LC network modules as
follows:
myswitch:hardware netmod traffic lc-> show -statistics
Unicast

Multicast Current Shared

Netmod Connections Connections


4D

21

Used

Cells Memory Memory


0

27648

The fields in these displays are defined as follows:


Field

Description

Netmod

The shared memory network module for which information is being displayed.

Unicast Connections

The number of unicast connections that are currently active on this shared memory
network module.

Multicast Connections

The number of multicast connections that are currently active on this shared memory
network module.

Current Cells

The number of cells currently in the dedicated queues and in the shared memory for this
network module.

Shared Memory

The amount of shared memory that is configured for this network module.

Used Memory

The amount of shared memory that is currently being used on this network module.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

5 - 115

Hardware Commands

5.7.10.4.5.1

Hardware Commands

5.7.10.5 hardware netmod traffic oc48stats


You can display traffic statistics for Series PC1 OC-48c port cards or OC-48c network modules
as follows:
myswitch:hardware netmod traffic-> oc48stats
Current
Netmod

Unicasts

4A

11

Maximum

Current

Maximum

Unicasts Multicasts Multicasts


32768

1024

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Field

Description

Netmod

The shared memory network module for which information is being displayed.

Current Unicasts

The current number of unicast connections active on this shared memory network
module.

Maximum Unicasts

The total number of unicast connections that this network module can support.

Current Multicasts

The current number of multicast connections active on this shared memory network
module.

Maximum Multicasts

The total number of multicast connections that this network module can support.

5 - 116

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Hardware Commands

These commands let you configure or display information about the traffic on Series LE
logical network modules on an ATM port card on an ESX-3000. To list the available
subcommands, type ? at the le level.
myswitch:hardware netmod traffic le-> ?
channelStats

Display channel statistics

models

Display netmod memory models

modify

Modify netmod traffic configuration

pathStats

Display through path statistics

show

Display netmod traffic configuration

5.7.10.6.1

hardware netmod traffic le channelStats

You can show channel traffic statistics for logical Series LE network modules as follows:
myswitch:hardware netmod traffic le-> channelStats
Output

C e l l s

L o s t

Cells

AtmIf

VPI

VCI

Total Intentional Unintentional

Transmitted

7A1

N/A

N/A

7A1

N/A

N/A

7A1

N/A

N/A

56022

7A1

16

N/A

N/A

628956

7A1

18

N/A

N/A

66969

7A1

32

N/A

N/A

N/A

7A1

34

N/A

N/A

N/A

Press <return> for more, or 'q' to quit... q

The fields in these displays are defined as follows:


Field

Description

Output AtmIf

The outgoing ATM interface number.

Output VPI

The outgoing virtual path number.

Output VCI

The outgoing virtual channel number.

Cells Lost Total

The number of cells on this channel that were dropped by the output network module.

Cells Lost Intentional

The number of cells dropped on this channel due to EPD (Early Packet Discard) or PPD
(Partial Packet Discard).

Cells Lost Unintentional

The number of cells dropped on this channel due to output memory shortages or the CLP
(Cell Loss Priority) threshold.

Cells Transmitted

The number of cells transmitted out this channel.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

5 - 117

Hardware Commands

5.7.10.6 hardware netmod traffic le

Hardware Commands

5.7.10.6.2

hardware netmod traffic le models

This command allows you to display the different types of traffic memory models on a Series
LE logical network module on an ATM port card on an ESX-3000. Enter the following:
myswitch:hardware netmod traffic le-> models
Cell
Model

Memory

Table
Memory Ucasts Mcasts

Cells Counters Name

256Kx64

32Kx32

6144

512

32768

0 default

256Kx64

32Kx32

6144

512

16384

1 one counter

256Kx64

32Kx32

6144

512

8192

256Kx64

64Kx32

6144

512

32768

2 default

512Kx64

64Kx32

6144

512

65536

2 default

256Kx64

32Kx32

4096

1024

24576

1 more mcast

256Kx64

64Kx32

4096

1024

32768

2 more mcast

512Kx64

64Kx32

4096

1024

65536

2 more mcast

256Kx64

32Kx32

6144

256

32768

0 8-port default

10

256Kx64

32Kx32

4096

512

32768

0 8-port more mcast

11

256Kx64

32Kx32

4096

512

24576

1 8-port one counter

12

256Kx64

32Kx32

4096

512

14336

2 8-port two counters

2 two counters

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Field

Description

Model

The shared memory model for this configuration. This is the number to enter for the
-index <integer> parameter when using hardware netmod traffic le modify.

Cell Memory1

The hardware configuration this shared memory model supports, in units of 64-bit words
(x64).

Table Memory

The hardware configuration this shared memory model supports, in units of 32-bit words
(x32).

Ucasts

The maximum number of unicast connections supported by this shared memory


configuration.

Mcasts2

The number of input multicast connections supported from the switch fabric to the
network module by this shared memory configuration.

Cells

The total amount of cell buffering that is supported by this shared memory configuration.

Counters

The number of per-connection counters that is supported by this shared memory


configuration. 0 means there are no per-connection counters. 1 means there are
per-connection counters for cells transmitted and for cells lost. 2 means there are
per-connection counters for cells transmitted, for cells lost, for intentional cells lost, and
for unintentional cells lost.

Name

The identifier for this shared memory model.

1.

The Cell Memory and Table Memory sizes determine which memory models are appropriate for a given network
module.

2.

Only one multicast output is supported per port for each multicast connection.

5 - 118

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Hardware Commands

hardware netmod traffic le modify

This command lets you configure traffic on logical Series LE network modules on an ATM
port card on an ESX-3000. Enter the following:
myswitch:hardware netmod traffic le-> modify
Usage:
[-netmod] <Netmod>

Netmod

[[-model] <integer>]

Model used

[[-epd] <percent>]

Early Packet Discard

[[-epdubr] <percent>]

Early Packet Discard for UBR

[[-efcion] <integer>]

EFCI On

[[-efcioff] <integer>]

EFCI Off

[[-vbrpriority] (rt|nrt)]

VBR Priority (LE only)

These parameters are defined as follows:


Parameter
-netmod <Netmod>
-model

<integer>1

Description
The logical Series LE network module to be configured.
The predefined memory model to be used for this logical Series LE network module. The
various models make different trade-offs between the number of cell buffers, and the
number of unicast and multicast connections, and the number of per-connection counters.
Enter the number found in the Model field of the hardware netmod traffic le
models command for the shared memory configuration that you want to use.

-epd <percent>

The AAL5 packet drop threshold to be set for AAL5 CBR, VBR, and ABR connections, in
percent of cells. By default, this value is set to 90% of the shared buffer size.

-epdubr <percent>

The AAL5 packet drop threshold to be set for AAL5 UBR connections only, in percent of
cells. By default, this value is set to 90% of the shared buffer size.

-efcion <integer>

The number of cells at which the ABR2 cells have the EFCI bit set, signalling that there is
congestion. The default for the on threshold is 64. The default for the off threshold is 1.

-efcioff <integer>3

The number of cells at which the ABR cells have the EFCI bit cleared, signalling that there
is no congestion. The default for the on threshold is 64. The default for the off threshold
is 1.

-vbrpriority (rt|nrt)

rt places the VBR traffic in the high priority queue. nrt places the VBR traffic in the low
priority queue. The default is nrt. This parameter only applies to the 25 MB logical Series
LE network modules on an ESX-3000 switch

1.

For proper operation, all Series LE network modules in a switch must use memory models that support the same
number of unicast connections. Therefore, all Series LE modules in an ESX-3000 switch should either use models 1-5
OR models 6-8. The following Series LE network modules can only use the following traffic memory models: OC-3
MM and UTP can only use models 1, 2, 3, and 6; OC-3 SM can only use models 4 and 7; and OC-12 MM and SM can
only use models 5 and 8.

2.

The Series LE network modules offer an ABR-ready ATM interface. A future ForeThought release will support ABR QoS
operation on these interfaces. ABR options in the current release will apply in that ForeThought release.

3.

The value for the off threshold must always be less than the value for the on threshold.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

5 - 119

Hardware Commands

5.7.10.6.3

Hardware Commands

5.7.10.6.4

hardware netmod traffic le pathStats

You can show path traffic statistics for Series LE logical network modules on an
ESX-3000switch as follows:
myswitch:hardware netmod traffic le-> pathStats
Output

C e l l s

AtmIf VPI

Total

L o s t

Cells

Intentional Unintentional

Transmitted

1B1

75

1B2

98

1B2

99

The fields in these displays are defined as follows:


Field

Description

Output AtmIf

The outgoing ATM interface number.

Output VPI

The outgoing virtual path number.

Cells Lost Total

The number of cells on this path that were dropped by the output network module.

Cells Lost Intentional

The number of cells dropped on this path due to EPD (Early Packet Discard) or PPD
(Partial Packet Discard).

Cells Lost Unintentional

The number of cells dropped on this path due to output memory shortages or the CLP
(Cell Loss Priority) threshold.

Cells Transmitted

The number of cells transmitted out this path for this priority.

5 - 120

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Hardware Commands

hardware netmod traffic le show

This command lets you display traffic model information on the Series LE logical network
modules on an ESX-3000switch as follows:
myswitch:hardware netmod traffic le-> show
Cell
Netmod Series

Memory

Table

CBR-VBR-ABR

Memory Model

EPD

UBR EFCI EFCI


EPD

On

7A

LE

256Kx64

32Kx32 6

90%

90%

64

Off VBR-Queue
1 N/A

7B

LE

256Kx64

32Kx32 6

90%

90%

64

1 N/A

7C

LE

256Kx64

32Kx32 6

90%

90%

64

1 N/A

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Field

1.

Description

Netmod

The logical network module that has been configured.

Series

Indicates what series of network module this is.

Cell Memory

The size of this shared memory cell RAM configuration (x64).

Table Memory

The size of this shared memory table RAM configuration (x32).

Model

The shared memory model used for this logical network module. See hardware netmod
traffic le models for more information.

CBR-VBR-ABR EPD

The AAL5 packet drop threshold for CBR, VBR, and ABR traffic on this logical network
module, in percent of the buffer size.

UBR EPD

The AAL5 packet drop threshold for UBR traffic on this logical network module, in
percent of the buffer size.

EFCI On

The threshold value at which the EFCI will be set (turned on), signalling congestion, for
ABR1 traffic, in cells.

EFCI Off

The threshold value at which the EFCI will be cleared (turned off), indicating no
congestion for ABR traffic, in cells.

VBR-Queue

The queue that is servicing the VBR traffic. rt is the high priority queue and nrt is the
low priority queue. This field only applies to 25 MB interfaces.

The logical Series LE network modules offer an ABR-ready ATM interface. A future ForeThought release will support
ABR QoS operation on these interfaces. ABR options in the current release will apply in that ForeThought release.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

5 - 121

Hardware Commands

5.7.10.6.5

Hardware Commands

5.7.10.6.5.1

hardware netmod traffic le show -statistics

This command lets you show traffic statistics about all of the Series LE network modules as
follows:
myswitch:hardware netmod traffic le-> show -statistics
Unicast

Multicast Current Shared

Netmod Connections Connections

Used

Cells Memory Memory

7A

23

19456

7B

16

19456

7C

16

19456

The fields in these displays are defined as follows:


Field

Description

Netmod

The shared memory network module for which information is being displayed.

Unicast Connections

The number of unicast connections that are currently active on this shared memory
network module.

Multicast Connections

The number of multicast connections that are currently active on this shared memory
network module.

Current Cells

The number of cells currently in the dedicated queues and in the shared memory for this
network module.

Shared Memory

The amount of shared memory that is configured for this network module.

Used Memory

The amount of shared memory that is currently being used on this network module.

5 - 122

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Hardware Commands

These commands let you configure or display information about the traffic on Series SF1
network modules. To list the available subcommands, type ? at the sf1 level.
myswitch:hardware netmod traffic sf1-> ?
modify

Modify Series SF1 Netmod Traffic Configuration

show

Display Series SF1 Netmod Traffic Configuration

5.7.10.7.1

hardware netmod traffic sf1 modify

This command lets you configure traffic on Series SF1 network modules. Enter the following:
myswitch:hardware netmod traffic sf1-> modify
Usage:
[-module] <Netmod>

Netmod

[-prioindex] (abr|nrtvbr|cbr-rtvbr|ubr)

Priority

[[-epd] <percent>]

AAL5 Packet Drop

[[-efcion] <integer>]

EFCI On

[[-efcioff] <integer>]

EFCI off

These parameters are defined as follows:


Parameter

1.

Description

-module <Netmod>

The SF1 network module to be configured.

-prioindex
(abr|nrtvbr|cbr-rtvbr|ubr)

The traffic type for which EPD or EFCI is being set. Can be ABR, nrtVBR, CBR-rtVBR, or
UBR.

-epd <integer>

The AAL5 packet drop threshold to be set for AAL5 CBR, VBR, and ABR connections, in
percent of cells. By default, this value is set to 90% of the shared buffer size.

-efcion <integer>

The number of cells at which the ABR cells have the EFCI bit set, signalling that there is
congestion. The default for the on threshold is 64. The default for the off threshold is 1.

-efcioff <integer>1

The number of cells at which the ABR cells have the EFCI bit cleared, signalling that there
is no congestion. The default for the on threshold is 64. The default for the off threshold
is 1.

The value for the off threshold must always be less than the value for the on threshold.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

5 - 123

Hardware Commands

5.7.10.7 hardware netmod traffic sf1

Hardware Commands

5.7.10.7.2

hardware netmod traffic sf1 show

This command lets you display traffic information on the Series SF1 network modules as
follows:
myswitch:hardware netmod traffic sf1-> show
Module

Priority

EPD

EFCI
ON

OFF

4A

ABR

90%

256

192

4A

nrtVBR

90%

N/A

N/A

4A

CBR-rtVBR

90%

N/A

N/A

4A

UBR

90%

N/A

N/A

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Field

Description

Module

The Series SF1 network module that has been configured.

Priority

The specific class of traffic.

EPD

The AAL5 packet drop threshold on this network module, in percent of the buffer size.

EFCI ON

The threshold value at which the EFCI bit is set (turned on), signalling congestion, for
ABR traffic, in cells.

EFCI OFF

The threshold value at which the EFCI bit is cleared (turned off), indicating no congestion
for ABR traffic, in cells.

5 - 124

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Hardware Commands

On an ASX-4000 switch, each port card contains two logical network modules (interface
groups). These commands let you configure or display information about the traffic on the
logical network modules on Series 1 port cards. To list the available subcommands, type ? at
the pc1 level.
myswitch:hardware netmod traffic pc1-> ?
channelStats

Display channel statistics

customBCS>

The customBCS directory

models

Display netmod memory models

modify

Modify netmod traffic configuration

pathStats

Display through path statistics

show

Display netmod traffic configuration

NOTE

The hardware netmod traffic pc1


commands are only valid on an ASX-4000
switch.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

5 - 125

Hardware Commands

5.7.10.8 hardware netmod traffic pc1

Hardware Commands

5.7.10.8.1

hardware netmod traffic pc1 channelStats

You can show channel traffic statistics for Series 1 port cards as follows:
myswitch:hardware netmod traffic pc1-> channelStats
Output

C e l l s

L o s t

Cells

AtmIf VPI

VCI

Total Intentional Unintentional

Transmitted

2A1

2A1

2A1

606

2A1

15

220774

2A1

16

35900

2A2

2A2

2A2

606

2A2

15

220774

2A2

16

35900

Press q to quit, any other key to continue...q

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Field

Description

Output AtmIf

The outgoing ATM interface number.

Output VPI

The outgoing virtual path number.

Output VCI

The outgoing virtual channel number.

Cells Lost Total

The number of cells on this channel that were dropped by the output port card.

Cells Lost Intentional

The number of cells dropped on this channel due to EPD (Early Packet Discard) or PPD
(Partial Packet Discard). This field does not apply to Series 1 OC-48c port cards.

Cells Lost Unintentional

The number of cells dropped on this channel due to output memory shortages or the CLP
(Cell Loss Priority) threshold. This field does not apply to Series 1 OC-48c port cards.

Cells Transmitted

The number of cells transmitted out this channel.

5 - 126

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Hardware Commands

hardware netmod traffic pc1 customBCS

These commands let you configure or display custom UBR Behavior Class Selector (BCS)
information on Series 1 port cards. To list the available subcommands, type ? at the
customBCS level.
myswitch:hardware netmod traffic pc1 customBCS-> ?
default

Show Default Series PC1 UBR BCS Configuration

defaultbcs

Show Default Series PC1 UBR BCS Configuration

delete

Remove Series PC1 custom UBR BCS configuration

modify

Modify Series PC1 custom UBR BCS configuration

new

Create new Series PC1 custom UBR BCS


configuration

show

Display Series PC1 custom UBR BCS configuration

For more information about how to configure a


custom UBRbcs, please see Chapter 1 in the
Multiservice
Broadband
Switch
Network
Configuration Manual.

NOTE

5.7.10.8.2.1

hardware netmod traffic pc1 customBCS default

This command lets you enter a BCS value on a Series 1 port card and have the switch return
the corresponding weight. Enter the following parameters:
myswitch:hardware netmod traffic pc1 customBCS-> default
Usage:
[-module] <Netmod>

Netmod

[-bcs] <integer>

Behavior Class Selector

These parameters are defined in Section 5.7.10.8.2.5.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

5 - 127

Hardware Commands

5.7.10.8.2

Hardware Commands

5.7.10.8.2.2

hardware netmod traffic pc1 customBCS defaultbcs

This command lets you use a pre-configured, default UBRbcs configuration on an individual
Series 1 port card, or on all Series 1 and Series 2 port cards in the switch. The pre-defined BCS
values are 10000, 20000, and 30000. Enter the following parameter:
myswitch:hardware netmod traffic pc1 customBCS-> defaultbcs ?
[[-netmod] <netmod>]

Netmod

This parameter is defined in Section 5.7.10.8.2.5.


If a specific network module is entered, the default UBRbcs configuration is used just on that
network module. If no network module is entered, the default configuration is applied to all
Series 1 and Series 2 port cards in the switch fabric.

To take effect, this command requires a reset of


the network module(s).

NOTE

This command is currently not supported.


NOTE

5.7.10.8.2.3

hardware netmod traffic pc1 customBCS delete

This command lets you delete a custom UBRbcs configuration on a Series 1 port card. Enter
the following parameters:
myswitch:hardware netmod traffic pc1 customBCS-> delete
Usage:
[-module] <Netmod>

Netmod

[-bcs] <integer>

Behavior Class Selector

[[-weight] <integer>]

Weight

These parameters are defined in Section 5.7.10.8.2.5.

5 - 128

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Hardware Commands

hardware netmod traffic pc1 customBCS modify

This command lets you modify a custom UBRbcs configuration on a Series 1 port card. Enter
the following parameters:
myswitch:hardware netmod traffic pc1 customBCS-> modify
Usage:
[-module] <Netmod>

Netmod

[-bcs] <integer>

Behavior Class Selector

[[-weight] <integer>]

Weight

These parameters are defined in Section 5.7.10.8.2.5.


5.7.10.8.2.5

hardware netmod traffic pc1 customBCS new

This command lets you create a custom UBRbcs configuration on a Series 1 port card. Enter
the following parameters:
myswitch:hardware netmod traffic pc1 customBCS-> new
Usage:
[-module] <Netmod>

Netmod

[-bcs] <integer>

Behavior Class Selector

[-weight] <integer>

Weight

The parameters for default, defaultbcs, delete, modify, and new are defined as
follows:
Parameter

Description

-module <Netmod>

The logical network module on a Series 1 port card to be configured.

-bcs <integer>

A user-assigned index number that uniquely identifies this BCS.

-weight <integer>

A user-assigned weight for this BCS. This number indicates how many cells get serviced
at a time from the UBR queue. The range of values is from 1 to 255. The default value (of
all UBR traffic) is 1, so this value should be greater than 1.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

5 - 129

Hardware Commands

5.7.10.8.2.4

Hardware Commands

5.7.10.8.2.6

hardware netmod traffic pc1 customBCS show

This command lets you display custom UBRbcs configuration information on a Series 1 port
card. Enter the following parameters:
myswitch:hardware netmod traffic pc1 customBCS-> show
Network
Module

BCS

Weight

1B

1B

1B

1B

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Field

Description

Network Module

The logical network module on a Series 1 port card that has been configured.

BCS

A user-assigned index number that uniquely identifies this BCS.

Weight

A user-assigned weight for this BCS.

5 - 130

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Hardware Commands

hardware netmod traffic pc1 models

This command allows you to display the different types of traffic memory models for a Series
1 port card. Enter the following parameters:
myswitch:hardware netmod traffic pc1-> models
Cell
Model

Memory

Table
Memory Ucasts Mcasts

Cells Counters Name

1024Kx64

128Kx32

24576

512 131072

0 mcast512 -- default

1024Kx64

128Kx32

24576

512

65536

1 mcast512 -- one counter

1024Kx64

128Kx32

24576

512

32768

2 mcast512 -- two counters

1024Kx64

256Kx32

24576

512 131072

2 mcast512 -- default

2048Kx64

256Kx32

24576

512 262144

2 mcast512 -- default

1024Kx64

128Kx32

16384

1024

98304

1 mcast1K

1024Kx64

256Kx32

16384

1024 131072

2 mcast1K

2048Kx64

256Kx32

16384

1024 262144

2 mcast1K

2048Kx64

256Kx32

16384

2048 229376

2 mcast2K

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Field
1

Description

Model

The shared memory model for this configuration. This is the number to enter for the
-model parameter when using the hardware netmod traffic pc1 modify command.

Cell Memory2

The hardware configuration this shared memory model supports, in 64-bit words (x64).

Table Memory

The hardware configuration this shared memory model supports, in 32-bit words (x32).

Ucasts

The maximum number of unicast connections supported by this shared memory


configuration.

Mcasts3

The number of input multicast connections supported from the switch fabric to the logical
network module by this shared memory configuration.

Cells

The total amount of cell buffering that is supported by this shared memory configuration.

Counters

The number of per-connection counters that is supported by this shared memory


configuration. 0 means there are no per-connection counters. 1 means there are
per-connection counters for cells transmitted and for cells lost. 2 means there are
per-connection counters for cells transmitted, for cells lost, for intentional cells lost, and
for unintentional cells lost.

Name

The identifier for this shared memory model.

1.

For proper operation, all Series 1 port cards in a fabric must use memory models that support the same number of
unicast connections. Additionally, their multicast spaces (indicated by their Name) must be compatible with what you
have configured under hardware fabric modify -index <board> -mcastspace.
The Series 1 OC-12c port cards can only use the following traffic memory models: 5, 8, and 9. This command does not
apply to Series 1 OC-48c port cards.

2.

The Cell and Table Memory sizes determine which memory models are appropriate for a given logical network module.

3.

Only one multicast output is supported per port for each multicast connection.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

5 - 131

Hardware Commands

5.7.10.8.3

Hardware Commands

5.7.10.8.4

hardware netmod traffic pc1 modify

This command lets you configure traffic on Series 1 port cards as follows:
myswitch:hardware netmod traffic pc1-> modify
Usage:
[-module] <Netmod>

Netmod

[[-model] <integer>]

Model used

[[-epd] <percent>]

Early Packet Discard

[[-epdubr] <percent>]

Early Packet Discard for UBR

[[-efcion] <integer>]

EFCI On

[[-efcioff] <integer>]

EFCI Off

[[-vbrpriority] (rt|nrt)]

VBR Priority

These parameters are defined as follows:


Parameter

Description

-module <Netmod>

The logical network module on a Series 1 port card to be configured.

-model1

The traffic memory model to be used for this logical network module on a Series 1 port
card. The predefined models make different trade-offs between the number of cell
buffers, the number of unicast and multicast connections, and the number of
per-connection counters. Enter the number found in the Model field of the hardware
netmod traffic pc1 models command for the shared memory configuration that you
want to use.

<integer>2

-epd <percent>

The threshold value, in a percent of cells, at which AAL5 Early Packet Discard (EPD) is
activated for CBR, VBR, and ABR connections on the logical network modules on Series 1
port cards. AAL5 packets that arrive when the shared buffer is over this threshold are
discarded in whole. By default, this value is set to 90% of the shared buffer size.

-epdubr <percent>

The threshold value, in a percent of cells, at which AAL5 Early Packet Discard (EPD) is
activated for UBR connections on the logical network modules on Series 1 port cards.
AAL5 packets that arrive when the shared buffer is over this threshold are discarded in
whole. By default, this value is set to 90% of the shared buffer size.

-efcion <integer>

The threshold, in cells, at which the ABR cells have the EFCI bit set, signalling congestion
to downstream flow control mechanisms. Once this threshold is surpassed, EFCI continues
to be set until the queue empties below the -efcioff threshold. The default is 64.

-efcioff <integer>

The threshold, in cells, at which the Available Bit Rate (ABR)3 cells have their explicit
forward congestion indicator (EFCI) bit cleared, indicating no congestion. The default is 1.

-vbrpriority (rt|nrt)

This option does not apply to the Series 1 port cards.

1.

For proper operation, all Series 1 port cards in a fabric must use memory models that support the same number of
unicast connections. Therefore, all Series 1 port cards in a fabric should either use model 5 or models 8-9.

2.

The switch software must be restarted for this option to take effect.

3.

The Series 1 port cards offer an ABR-ready ATM interface. A future ForeThought release will support ABR QoS operation
on these interfaces. ABR options in the current release will apply in that ForeThought release.

5 - 132

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Hardware Commands

5.7.10.8.5

Hardware Commands

The -epd, -epdubr, -ecfion, and -efcioff


options are not available on Series 1 OC-48c port
cards.

NOTE

hardware netmod traffic pc1 pathStats

You can show path traffic statistics for Series 1 port cards as follows:
myswitch:hardware netmod traffic pc1-> pathstats
Output

C e l l s

AtmIf VPI

L o s t

Cells

Total Intentional Unintentional

Transmitted

2A1

75

2A1

76

The fields in these displays are defined as follows:


Field

Description

Output AtmIf

The outgoing ATM interface number.

Output VPI

The outgoing virtual path number.

Cells Lost Total

The number of cells on this path that were dropped by the output network module.

Cells Lost Intentional

The number of cells dropped on this path due to EPD (Early Packet Discard) or PPD
(Partial Packet Discard).

Cells Lost Unintentional

The number of cells dropped on this path due to output memory shortages or the CLP
(Cell Loss Priority) threshold.

Cells Transmitted

The number of cells transmitted out this path for this priority.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

5 - 133

Hardware Commands

5.7.10.8.6

hardware netmod traffic pc1 show

This command lets you display traffic model information on the Series 1 port cards. The
information is displayed for each module in the order in which they are installed in the
switch. In this example, 2A and 2B are logical network modules in an OC-12c port card and
2D is a logical network module in an OC-48c port card. Enter the following parameters:
myswitch:hardware netmod traffic pc1-> show
CBR-rtVBRCell
Netmod Series

Memory

Table

nrtVBR-ABR

Memory Model

EPD

UBR EFCI EFCI


EPD

On

2A

PC1

2048Kx64

256Kx32 5

90%

90%

64

Off VBR-Queue
1 N/A

2B

PC1

2048Kx64

256Kx32 5

90%

90%

64

1 N/A

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Field

1.

Description

Netmod

The logical network module on a Series 1 port card that has been configured.

Series

The series of port card this is.

Cell Memory

The hardware configuration this memory model supports (x64).

Table Memory

The hardware configuration this memory model supports (x32).

Model

The shared memory model used for this logical network module. See hardware netmod
traffic pc1 models for more information.

CBR-rtVBR-nrtVBR-ABR
EPD

The AAL5 packet drop threshold for CBR, VBR, and ABR traffic on this logical network
module, in percent of the buffer size.

UBR EPD

The AAL5 packet drop threshold for UBR traffic on this logical network module, in
percent of the buffer size.

EFCI On

The threshold value at which the EFCI will be set (turned on), signalling congestion, for
ABR1 traffic, in cells.

EFCI Off

The threshold value at which the EFCI will be cleared (turned off), indicating no
congestion for ABR traffic, in cells.

VBR-Queue

This field does not apply to the Series 1 port cards.

The Series 1 port cards offer an ABR-ready ATM interface. A future ForeThought release will support ABR QoS
operation on these interfaces. ABR options in the current release will apply in that ForeThought release.

5 - 134

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Hardware Commands

hardware netmod traffic pc1 show -statistics

Hardware Commands

5.7.10.8.6.1

This command lets you display additional traffic information for the Series 1 port cards.
myswitch:hardware netmod traffic pc1-> show -statistics
Unicast

Multicast Current Shared

Netmod Connections Connections

Used

Cells Memory Memory

2A

20

0 253952

2B

20

0 253952

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Field

Description

Netmod

The logical network module on a Series 1 port card for which information is being
displayed.

Unicast Connections

The current number of active unicast connections on this logical network module.

Multicast Connections

The current number of active multicast connections on this logical network module.

Current Cells

The number of cells currently in the dedicated queues and in the shared memory for this
logical network module.

Shared Memory

The amount of shared memory that is configured for this logical network module.

Used Memory

The amount of shared memory currently being used on this logical network module.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

5 - 135

Hardware Commands

5.7.10.9 hardware netmod traffic pc2


On an ASX-4000 switch, each port card contains two logical network modules (interface
groups). These commands let you configure or display information about the traffic on the
logical network modules on Series 2 port cards. To list the available subcommands, type ? at
the pc2 level.
myswitch:hardware netmod traffic pc2-> ?
buffer>

The buffer directory

customBCS>

The customBCS directory

modify

Modify Series PC2 Netmod Traffic Configuration

show

Display Series PC2 Netmod Traffic Configuration

5.7.10.9.1

hardware netmod traffic pc2 buffer

These commands lets you configure the buffer class or traffic type for Series 2 port cards. The
ASICs in the Series 2 port cards provide a total of eight buffer classes. The first five classes
support ATM Forum TM4.0 traffic categories (base buffers for CBR, rtVBR, nrtVBR, ABR, and
UBR service categories) and the remaining three classes can be used to create new buffer
classes. Default buffer classes cannot be deleted. To list the available subcommands, type ? at
the buffer level.
myswitch:hardware netmod traffic pc2 buffer-> ?
assign>

The assign directory

delete

Remove a buffer class

modify

Modify a buffer class

new

Create a new buffer class

show

Display Series PC2 buffer classes

5 - 136

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Hardware Commands

hardware netmod traffic pc2 buffer assign

These commands let you create, remove, and display Series 2 buffer class assignments. Buffer
classes are assigned for the new subcategory created as per the UPC contract. Assignment of a
different subcategory traffic into the base buffer of a service category is not allowed. For
example, assigning part of nrt-VBR PVC traffic into the CBR base buffer is not allowed. A
subcategory cannot be assigned to two different buffer classes. ABR traffic can be served only
by its base buffer class. Additionally, no other subcategory traffic can be assigned to ABR
buffer class. This is required because of the special characteristics of the ABR traffic (e.g., ER
and RM cell features). All SVCs will be created with subcategory 1.

NOTE

When a buffer class assignment is created or


deleted, a network module reset is required for
the command to take effect.

myswitch:hardware netmod traffic pc2 buffer assign-> ?


delete

Remove a buffer class assignment

new

Create a new buffer class assignment

show

Display Series PC2 buffer class assignments

hardware netmod traffic pc2 buffer assign delete


This command lets you delete a buffer class assignment. A network module reset is required
for this command to take effect.
myswitch:hardware netmod traffic pc2 buffer assign-> delete
Usage:
[-netmod] <netmod>

Netmod

[-servcat] <ServCat>

Service Category

[-subcat] <integer (1..16)>


[[-buffer] <text>]

Service Sub-category
Buffer

These parameters are defined in the next section.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

5 - 137

Hardware Commands

5.7.10.9.1.1

Hardware Commands

hardware netmod traffic pc2 buffer assign new


This command lets you create a new buffer class assignment. A network module reset is
required for this command to take effect.
myswitch:hardware netmod traffic pc2 buffer assign-> new
Usage:
[-netmod] <netmod>

Netmod

[-servcat] <ServCat>

Service Category

[-subcat] <integer (1..16)>


[[-buffer] <text>]

Service Sub-category
Buffer

These parameters for delete and new are defined as follows:


Parameter

Description

-netmod <netmod>

The logical network module on a Series 2 port card for which you are creating a new
buffer class assignment

-servcat <ServCat>

The service category to which the buffer class assignment will apply. Can be CBR, rtVBR,
nrtVBR, ABR, or UBR.

-subcat <integer (1..16)>

The service subcategory for this buffer class assignment. A set of connections can be
grouped within a service category. This index is used when assigning classes to a group
of connections on the Series 2 port cards on an ASX-4000 switch.

-buffer <text>

The buffer class or traffic type.

5 - 138

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Hardware Commands

Hardware Commands

hardware netmod traffic pc2 buffer assign show


This command lets you display buffer class assignment information.
myswitch:hardware netmod traffic pc2 buffer assign> show
Service

Service

Netmod

Category

Sub-category

Buffer
Class

2C

CBR

default

cbr_1

If buffer class assignments have not been created, the following displays:
myswitch:hardware netmod traffic pc2 buffer assign-> show
This table is currently empty.

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Field

Description

Netmod

Indicates the logical network module on a Series 2 port card for which a buffer class
assignment applies.

Service Category

Indicates the service category to which the buffer class assignment applies.

Service Sub-category

Indicates the service subcategory for this buffer class assignment. A set of connections can
be grouped within a service category. This index is used when assigning classes to a group
of connections on the Series 2 port cards on an ASX-4000 switch.

Buffer Class

Indicates the buffer class name.

5.7.10.9.1.2

hardware netmod traffic pc2 buffer delete

This command lets you remove a buffer class. A network module reset is required for this
command to take effect.
myswitch:hardware netmod traffic pc2 buffer-> delete
Usage:
[-netmod] <netmod>

Netmod

[-buffer] <text>

Buffer

[[-epd] <percent>]

EPD Threshold

These parameters are defined in Section 5.7.10.9.1.4.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

5 - 139

Hardware Commands

5.7.10.9.1.3

hardware netmod traffic pc2 buffer modify

This command lets you modify a buffer class. A network module reset is required for this
command to take effect.
myswitch:hardware netmod traffic pc2 buffer-> modify
Usage:
[-netmod] <netmod>

Netmod

[-buffer] <text>

Buffer

[[-epd] <percent>]

EPD Threshold

These parameters are defined in Section 5.7.10.9.1.4.


5.7.10.9.1.4

hardware netmod traffic pc2 buffer new

This command lets you create a new buffer class. A network module reset is required for this
command to take effect.
myswitch:hardware netmod traffic pc2 buffer-> new
Usage:
[-netmod] <netmod>

Netmod

[-buffer] <text>

Buffer

[[-epd] <percent>]

EPD Threshold (default: 90%)

These parameters are defined as follows:


Parameter

Description

-netmod <netmod>

The logical network module on a Series 2 port card for which you want to create a new
buffer class.

-buffer <text>

The buffer class category.

-epd <percent>

The threshold for AAL5 Early Packet Discard on this logical network module in percent
of the buffer size. The default is 90%.

5 - 140

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Hardware Commands

hardware netmod traffic pc2 buffer show

Hardware Commands

5.7.10.9.1.5

This command lets you display buffer class information.


myswitch:hardware netmod traffic pc2 buffer> show
Buffer

EPD

Netmod

Name

Threshold

2B

ABR

90%

2B

CBR

90%

2B

UBR

90%

2B

nrtVBR

90%

2B

rtVBR

90%

2C

ABR

90%

2C

CBR

90%

2C

UBR

90%

2C

nrtVBR

90%

2C

rtVBR

90%

2D

ABR

90%

2D

CBR

90%

2D

UBR

90%

2D

nrtVBR

90%

2D

rtVBR

90%

2A

ABR

90%

2A

CBR

90%

2A

UBR

90%

2A

nrtVBR

90%

2A

rtVBR

90%

If no buffer classes have been configured, the following displays:


myswitch:hardware netmod traffic pc2 buffer-> show
This table is currently empty.

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Field

Description

Netmod

The logical network modules on a Series 2 port card.

Buffer Name

The buffer class category for this logical network module.

EPD Threshold

The threshold for AAL5 Early Packet Discard on this logical network module in percent of
the buffer size. The default is 90%.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

5 - 141

Hardware Commands

5.7.10.9.2

hardware netmod traffic pc2 customBCS

These commands let you configure or display custom UBR Behavior Class Selector (BCS)
information on Series 2 port cards. To list the available subcommands, type ? at the
customBCS level.
myswitch:hardware netmod traffic pc2 customBCS-> ?
default

Show Default Series PC2 UBR BCS Configuration

defaultbcs

Show Default Series PC2 UBR BCS Configuration

delete

Remove Series PC2 Custom UBR BCS Configuration

modify

Modify Series PC2 Custom UBR BCS Configuration

new

Create Series PC2 Custom UBR BCS Configuration

show

Display Series PC2 Custom UBR BCS Configuration

For more information about how to configure a


custom UBRbcs, please see Chapter 1 in the
Multiservice
Broadband
Switch
Network
Configuration Manual.

NOTE

5.7.10.9.2.1

hardware netmod traffic pc2 customBCS default

This command lets you enter a BCS value on a Series 2 port card and have the switch return
the corresponding weight. Enter the following parameters:
myswitch:hardware netmod traffic pc2 customBCS-> default
Usage:
[-netmod] <netmod>

Netmod

[-bcs] <integer>

Behavior Class Selector

These parameters are defined in Section 5.7.10.9.2.5.

5 - 142

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Hardware Commands

hardware netmod traffic pc2 customBCS defaultbcs

This command lets you use a pre-configured, default UBRbcs configuration on an individual
Series 2 port card, or on all Series 1 and Series 2 port cards in the switch. The pre-defined BCS
values are 10000, 20000, and 30000. Enter the following parameter:
myswitch:hardware netmod traffic pc2 customBCS-> defaultbcs ?
[[-netmod] <netmod>]

Netmod

This parameter is defined in Section 5.7.10.9.2.5.


If a specific network module is entered, the default UBRbcs configuration is used just on that
network module. If no network module is entered, the default configuration is applied to all
Series 1 and Series 2 port cards in the switch fabric.

To take effect, this command requires a reset of


the network module(s).

NOTE

This command is currently not supported.


NOTE

5.7.10.9.2.3

hardware netmod traffic pc2 customBCS delete

This command lets you delete a custom UBRbcs configuration on a Series 2 port card. Enter
the following parameters:
myswitch:hardware netmod traffic pc2 customBCS-> delete
Usage:
[-netmod] <netmod>

Netmod

[-bcs] <integer>

Behavior Class Selector

[[-buffer] <text>]

Buffer

[[-weight] <integer>]

Weight

These parameters are defined in Section 5.7.10.9.2.5.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

5 - 143

Hardware Commands

5.7.10.9.2.2

Hardware Commands

5.7.10.9.2.4

hardware netmod traffic pc2 customBCS modify

This command lets you modify a custom UBRbcs configuration on a Series 2 port card. Enter
the following parameters:
myswitch:hardware netmod traffic pc2 customBCS-> modify
Usage:
[-netmod] <netmod>

Netmod

[-bcs] <integer>

Behavior Class Selector

[[-buffer] <text>]

Buffer

[[-weight] <integer>]

Weight

These parameters are defined in Section 5.7.10.9.2.5.


5.7.10.9.2.5

hardware netmod traffic pc2 customBCS new

This command lets you create a custom UBRbcs configuration on a Series 2 port card. Enter
the following parameters:
myswitch:hardware netmod traffic pc2 customBCS-> new
Usage:
[-netmod] <netmod>

Netmod

[-bcs] <integer>

Behavior Class Selector

[[-buffer] <text>]

Buffer

[[-weight] <integer>]

Weight

The parameters for default, defaultbcs, delete, modify, and new are defined as
follows:
Parameter

Description

-netmod <netmod>

The logical network module on a Series 2 port card to be configured.

-bcs <integer>

A user-assigned index number that uniquely identifies this BCS.

-buffer <text>

The user-assigned UBR buffer class for this BCS.

-weight <integer>

A user-assigned weight for this BCS. This number indicates how many cells get serviced
at a time from the UBR queue. The range of values is from 1 to 255. The default value (of
all UBR traffic) is 1, so this value should be greater than 1.

5 - 144

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Hardware Commands

hardware netmod traffic pc2 customBCS show

This command lets you display custom UBRbcs configuration information on a Series 2 port
card. Enter the following parameters:
myswitch:hardware netmod traffic pc2 customBCS-> show
Network
Module

BCS

Buffer

Weight

1B

UBR

1B

UBR2

1B

UBR3

1B

UBR4

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Field

Description

Network Module

The logical network module on a Series 2 port card that has been configured.

BCS

A user-assigned index number that uniquely identifies this BCS.

Buffer

The user-assigned buffer class for this BCS.

Weight

A user-assigned weight for this BCS.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

5 - 145

Hardware Commands

5.7.10.9.2.6

Hardware Commands

5.7.10.9.3

hardware netmod traffic pc2 modify

This command lets you modify Series 2 port card traffic configuration.
myswitch:hardware netmod traffic pc2-> modify
Usage:
[-netmod] <netmod>

Netmod

[[-ucastConns] <integer>]

Unicast Connections

[[-efcion] <integer>]

EFCI On

[[-efcioff] <integer>]

EFCI Off

[[-aal5cntMode] (cell|packet)]

AAL5 Counting Mode

[[-aal5cntOverride] (on|off)]

AAL5 Counting Mode Override

[[-overbookingHw] (disabled|enabled)]

Hardware Overbooking Switch

These parameters are defined as follows:


Parameter

Description

-netmod <netmod>

The logical network module on a Series 2 port card to be configured.

-ucastConns <integer>

The maximum number of unicast connections supported by this shared memory


configuration.

-efcion <integer>

The threshold value at which the EFCI will be set (turned on), indicating congestion for
ABR traffic, in cells.

-efcioff <integer>

The threshold value at which the EFCI will be cleared (turned off), indicating no
congestion for ABR traffic, in cells.

-aal5cntMode (cell|packet)

The AAL5 counting mode by which the logical network module counts the number of
transmitted AAL5 PDUs. packet means AAL5 packets are counted when gathering
statistics for AAL5 connections. cell means AAL5 cells are counted when gathering
statistics for AAL5 connections.

-aal5cntOverride (on|off)

This lets you override the current AAL5 counting mode at the per-connection level. on
means the logical network module counts the number of transmitted AAL5 PDUs,
regardless of the current counting mode at the per-connection level. off means the
logical network module does not count the number of transmitted AAL5 PDUs,
regardless of the current counting mode at the per-connection level. The default is off.

-overbookingHw
(disabled|enabled)

disabled turns off nrtVBR and rtVBR overbooking in the hierarchical shaper on this
port card. The default is disabled.
enabled turns on nrtVBR and rtVBR overbooking in the hierarchical shaper on this port
card.

5 - 146

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Hardware Commands

hardware netmod traffic pc2 show

Hardware Commands

5.7.10.9.4

This command lets you display Series 2 port card traffic configuration information.
myswitch:hardware netmod traffic pc2> show
Network

MDup

EFCI

EFCI

Module

Ucast

Max Connections
Mcast

List

On

Off

Hardware
Overbooking

1A

126976

512

8184

256

192

disabled

1B

95232

512

6138

256

192

disabled

1C

126976

512

8184

256

192

disabled

1D

126976

512

8184

256

192

disabled

If Series 2 port card traffic has not been configured, the following displays:
myswitch:hardware netmod traffic pc2-> show
This table is currently empty.

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Field

Description

Network Module

The logical network module on a Series 2 port card.

Max Connections Ucast

The total number of unicast connections that this logical network module can support.

Max Connections Mcast

The total number of multicast connections that this logical network module can support.

MDup List

The maximum number of multicast legs per port.

EFCI On

The threshold value at which the EFCI will be set (turned on), indicating congestion for
ABR traffic, in cells.

EFCI Off

The threshold value at which the EFCI will be cleared (turned off), indicating no
congestion for ABR traffic, in cells.

Hardware Overbooking

disabled turns off nrtVBR and rtVBR overbooking in the hierarchical shaper on this port
card.
enabled turns on nrtVBR and rtVBR overbooking in the hierarchical shaper on this port
card.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

5 - 147

Hardware Commands

5.7.10.9.4.1

hardware netmod traffic pc2 show -aal5CntMode

This command lets you display Series 2 port card AAL5 counting mode configuration.
myswitch:hardware netmod traffic pc2-> show -aal5CntMode
Network

AAL5 Counting

Module

Mode

Override

2A

packet

off

2B

packet

off

2C

packet

off

2D

packet

off

If Series 2 port cards have not been configured, the following displays:
myswitch:hardware netmod traffic pc2-> show -aal5CntMode
There are no entries matching your query.

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Field

Description

Network Module

The logical network module on a Series 2 port card that has been configured.

AAL5 Counting Mode

The AAL5 counting mode by which the logical network module counts the number of
transmitted AAL5 PDUs. packet means AAL5 packets are counted when gathering
statistics for AAL5 connections. cell means AAL5 cells are counted when gathering
statistics for AAL5 connections.

AAL5 Counting Override

Indicates whether the current AAL5 counting mode at the per-connection level can be
overridden. on means the logical network module counts the number of transmitted
AAL5 PDUs, regardless of the current counting mode at the per-connection level. off
means the logical network module does not count the number of transmitted AAL5 PDUs,
regardless of the current counting mode at the per-connection level. The default is off.

5 - 148

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Hardware Commands

hardware netmod traffic pc2 show -memory

Hardware Commands

5.7.10.9.4.2

This command lets you display Series 2 port card memory configuration information.
myswitch:hardware netmod traffic pc2-> show -memory
Network
Module

Cell

Table

Scheduler

Shared

Memory

Memory

Memory

Memory

2A

512K

2048Kx32

1024Kx32

516992

2B

512K

2048Kx32

1024Kx32

516992

2C

512K

2048Kx32

1024Kx32

501632

2D

384K

1536Kx32

768Kx32

376224

If no Series 2 port cards have been configured, the following displays:


myswitch:hardware netmod traffic pc2-> show -memory
There are no entries matching your query.

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Field

Description

Network Module

The logical network module on a Series 2 port card that has been configured.

Cell Memory

The hardware configuration this memory model supports.

Table Memory

The hardware configuration this memory model supports, in 32-bit words (x32).

Scheduler Memory

The scheduler memory size, in 32-bit words (x32).

Shared Memory

The total amount of cell buffering that is supported by this shared memory configuration.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

5 - 149

Hardware Commands

5.7.10.9.4.3

hardware netmod traffic pc2 show -stats

This command lets you display Series 2 port card statistics information.
myswitch:hardware netmod traffic pc2-> show -stats
Network

MDup

Cells

Module

Current Connections
Ucast

Mcast

Used

Buffered

2A

11

2B

2C

85

2D

64

If no Series 2 port cards have been configured, the following displays:


myswitch:hardware netmod traffic pc2-> show -stats
There are no entries matching your query.

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Field

Description

Network Module

The logical network module on a Series 2 port card that has been configured.

Current Connections Ucast

The current number of active unicast connections on this logical network module.

Current Connections Mcast

The current number of active multicast connections on this logical network module.

MDup Used

The maximum number of multicast legs used per port.

Cells Buffered

The current number of cells buffered.

5 - 150

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Hardware Commands

These commands let you manage the configuration of the various ports. Type ? at the port
level to display the available subcommands.
myswitch:hardware port-> ?
ds1>

The ds1 directory

ds3>

The ds3 directory

e1>

The e1 directory

e3>

The e3 directory

ethernet>

The ethernet directory

j2>

The j2 directory

modify

Set port admin status to up/down

show

Display port configuration

sonet>

The sonet directory

taxi>

The taxi directory

tp25>

The tp25 directory

traffic>

The traffic directory

NOTE

Not all of the above menus are displayed on


every platform. The ds1>, ds3>, e1>, e3>,
ethernet>, j2>, taxi>, and tp25> menus are
only displayed on platforms that can support
these types of connections.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

5 - 151

Hardware Commands

5.8 hardware port

Hardware Commands

5.8.1

hardware port ds1

These commands allow you to modify various aspects of the configuration of the ports on a
DS1 network module. The DS1 commands are available only when a DS1 network module is
installed in the switch fabric. To list the available subcommands, type ? at the ds1 level.
myswitch:hardware port ds1-> ?
errors>

The errors directory

modify

Modify DS1 port configuration parameters

show

Display DS1 port configuration

statistics

Display ds1 statistics

5.8.1.1 hardware port ds1 errors


This submenu lets you configure bit error rate (BER) parameters on a DS1 network module.
You can display the list of available subcommands by typing ? at the errors level.
myswitch:hardware port ds1 errors-> ?
modify

Modify DS1 port BER configuration parameters

show

Display DS1 port BER configuration

5 - 152

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Hardware Commands

hardware port ds1 errors modify

Hardware Commands

5.8.1.1.1

This command lets you modify error thresholds on a DS1 network module as follows:
myswitch:hardware port ds1 errors-> modify
Usage:
[-port] <BNP>

Port

[[-errormodel] (none|random|bursty)]

BER Error Model

[[-seconds] <integer>]

CRC Defect Seconds Threshold

[[-errors] <integer>]

CRC Defect Errors Threshold

[[-failenable] (enabled|disabled)]

Fail on Excessive Errors

[[-sfber] <integer>]

Sig Fail BER

[[-sdber] <integer>]

Sig Degrade BER

These parameters are defined as follows:


Parameter

Description

-port <BNP>

The port number of the DS1 network module to be configured.

-errormodel
(none|random|bursty)

The error distribution model which identifies signal degrade and signal fail conditions:
random selects a random error distribution and declares signal conditions based on
the thresholds set under -sfber <integer> and -sdber <integer>.
bursty selects a burst error model and declares signal degrade conditions based on
the thresholds set in under -seconds <integer> and -errors <integer>.
none disables the detection of signal conditions.

-seconds <integer>

The consecutive number of bad/good seconds to detect/clear an Excessive CRC Error


Defect. This parameter is only applicable when the Error Model field under hardware
port ds1 errors show is set to bursty. The range of values is from 2 to 10. The default
value is 10 seconds.

-errors <integer>

The threshold for the number of CRC errors per second. If the number of errors exceeds
the threshold, the particular second is declared bad; otherwise it is declared good. This
parameter is only applicable when the Error Model field under hardware port ds1
errors show is set to bursty.

-failenable
(enabled|disabled)

enabled means that when an Excessive CRC Error Defect is declared, the ports
operational state is forced to down.
disabled means that when an Excessive CRC Error Defect is declared, no action is taken
on the ports operational state.

-sfber <integer>

The exponent of 10 for the current signal fail bit error rate (BER) threshold for this port.
For example, the value -4 represents a BER of 10-4. The clearing threshold is always onetenth of the declaring threshold. This parameter is only applicable when the Error
Model field under hardware port ds1 errors show is set to random.

-sdber <integer>

The exponent of 10 for the current signal degrade bit error rate (BER) threshold for this
port. For example, the value -8 represents a BER of 10-8. The clearing threshold is always
one-tenth of the declaring threshold. This parameter is only applicable when the Error
Model field under hardware port ds1 errors show is set to random.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

5 - 153

Hardware Commands

5.8.1.1.2

hardware port ds1 errors show

This command lets you display the BER configuration on a DS1 network module as follows:
myswitch:hardware port ds1 errors-> show
Port

State ErrorModel

FailEnable

Seconds Errors

SF

SD

1D1

OK

random

disabled

N/A

N/A

-3

-5

1D2

OK

random

disabled

N/A

N/A

-3

-5

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Field

Description

Port

The port number of each DS1 network module currently installed.

State

The current state of the port as determined through bit error rate analysis. Can be one of
the following:
OK - The port is functioning normally.
SD - The port is experiencing signal degradation.
SF - The port is experiencing signal failure.

ErrorModel

The error distribution model which identifies signal degrade and signal fail conditions:
random selects a random error distribution and declares signal conditions based on
the thresholds set under -sfber <integer> and -sdber <integer>.
bursty selects a burst error model and declares signal degrade conditions based on
the thresholds set in under -seconds <integer> and -errors <integer>.
none disables the detection of signal conditions.

FailEnable

enabled means that when an Excessive CRC Error Defect is declared, the ports
operational state is forced to down.
disabled means that when an Excessive CRC Error Defect is declared, no action is taken
on the ports operational state.

Seconds

The consecutive number of bad/good seconds to detect/clear an Excessive CRC Error


Defect. This parameter is only applicable when the Error Model field is set to bursty.

Errors

The threshold for the number of CRC errors per second. If the number of errors exceeds
the threshold, the particular second is declared bad; otherwise it is declared good. This
parameter is only applicable when the Error Model field is set to bursty.

SF

The exponent of 10 for the current signal fail bit error rate (BER) threshold for this port.
For example, the value -4 represents a BER of 1E-4. This parameter is only applicable when
the Error Model field is set to random.

SD

The exponent of 10 for the current signal degrade bit error rate (BER) threshold for this
port. For example, the value -8 represents a BER of 1E-8. This parameter is only applicable
when the Error Model field is set to random.

5 - 154

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Hardware Commands

Hardware Commands

5.8.1.2 hardware port ds1 modify


This command lets you configure DS1 network modules as follows:
myswitch:hardware port ds1-> modify
Usage:
[-port] <BNP>

Port

[[-mode] (hcs|plcp)]

Mode

[[-loopback] <loopback>]

Loopback Config

[[-timing] (network|internal)]

Timing

[[-prbs] <prbs>]

PRBS

[[-scrambling] (on|off)]

Scrambling

[[-length] <ds1length_type>]

Line Length

[[-emptycells] (unassigned|idle)]

Empty Cells

These parameters are defined as follows:


Parameter

Description

-port <BNP>

The port number of the DS1 network module to be configured.

-mode (hcs|plcp)

plcp means that the port uses PLCP (Physical Layer Convergence Protocol) framing
(G.751) for cell delineation.
hcs means that the port uses HCS (Header Check Sequence) based framing (G.832) for
cell delineation. The default is hcs.

-loopback <loopback>

The type of loopback:


Line connects the transmitter to the receiver. The data stream received from the line is
retransmitted out to the line. Cells switched to this port are not sent over the line.
Payload means the DS1 stream received from the network has the DS1 overhead bits
re-inserted and is retransmitted to the network.
Diagnostic connects the receiver to the transmitter. The DS1 stream transmitted by
the SCP to a port is looped back to the SCP. The stream is still transmitted over the
cable, but the incoming stream is ignored.
None means no loopback will take place on this port. The default is none.

-timing (network|internal)

The transmit clock for this port.


network means that the clock that is recovered from the receive line of this port is
used to drive the transmit line of this port.
internal means that the internal clock is used to drive the transmit line of this port.

-prbs <prbs>

on means that PRBS is enabled on this port and the Pseudo-Random Bit Sequence
Generator (PRSG) will provide an unframed 2^15-1 test sequence as defined in
Recommendation O.151 on this port.
off means that PRBS is disabled on this port. The default is off.

-scrambling (on|off)

on indicates that cell payload scrambling is enabled on this port.


off means that cell payload scrambling is disabled on this port. Only the payload of the
ATM cells is scrambled. The default is off.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

5 - 155

Hardware Commands

Parameter
-length <ds1length_type>

Description
Lt110 means the physical cable is shorter than 110 ft.
110-220 means the physical cable is between 110 and 220 ft.
220-330 means the physical cable is between 220 and 330 ft.
330-440 means the physical cable is between 330 and 440 ft.
440-550 means the physical cable is between 440 and 550 ft.
550-660 means the physical cable is between 550 and 660 ft.
Gt6551 means the physical cable is greater than 655 ft.
Lt110A2 means the physical cable is shorter than 110 ft.
110-220A means the physical cable is between 110 and 220 ft.
220-330A means the physical cable is between 220 and 330 ft.
330-440A means the physical cable is between 330 and 440 ft.
440-550A means the physical cable is between 440 and 550 ft.
550-660A means the physical cable is between 550 and 660 ft.
Gt655A means the physical cable is greater than 655 ft.

-emptycells
(unassigned|idle)3

The type of cells this port sends for filler when the port is not sending data:
idle cells set the CLP bit=1.
unassigned cells set the CLP bit=0. Idle=invalid
unassigned=unassigned. The default is unassigned.

cell

pattern

and

1.

The DS1 network module is designed to meet all applicable requirements up to 655 feet of cable. Operation with cables
greater than 655 feet in length is not guaranteed.

2.

Series C, Revision 2, network modules with ACCA0055 part numbers should use ONLY the parameters that are
appended with an A (e.g., Lt110A). To check the Series and Revision numbers, use the hardware netmod show
command and look under the Series and Rev. fields, respectively. To check the Part number (ACCA####), remove the
network module from the switch, and look at either the right edge of the top of the printed circuit board, or the top of
the rear connector.

3.

Refer to page 57 of the ATM Forum 3.0 Specification for more information. In general, it is not necessary to change this
parameter from the default setting.

5 - 156

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Hardware Commands

This command allows you to display current information about all of the ports on a DS1
network module. Enter the following parameters:
myswitch:hardware port ds1-> show
Port Carrier Stat Mode Framing Loopback Timing

PRBS Scram Length

EmptyCells

1D1

no

292 hcs

ESF

none

internal N/A

off Lt110

unassigned

1D2

no

292 hcs

ESF

none

internal N/A

off Lt110

unassigned

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Field
Port

Description
The port number of each DS1 network module currently installed.

Carrier

yes means a carrier has been detected on this port. no means a carrier has not been
detected.

Stat

The DS1 line status of the port.

Mode

plcp means that the port uses PLCP (Physical Layer Convergence Protocol) framing for
cell delineation. hcs means the port uses HCS (Header Check Sequence) cell delineation.

Framing

The type of framing used for the port. The type of circuit affects the number of bits per
second that the circuit can reasonably carry, as well as the interpretation of the usage and
error statistics. This is a read-only field.

Loopback

The loopback mode on the port. Can be: none, line, payload, or diagnostic.

Timing

The transmit clock for this port. network means that the clock that is recovered from the
receive line of this port is used to drive the transmit line of this port. internal means
that the internal clock is used to drive the transmit line of this port.

PRBS

on means that PRBS is enabled on this port and the Pseudo-Random Bit Sequence
Generator (PRSG) will provide an unframed 2^15-1 test sequence as defined in
Recommendation O.151. off means that PRBS is disabled on this port.

Scram

on means that payload scrambling is enabled on this port. off means that payload
scrambling is disabled on this port.

Length

The length of the physical cable that is attached to this port.


2

EmptyCells

The type of cells this port sends for filler when the port is not sending data. Idle cells set
the CLP bit=1 and unassigned cells set the CLP bit=0. Idle=invalid cell pattern and
unassigned=unassigned.

1.

A carrier is detected when a signal is applied to the receive side of the port. It does not guarantee that the signal is the
proper frequency.

2.

Please refer to page 57 of the ATM Forum 3.0 Specification for more information. In general, it is not necessary to
change this parameter from the default setting.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

5 - 157

Hardware Commands

5.8.1.3 hardware port ds1 show

Hardware Commands

5.8.1.4 hardware port ds1 statistics


You can display statistics about all of the DS1 network modules in an individual switch fabric
by entering statistics at the ds1 level. This command is available only when at least one
DS1 network module is installed in the switch fabric.
myswitch:hardware port ds1-> statistics
DS1 port 4D1

counter

Value

Delta

----------

-----------

ds1FramingLOSs

(0)

ds1FramingLCVs

(0)

ds1FramingFERRs

(0)

ds1FramingOOFs

(0)

ds1FramingAISs

(0)

ds1FramingB8ZSPatterns

(0)

ds1Framing8Zeros

(0)

ds1Framing16Zeros

(0)

ds1FramingYellowAlarms

(0)

ds1FramingRedAlarms

(0)

ds1FramingBEEs

(0)

ds1FramingPRBSs

(0)

ds1FramingBERs

(0)

ds1PlcpBIP8s

(0)

ds1PlcpFERRs

(0)

ds1PlcpFEBEs

(0)

ds1PlcpLOFs

(0)

ds1PlcpYellows

(0)

ds1AtmHCSs

(0)

ds1AtmRxCells

1033962

(1033962)

ds1AtmTxCells

1071617

(1071617)

ds1AtmUHCSs

(0)

ds1AtmCHCSs

(0)

ds1AtmLCDs

(0)

-----------------------------------

Press q to quit, any other key to continue... q

NOTE

5 - 158

The Value column shows the current value of the


counter. The Delta column shows the change in
the counter since the last time you checked this
value. The counters are reset when the switch is
restarted or when a network module is replaced.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Hardware Commands

The PLCP counters increment only when the


DS1 network module is running in the PLCP
mode, but the HCS counter always increments,
regardless of which mode is running. The PLCP
counters do not apply to Series D DS1 network
modules.

Hardware Commands

NOTE

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Field

Description

ds1FramingLOSs

The number of seconds in which Loss Of Signal (LOS) errors have been detected.

ds1FramingLCVs

The number of Line Code Violations (LCV) that have been detected.

ds1FramingFERRs

The number of DS1 framing error (FERR) events that have been detected.

ds1FramingOOFs

The number of DS1 Out Of Frame (OOF) error events that have been detected.

ds1FramingAISs

The number of seconds in which Alarm Indication Signals (AIS) were detected by the DS1
Receive Framer block. AIS means an upstream failure has been detected by the far end.

ds1FramingB8ZSPatterns

The number of seconds in which B8ZS Pattern events have been detected.

ds1Framing8Zeros

The number of seconds in which 8 Zeros events have been detected.

ds1Framing16Zeros

The number of seconds in which 16 Zeros events have been detected.

ds1FramingYellowAlarms

The number of seconds in which Yellow Alarm events have been detected.

ds1FramingRedAlarms

The number of seconds in which Red Alarm events have been detected.

ds1FramingBEEs

The number of Bit Encoding Error (BEE) events that have been detected.

ds1FramingPRBSs

The number of seconds in which Pseudo Random Bit Sequence (PRBS) patterns have been
detected.

ds1FramingBERs

The number of PRBS Bit Error events that have been detected.

ds1PlcpBIP8s

The number of BIP-8 (Bit Interleaved Parity-8) error events. The BIP-8 is calculated over
the Path Overhead field and the associated ATM cell of the previous PLCP frame. A BIP-N
is a method of error monitoring. An N-bit code is generated by the transmitting
equipment in such a manner that the first bit of the code provides even parity over the
first bit of all N-bit sequences in the previous VT SPE, the second bit provides even parity
over the second bits of all N-bit sequences within the specified portion, etc.

ds1PlcpFERRs

The number of Physical Layer Convergence Protocol (PLCP) octet error events.

ds1PlcpFEBEs

The number of ATM Far End Block Error (FEBE) events.

ds1PlcpLOFs

The number of seconds in which Loss Of Frame (LOF) errors were detected by the PLCP
(Physical Layer Convergence Protocol) receiver. LOF is declared when an Out Of Frame
state persists for more than 1ms. LOF is removed when an in-frame state persists for more
than 12ms.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

5 - 159

Hardware Commands

Field

Description

ds1PlcpYellows

The number of seconds in which Yellow alarm errors were detected by the PLCP (Physical
Layer Convergence Protocol) receiver. A yellow alarm is asserted when 10 consecutive
yellow signal bits are set to logical 1. Yellow signals are used to alert upstream terminals of
a downstream failure in order to initiate trunk conditioning on the failure circuit.

ds1AtmHCSs

The number of header check sequence (HCS) error events. The HCS is a CRC-8 calculation
over the first 4 octets of the ATM cell header.

ds1AtmRxCells

The number of ATM cells that were received, not including idle/unassigned cells.

ds1AtmTxCells

The number of ATM cells that were sent, not including idle/unassigned cells.

ds1AtmUHCSs

The number of uncorrectable header check sequence (UHCS) error events. The HCS is a
CRC-8 calculation over the first 4 octets of the ATM cell header.

ds1AtmCHCSs

The number of correctable header check sequence (CHCS) error events. The HCS is a
CRC-8 calculation over the first 4 octets of the ATM cell header.

ds1AtmLCDs

The number of seconds in which Loss of Cell Delineation (LCD) has occurred. An LCD
defect is detected when an out of cell delineation state has persisted for 4ms. An LCD
defect is cleared when the sync state has been maintained for 4ms.

5.8.2

hardware port ds3

These commands let you modify various aspects of the configuration of the ports on a DS3
network module. These commands are available only when a DS3 network module is
installed in the switch fabric. You can display the list of available subcommands by typing ? at
the ds3 level.
myswitch:hardware port ds3-> ?
errors>

The errors directory

modify

Modify DS3 port configuration parameters

show

Display DS3 port configuration

statistics

Display ds3 statistics

DS3 Series E network modules do not use these


commands. DS3 Series E network modules use
the commands under interfaces dsx3.

NOTE

5.8.2.1 hardware port ds3 errors


This submenu lets you configure bit error rate (BER) parameters on a DS3 network module.
You can display the list of available subcommands by typing ? at the errors level.
myswitch:hardware port ds3 errors-> ?
modify

Modify DS3 port BER configuration parameters

show

Display DS3 port BER configuration

5 - 160

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Hardware Commands

hardware port ds3 errors modify

Hardware Commands

5.8.2.1.1

This command lets you modify error thresholds on a DS3 network module as follows:
myswitch:hardware port ds3 errors-> modify
Usage:
[-port] <BNP>

Port

[[-errormodel] (none|random|bursty)]

BER Error Model

[[-seconds] <integer>]

Pbit Parity Defect Seconds Threshold

[[-errors] <integer>]

Pbit Parity Defect Errors Threshold

[[-failenable] (enabled|disabled)]

Fail on Excessive Errors

[[-sfber] <integer>]

Sig Fail BER Thresh

[[-sdber] <integer>]

Sig Degrade BER Thresh

These parameters are defined as follows:


Parameter

Description

-port <BNP>

The port number of the DS3 network module to be configured.

-errormodel
(none|random|bursty)

The error distribution model which identifies signal degrade and signal fail conditions:
random selects a random error distribution and declares signal conditions based on
the thresholds set under -sfber <integer> and -sdber <integer>.
bursty selects a burst error model and declares signal degrade conditions based on
the thresholds set in under -seconds <integer> and -errors <integer>.
none disables the detection of signal conditions.

-seconds <integer>

The consecutive number of bad/good seconds to detect/clear an Excessive P-bit Parity


Error Defect. This parameter is only applicable when the Error Model field under
hardware port ds3 errors show is set to bursty. The range of values is from 2 to 10.
The default value is 10 seconds.

-errors <integer>

The threshold for the number of P-bit Parity Errors per second. If the number of errors
exceeds the threshold, the particular second is declared bad; otherwise it is declared good.
This parameter is only applicable when the Error Model field under hardware port
ds3 errors show is set to bursty.

-failenable
(enabled|disabled)

enabled means that when an Excessive P-bit Parity Error Defect is declared, the ports
operational state is forced to down.
disabled means that when an Excessive P-bit Parity Error Defect is declared, no action is
taken on the ports operational state.

-sfber <integer>

The exponent of 10 for the current signal fail bit error rate (BER) threshold for this port.
For example, the value -4 represents a BER of 10-4. The clearing threshold is always onetenth of the declaring threshold. This parameter is only applicable when the Error
Model field under hardware port ds3 errors show is set to random.

-sdber <integer>

The exponent of 10 for the current signal degrade bit error rate (BER) threshold for this
port. For example, the value -8 represents a BER of 10-8. The clearing threshold is always
one-tenth of the declaring threshold. This parameter is only applicable when the Error
Model field under hardware port ds3 errors show is set to random.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

5 - 161

Hardware Commands

5.8.2.1.2

hardware port ds3 errors show

This command lets you display the BER configuration on a DS3 network module as follows:
myswitch:hardware port ds3 errors-> show
Port

State ErrorModel

FailEnable

Seconds Errors

SF

SD

1D1

OK

random

disabled

N/A

N/A

-3

-5

1D2

OK

random

disabled

N/A

N/A

-3

-5

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Field

Description

Port

The port number of each DS3 network module currently installed.

State

The current state of the port as determined through bit error rate analysis. Can be one of
the following:
OK - The port is functioning normally.
SD - The port is experiencing signal degradation.
SF - The port is experiencing signal failure.

ErrorModel

The error distribution model which identifies signal degrade and signal fail conditions:
random selects a random error distribution and declares signal conditions based on
the thresholds set under -sfber <integer> and -sdber <integer>.
bursty selects a burst error model and declares signal degrade conditions based on
the thresholds set in under -seconds <integer> and -errors <integer>.
none disables the detection of signal conditions.

FailEnable

enabled means that when an Excessive P-bit Parity Error Defect is declared, the ports
operational state is forced to down.
disabled means that when an Excessive P-bit Parity Error Defect is declared, no action is
taken on the ports operational state.

Seconds

The consecutive number of bad/good seconds to detect/clear an Excessive P-bit Parity


Error Defect. This parameter is only applicable when the Error Model field is set to
bursty. The range of values is from 2 to 10. The default value is 10 seconds.

Errors

The threshold for the number of P-bit Parity Errors per second. If the number of errors
exceeds the threshold, the particular second is declared bad; otherwise it is declared good.
This parameter is only applicable when the Error Model field is set to bursty.

SF

The exponent of 10 for the current signal fail bit error rate (BER) threshold for this port.
For example, the value -4 represents a BER of 1E-4. This parameter is only applicable when
the Error Model field is set to random.

SD

The exponent of 10 for the current signal degrade bit error rate (BER) threshold for this
port. For example, the value -8 represents a BER of 1E-8. This parameter is only applicable
when the Error Model field is set to random.

5 - 162

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Hardware Commands

Hardware Commands

5.8.2.2 hardware port ds3 modify


This command lets you configure DS3 network modules as follows:
myswitch:hardware port ds3-> modify
[-port] <BNP>

Port

[[-mode] (hcs|plcp)]

Mode

[[-framing] (cbit|cchannel)]

Framing

[[-loopback] <loopback>]

Loopback Config

[[-timing] (network|internal)]

Timing

[[-scrambling] (on|off)]

Scrambling

[[-length] (Lt225|Gt225)]

Line Length

[[-emptycells] (unassigned|idle)]

Empty Cells

These parameters are defined as follows:


Parameter

Description

-port <BNP>

The port number of the DS3 network module to be configured.

-mode (hcs|plcp)

plcp means the port uses PLCP (Physical Layer Convergence Protocol) framing for cell
delineation. hcs means the port uses HCS (Header Check Sequence) based framing for
cell delineation. The default is hcs.

-framing (cbit|cchannel)

The type of framing for the port. cchannel (clearchannel) means that standard M23
framing is used on this port. The default is cbit (cbitparity).

-loopback <loopback>

The type of loopback:


cell loopback means that the DS3 stream received from the network is unframed into
ATM cells. The cells are reframed and transmitted back to the network.
payload loopback mean the DS3 stream received from the network has the DS3
overhead bits re-inserted and is retransmitted to the network.
diagnostic loopback connects the receiver to the transmitter. The DS3 stream
transmitted by the switch to a port is looped back to the switch. The DS3 stream is still
transmitted to the network, but the incoming DS3 stream is ignored.
line loopback connects the transmitter to the receiver. The data stream received from
the line is retransmitted out to the line. Cells that are switched to this port are not sent
over the line.
none designates that no loopback will take place on this port. This is the default.

-timing (network|internal)

The transmit clock for this port. network means that the clock that is recovered from the
receive line of this port is used to drive the transmit line of this port. internal means
that the internal clock is used to drive the transmit line of this port.

-scrambling (on|off)

on means that cell payload scrambling is enabled on this port. off means that cell
payload scrambling is disabled on this port. The default is on.

-length (Lt225|Gt225)

Use Lt225 if the physical cable is shorter than 225 ft. Use Gt225 if the physical cable is
greater than 225 ft. Gt225 is the default.

-emptycells
(unassigned|idle)

The type of cells this port sends for filler when the port is not sending data. Idle cells set
the CLP bit=1 and unassigned cells set the CLP bit=0. Idle=invalid cell pattern and
unassigned=unassigned. The default is unassigned.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

5 - 163

Hardware Commands

5.8.2.3 hardware port ds3 show


This command allows you to display current information about all of the ports on the DS3
network module. Enter the following parameters:
myswitch:hardware port ds3-> show
Port

Carrier Stat Mode

Framing

Loopback Timing

Scram Length

EmptyCells

1A1

no

292 plcp

cbit

none

internal

off

Gt225

unassigned

1A2

no

292 plcp

cbit

none

internal

off

Gt225

unassigned

1A3

no

292 plcp

cbit

none

internal

off

Gt225

unassigned

1A4

no

292 plcp

cbit

none

internal

off

Gt225

unassigned

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Field
Port

Description
The DS3 port number of the network module(s) currently installed in the switch.

Carrier

yes means a carrier has been detected on this port. no means a carrier has not been
detected on this port. A carrier is detected when a signal is applied to the receive side of
the port, but it does not guarantee the signal is the proper frequency.

Stat

The DS3 line status of the port.

Mode

Plcp means the port uses PLCP (Physical Layer Convergence Protocol) framing for cell
delineation. Hcs means the port uses HCS (Header Check Sequence) based framing for
cell delineation.

Framing

The type of framing used for the port. Can be cchannel or cbit.

Loopback

The loopback mode on the port. Can be cell, payload, diagnostic, line, or none.

Timing

The transmit clock for this port. network means that the clock that is recovered from the
receive line of this port is used to drive the transmit line of this port. internal means
that the internal clock is used to drive the transmit line of this port.

Scram

On means payload scrambling is enabled on the port. Off means payload scrambling is
disabled on the port.

Length

The length of the physical cable that is attached to this port. Lt225 means the cable is less
than 225 ft. Gt225 means the cable is greater than 225 ft.

EmptyCells2

The type of cells this port sends for filler when the port is not sending data. Idle cells set
the CLP bit = 1 and unassigned cells set the CLP bit = 0. Idle = invalid cell pattern and
unassigned = unassigned.

1.

A carrier is detected when a signal is applied to the receive side of the port, but it does not guarantee the signal is the
proper frequency.

2.

Please refer to page 57 of the ATM Forum 3.0 Specification for more information. In general, it is not necessary to
change this parameter from the default setting.

5 - 164

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Hardware Commands

You can list statistics about all of the DS3 network modules in an individual switch fabric by
entering statistics at the ds3 level. This command is available only when at least one DS3
network module is installed in the switch fabric.
myswitch:hardware port ds3-> statistics
DS3 port 4A1

counter

-----------------------------------

Value

Delta

----------

-----------

ds3FramingLOSs

ds3FramingLCVs

65535

ds3FramingSumLCVs

65535

ds3FramingFERRs

1023

ds3FramingOOFs

ds3FramingFERFs

ds3FramingAISs

ds3FramingPbitPERRs

1976

ds3FramingCbitPERRs

16383

ds3FramingFEBEs

8756

ds3FramingIDLEs

ds3PlcpFERRs

288

ds3PlcpLOFs

ds3PlcpBIP8s

ds3PlcpFEBEs

ds3PlcpYellows

ds3AtmHCSs

95

ds3AtmRxCells

1067397

ds3AtmTxCells

1075163

ds3AtmLCDs

Press q to quit, any other key to continue... q

NOTE

All of the PLCP counters listed above increment


only when the DS3 network module is running
in the PLCP mode. However, the HCS counter
always increments, regardless of which mode is
running.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

5 - 165

Hardware Commands

5.8.2.4 hardware port ds3 statistics

Hardware Commands

NOTE

The Value column shows the current value of the


counter. The Delta column shows the change in
the counter since the last time you checked this
value. The counters are reset when the switch is
restarted or when a network module is replaced.

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Field

Description

ds3FramingLOSs

The number of seconds in which Loss Of Signal (LOS) errors were detected by the DS3
Receive Framer block.

ds3FramingLCVs

The number of Line Code Violations (LCV) detected by the DS3 Receive Framer block.

ds3FramingSumLCVs

The number of DS3 information blocks (85 bits) which contain one or more Line Code
Violations (LCV).

ds3FramingFERRs

The number of DS3 framing error (FERR) events.

ds3FramingOOFs

The number of seconds in which DS3 Out Of Frame (OOF) error events occurred.

ds3FramingFERFs

The number of seconds in which a Far End Receive Failure (FERF) state has been detected
by the DS3 Receive Framer block. The FERF signal alerts the upstream terminal that a
failure has been detected along the downstream line.

ds3FramingAISs

The number of seconds in which Alarm Indication Signals (AIS) were detected by the DS3
Receive Framer block. AIS means an upstream failure has been detected by the far end.

ds3FramingPbitPERRs

The number of P-bit parity error (PERR) events.

ds3FramingCbitPERRs

The number of C-bit parity error (PERR) events.

ds3FramingFEBEs

The number of DS3 far end block error (FEBE) events.

ds3FramingIDLEs

The number of seconds in which an IDLE signal was detected by the DS3 Receive Framer
block.

ds3PlcpFERRs

The number of Physical Layer Convergence Protocol (PLCP) octet error events.

ds3PlcpLOFs

The number of seconds in which Loss Of Frame (LOF) errors were detected by the PLCP
(Physical Layer Convergence Protocol) receiver. LOF is declared when an Out-Of-Frame
state persists for more than 1ms. LOF is removed when an in-frame state persists for more
than 12ms.

ds3PlcpBIP8s

The number of BIP-8 (Bit Interleaved Parity-8) error events. The BIP-8 is calculated over
the Path Overhead field and the associated ATM cell of the previous PLCP frame. A BIP-N
is a method of error monitoring. An N-bit code is generated by the transmitting
equipment in such a manner that the first bit of the code provides even parity over the
first bit of all N-bit sequences in the previous VT SPE, the second bit provides even parity
over the second bits of all N-bit sequences within the specified portion, etc.

ds3PlcpFEBEs

The number of ATM Far End Block Error (FEBE) events.

5 - 166

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Hardware Commands

Description

ds3PlcpYellows

The number of seconds in which Yellow alarm errors were detected by the PLCP (Physical
Layer Convergence Protocol) receiver. A yellow alarm is asserted when 10 consecutive
yellow signal bits are set to logical 1. Yellow signals are used to alert upstream terminals of
a downstream failure in order to initiate trunk conditioning on the failure circuit.

ds3AtmHCSs

The number of the header check sequence (HCS) error events. The HCS is a CRC-8
calculation over the first 4 octets of the ATM cell header.

ds3AtmRxCells

The number of ATM cells that were received, not including idle/unassigned cells.

ds3AtmTxCells

The number of ATM cells that were sent, not including idle/unassigned cells.

ds3AtmLCDs

The number of seconds in which Loss of Cell Delineation (LCD) has occurred. An LCD
defect is detected when an out of cell delineation state has persisted for 4ms. An LCD
defect is cleared when the sync state has been maintained for 4ms.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

5 - 167

Hardware Commands

Field

Hardware Commands

5.8.3

hardware port e1

These commands allow you to modify the configuration of the ports on an E1 network
module. These commands are available only when an E1 network module is installed in the
switch fabric. To display the list of available subcommands, type ? at the e1 level.
myswitch:hardware port e1-> ?
modify

Modify E1 port configuration parameters

show

Display E1 port configuration

statistics

Display e1 statistics

5.8.3.1 hardware port e1 modify


This command lets you configure E1 network modules as follows:
myswitch:hardware port e1-> modify
Usage:
[-port] <BNP>

Port

[[-mode] (hcs|plcp)]

Mode

[[-loopback] <loopback>]

Loopback Config

[[-timing] (network|internal)]

Timing

[[-scrambling] (on|off)]

Scrambling

[[-length] <e1length_type>]

Line Length

[[-emptycells] (unassigned|idle)]

Empty Cells

These parameters are defined as follows:


Parameter

Description

-port <BNP>

The number of the E1 port to be configured.

-mode (hcs|plcp)1

plcp means that the port uses PLCP (Physical Layer Convergence Protocol) framing
(G.751) for cell delineation. hcs means that the port uses HCS (Header Check Sequence)
based framing (G.832) for cell delineation. The default is hcs.

-loopback <loopback>

The type of loopback:


Line loopback connects the transmitter to the receiver. The data stream received from
the line is retransmitted out to the line. Cells that are switched to this port are not sent
over the line.
Payload loopback means the stream received from the network has the E1 overhead
bits re-inserted and is retransmitted to the network.
Diagnostic loopback connects the receiver to the transmitter. The E1 stream
transmitted by the SCP to a port is looped back to the SCP. The stream is still transmitted over the cable, but the incoming stream is ignored.
None means that no loopback will take place on this port. The default is none.

5 - 168

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Hardware Commands

-timing (network|internal)

Description
The transmit clock for this port:
network means that the clock that is recovered from the receive line of this port is
used to drive the transmit line of this port.
internal means that the internal clock is used to drive the transmit line of this port.

-scrambling (on|off)

on indicates that cell payload scrambling is enabled on this port.


off means that cell payload scrambling is disabled on this port. Only the payload of the
ATM cells is scrambled. The default is on.

-length <e1length_type>2

Lt110 means the physical cable is shorter than 110 ft.


110-220 means the physical cable is between 110 and 220 ft.
220-330 means the physical cable is between 220 and 330 ft.
330-440 means the physical cable is between 330 and 440 ft.
440-550 means the physical cable is between 440 and 550 ft.
550-660 means the physical cable is between 550 and 660 ft.
G703-75 means the physical cable is a G703 standard 75 ohm coaxial line.
G703-120 means the physical cable is a G703 standard 120 ohm symmetrical line.
Lt110A means the physical cable is shorter than 110 ft.
110-220A means the physical cable is between 110 and 220 ft.
220-330A means the physical cable is between 220 and 330 ft.
330-440A means the physical cable is between 330 and 440 ft.
440-550A means the physical cable is between 440 and 550 ft.
550-660A means the physical cable is between 550 and 660 ft.
G703-75A means the physical cable is a G703 standard 75 ohm coaxial line.
G703-120A means the physical cable is a G703 standard 120 ohm symmetrical line.

-emptycells
(unassigned|idle)3

The type of cells this port sends for filler when the port is not sending data:
idle cells set the CLP bit=1.
unassigned cells set the CLP bit=0.
unassigned=unassigned. The default is idle.

1.

Idle=invalid

cell

pattern

and

This parameter is only available on Series C E1 network modules.

2.

Series C, Revision 2, network modules with ACCA0055 part numbers should use ONLY the parameters that are
appended with an A (e.g., Lt110A). To check the Series and Revision numbers, use the hardware netmod show
command and look under the Series and Rev. fields, respectively. To check the Part number (ACCA####), remove the
network module from the switch, and look at either the right edge of the top of the printed circuit board, or the top of
the rear connector.

3.

Refer to page 57 of the ATM Forum 3.0 Specification for more information. In general, it is not necessary to change this
parameter from the default setting.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

5 - 169

Hardware Commands

Parameter

Hardware Commands

5.8.3.2 hardware port e1 show


This command lets you display information about all of the ports on E1 network modules.
Enter the following parameters:
myswitch:hardware port e1-> show
Port Carrier Stat Mode LineType Loopback Timing

Scram Length

EmptyCells

4B1

no

580 N/A

CRC

none

internal on

Lt110

idle

4B2

no

580 N/A

CRC

none

internal on

Lt110

idle

4B3

no

580 N/A

CRC

none

internal on

Lt110

idle

4B4

no

580 N/A

CRC

none

internal on

Lt110

idle

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Field
Port

Description
The port numbers of each E1 network module currently installed in the switch fabric.

Carrier

yes means a carrier has been detected on this port.


no means it has not been detected.

Stat

The E1 line status of the port.

Mode

plcp means that the port uses PLCP framing for cell delineation.
hcs means that the port uses HCS cell delineation.

LineType

The variety of E1 line implementing this circuit. The type of circuit affects the number of
bits per second that the circuit can reasonably carry, as well as the interpretation of the
usage and error statistics. This parameter is read-only.

Loopback

The loopback mode on the port.

Timing

The transmit clock for this port:


network means that the clock that is recovered from the receive line of this port is
used to drive the transmit line of this port.
internal means that the internal clock is used to drive the transmit line of this port.

Scram

on means that payload scrambling is enabled on this port. off means that it is disabled.

Length

The length of the physical cable that is attached to this port.


2

EmptyCells

The type of cells this port sends for filler when the port is not sending data:
idle cells set the CLP bit=1.
unassigned cells set
unassigned=unassigned.

the

CLP

bit=0.

Idle=invalid

cell

pattern

and

1.

A carrier is detected when a signal is applied to the receive side of the port. It does not guarantee that the signal is the
proper frequency.

2.

Please refer to page 57 of the ATM Forum 3.0 Specification for more information. In general, it is not necessary to
change this parameter from the default setting.

5 - 170

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Hardware Commands

You can display statistics about all of the E1 network modules in an individual switch fabric
by entering statistics at the e1 level. This command is available only when at least one E1
network module is installed in the switch fabric.
myswitch:hardware port e1-> statistics
e1 Port 1D1 Counter
------------------------------

Value

Delta

--------------

--------------

e1FramingLCVs

e1FramingFERRs

e1FramingFEBEs

e1FramingCRCs

e1FramingOOFs

e1FramingLOSs

e1FramingAISs

e1FramingAISDs

e1FramingRedAlarms

e1FramingYellowAlarms

e1PlcpBIP8s

e1PlcpFERRs

e1PlcpFEBEs

844

17

e1PlcpYellows

e1AtmHCSs

e1AtmRxCells

19007

264

e1AtmTxCells

e1PlcpLOFs

19352

264

e1AtmUHCSs

e1AtmCHCSs

e1AtmLCHDs

Press return for more, q to quit: q

NOTE

The PLCP counters increment only when the E1


network module is running in the PLCP mode,
but the HCS counter always increments,
regardless of which mode is running. The PLCP
counters do not apply to Series D E1 network
modules at all.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

5 - 171

Hardware Commands

5.8.3.3 hardware port e1 statistics

Hardware Commands

NOTE

The Value column shows the current value of the


counter. The Delta column shows the change in
the counter since the last time you checked this
value. The counters are reset when the switch is
restarted or when a network module is replaced.

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Field

Description

e1FramingLCVs

The number of Line Code Violations (LCV) detected by the E1 Receive Framer block.

e1FramingFERRs

The number of E1 framing error (FERR) events.

e1FramingFEBEs

The number of E1 far end block errors.

e1FramingCRCs

The number of cyclic redundancy check errors.

e1FramingOOFs

The number of OOF (loss of basic frame alignment) errors that have been detected.

e1FramingLOSs

The number of seconds in which LOS (loss of signal) error events occurred.

e1FramingAISs

The number of seconds in which AIS (alarm indication signal) error events occurred.

e1FramingAISDs

The number of seconds in which AISD (unframed pattern of all ones) error events
occurred.

e1FramingRedAlarms

The number of seconds in which Red Alarm events were experienced.

e1FramingYellowAlarms

The number of seconds in which Yellow Alarm events were experienced.

e1PlcpBIP8s

The number of BIP-8 (Bit Interleaved Parity-8) error events. The BIP-8 is calculated over
the Path Overhead field and the associated ATM cell of the previous PLCP frame. A BIP-N
is a method of error monitoring. An N-bit code is generated by the transmitting
equipment in such a manner that the first bit of the code provides even parity over the
first bit of all N-bit sequences in the previous VT SPE, the second bit provides even parity
over the second bits of all N-bit sequences within the specified portion, etc.

e1PlcpFERRs

The number of Physical Layer Convergence Protocol (PLCP) octet error events.

e1PlcpFEBEs

The number of ATM Far End Block Error (FEBE) events.

e1PlcpLOFs

The number of seconds in which Loss Of Frame (LOF) errors were detected by the PLCP
(Physical Layer Convergence Protocol) receiver. OOF is declared when an error is detected
in both the A1 and A2 octets or when 2 consecutive POHID octets are found in error. LOF
is declared when an OOF state persists for more than 20ms. LOF is removed upon finding
two valid consecutive sets of framing (A1 and A2) octets and two valid sequential path
overhead identifier octets.

e1PlcpYellows

The number of seconds in which Yellow alarm errors were detected by the PLCP (Physical
Layer Convergence Protocol) receiver. A yellow alarm is asserted when 10 consecutive
yellow signal bits are set to logical 1. Yellow signals are used to alert upstream terminals of
a downstream failure in order to initiate trunk conditioning on the failure circuit.

e1AtmHCSs

The number of header check sequence (HCS) error events. The HCS is a CRC-8 calculation
over the first 4 octets of the ATM cell header.

5 - 172

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Hardware Commands

Description

e1AtmRxCells

The number of ATM cells that were received, not including idle/unassigned cells.

e1AtmTxCells

The number of ATM cells that were sent, not including idle/unassigned cells.

e1AtmUHCSs

The number of uncorrectable header check sequence (UHCS) error events. The HCS is a
CRC-8 calculation over the first 4 octets of the ATM cell header.

e1AtmCHCSs

The number of correctable header check sequence (CHCS) error events. The HCS is a
CRC-8 calculation over the first 4 octets of the ATM cell header.

e1AtmLCDs

The number of seconds in which Loss of Cell Delineation (LCD) has occurred. An LCD
defect is detected when an out of cell delineation state has persisted for 4ms. An LCD
defect is cleared when the sync state has been maintained for 4ms.

5.8.4

hardware port e3

These commands allow you to modify various aspects of the configuration of the ports on an
E3 network module. These commands are available only when an E3 network module is
installed in the switch fabric. To list the available subcommands, type ? at the e3 level.
myswitch:hardware port e3-> ?
modify

Modify E3 port configuration parameters

show

Display E3 port configuration

statistics

Display e3 statistics

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

5 - 173

Hardware Commands

Field

Hardware Commands

5.8.4.1 hardware port e3 modify


This command lets you configure E3 network modules as follows:
myswitch:hardware port e3-> modify
Usage:
[-port] <BNP>

Port

[[-mode] (hcs|plcp)]

Mode

[[-loopback] <loopback>]

Loopback Config

[[-timing] (network|internal)]

Tx Clock Source

[[-scrambling] (on|off)]

Scrambling

[[-emptycells] (unassigned|idle)]

Empty Cells

These parameters are defined as follows:


Parameter

Description

-port <BNP>

The number of the E3 port to be configured.

-mode (hcs|plcp)

plcp means that the port uses PLCP (Physical Layer Convergence Protocol) framing
(G.751) for cell delineation. hcs means that the port uses HCS (Header Check Sequence)
based framing (G.832) for cell delineation. The default is hcs.

-loopback <loopback>

Cell loopback means the E3 stream received from the network is unframed into ATM
cells. The cells are then reframed and transmitted back to the network.
Payload loopback means the E3 stream received from the network has the E3
overhead bits re-inserted and is retransmitted to the network.
Diagnostic loopback connects the receiver to the transmitter. The E3 stream
transmitted by the switch to a port is looped back to the switch. The E3 stream is still
transmitted to the network, but the incoming E3 stream is ignored.
Line loopback connects the transmitter to the receiver. The data stream received from
the line is retransmitted out to the line. Cells that are switched to this port are not sent
over the line.
None means that no loopback will take place on the port. The default is none.

-timing (network|internal)

The transmit clock for this port:


network means that the clock that is recovered from the receive line of this port is
used to drive the transmit line of this port.
internal means that the internal clock is used to drive the transmit line of this port.

1.

-scrambling (on|off)

on means cell payload scrambling is enabled on this port. off means cell payload
scrambling is disabled. Only the payload of the ATM cells is scrambled. The default is on.

-emptycells
(unassigned|idle)1

The type of cells this port sends for filler when the port is not sending data. Idle cells set
the CLP bit=1 and unassigned cells set the CLP bit=0. Idle=invalid cell pattern and
unassigned=unassigned. The default is idle.

Refer to page 57 of the ATM Forum 3.0 Specification for more information. In general, it is not necessary to change this
parameter from the default setting.

5 - 174

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Hardware Commands

Hardware Commands

5.8.4.2 hardware port e3 show


This command allows you to display current information about an E3 network module. Enter
the following parameters:
myswitch:hardware port e3-> show
Port

Carrier

Stat Mode

Loopback Timing

Scram EmptyCells

1C1

no

5136 hcs

none

internal

on

idle

1C2

no

5136 hcs

none

internal

on

idle

1C3

yes

7296 hcs

none

internal

on

idle

1C4

no

5136 hcs

none

internal

on

idle

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Field
Port

Description
The port numbers of each E3 network module currently installed in the switch fabric.

Carrier

yes means a carrier has been detected on this port.


no means a carrier has not been detected.

Stat

The E3 line status of the port.

Mode

plcp means that the port uses PLCP framing for cell delineation.
hcs means that the port uses HCS cell delineation.

Loopback

The loopback mode on the port.

Timing

The transmit clock for this port:


network means that the clock that is recovered from the receive line of this port is
used to drive the transmit line of this port.
internal means that the internal clock is used to drive the transmit line of this port.

Scram

on means that payload scrambling is enabled on this port.


off means that payload scrambling is disabled on this port.

EmptyCells2

The type of cells this port sends for filler when the port is not sending data:
idle cells set the CLP bit=1.
unassigned cells set
unassigned=unassigned.

the

CLP

bit=0.

Idle=invalid

cell

pattern

and

1.

A carrier is detected when a signal is applied to the receive side of the port. It does not guarantee that the signal is the
proper frequency.

2.

Please refer to page 57 of the ATM Forum 3.0 Specification for more information. In general, it is not necessary to
change this parameter from the default setting.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

5 - 175

Hardware Commands

5.8.4.3 hardware port e3 statistics


You can display statistics about all of the E3 network modules in an individual switch fabric
by entering statistics at the e3 level. This command is available only when at least one E3
network module is installed in the switch fabric.
myswitch:hardware port e3-> statistics
E3 port 1C1

counter

----------------------------------e3FramingLOSs
e3FramingLCVs

Value

Delta

----------

-----------

61008

(61008)

3701351264 (3701351264)

e3FramingFERRs

124822049

(124822049)

e3FramingOOFs

(0)

e3FramingFERFs

(0)

e3FramingAISs

(0)

e3FramingBIP8s

438314075

(438314075)

e3FramingFEBEs

7195460

(7195460)

e3PlcpFERRs

(0)

e3PlcpLOFs

(0)

e3PlcpBIP8s

(0)

e3PlcpFEBEs

(0)

e3PlcpYellows

(0)

e3AtmHCSs

(0)

e3AtmRxCells

(0)

e3AtmTxCells

146013

(146013)

(0)

e3AtmLCDs
Press q to quit, any other key to continue...q

NOTE

NOTE

5 - 176

All of the PLCP counters listed above increment


only when the E3 network module is running in
the PLCP mode. However, the HCS counter
always increments, regardless of which mode is
running.

The Value column shows the current value of the


counter. The Delta column shows the change in
the counter since the last time you checked this
value. The counters are reset when the switch is
restarted or when a network module is replaced.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Hardware Commands

Field

Description

e3FramingLOSs

The number of seconds in which Loss Of Signal (LOS) errors were detected by the E3
Receive Framer block.

e3FramingLCVs

The number of Line Code Violations (LCV) that were detected by the E3 Receive Framer
block.

e3FramingFERRs

The number of E3 framing error (FERR) events.

e3FramingOOFs

The number of seconds in which E3 Out Of Frame (OOF) error events were experienced.

e3FramingFERFs

The number of seconds in which Far End Receive Failures for a port configured with HCS
framing were experienced. Indicates the number of seconds in which Remote Alarm
Indications for a port configured with PLCP framing were experienced.

e3FramingAISs

The number of seconds in which Alarm Indication Signals (AIS) were detected by the E3
Receive Framer block. AIS indicates that an upstream failure has been detected by the far
end.

e3FramingBIP8s

The number of E3 G.832 BIP-8 errors. This counter is only valid for a port using HCS framing.

e3FramingFEBEs

The number of E3 far end block error (FEBE) events.

e3PlcpFERRs

The number of Physical Layer Convergence Protocol (PLCP) octet error events.

e3PlcpLOFs

The number of seconds in which Loss Of Frame (LOF) errors were detected by the PLCP
(Physical Layer Convergence Protocol) receiver. LOF is declared when an Out-Of-Frame
state persists for more than 1ms. LOF is removed when an in-frame state persists for more
than 12ms.

e3PlcpBIP8s

The number of BIP-8 (Bit Interleaved Parity-8) error events. The BIP-8 is calculated over
the Path Overhead field and the associated ATM cell of the previous PLCP frame. A BIP-N
is a method of error monitoring. An N-bit code is generated by the transmitting
equipment in such a manner that the first bit of the code provides even parity over the
first bit of all N-bit sequences in the previous VT SPE, the second bit provides even parity
over the second bits of all N-bit sequences within the specified portion, etc.

e3PlcpFEBEs

The number of ATM Far End Block Error (FEBE) events.

e3PlcpYellows

The number of seconds in which Yellow alarm errors were detected by the PLCP (Physical
Layer Convergence Protocol) receiver. Yellow alarm is asserted when 10 consecutive
yellow signal bits are set to logical 1. Yellow signals are used to alert upstream terminals of
a downstream failure in order to initiate trunk conditioning on the failure circuit.

e3AtmHCSs

The number of header check sequence (HCS) error events. The HCS is a CRC-8 calculation
over the first 4 octets of the ATM cell header.

e3AtmRxCells

The number of ATM cells that were received, not including idle/unassigned cells.

e3AtmTxCells

The number of ATM cells that were sent, not including idle/unassigned cells.

e3AtmLCDs

The number of seconds in which Loss of Cell Delineation (LCD) has occurred. An LCD
defect is detected when an out of cell delineation state has persisted for 4ms. An LCD
defect is cleared when the sync state has been maintained for 4ms.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

5 - 177

Hardware Commands

The fields in this display are defined as follows:

Hardware Commands

5.8.5

hardware port ethernet

This command allows you to access the auto-negotiation subcommand on an Ethernet port
card and is available only when an Ethernet port card is installed in the switch fabric. To
display the auto-negotiation subcommand, type ? at the ethernet level.
myswitch:hardware port ethernet-> ?
auto-negotiation>

The auto-negotiation directory

5.8.5.1 hardware port ethernet auto-negotiation


This command allows you to enable or disable a ports auto-negotiation feature as well as
display the ports auto-negotiation parameters. Enter the following:
myswitch:hardware port ethernet auto-negotiation-> ?
modify

Modify port's configuration mode

show

Display auto-negotiation parameters

5.8.5.1.1

hardware port ethernet auto-negotiation modify ESX-3000 Platforms

This command allows you to either enable the auto-negotiation feature or disable the feature
and manually configure the speed and duplex parameters on the port. Enter the following:
myswitch:hardware port ethernet auto-negotiation-> modify
Usage:
[-port] <EthernetIf>

Port Id

[[-configmodes] <Modes>]

Config Modes

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Field

Description

-port <EthernetIf>

The port on which you wish to enable and/or modify the auto-negotiation feature
parameters.

-configmodes <Modes>

The ports configuration setting. May either be set for auto-negotiation (auto) or set
manually (10/Half, 10/Full, 100/Half, 100/Full, auto/10/half, auto/10/
Full, auto/100/Half, or auto/100/Full).

5 - 178

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Hardware Commands

hardware port ethernet auto-negotiation modify ASX-200BX, ASX-1000,


ASX-1200, TNX-210, and TNX-1100 Platforms

This command allows you to either enable the auto-negotiation feature or disable the feature
and manually configure the speed and duplex parameters on the port. Enter the following:
myswitch:hardware port ethernet auto-negotiation-> modify
Usage:
[-port] <rfc1483If>

Port

[[-mode] <ASX Ethernet Advertised speeds>]

Config Modes

[[-modeSNMP] <ASX Ethernet Config Modes>]

Config Modes SNMP

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Field

Description

-port

The port on which you wish to enable and/or modify the auto-negotiation feature
parameters.

-mode
<ASX Ethernet
Advertised speeds>

The ports configuration setting. May either be set for auto-negotiation (auto) or set
manually (10/Half, 10/Full, 100/Half, 100/Full, auto/10/half, auto/10/
Full, auto/100/Half, or auto/100/Full).

-modeSNMP
<ASX Ethernet
Config Modes>

The ports configuration setting as exported to SNMP. May either be set for autonegotiation (auto) or set manually (10/Half, 10/Full, 100/Half, or 100/Full).

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

5 - 179

Hardware Commands

5.8.5.1.2

Hardware Commands

5.8.5.1.3

hardware port ethernet auto-negotiation show

This command allows you to display the link state and parameters of a port. Enter the
following:
myswitch:hardware port ethernet auto-negotiation-> show
Link

Remote

Port

Config.
Mode

OperState

Status

Auto State

Remote
OperState

2B1

100/Full

100/Full

up

not-detected

N/A

2B2

100/Full

100/Full

up

not-detected

N/A

2B3

100/Full

100/Full

up

not-detected

N/A

2B4

100/Full

100/Full

up

not-detected

N/A

2C1

100/Full

100/Full

up

not-detected

N/A

2C2

100/Full

100/Full

up

not-detected

N/A

2C3

100/Full

100/Full

up

not-detected

N/A

2C4

100/Full

100/Full

up

not-detected

N/A

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Field

Description

Port

The port on which you wish to view link states and parameters.

Config. Mode

Shows the port setting. May either be capable of auto-negotiation (auto) or manually-set
to one of eight speed/duplexes (10/Half, 10/Full, 100/Half, 100/Full, auto/10/
half, auto/10/Full, auto/100/Half, or auto/100/Full).

OperState

Shows the speed/duplex mode that the port is using. May be 10/Half, 10/Full, 100/
Half, or 100/Full.

Link Status

Shows whether or not the port detects that another Ethernet port is connected to it. up
indicates connectivity, down indicates no connectivity.

Remote Auto State

Shows whether or not a remote device is capable of auto-negotiation. auto indicates autonegotiation capability, not-detected indicates absence of auto-negotiation capability.

Remote OperState

For remote devices shown to be capable of auto-negotiation, indicates the speed/duplex.


Indicates N/A if auto-negotiation capability is not-detected.

5 - 180

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Hardware Commands

hardware port j2

These commands let you modify various aspects of the configuration of a J2 network module.
The following J2 commands are available only when a J2 network module is installed in the
switch fabric. To display the list of available subcommands, type ? at the j2 level.
myswitch:hardware port j2-> ?
modify

Modify J2 port configuration parameters

show

Display J2 port configuration

statistics

Display j2 statistics

5.8.6.1 hardware j2 port modify


This command lets you configure J2 network modules as follows:
myswitch:hardware port j2-> modify
Usage:
[-port] <BNP>

Port

[[-linelength] (short|long)]

Line Length

[[-loopback] (none|line|diag)]

Loopback

[[-timing] (network|internal)]

Timing

[[-emptycells] (unassigned|idle)]

Empty Cells

These parameters are defined as follows:


Parameter

Description

-port <BNP>

The number of the J2 port to be configured.

-linelength (short|long)

The length of the physical cable attached to this port. If the line attached to the receive port
has greater than 4 db of attenuation, then the line must be configured as long. If
otherwise, then it must be configured as short. In general, if the cable is less than 20 feet,
then configure the line as short.

-loopback <loopback>

The type of loopback:


Line connects the transmitter to the receiver. The data stream received from the line is
retransmitted out to the line. Cells that are switched to this port are not sent over the
line.
Diagnostic loopback connects the receiver to the transmitter. The J2 stream
transmitted by the switch to a port is looped back to the switch. The J2 stream is still
transmitted to the network, but the incoming J2 stream is ignored.
None designates that no loopback will take place on this port. This is the default.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

5 - 181

Hardware Commands

5.8.6

Hardware Commands

Parameter

Description

-timing (network|internal)

The transmit clock for this port:


Network means that the clock that is recovered from the receive line of this port is
used to drive the transmit line of this port.
Internal means that the internal clock is used to drive the transmit line of this port.

-emptycells
(unassigned|idle)1
1.

The type of cells this port sends for filler when the port is not sending data. Idle cells set
the CLP bit=1 and unassigned cells set the CLP bit=0. Idle=invalid cell pattern and
unassigned=unassigned. The default is idle.

Refer to page 57 of the ATM Forum 3.0 Specification for more information. In general, it is not necessary to change this
parameter from the default setting.

5.8.6.2 hardware j2 port show


This command allows you to display information about the configuration of the ports on a J2
network module. Enter the following parameters:
myswitch:hardware port j2-> show
Port Carrier Status LineLength Loopback Timing

EmptyCells

1D1

no

192 short

none

internal

unassigned

1D2

no

192 short

none

internal

unassigned

1D3

no

192 short

none

internal

unassigned

1D4

no

192 short

none

internal

unassigned

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Field
Port

The J2 port number of the network module(s) currently installed in the switch.
1

1.

Description

Carrier

yes means a carrier has been detected on this port. no means a carrier has not been
detected on this port. A carrier is detected when a signal is applied to the receive side of
the port, but it does not guarantee the signal is the proper frequency.

Status

The J2 line status of the port.

LineLength

The length of the physical cable that is attached to this port. Can be short or long.

Loopback

The loopback mode on the port. Can be diagnostic, line, or none.

Timing

The transmit clock for this port. network means that the clock that is recovered from the
receive line of this port is used to drive the transmit line of this port. internal means
that the internal clock is used to drive the transmit line of this port.

EmptyCells

The type of cells this port sends for filler when the port is not sending data. Idle cells set
the CLP bit=1 and unassigned cells set the CLP bit=0. Idle=invalid cell pattern and
unassigned=unassigned. Refer to page 57 of the ATM Forum 3.0 Specification for more
information. In general, it is not necessary to change this parameter from the default
setting

A carrier is detected when a signal is applied to the receive side of the port, but it does not guarantee the signal is the
proper frequency.

5 - 182

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Hardware Commands

You can display statistics about all of the J2 network modules by entering statistics at the
j2 level. This command is available only when at least one J2 network module is installed.
myswitch:hardware port j2-> statistics
J2 port 1D1

counter

Value

Delta

----------

-----------

j2AtmHCSs

(0)

j2AtmRxCells

(0)

j2AtmTxCells

207772

(207772)

-----------------------------------

j2AtmLCDs

(0)

j2B8ZSCodingErrors

(0)

j2CRC5Errors

(0)

j2FramingErrors

(0)

j2RxLossOfFrame

(0)

j2RxLossOfClock

(0)

j2RxAIS

(0)

j2TxLossOfClock

(0)

j2RxRemoteAIS

(0)

86919

(86919)

j2RxLossOfSignal

Press q to quit, any other key to continue...q

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Field

Description

j2AtmHCSs

The number of header check sequence (HCS) error events. The HCS is a CRC-8 calculation over
the first 4 octets of the ATM cell header.

j2AtmRxCells

The number of ATM cells that were received.

j2AtmTxCells

The number of ATM cells that were transmitted.

j2AtmLCDs

The number of seconds in which a Loss of Cell Delineation (LCD) has occurred. An LCD defect
is detected when an out of cell delineation state has persisted for 4ms. An LCD defect is cleared
when the sync state has been maintained for 4ms.

j2B8ZSCodingErrors

The number of B8ZS coding violation errors.

j2CRC5Errors

The number of CRC-5 received errors.

j2FramingErrors

The number of framing patterns received in error.

j2RxLossOfFrame

The number of seconds during which the receiver was experiencing Loss Of Frame.

j2RxLossOfClock

The number of seconds during which the receiver was not observing transitions on the
received clock signal.

j2RxAIS

The number of seconds during which the receiver detected an Alarm Indication Signal.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

5 - 183

Hardware Commands

5.8.6.3 hardware j2 port statistics

Hardware Commands

Field

Description

j2TxLossOfClock

The number of seconds during which the transmitter experienced Loss Of Clock.

j2RxRemoteAIS

The number of seconds during which the receiver observed the Alarm Indication Signal in the
m-bits channel.

j2RxLossOfSignal

The number of seconds during which the transmitter was experiencing Loss Of Signal.

NOTE

5 - 184

The Value column shows the current value of the


counter. The Delta column shows the change in
the counter since the last time you checked this
value. The counters are reset when the switch is
restarted or when a network module is replaced.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Hardware Commands

hardware port modify

This command allows you to change the state of a port or to set an LED model for the front
panel LEDs on all network modules, except for Series LEs. Enter the following:
myswitch:hardware port-> modify
Usage:
[-port] <BNP>

Port

[[-adminstatus] (up|down)]

Admin Status

[[-ledmodel] (lan|wan)]

LED Model

These parameters are defined as follows:


Parameter

Description

-port <BNP>

The number of port to be managed.

-adminstatus (up|down)

This parameter allows you to change the state of a port to be up (on-line) or down (offline). When a port is down, all signalling and communication is disabled. This command
is useful for taking a port out of service temporarily to perform diagnostics.
up brings the designated port on-line. down takes the designated port off-line.

-ledmodel (lan|wan)

This parameter lets you select an LED model to use for setting the front panel LED colors
on a per-port basis on all network modules, except Series LE. Typically, the lan LEDs
blink when transmitting or receiving data on a port. Typically, the wan LEDs illuminate
solid green, unless an error condition exists on a port.
For both the lan and wan models, RED means a fault in the receive direction, YELLOW
means a fault in the transmit direction (Line Remote Defect Indication), AUTO/GREEN
means no fault. Only the receive LED color is changed. These models show only three
states and do not reflect the status of the Path Alarm Indications and Path Remote Defect
Indications. lan is the default value for all network modules.
However, when redundancy is configured, the default (and only) LED model for Series D
network modules is wan. When redundancy is configured, the default LED model for
Series E network modules is lan. Series E supports either model when redundancy is
configured.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

5 - 185

Hardware Commands

5.8.7

Hardware Commands

5.8.8

hardware port show

This command lets you display general information about the ports on an individual switch
fabric. To show general information about all of the ports, enter the following:
myswitch:hardware port-> show
Port

Carrier Admin

Oper

Speed (bps)

1B1

no

up

down

155000000

OC3

1B2

no

up

down

155000000

OC3

1B3

no

up

down

155000000

OC3

1B4

no

up

down

155000000

1C1

no

up

down

2048000

FRAME1

1C2

no

up

down

2048000

FRAME1

1C3

no

up

down

2048000

FRAME1

1C4

no

up

down

2048000

FRAME1

1CTL

yes

up

up

80000000

Model

OC3

ASX-CTL

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Field

Description

Port

The port numbers of each network module currently installed in the switch fabric. The
control port on an ASX-4000 switch is displayed as 5CTL since it does not belong to a
specific fabric.

Carrier

yes means a carrier has been detected on this port. no means a carrier has not been
detected. A carrier is detected when a signal is applied to the receive side of the port. It
does not guarantee that the signal is the proper frequency

Admin

The administrative state of this port. Can be up (on-line) or down (off-line).

Oper

The current operational state of this port. If a port was administered up, but the carrier or
the framing bits were lost, the Admin status indicates up, but this status indicates that the
port is down.

Speed (bps)

The speed of this ports link in Bps.

Model

The type of network module. For the control port, displays ASX-CTL.

5 - 186

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Hardware Commands

This command lets you display the LED models used for each port of all network modules
(except for Series LE). Enter the following parameters:
myswitch:hardware port-> show -led
Port

Type

rxLED

txLED

clkLED

Model

1B1

OC3

red

auto

N/A

lan

1B2

OC3

red

auto

N/A

lan

1B3

OC3

red

auto

N/A

lan

1B4

OC3

red

auto

N/A

lan

1C1

FRAME1

yellow

off

off

wan

1C2

FRAME1

yellow

off

off

wan

1C3

FRAME1

yellow

off

off

wan

1C4

FRAME1

yellow

off

off

wan

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Field

Description

Port

The port number of the network module(s) currently installed in the switch (fabric).

Type

The type of network module it is. ASX-BP are the intra-fabric ports on an ASX-1000
switch, ASX-1200 switch, or TNX-1100 switch. ASX-CTL is the control port.

rxLED

The color of the receive LED for this port. Can be off, green, red, yellow, or auto.
auto means that the LED is under hardware control. Typically, hardware control means
that the LED is normally dark with green blinks to indicate data traffic.

txLED

The color of the transmit LED for this port. Can be off, green, red, yellow, or auto.
auto means that the LED is under hardware control. Typically, hardware control means that
the LED is normally dark with green blinks to indicate data traffic.

clkLED

This field only applies to the receive port LEDs on FramePlus network modules. green
indicates that the port is providing the 8 KHz clock reference to the switch. off means
that the port is not providing the 8 KHz clock reference to the switch.

Model

The LED model (lan or wan) that has been assigned to this port.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

5 - 187

Hardware Commands

5.8.8.1 hardware port show -led

Hardware Commands

5.8.9

hardware port sonet

These commands allow you to modify various aspects of the configuration of all of the ports
on a SONET network module. The following SONET commands are available only when a
SONET network module is installed in the switch fabric. You can display the list of available
subcommands by typing ? at the sonet level.
myswitch:hardware port sonet-> ?
errors>

The errors directory

modify

Modify SONET port configuration parameters

show

Display SONET port configuration

statistics

Display SONET statistics

All SONET Series C, LC, LE, and D network


modules, Series 1 port cards, and most Series 2
port cards use these commands. SONET Series E
network modules and Series 2 channelized
OC-12 port cards do not use these commands;
instead they use the commands under
interfaces sonet and interfaces atm-tc.

NOTE

5.8.9.1 hardware port sonet errors


These commands let you configure the bit error assessment method and its parameters for
ASX-4000 redundancy. You can display the list of available subcommands by typing ? at the
errors level.
myswitch:hardware port sonet errors-> ?
modify

Manually edit BER configuration

show

Display port Bit Error Rate configuration

5.8.9.1.1

hardware port sonet errors modify

This command lets you modify the bit error rate configuration. Three distribution models are
supported: random, bursty, and none. The choice of which model to use is based on the
expected pattern or distribution of line error occurrences. Enter the following:
myswitch:hardware port sonet errors-> modify
Usage:
[-port] <BNP>
[[-errormodel] (none|random|bursty)]

Port
BER Error Model

[[-failenable] (enabled|disabled)]

Fail on Excessive Errors

[[-seconds] <integer>]

Seconds Threshold

[[-errors] <integer>]

Errors Threshold

[[-sfber] <integer>]

Signal Fail BER

[[-sdber] <integer>]

Signal Degrade BER

5 - 188

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Hardware Commands

Parameter

Description

-port <BNP>

The port of the SONET network module to be configured.

-errormodel
(none|random|bursty)

The error distribution model to be used to identify signal degrade and signal fail
conditions. Three error models are available:
none indicates that the detection of signal conditions is disabled. If the error
distribution model is set to none, signal degrade and signal fail conditions are never
declared (i.e., they are always reported as clear).
random selects a random error distribution and declares signal conditions based on
the thresholds set in the -sdber and -sfber parameters. The random error
distribution model is implemented according to sections 5.3.3 and 5.3.4 of GR-253CORE for detecting and clearing signal degrade and signal fail conditions. For this
model, the thresholds are specified as two bit errors rates (BER). BER is expressed as a
negative power of 10 (e.g. 10-5 is 1 bit error in 100,000 bits). Each of the specified
thresholds is the declaration threshold. The clearing threshold is always one-tenth the
declaration threshold. For example, port 2C1 declares a bit error when the BER
exceeds 10-9, but only clears when the BER drops below 10-10.
Signal degrade thresholds range from 10-9 to 10-5, inclusively. For the signal failure
thresholds, the range is from 10-5 to 10-3, inclusively. When a port is initially changed
to the random error distribution model, the default settings for the signal degrade and
the signal failure thresholds are 10-5 and 10-3, respectively. When setting the BER
thresholds, it is only necessary to enter the exponent (i.e., -5 to specify a BER of 10-5).
random is the default error distribution model.
bursty selects a burst error model and declares signal degrade condition based on the
thresholds set in the -seconds and -errors parameters. The bursty error
distribution model is implemented according to section 2.2.2.5.2 of ITU-T G.783 for
detecting and clearing signal degrade conditions. This model cannot be used to detect
signal fail conditions from line bit errors. In this model, the threshold is specified as a
number of line BIP errors per seconds and a number of consecutive seconds. A signal
degrade condition is declared if the number of line BIP errors observed per second
exceeds the configured threshold for the configured number of consecutive seconds.
Likewise, to clear the signal degrade condition, the number of line BIP errors observed
per second must remain less than the configured threshold for the configured number
of consecutive seconds.

-failenable
(enabled|disabled)

Enable or disable the signal fail condition on excessive errors.

-seconds <integer>

The number of consecutive seconds over which the line BIP error count is compared to the
configured error rate. The number of seconds ranges from 2 to 10 seconds with 10 being
the default value.

-errors <integer>

The threshold for the number of line BIP errors per seconds. This value varies from 1 to a
maximum that is dependent on the signal level.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

5 - 189

Hardware Commands

These parameters are defined as follows:

Hardware Commands

Parameter

Description

-sfber <integer>

The signal failure BER. Signal failure thresholds range from 10-5 to 10-3, inclusively. When
a port is initially changed to the random error distribution model, the default settings for
the signal degrade and the signal failure thresholds are 10-5 and 10-3, respectively. When
setting the BER thresholds, it is only necessary to enter the exponent (i.e., -5 to specify a
BER of 10-5).

-sdber <integer>

The signal degrade BER. Signal degrade thresholds range from 10-9 to 10-5, inclusively.
When a port is initially changed to the random error distribution model, the default
settings for the signal degrade and the signal failure thresholds are 10-5 and 10-3,
respectively. When setting the BER thresholds, it is only necessary to enter the exponent
(i.e., -5 to specify a BER of 10-5).

5.8.9.1.2

hardware port sonet errors show

This command lets you display the bit error distribution model and its thresholds for the
signal degrade condition and for the signal fail condition, if applicable. Enter the following:
myswitch:hardware port sonet errors-> show
Port

State ErrorModel FailEnable

Seconds Errors

SF

SD

2A1

OK

random

disabled

N/A

N/A

-3

-5

2A2

OK

random

disabled

N/A

N/A

-3

-5

2A3

OK

random

disabled

N/A

N/A

-3

-5

2A4

OK

random

disabled

N/A

N/A

-3

-5

Press <return> for more, or 'q' to quit... q

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Field

Description

Port

The ports of each SONET network module or port card currently installed in the switch
fabric.

State

The current operating state of this SONET network module.

ErrorModel

The error distribution model for this SONET network module.

FailEnable

Displays whether the signal fail condition on excessive errors is enabled or disabled.

Seconds

The number of consecutive seconds over which the line BIP error count is compared to the
configured error rate.

Errors

The threshold for the number of line BIP errors per seconds.

SF

The signal failure BER. Only the exponent value is displayed (i.e., -3 to specify a BER of
10-3).

SD

The signal degrade BER. Only the exponent is displayed (i.e., -5 to specify a BER of 10-5).

5 - 190

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Hardware Commands

Hardware Commands

5.8.9.2 hardware port sonet modify


This command lets you configure SONET network modules as follows:
myswitch:hardware port sonet-> modify
Usage:
[-sonetport] <BNP>

Port

[[-mode] (sonet|sdh)]

Mode

[[-loopback] <loopback>]

Loopback Config

[[-timing] (network|internal)]

Tx Clock Source

[[-scrambling] (on|off)]

Scrambling

[[-emptycells] (unassigned|idle)]

Empty Cells

These parameters are defined as follows:


Parameter

Description

-sonetport <BNP>

The port number of the SONET network module to be configured.

-mode (sonet|sdh)

The mode of operation for this port. Can be sonet or sdh.

-loopback <loopback>

The type of loopback:


line connects the transmitter to the receiver. The data stream received from the fiber
is retransmitted out to the fiber. In line loopback, the port acts as if it were an optical
repeater. Cells that are switched to this port are not sent over the fiber. This option is
valid for all SONET network modules. This option is not supported for Series 1
OC-48c port cards on an ASX-4000 switch.1
diag(nostic) connects the receiver to the transmitter. The SONET stream
transmitted by the fiber to a port is looped back to the fiber. The stream is still
transmitted over the fiber, but the incoming stream is ignored. This option is valid for
all SONET network modules, except for Series C OC-12 network modules.
path means that the loopback point is between the TPOP and RPOP blocks and the
transmit parallel stream is connected to the receive stream. This option is valid only for
Series C OC-12 network modules.
both lets you perform both diagnostic and line loopback on a particular port. This
option is valid only for Series 1 OC-48c port cards on an ASX-4000 switch.
none means no loopback will take place on this port. The default is none.

-timing (network|internal)

The transmit clock for this port:


network means that the clock that is recovered from the receive line of this port is
used to drive the transmit line of this port.
internal means that the internal clock is used to drive the transmit line of this port.

-scrambling (on|off)

on means that cell payload scrambling is enabled on this port.


off means that cell payload scrambling is disabled on this port.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

5 - 191

Hardware Commands

Parameter
-emptycells
(unassigned|idle)3

Description
The type of cells this port sends for filler when the port is not sending data:
idle cells set the CLP bit=1.
unassigned cells set the CLP bit=0. Idle=invalid
unassigned=unassigned. The default is unassigned.

cell

pattern

and

1.

An error occurs if you attempt to use line loopback on a Series 1 OC-48 port card on an ASX-4000 switch. If you want to
use line loopback on a Series 1 OC-48 port card on an ASX-4000 switch, you can use the both option, which applies
both line and diagnostic loopback to the port.

2.

The scrambling mode should be set to the same status on both the transmitting side and the receiving side.

3.

Refer to page 57 of the ATM Forum 3.0 Specification for more information. In general, it is not necessary to change this
parameter from the default setting.

5 - 192

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Hardware Commands

This command lets you display information about the configuration of all of the ports on a
SONET network module. Enter the following parameters:
myswitch:hardware port sonet-> show
Port Width

Line Mode

4B1

sts3c

UTP

sonet none

Loopback Timing

internal on

Scrambling EmptyCells
unassigned

4B2

sts3c

UTP

sonet none

internal on

unassigned

4B3

sts3c

UTP

sonet none

internal on

unassigned

4B4

sts3c

UTP

sonet none

internal on

unassigned

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Field

Description

Port

The port numbers of each SONET network module or port card currently installed in the
switch fabric.

Width

The SDH transmission rates STM-1 (155.52 Mbps), STM-4 (622.08 Mbps) and STM-16
(2488.32 Mbps) are equivalent to SONET rates STS-3, STS-12 and STS-48, respectively. This
is a read-only field.

Line

The line type for this interface. The line type for optical SONET signals may be SMSR
(single-mode short reach), SMIR (single-mode intermediate reach), other (single-mode
long reach), or MM (multi-mode) fiber. For electrical interfaces, the line type is UTP
(Unshielded Twisted Pair).

Mode

The mode of operation for this port. Can be sonet or sdh.

Loopback

The loopback mode on the port. Can be one of the following: line, diagnostic, path,
or none.

Timing1

The transmit clock for this port:


network means that the clock that is recovered from the receive line of this port is
used to drive the transmit line of this port.

Scrambling

internal means that the internal clock is used to drive the transmit line of this port.

on means that payload scrambling is enabled on this port.


off means that payload scrambling is disabled on this port.

Scrambling

on means that payload scrambling is enabled on this port.


off means that payload scrambling is disabled on this port.

1.

The timing option displays N/A on all OC-12 network modules because they always use internal timing.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

5 - 193

Hardware Commands

5.8.9.3 hardware port sonet show

Hardware Commands

5.8.9.3.1

hardware port sonet show -status

This command also lets you display information about the section, line, path, and ATM status
of all of the ports on the SONET network modules and port cards. Enter the following:
myswitch:hardware port sonet-> show -status
Port Carrier Section Line Path Atm
4B1

yes

4B2

yes

4B3

yes

4B4

no

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Field

Description

Port

The port numbers of each SONET network module currently installed in the switch fabric.

Carrier

yes means a carrier has been detected on this port.


no means a carrier has not been detected. A carrier is detected when a signal is applied to
the receive side of the port. It does not guarantee that the signal is the proper frequency

Section

The Section Status of this interface. The variable is a bit map represented as a sum, so it
can represent multiple defects simultaneously. The various bit positions are as follows:
1 - sonetSectionNoDefect
2 - sonetSectionLOS - Loss Of Signal was detected. LOS is declared when 20 +/- 3us of all
zero patterns is detected.
4 - sonetSectionLOF - Loss Of Frame was detected. LOF is declared when an out-of-frame
condition persists for 3ms.

Line

The Line Status of this interface. It is a bit map represented as a sum, so it can represent
multiple defects simultaneously. The various bit positions are:
1 - sonetLineNoDefect
2 - sonetLineAIS - Line Alarm Indication Signal was detected. Line AIS is asserted when a
111 binary pattern is detected in bits 6, 7, 8 of the K2 byte for five consecutive frames.
4 - sonetLineRDI Line Remote Defect Indication was detected. RDI is asserted when a 110
binary pattern is detected in bits 6, 7, 8 of the K2 byte for five consecutive frames.
8 - sonetLineBIP indicates a B2 byte Line BIP error.

5 - 194

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Hardware Commands

Path

Description
Shows the Path Status of this interface. The variable is a bit map represented as a sum, so
it can represent multiple defects simultaneously. The various bit positions are as follows:
1 - sonetPathNoDefect
2 - sonetPathLOP - Path Loss Of Pointer was detected. Path LOP is declared when a
normal pointer value is not found for eight consecutive frames.
4 - sonetPathAIS - Path Alarm Indication Signal was detected. Path AIS is asserted when
an all ones pattern is detected in the pointer bytes (H1 and H2) for three consecutive
frames.
8 - sonetPathRDI - Path RDI alarm has been detected. RDI alarm is declared when bit 5 of
the path status byte is high for ten consecutive frames.
16 - sonetPathUnequiped - Path is not provisioned (idle). PathSignalLabel = hex 00.
32 - sonetPathSignalLabelMismatch - A received Path Signal Label mismatch. A received
Signal Label is considered mismatched if it does not equal either the standard value for an
ATM payload (hex13) or the value for an equipped non-specific payload (1 hex).

Atm

The ATM Status of the interface. The variable is a bit map represented as a sum, so it can
represent multiple defects simultaneously. The various bit positions areas follows:
1 - sonetAtmNoDefect
2 - sonetAtmLCD - Loss of Cell Delineation was detected. LCD is declared when a
normal pointer value is not found for eight consecutive frames.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

5 - 195

Hardware Commands

Field

Hardware Commands

5.8.9.4 hardware port sonet statistics


You can display statistics about all of the SONET network modules on an individual switch
fabric by entering statistics at the sonet level. This command is available only when at
least one SONET (OC-3c, OC-12c, OC-48c, or UTP) network module is installed.
myswitch:hardware port sonet-> statistics
Sonet port 4B1

counter

Value

Delta

----------

-----------

sonetSectionBIPs

34320

(34320)

sonetSectionLOSs

(1)

sonetSectionLOFs

(0)

sonetLineBIPs

165

(165)

sonetLineFEBEs

-----------------------------------

840

(840)

sonetLineAISs

(0)

sonetLineRDIs

(0)

sonetPathBIPs

75

(75)

sonetPathFEBEs

316

(316)

sonetPathLOPs

(0)

sonetPathAISs

(0)

sonetPathRDIs

(0)

sonetPathUNEQs

(0)

sonetPathPLMs

(0)

sonetAtmCorrectableHCSs

(0)

21

(21)

(0)

sonetAtmUncorrectableHCSs
sonetAtmLCDs

Press q to quit, any other key to continue...q

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Field

Description

sonetSectionBIPs

The number of Section BIP-8 (Bit Interleaved Parity) errors that have been detected. The
calculated BIP-8 code is compared with the BIP-8 code extracted from the B1 byte of the
following frame. Differences indicate that a section level bit error has occurred.

sonetSectionLOSs

The number of seconds in which Loss Of Signal (LOS) has occurred. A LOS is declared
when 20 +/- 3ms of all zeros patterns is detected. LOS is cleared when two valid framing
words are detected and during the intervening time no LOS condition is detected.

sonetSectionLOFs

The number of seconds in which Loss Of Frame (LOF) has occurred. A LOF is declared
when an out-of-frame (OOF) condition persists for 3ms. It is cleared when an in-frame
condition persists for 3ms. While in-frame, the framing bytes (A1, A2) in each frame are
compared against the expected pattern. OOF is declared when four consecutive frames
containing one or more framing pattern errors have been received.

5 - 196

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Hardware Commands

Description

sonetLineBIPs

The number of Line BIP-24 (Bit Interleaved Parity) errors that have been detected. The
calculated BIP-24 code is based on the line overhead and synchronous payload envelope
(SPE) of the STS-3c stream. The line BIP-24 code is a bit interleaved parity calculation
using even parity. The calculated code is compared with the BIP-24 code extracted from
the B2 bytes of the following frame. Differences indicate that a line layer bit error has
occurred.

sonetLineFEBEs

The number of line Far End Block Errors (FEBE) that have been detected.

sonetLineAISs

The number of seconds in which line Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) has occurred. A line
AIS is asserted when a 111 binary pattern is detected in bits 6, 7, 8 of the K2 byte for five
consecutive frames. It is removed when any pattern other than 111 is detected in these bits
for five consecutive frames.

sonetLineRDIs

The number of seconds in which a line Remote Defect Indication (RDI) has occurred. A
line RDI is asserted when a 110 binary pattern is detected in bits 6, 7, 8 of the K2 byte for
five consecutive frames. It is removed when any pattern other than 110 is detected in these
bits for five consecutive frames.

sonetPathBIPs

The number of Path BIP-8 (Bit Interleaved Parity) errors that have been detected. A path
BIP-8 error is detected by comparing the path BIP-8 byte (B3) extracted from the current
frame, to the path BIP-8 computed for the previous frame.

sonetPathFEBEs

The number of path Far End Block Errors (FEBE) that have been detected. FEBEs are
detected by extracting the 4-bit FEBE field from the path status byte (G1). The valid range
for the 4-bit field is between 0000 and 1000, representing zero to eight errors. Other values
are interpreted as zero errors.

sonetPathLOPs

The number of seconds in which path Loss Of Pointer (LOP) has occurred. A path LOP is
detected when a normal pointer value is not found in eight consecutive frames. It is
cleared when a normal pointer value is found for three consecutive frames.

sonetPathAISs

The number of seconds in which a path Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) has occurred. A
path AIS is asserted when an all-ones pattern is detected in the pointer bytes (H1 and H2)
for three consecutive frames and is cleared when a valid pointer is found for three
consecutive frames. AIS means an upstream failure has been detected.

sonetPathRDIs

The number of seconds in which a path Remote Defect Indication (RDI) alarm has
occurred. A path RDI is detected by extracting bit 5 of the path status byte. If bit 5 is high
for 10 consecutive frames, then an RDI alarm is declared. An RDI alarm is cleared when
bit 5 is low for 10 consecutive frames. RDI signals are used to alert upstream terminals of a
downstream failure in order to initiate trunk conditioning on the failure circuit.

sonetPathUNEQs

The number of seconds in which a path UNEQ defect has occurred. A path UNEQ defect
is detected when the STS Signal label (C2 byte) == 0x00.

sonetPathPLMs

The number of seconds in which a Path Label Mismatch (PLM) defect has occurred. A
PLM defect is detected when the STS Signal label (C2 bytes) != 0x00, 0x01, 0x13, 0xFC, or
0xFF.

sonetAtmCorrectableHCSs

The number of correctable Header Check Sequence (HCS) error events that occurred. The
HCS is a CRC-8 calculation over the first 4 octets of the ATM cell header. Because all HEC
errors are now counted as uncorrectable, this counter no longer increments.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

5 - 197

Hardware Commands

Field

Hardware Commands

Field

Description

sonetAtmUncorrectableHCSs

The number of uncorrectable Header Check Sequence (HCS) error events that occurred.
The HCS is a CRC-8 calculation over the first 4 octets of the ATM cell header.

sonetAtmLCDs

The number of seconds in which a Loss of Cell Delineation (LCD) has occurred. An LCD
defect is detected when an out of cell delineation state has persisted for 4ms. An LCD
defect is cleared when the sync state has been maintained for 4ms.

NOTE

5 - 198

The Value column shows the current value of the


counter. The Delta column shows the change in
the counter since the last time you checked this
value. The counters are reset when the switch is
restarted or when a network module is replaced.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Hardware Commands

These commands let you modify the configuration of the ports on a TAXI network module.
The following commands are available only when a TAXI network module is installed in the
switch fabric. To list the available subcommands, type ? at the taxi level.
myswitch:hardware port taxi-> ?
modify

Modify TAXI port configuration parameters

show

Display TAXI port configuration

5.8.10.1 hardware port taxi modify


This command allows you to designate the type of loopback on a port on a TAXI network
module. Enter the following parameters:
myswitch:hardware port taxi-> modify
Usage:
[-port] <BNP>

Port

[[-taxiloopback] (diag|none)]

Loopback Config

These parameters are defined as follows:


Parameter

Description

-port <BNP>

The TAXI port on which the loopback mode is to be changed.

-taxiloopback (diag|none)

The type of loopback:


diagnostic loopback connects the receiver to the transmitter. The TAXI stream
transmitted by the switch to a port is looped back to the switch. The TAXI stream is
still transmitted to the network, but the incoming TAXI stream is ignored.
none designates that no loopback will take place on this port. This is the default.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

5 - 199

Hardware Commands

5.8.10 hardware port taxi

Hardware Commands

5.8.10.2 hardware port taxi show


This command enables you to display current information about all of the ports on a TAXI
network module. Enter the following parameters:
myswitch:hardware port taxi-> show
Port

Carrier State Loopback

1A1

no

down

none

1A2

no

down

none

1A3

no

down

none

1A4

yes

up

none

1A5

no

down

none

1A6

no

down

none

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Field
Port

Description
The port numbers of each network module currently installed in the switch fabric.

Carrier

yes means a carrier has been detected on this port.


no means a carrier has not been detected.

1.

State

The current state of this port. Can be up (on-line) or down (off-line).

Loopback

The loopback mode of this port. Can be either none or diagnostic.

A carrier is detected when a signal is applied to the receive side of the port. It does not guarantee that the signal is the
proper frequency.

5 - 200

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Hardware Commands

These commands allow you to modify various aspects of the configuration of the ports on a
TP25 network module. The following tp25 commands are available only when a TP25
network module is installed in the switch fabric. You can display the list of available
subcommands by typing ? at the tp25 level.
myswitch:hardware port tp25-> ?
modify

Modify TP25 port configuration parameters

show

Display TP25 port configuration

statistics

Display tp25 statistics

5.8.11.1 hardware port tp25 modify


This command allows you to designate the type of loopback on a port on a TP25 network
module. Enter the following parameters:
myswitch:hardware port tp25-> modify
Usage:
[-port] <BNP>

Port

[[-loopback] <loopback>]

Loopback Config

These parameters are defined as follows:


Parameter

Description

-port <BNP>

The TP25 port on which the loopback mode is to be changed.

-loopback <loopback>

The type of loopback:


line loopback, also known as remote loopback, causes received data to be transferred
to the upstream system as well as to be looped back to the transmitter on this port.
diagnostic loopback connects the receiver to the transmitter. The stream
transmitted by the switch to a port is looped back to the switch. The stream is still
transmitted to the network, but the incoming stream is ignored.
none designates that no loopback will take place on this port. This is the default.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

5 - 201

Hardware Commands

5.8.11 hardware port tp25

Hardware Commands

5.8.11.2 hardware port tp25 show


This command allows you to display current information about a TP25 network module.
Enter the following parameters:
myswitch:hardware port tp25-> show
Port Carrier Media Loopback RxTiming
1A1

no

UTP

none

N/A

1A2

no

UTP

none

N/A

1A3

no

UTP

none

N/A

1A4

no

UTP

none

N/A

1A5

no

UTP

none

N/A

1A6

no

UTP

none

N/A

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Field
Port

Description
The TP25 port number of the network module(s) currently installed in the switch.

Carrier

yes means a carrier has been detected on this port.


no means a carrier has not been detected on this port.

Media

The kind of physical medium connected to the TP25 interface. UTP means that it is
Unshielded Twisted Pair.

Loopback

The loopback mode on the port. Can be either line or none.

RxTiming

Indicates whether or not the port is receiving an 8kHz timing sync marker. These markers
can be used to derive an 8kHz signal that can be transmitted from all ports on the network
module and back to the switch fabric (on switches that support timing features).
No means the port is not receiving sync pulses.
Yes means the port is receiving sync pulses.

1.

A carrier is detected when a signal is applied to the receive side of the port, but it does not guarantee the signal is the
proper frequency.

5 - 202

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Hardware Commands

You can display statistics about all of the TP25 network modules in an individual switch fabric
by entering statistics at the tp25 level. The following TP25 command is available only
when at least one TP25 network module is installed in the switch fabric.
myswitch:hardware port tp25-> statistics
TP25 port 1A1

counter

-----------------------------------

Value

Delta

----------

-----------

tp25AtmHCSs

(0)

tp25AtmRxCells

N/A

tp25AtmTxCells

3065852

(3065852)

(0)

tp25ErrorSymbol
TP25 port 1A2

counter

-----------------------------------

Value

Delta

----------

-----------

tp25AtmHCSs

(0)

tp25AtmRxCells
tp25AtmTxCells

N/A
3065852

(3065852)

(0)

tp25ErrorSymbol
Press q to quit, any other key to continue...q

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Field

Description

tp25AtmHCSs

The number of header check sequence (HCS) error events. The HCS is a CRC-8 calculation
over the first 4 octets of the ATM cell header.

tp25AtmRxCells

The number of ATM cells that were received.

tp25AtmTxCells

The number of ATM cells that were transmitted.

tp25ErrorSymbol

The number of undefined symbols received.

NOTE

The Value column shows the current value of the


counter. The Delta column shows the change in
the counter since the last time you checked this
value. The counters are reset when the switch is
restarted or when a network module is replaced.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

5 - 203

Hardware Commands

5.8.11.3 hardware port tp25 statistics

Hardware Commands

5.8.12 hardware port traffic


These commands enable you to configure various traffic management features on an
individual port on a network module on the switch. You can display the list of available
subcommands by typing ? at the traffic level.
myswitch:hardware port traffic-> ?
c>

The c directory

d>

The d directory

e>

The e directory

lc>

The lc directory

sf1>

The sf1 directory

The following is displayed on an ESX-3000 switch:


myswitch:hardware port traffic-> ?
le>

The le directory

The following is displayed on an ASX-4000 switch:


myswitch:hardware port traffic-> ?
c>

The c directory

d>

The d directory

pc1>

The pc1 directory

pc2>

The pc2 directory

sf1>

The sf1 directory

5.8.12.1 hardware port traffic c


These commands enable you to configure various traffic management features on an
individual port on a Series C network module on the switch. You can display the list of
available subcommands by typing ? at the c level.
myswitch:hardware port traffic c-> ?
modify

Modify port traffic configuration

show

Display port traffic configuration

statistics

Display port traffic statistics

5 - 204

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Hardware Commands

hardware port traffic c modify

Hardware Commands

5.8.12.1.1

This command lets you configure traffic on Series C network modules as follows:
myswitch:hardware port traffic c-> modify
Usage:
[-atmif] <AtmIf>

Atm Interface

[[-clpthreshcbr] <integer>]

CLP Threshold For CBR and rtVBR

[[-clpthreshnrtvbr] <integer>]

CLP Threshold For nrtVBR

[[-clpthreshabr] <integer>]

CLP Threshold For ABR

[[-efcionabr] <integer>]

EFCI On For ABR

[[-efcioffabr] <integer>]

EFCI Off For ABR

[[-qsizecbr] <integer>]

Qsize For CBR and rtVBR

[[-qsizenrtvbr] <integer>]

Qsize For nrtVBR

[[-qsizeabr] <integer>]

Qsize For ABR

[[-maxcdvcbr] <integer>]

Max CDV For CBR and rtVBR

[[-maxcdvnrtvbr] <integer>]

Max CDV For nrtVBR

These parameters are defined as follows:


Parameter

Description

-atmif <AtmIf>

The Series C port to be configured.

-clpthreshcbr <integer>

The number of cells in the buffer at which CBR and rtVBR traffic drops CLP=1 cells. The
default is 256.

-clpthreshnrtvbr <integer>

The number of cells in the buffer at which nrtVBR traffic drops CLP=1 cells. The default is 256.

-clpthreshabr <integer>

The number of cells in the buffer at which ABR and UBR traffic drops CLP=1 cells. The
default is 256 cells. The Series C network modules offer an ABR-ready ATM interface. A
future ForeThought release will support ABR QoS operation on these interfaces. ABR
options in the current release will apply in that ForeThought release.

-efcionabr <integer>

The threshold number of cells over which UBR and ABR cells will have their EFCI bit set,
signalling congestion. The default is 64 cells.

-efcioffabr <integer>

The threshold number of cells over which UBR and ABR cells will have their EFCI bit
cleared, indicating no congestion. The default is 64 cells.

-qsizecbr <integer>

The minimum queue size to be assigned to CBR and rtVBR traffic. The default is 256 cells.

-qsizenrtvbr <integer>

The minimum queue size to be assigned to nrtVBR traffic. The default is 256 cells.

-qsizeabr <integer>

The minimum queue size to be assigned to ABR and UBR traffic. The default is 256 cells.
The Series C network modules offer an ABR-ready ATM interface. A future ForeThought
release will support ABR QoS operation on these interfaces. ABR options in the current
release will apply in that ForeThought release.

-maxcdvcbr <integer>

In microseconds, the cell delay variation that an output cell experiences under the worst
conditions for output CBR and rtVBR traffic. The network module must be reset.

-maxcdvnrtvbr <integer>

In microseconds, the cell delay variation that an output cell experiences under the worst
conditions for output nrtVBR traffic. The network module must be reset.

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

5 - 205

Hardware Commands

5.8.12.1.2

hardware port traffic c show

This command lets you display port and priority traffic information for all of the ports on all
of the Series C network modules. Enter the following:
myswitch:hardware port traffic c-> show
CLP
Threshold
AtmIf

CBR-

Qsize

nrtVBR ABR-UBR CBR-

rtVBR

EFCI

EFCI

On

Off

nrtVBR ABR-UBR ABR

ABR

rtVBR

CDV
CBR-

nrtVBR

rtVBR

1A1

256

256

256

256

256

256

33

1126

2252

1A2

256

256

256

256

256

256

33

1126

2252

1A3

256

256

256

256

256

256

33

1126

2252

1A4

256

256

256

256

256

256

33

1126

2252

1A5

256

256

256

256

256

256

33

1126

2252

1A6

256

256

256

256

256

256

33

1126

2252

The fields in this display are defined as follows:


Field

Description

AtmIf

The port numbers of each Series C network module installed in the switch fabric.

CLP Threshold CBR-rtVBR

The value at which cells that have been tagged as non-conforming (CLP=1) are dropped
for CBR and rtVBR traffic on this port.

CLP Threshold nrtVBR

The value at which cells that have been tagged as non-conforming (CLP=1) are dropped
for nrtVBR traffic on this port.

CLP Threshold ABR-UBR

The value at which cells that have been tagged as non-conforming (CLP=1) are dropped
for ABR and UBR traffic on this port.

Qsize CBR-rtVBR

The reserved queue size for CBR and rtVBR traffic on this port.

Qsize nrtVBR

The reserved queue size for nrtVBR traffic on this port.

Qsize ABR-UBR

The reserved queue size for ABR and UBR traffic on this port.

EFCI On ABR

The value at which the EFCI bit is set (turned on) when the threshold number is reached,
signalling congestion, for ABR traffic on this port.

EFCI Off ABR

The value at which the EFCI bit is cleared (turned off) when the threshold number is
reached, indicating no congestion, for ABR traffic on this port.

CDV CBR-rtVBR

The maximum cell delay variation for CBR and rtVBR traffic on this port, specified in
microseconds.

CDV nrtVBR

The maximum cell delay variation for nrtVBR traffic on this port, specified in
microseconds.

5 - 206

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Hardware Commands

hardware port traffic c statistics

You can display traffic statistics for all of the ports on the Series C network modules in a
switch fabric as follows:
myswitch:hardware port traffic c-> statistics
Current

Txed

AtmIf

Priority

Cells

Cells

Lost
Cells

1A1

UBR-ABR

1A1

nrtVBR

29759

1A1

CBR-rtVBR

1A2

UBR-ABR

1A2

nrtVBR

29760

1A2

CBR-rtVBR

Press <return> for more, or 'q' to quit... q

The fields in these displays are defined as follows:


Field

Description

AtmIf

The ATM interface number.

Priority

The traffic type for this ATM interface.

Current Cells

The number of cells currently in shared memory for this ATM interface and priority.

Txed Cells

The number of cells transmitted out this ATM interface for this priority.

Lost Cells

The number of cells for this ATM interface and priority dropped by the output network
module.

5.8.12.2 hardware port traffic d


These commands enable you to configure various traffic management features on an
individual port on a Series D or IMA network module on the switch. You can display the list
of available subcommands by typing ? at the d level.
myswitch:hardware port traffic d-> ?
modify

Modify port traffic configuration

show

Display port traffic configuration

statistics

Display port traffic statistics

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

5 - 207

Hardware Commands

5.8.12.1.3

Hardware Commands

5.8.12.2.1

hardware port traffic d modify

This command lets you configure traffic on Series D or IMA network modules as follows:
myswitch:hardware port traffic d-> modify
Usage:
[-atmif] <AtmIf>

Atm Interface

[[-qsizecbr] <integer>]

Qsize For CBR-rtVBR

[[-qsizenrtvbr] <integer>]

Qsize For nrtVBR

[[-qsizeabr] <integer>]

Qsize For ABR

[[-qsizeubr] <integer>]

Qsize For UBR

[[-clp01cbr] <integer>]

CLP01 Threshold For CBR-rtVBR

[[-clp01nrtvbr] <integer>]

CLP01 Threshold For nrtVBR

[[-clp01abr] <integer>]

CLP01 Threshold For ABR

[[-clp01ubr] <integer>]

CLP01 Threshold For UBR

[[-clp1cbr] <integer>]

CLP1 Threshold For CBR-rtVBR

[[-clp1nrtvbr] <integer>]

CLP1 Threshold For nrtVBR

[[-clp1abr] <integer>]

CLP1 Threshold For ABR

[[-clp1ubr] <integer>]

CLP1 Threshold For UBR

[[-altclpcbr] (allOn|allOff|svcOn|svcOff)]

Alt CLP CBR-rtVBR

[[-altclpnrtvbr] (allOn|allOff|svcOn|svcOff)]

Alt CLP nrtVBR

[[-altclpubr] (allOn|allOff|svcOn|svcOff)]

Alt CLP UBR

[[-ratelimit] <integer>]

Rate Limit

These parameters are defined as follows:


Parameter

Description

-atmif <AtmIf>

The Series D port or interface that is being configured.

-qsizecbr <integer>

The minimum dedicated queue size to be assigned to CBR and rtVBR traffic. The default
is 256.

-qsizenrtvbr <integer>

The minimum dedicated queue size to be assigned to nrtVBR traffic. The default is 256
cells.

-qsizeabr <integer>

The minimum dedicated queue size to be assigned to ABR traffic. The default is 256 cells.

-qsizeubr <integer>

The minimum dedicated queue size to be assigned to UBR traffic. The default is 256 cells.

-clp01cbr <integer>

The number of cells in the buffer at which CBR and rtVBR traffic drops CLP=0+1 cells.
Applying a CLP=0+1 threshold means that when the current cell count for this port and
class is greater than this threshold, cells are dropped, regardless of their CLP bit. This
threshold must be greater than the -clp1cbr threshold. This number must be entered in
multiples of 8. The maximum value is the size of cell memory. The default is the size of
cell memory for CLP=0+1 cells.

5 - 208

AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual Part 1

Hardware Commands

Description

-clp01nrtvbr <integer>

The number of cells in the buffer at which nrtVBR traffic drops CLP=0+1 cells. Applying
a CLP=0+1 threshold means that when the current cell count for this port and class is
greater than this threshold, cells are dropped, regardless of their CLP bit. This threshold
must be greater than the -clp1nrtvbr threshold. This number must be entered in multiples of 8. The maximum value is the size of cell memory. The default is the size of cell
memory for CLP=0+1 cells.

-clp01abr <integer>

The number of cells in the buffer at which ABR traffic drops CLP=0+1 cells. Applying a
CLP=0+1 threshold means that when the current cell count for this port and class is
greater than this threshold, cells are dropped, regardless of their CLP bit. This threshold
must be greater than the clp1abr threshold. This number must be entered in multiples of
8. The maximum value is the size of cell memory. The default is the size of cell memory
for CLP=0+1 cells.

-clp01ubr <integer>

The number of cells in the buffer at which UBR traffic drops CLP=0+1 cells. Applying a
CLP=0+1 threshold means that when the current cell count for this port and class is
greater than this threshold, cells are dropped, regardless of their CLP bit. This threshold
must be greater than the clp1ubr threshold. This number must be entered in multiples of
8. The maximum value is the size of cell memory. The default is the size of cell memory
for CLP=0+1 cells.

-clp1c